advertisement
M
Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR
Product Reference Guide
MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA Solutions and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are a properties of their owners.
©2014 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved.
AP-7131N-FGR Access Point
Product Reference Guide
Contents
Antenna Support for 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
WPA2-CCMP (802.11i) Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
2 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Multiple Management Accessibility Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Programmable SNMP v3 Trap Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Configuration File Import/Export Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
On-board Radius Server Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Chapter 2. Hardware Installation
Connecting to the Access Point using the WAN Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Connecting to the Access Point using the LAN Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Configuring Your Browser for AP-7131N-FGR Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Accessing the AP-7131N-FGR Using Internet Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Accessing the AP-7131N-FGR Using Mozilla Firefox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Configuring Basic WLAN Security Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3
4 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Chapter 4. System Configuration
Creating a Certificate for Onboard RADIUS Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Configuring SNMP RF Trap Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Configuring Advanced DHCP Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Setting the Type Filter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Configuring Network Address Translation (NAT) Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Configuring Port Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Configuring WLAN Security Policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Configuring a WLAN Access Control List (ACL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Setting the WLAN Quality of Service (QoS) Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Configuring WLAN Hotspot Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Setting the WLAN’s Radio Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
Configuring the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
Applying a Filter to LAN1, LAN2 or a WLAN (1-16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
Chapter 6. Configuring Access Point Security
Configuring Advanced Subnet Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Creating a VPN Tunnel between Two Access Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Moving Rogue APs to the Allowed AP List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Displaying Rogue AP Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Using MUs to Detect Rogue Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
5
6 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Mapping Users to Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
Defining User Access Permissions by Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67
Editing Group Access Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69
Chapter 7. Monitoring Statistics
Network LAN, Bridge Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Network LAN, WLAN-Mapping Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Network LAN, DHCP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Network Type Filter Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Network WAN NAT Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
Network WAN, VPN Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
Network WAN, Dynamic DNS Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62
Network WLAN Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-67
Network Security Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-80
Network ACL Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-88
Network Radio Configuration Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-93
Network Quality of Service (QoS) Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-124
Network Rate Limiting Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-129
Network Rogue-AP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-132
Network MU Locationing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-145
System Certificate Management Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-175
System SNMP Access Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-189
System SNMP Traps Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-194
System User Database Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-200
System Network Time Protocol (NTP) Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-241
System Configuration-Update Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-253
Chapter 9. Configuring Mesh Networking
7
8 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Client Bridge Configuration Process Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4
Mesh Networking and the Access Point’s Two Subnets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5
Impact of Importing/Exporting Configurations to a Mesh Network . . . . . . . . .9-6
Setting the LAN Configuration for Mesh Networking Support . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7
Configuring a WLAN for Mesh Networking Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
Configuring the Access Point Radio for Mesh Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13
Scenario 1 - Two Base Bridges and One Client Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20
Verifying Mesh Network Functionality for Scenario #1. . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
Scenario 2 - Two Hop Mesh Network with a Base Bridge Repeater and a
Client Bridge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
Verifying Mesh Network Functionality for Scenario #2. . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
Manual Adoption Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Securing a Configuration Channel Between Switch and AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4
Securing Data Tunnels between the Switch and AAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5
Topology Deployment Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Extended WLANs with Independent WLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Extended WLAN with Mesh Networking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
Adopting an Adaptive AP Manually. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Adopting an Adaptive AP Using a Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-13
Adaptive AP Deployment Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-15
Sample Switch Configuration File for IPSec and Independent WLAN . . . . .10-16
Appendix A. Technical Specifications
Configuring a VPN Tunnel Between Two Access Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
9
10 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
About This Guide
Introduction
This guide provides configuration and setup information for the AP-7131N-FGR model access point.
Document Conventions
The following document conventions are used in this document:
NOTE Indicate tips or special requirements.
CAUTION Indicates conditions that can cause equipment damage or data loss.
WARNING! Indicates a condition or procedure that could result in personal injury or equipment damage.
viii Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Notational Conventions
The following notational conventions are used in this document:
• Italics are used to highlight specific items in the general text, and to identify chapters and sections in this and related documents.
• Bullets (•) indicate:
• action items
• lists of alternatives
• lists of required steps that are not necessarily sequential
• Sequential lists (those describing step-by-step procedures) appear as numbered lists.
Service Information
If a problem is encountered with the access point, contact Customer Support
. Refer to
Appendix C, Customer Support for contact information. Before calling, have the model and serial
number on hand.
If the problem cannot be solved over the phone, you may need to return your equipment for servicing.
If that is necessary, you will be given specific instructions.
Motorola Solutions is not responsible for any damages incurred during shipment if the approved shipping container is not used. Shipping the units improperly can possibly void the warranty. If the original shipping container was not kept, contact Motorola Solutions to have another sent to you.
Introduction
As a standalone access point, an AP-7131N-FGR provides small and medium-sized businesses with a consolidated wired and wireless networking infrastructure, all in a single device. The integrated router, gateway, firewall, DHCP and Power-over-Ethernet (PoE) simplify and reduce the costs associated with networking by eliminating the need to purchase and manage multiple devices.
The access point is also designed to meet the needs of large, distributed enterprises by converging the functionality of a thick access point and thin access port into a single device. This mode enables the deployment of a fully featured intelligent access point that can be centrally configured and managed via a Motorola Solutions wireless switch in either corporate headquarters or a network
operations center (NOC). In the event the connection between the access point and the wireless switch is lost, a Remote Site Survivability (RSS) feature ensures the delivery of uninterrupted wireless services at the local or remote site. All traffic between the adaptive access points and the wireless switch is secured though an IPSec tunnel. Additionally, compatibility with Motorola Solutions’ RF
Management Suite (RFMS) allows you to centrally plan, deploy, monitor and secure large deployments.
1-2 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
If you are new to using an access point for managing your network, refer to
Theory of Operations on page 1-23 for an overview on wireless networking fundamentals.
Beginning with the 4.x access point firmware baseline, Motorola Solutions is introducing an
AP-7131N-FGR model access point as a compliment to the existing AP-7131 access point family. The new AP-7131N-FGR access point supports the same feature set as existing AP-7131and AP-7131N model access points. Unlike the AP-7131 and AP-7131N models however, an AP-7131N-FGR has specialized data protection mechanisms and prompts the user when secure information is displayed within the access point GUI applet.
The AP-7131N-FGR enables you to configure one radio for 802.11a/n support, and the other for
802.11b/g/n support.
The two models available to the AP-7131N-FGR series include:
• AP-7131N-66040-FGR (802.11an and 802.11bgn capable)
• AP-7131N-44040-FGR (802.11a and 802.11bg capable)
1.1 New Features
The following features are now available with the introduction of the new 4.0 access point hardware and firmware baseline:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Introduction 1-3
1.1.1 IP Filtering
IP filtering determines which IP packets are processed normally and which are discarded. If discarded, the packet is deleted and completely ignored (as if never received). Optionally apply different criteria to better refine which packets to filter.
IP filtering supports the creation of up to 20 filter rules enforced at layer 3. Once defined (using the access point’s SNMP, GUI or CLI), filtering rules can be enforced on the access point’s LAN1, LAN2 and WLAN interfaces. An additional default action is also available denying traffic when the filter rules fail. Lastly, imported and exported configurations retain their defined IP filtering configurations.
For information on configuring the access point’s IP filtering functionality, see
Configuring IP Filtering on page 5-73
.
1.1.2 MU Rate Limiting
MU rate limiting enables an administrator to determine how much radio bandwidth is allocated to each MU within any one of the 16 supported WLANs.
Before this 4.0 baseline release, Motorola Solutions access points supported bandwidth management on a per-WLAN basis. Each WLAN could be configured to receive (at most) a certain percentage of the total available downstream bandwidth. The new rate limiting feature is a replacement of the bandwidth management feature allowing for better MU radio bandwidth allotments on a per WLAN basis.
To globally enable or disable the MU rate limit and assess the WLANs in which it’s currently invoked,
see Configuring MU Rate Limiting on page 5-67
.
To define the actual MU rate limit (maximum downstream bandwidth allocation in kbps), see
Creating/Editing Individual WLANs on page 5-29 .
1.1.3 Per Radio MU Limit
Prior to this new 4.0 AP firmware baseline, an access point allowed a total of 127 MU associations, regardless of the number of radios on the AP. With a dual-radio AP, if there were already 127 MUs associated to one radio, that were no slots available for a MU to associate with another radio.
With the new 4.0 firmware, an AP can reserve slots on each radio so MUs of one radio type (11a/n or 11bg/n) have better chances for AP association. Therefore, the total number of MUs allowed to associate remains at 127, but you can now strategically distribute the 127 MU associations between the data radios.
1-4 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
For information on setting the number of MU associations on a specific radio, see Configuring the
802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n Radio on page 5-56
.
1.1.4 Power Setting Configuration
The access point’s power management functionality automatically configures the AP's operational mode so it safely operates within available power. The power setting feature enables the user to select one of three power operating modes, 3af, 3at and full power. When an access point is operating in either 3af or 3at mode, the transmit power is always lower than the full power setting.
With the introduction of the AP-7131N-FGR model access point, the power options available for dual radio model access points has never been more diverse, and careful consideration must be made before deploying the access point.
The AP’s hardware design uses a complex programmable logic device (CPLD). When an AP is powered on (or performing a cold reset), the CPLD determines the maximum power available to the AP by a
POE device. Once an operational power configuration is defined, the AP firmware can read the power setting and configure operating characteristics based on the AP’s SKU and power configuration. If the
POE cannot provide sufficient power (with all interfaces enabled), the following interfaces could be disabled or modified:
• Radio transmit power could be reduced due to lack of sufficient power or the radio can be disabled
• The WAN port configuration could be changed (enabled or disabled)
For information on configuring the access point’s power configuration, see
1.1.5 AMSDU Transmission Support
Aggregate MAC Service Data Unit (AMSDU) is an 802.11n specific MAC feature which enhances the transmission of multiple MSDU contents wrapped within a single preamble/packet infrastructure.
The AMSDU transmission limit is set to 3839 bites by default.
For information on configuring AMSDU support for an access point radio, see
802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n Radio on page 5-56
. AMSDU support can be defined by selecting the Set
Aggregation button within the Network Configuration -> Wireless -> Radio Configuration ->
Radio1 screen.
Introduction 1-5
1.1.6 IPSec VPN Support
A VPN ensures data privacy between two end points, even while using a communication medium which is itself insecure (like the Internet). VPNs create a secure tunnel between two end points as if they are directly connected over a secure connection. Traffic is secured using a robust IPSec encryption technique.
You can get the safety of a VPN in a WLAN by hosting the VPN server at the access point, and the
VPN client software on the MU. For that reason, a VPN provides secure WLAN access to MUs. A VPN solution was more common before 802.11i was introduced, but is not as common now, since 802.11i/
WPA2 is considered more secure.
For information on configuring VPN support, see
Configuring VPN Tunnels on page 6-22
. For
.
1.2 Feature Overview
The following legacy features have been carried forward into the 4.x firmware baseline:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Antenna Support for 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz Radios
•
•
Support for 4 BSSIDs per Radio
•
Quality of Service (QoS) Support
•
Industry Leading Data Security
•
•
Multiple Management Accessibility Options
•
•
Programmable SNMP v3 Trap Support
•
1-6 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
•
•
•
•
•
•
Advanced Event Logging Capability
•
Configuration File Import/Export Functionality
•
Default Configuration Restoration
•
•
•
•
On-board Radius Server Authentication
•
•
Routing Information Protocol (RIP)
•
•
•
•
•
•
Radius Time-Based Authentication
•
1.2.1 802.11n Support
Motorola Solutions provides full life-cycle support for either a new or existing 802.11n mobility deployment, from network design to day-to-day support. For information on deploying your 802.11n radio, see
Configuring the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n Radio on page 5-56 .
1.2.2 Sensor Support
The Motorola Solutions Wireless Intrusion Protection System (WIPS) protects your wireless network, mobile devices and traffic from attacks and unauthorized access. WIPS provides tools for standards compliance and around-the-clock 802.11a/b/g wireless network security in a distributed environment. WIPS allows administrators to identify and accurately locate attacks, rogue devices and
Introduction 1-7 network vulnerabilities in real time and permits both a wired and wireless lockdown of wireless device connections upon acknowledgement of a threat.
An access point radio can function as a sensor and upload sensor mode operation information to a dedicated WIPS server. WIPS is not supported on a WLAN basis, rather sensor functionality is supported on the access point radio(s) available to each WLAN. When an access point radio is functioning as a WIPS sensor, it is able to scan in sensor mode across all channels within the 2.4 and
5.0 GHz bands.
NOTE Sensor support requires a Motorola Solutions AirDefense WIPS Server on the network. Sensor functionality is not provided by the access point alone. The access point works in conjunction with a dedicated WIPS server.
The following is a network topology illustrating how a sensor functions within an access point supported wireless network:
1-8 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
A radio in sensor mode supports three basic features:
NOTE The functions described below are conducted on the WIPS server side, not on the access point.
• Wireless Termination - The access point attempts to force an unwanted (or unauthorized) connection to disconnect.
• Wireless Sniffing - All received frames are reported to the WIPS server. This feature provides the WIPS server with visibility into the activity on the wireless network. The WIPS server processes the received traffic and provides the IT administrator with useful information about the 802.11 RF activities in the enterprise.
• Spectrum Analysis - The data needed to provide the current RF Spectrum is provided to the
WIPS server. The access point does not display the data, but it is available to the WIPS server. Spectrum analysis can operate only when there are no WLAN radios configured. The
WIPS daemon and server are responsible for limiting operation only when there is no radio in WLAN mode. When a configuration change is made at the AP, the Spectrum Analysis operation stops.
• Live View- The WIPS application (commonly referred to as Motorola Solutions Enterprise) provides a live view of the sensors, APs and MUs operating in a WLAN. Live view support exists throughout the WIPS application, wherever a device icon appears in an information panel or navigation tree. Access Live View by right-clicking on the device, which automatically limits the data to the specific device your choose.
Sensor radios can be tuned to channels in both the 2.4GHz and 5.0 GHz band. The channels in use by a given radio are defined by the WIPS application. There is no need to explicitly set a band for a sensor radio. Instead, select either default values or specific channels. Specific channels can be in either band.
CAUTION Users cannot define a radio as a sensor when one of the access point radios is functioning as a rogue AP detector. To use one of the radios as a WIPS sensor, you must disable its current detector method(s) first, then set the radio for WIPS sensor support. For information on
disabling rogue AP detection, see Configuring Rogue AP Detection on page 6-42 .
With this most recent 4.0 release of the access point firmware, WIPS functionality is no longer configured within a designated WIPS screen. WIPS functionality is now defined as part of the access point’s quick setup procedure. For information on using the access point’s Quick Setup screen to
Introduction 1-9 define how WIPS can be supported on an access point radio, see
Configuring Device Settings on page
1.2.3 Mesh Roaming Client
Enable the Mesh Roaming Client feature (using the access point’s CLI) to allow a client bridge to associate in the same manner as a regular mesh client bridge. After an initial (single) association, the client bridge will not attempt additional associations. Since STP will be disabled, the association forwards data as soon as the association attempt is successful. When Mesh Roaming Client is enabled, base bridge mode is not supported to avoid a loop within the mesh topology. Thus, the Mesh
Roaming Client is always an end point (by design) within the mesh wireless topology. The base bridge will need STP disabled to immediately begin forwarding data when a roaming client bridge associates.
1.2.4 Dual Mode Radio Options
When the access point is manufactured as a dual-radio access point, as is the case with the
AP-7131N-FGR, the access point enables you to configure one radio for 802.11a/n support, and the other for 802.11b/g/n support.
The two models available to the AP-7131N-FGR series include:
• AP-7131N-66040-FGR (802.11an and 802.11bgn capable)
• AP-7131N-44040-FGR (802.11a and 802.11bg capable)
For detailed information, see Setting the WLAN’s Radio Configuration on page 5-51 .
1.2.5 Separate LAN and WAN Ports
The access point has one LAN (GE1/POE) port and one WAN (GE2) port, each with their own MAC address. The access point must manage all data traffic over the LAN connection carefully as either a
DHCP client, BOOTP client, DHCP server or using a static IP address. The access point can only use a
Power-over-Ethernet device when connected to the LAN port.
A Wide Area Network (WAN) is a widely dispersed telecommunications network. In a corporate environment, the WAN port might connect to a larger corporate network. For a small business, the
WAN port might connect to a DSL or cable modem to access the Internet. Regardless, network address information must be configured for the access point’s intended mode of operation.
1-10 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
For detailed information on configuring the access point’s WAN port, see
Configuring WAN Settings on page 5-16
.
The LAN and WAN port MAC addresses can be located within the LAN and WAN Stats screens.
and Viewing LAN Statistics on page 7-6
. For information on access point MAC address assignments, see
MAC Address Assignment on page 1-29 .
1.2.6 Multiple Mounting Options
The access point attaches to a wall, mounts under a ceiling or above a ceiling (attic). Choose a mounting option based on the physical environment of the coverage area. Do not mount the access point in a location that has not been approved in a radio coverage site survey.
For detailed information on the mounting options available , see
Mounting an AP-7131N-FGR on page
.
1.2.7 Antenna Support for 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz Radios
The access point supports several 802.11a/n and 802.11b/g/n radio antennas. Select the antenna best suited to the radio transmission requirements of your coverage area.
1.2.8 Sixteen Configurable WLANs
A Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) is a data-communications system that flexibly extends the functionalities of a wired LAN. A WLAN does not require lining up devices for line-of-sight transmission, and are thus, desirable for wireless networking. Roaming users can be handed off from one access point to another like a cellular phone system. WLANs can therefore be configured around the needs of specific groups of users, even when they are not in physical proximity. Sixteen WLANs are configurable on each access point.
To enable and configure WLANs on an access point radio, see
.
1.2.9 Support for 4 BSSIDs per Radio
The access point supports four BSSIDs per radio. Each BSSID has a corresponding MAC address. The first MAC address corresponds to BSSID #1. The MAC addresses for the other three BSSIDs (BSSIDs
#2, #3, #4) are derived by adding 1, 2, 3, respectively, to the radio MAC address.
Introduction 1-11
If the radio MAC address displayed on the Radio Settings screen is 00:23:68:72:20:DC, then the
BSSIDs for that radio will have the following MAC addresses:
BSSID
BSSID #1
BSSID #2
BSSID #3
BSSID #4
MAC Address
00:23:68:72:20:DC
00:23:68:72:20:DD
00:23:68:72:20:DE
00:23:68:72:20:DF
Hexadecimal Addition
Same as Radio MAC address
Radio MAC address +1
Radio MAC address +2
Radio MAC address +3
For detailed information on strategically mapping BSSIDs to WLANs, see
Configuring the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n Radio on page 5-56
. For information on access point MAC address assignments, see
MAC Address Assignment on page 1-29
.
1.2.10 Quality of Service (QoS) Support
The QoS implementation provides applications running on different wireless devices a variety of priority levels to transmit data to and from the access point. Equal data transmission priority is fine for data traffic from applications such as Web browsers, file transfers or email, but is inadequate for multimedia applications.
Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP), video streaming and interactive gaming are highly sensitive to latency increases and throughput reductions. These forms of higher priority data traffic can significantly benefit from the QoS implementation.The WiFi Multimedia QOS Extensions (WMM) implementation used by the shortens the time between transmitting higher priority data traffic and is thus desirable for multimedia applications. In addition, U-APSD (WMM Power Save) is also supported.
WMM defines four access categories—voice, video, best effort and background—to prioritize traffic for enhanced multimedia support.
For detailed information on configuring QoS support, see
Setting the WLAN Quality of Service (QoS)
1.2.11 Industry Leading Data Security
The AP-7131N-FGR a unique set of encryption and authentication techniques to protect the data transmitting on the WLAN.
The following authentication techniques are supported:
1-12 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
•
The following encryption techniques are supported:
•
WPA2-CCMP (802.11i) Encryption
In addition, the access point supports the following additional security features:
•
•
•
For an overview on the encryption and authentication schemes available , refer to Configuring Access
1.2.11.1 EAP Authentication
The Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) feature provides access points and their associated
MUs an additional measure of security for data transmitted over the wireless network. Using EAP, authentication between devices is achieved through the exchange and verification of certificates.
EAP is a mutual authentication method whereby both the MU and AP are required to prove their identities. Using EAP, the user loses device authentication if the server cannot provide proof of device identification.
Using EAP, a user requests connection to a WLAN through the access point. The access point then requests the identity of the user and transmits that identity to an authentication server. The server prompts the AP for proof of identity (supplied to the by the user) and then transmits the user data back to the server to complete the authentication process.
An MU is not able to access the network if not authenticated. When configured for EAP support, the access point displays the MU as an EAP station.
EAP is only supported on mobile devices running Windows XP, Windows 2000 (using Service Pack #4) and Windows Mobile 2003. Refer to the system administrator for information on configuring a Radius
Server for EAP (802.1x) support.
For detailed information on EAP configurations, see
Configuring 802.1x EAP Settings on page 6-6
.
1.2.11.2 WPA2-CCMP (802.11i) Encryption
WPA2 is a newer 802.11i standard that provides even stronger wireless security than Wi-Fi Protected
Access (WPA) and WEP. Counter-mode/CBC-MAC Protocol (CCMP) is the security standard used by
Introduction 1-13 the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES). CCMP computes a Message Integrity Check (MIC) using the proven Cipher Block Message Authentication Code (CBC-MAC) technique. Changing just one bit in a message produces a totally different result.
WPA2-CCMP is based on the concept of a Robust Security Network (RSN), which defines a hierarchy of keys with a limited lifetime . Messages are encrypted using a 128-bit secret key and a 128-bit block of data. The end result is an encryption scheme as secure as any the access point provides.
For detailed information on WPA2-CCMP, see Configuring WPA2-CCMP (802.11i) on page 6-11 .
1.2.11.3 Firewall Security
A firewall keeps personal data in and hackers out. The access point’s firewall prevents suspicious
Internet traffic from proliferating the access point managed network. The access point performs
Network Address Translation (NAT) on packets passing to and from the WAN port. This combination provides enhanced security by monitoring communication with the wired network.
For detailed information on configuring the access point’s firewall, see
Configuring Firewall Settings on page 6-13
.
1.2.11.4 VPN Tunnels
Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) are IP-based networks using encryption and tunneling providing users remote access to a secure LAN. In essence, the trust relationship is extended from one LAN across the public network to another LAN, without sacrificing security. A VPN behaves like a private network; however, because the data travels through the public network, it needs several layers of security. The access point can function as a robust VPN gateway.
For detailed information on configuring VPN security support, see Configuring VPN Tunnels on page
.
1.2.11.5 Content Filtering
Content filtering allows system administrators to block specific commands and URL extensions from going out through the WAN port. Therefore, content filtering affords system administrators selective control on the content proliferating the network and is a powerful screening tool. Content filtering allows the blocking of up to 10 files or URL extensions and allows blocking of specific outbound requests.
For detailed information on configuring content filtering support, see Configuring Content Filtering
.
1-14 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
1.2.12 VLAN Support
A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) can electronically separate data on the same AP from a single broadcast domain into separate broadcast domains. By using a VLAN, you can group by logical function instead of physical location. There are 16 VLANs supported on the access point. An administrator can map up to 16 WLANs to 16 VLANs and enable or disable dynamic VLAN assignment. In addition to these 16 VLANs, the access point supports dynamic, user-based, VLANs when using EAP authentication.
VLANs enable organizations to share network resources in various network segments within large areas (airports, shopping malls, etc.). A VLAN is a group of clients with a common set of requirements independent of their physical location. VLANs have the same attributes as physical LANs, but they enable administrators to group clients even when they are not members of the same network segment.
For detailed information on configuring VLAN support, see
Configuring VLAN Support on page 5-5 .
1.2.13 Multiple Management Accessibility Options
The access point can be accessed and configured using one of the following:
• Java-Based Web UI
• Human readable config file (imported via SFTP)
• MIB (Management Information Base)
• Command Line Interface (CLI) accessed via RS-232 . Use the access point’s DB-9 serial port for direct access to the command-line interface from a PC. Use a Null-Modem cable (Part
No. 25-632878-0) for the best fitting connection.
1.2.14 Updatable Firmware
Motorola Solutions periodically releases updated versions of device firmware to the Motorola
Solutions Web site. If the firmware version displayed on the System Settings screen (see
System Settings on page 4-2 ) is older than the version on the Web site, Motorola Solutions
recommends updating the access point to the latest firmware version for full feature functionality.
Introduction 1-15
1.2.15 Programmable SNMP v3 Trap Support
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) facilitates the exchange of management information between network devices. SNMP uses Management Information Bases (MIBs) to manage the device configuration and monitor Internet devices in remote locations. MIB information accessed via SNMP is defined by a set of managed objects called Object Identifiers (OIDs). An OID is used to uniquely identify each object variable of a MIB.
SNMP allows a network administrator to configure the access point, manage network performance, find and solve network problems, and plan network growth. The access point supports SNMP management functions for gathering information from its network components. The MIB files are available at https://portal.motorolasolutions.com/Support/US-EN. In the given portal, the user
should serach for “AP7131N-GR MIBS 4.0.4.0”. For more information refer Appendix C, Customer
Few acronyms used in the MIB files:
Portal
MIB
LAN
WAN
POE
WLAN
AP
Switch
MU
Table 1.1 Acronyms
Radio of an AP
Management Information Base
Local Area Network
Wide Area Network
Power Over Ethernet
Wireless LAN
Access Point
RFS7000-GR
Mobile Unit
The access point’s SNMP agent functions as a command responder and is a multilingual agent responding to SNMP v3 managers (command generators). For detailed information on configuring
SNMP traps, see
Configuring SNMP Settings on page 4-27
.
1-16 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
1.2.16 Power-over-Ethernet Support
When users purchase a Motorola Solutions WLAN solution, they often need to place access points in obscure locations. In the past, a dedicated power source was required for each access point in addition to the Ethernet infrastructure. This often required an electrical contractor to install power drops at each access point location.
An approved Power Injector solution merges power and Ethernet into one cable, reducing the burden of installation and allows optimal access point placement in respect to the intended radio coverage area. The access point can only use a Power-over-Ethernet device when connected to the access point’s LAN (GE1/POE) port. The access point can also support 3af/3at compliant products from other vendors.
The Power Injector (Part No. AP-PSBIAS-1P3-AFR) is a single-port Power over Ethernet hub combining low-voltage DC with Ethernet data in a single cable connecting to the access point. The Power
Injector’s single DC and Ethernet data cable creates a modified Ethernet cabling environment on the access point’s LAN port eliminating the need for separate Ethernet and power cables. For detailed information on using the Power Injector, see
Power Injector System on page 2-6
.
1.2.17 MU-MU Transmission Disallow
The access point’s MU-MU Disallow feature prohibits MUs from communicating with each other even if on the same WLAN, assuming one of the WLAN’s is configured to disallow MU-MU communication. Therefore, if an MU’s WLAN is configured for MU-MU disallow, it will not be able to communicate with any other MUs connected to this access point.
For detailed information on configuring an WLAN to disallow MU to MU communications, see
Creating/Editing Individual WLANs on page 5-29 .
1.2.18 Voice Prioritization
Each access point WLAN has the capability of having its QoS policy configured to prioritize the network traffic requirements for associated MUs. A WLAN QoS page is available for each enabled
WLAN on either the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n radio.
Use the QoS page to enable voice prioritization for devices to receive the transmission priority they may not normally receive over other data traffic. Voice prioritization allows the access point to assign priority to voice traffic over data traffic, and (if necessary) assign legacy voice supported devices (non
WMM supported voice devices) additional priority.
Introduction 1-17
For detailed information on configuring voice prioritization over other voice enabled devices, see
Setting the WLAN Quality of Service (QoS) Policy on page 5-39 .
1.2.19 Support for CAM and PSP MUs
The access point supports both CAM and PSP powered MUs. CAM (Continuously Aware Mode) MUs leave their radios on continuously to hear every beacon and message transmitted. These systems operate without any adjustments by the access point.
A beacon is a uniframe system packet broadcast by the AP to keep the network synchronized. A beacon includes the ESSID, MAC address, Broadcast destination addresses, a time stamp, a DTIM
(Delivery Traffic Indication Message) and the TIM (Traffic Indication Map).
PSP (Power Save Polling) MUs power off their radios for short periods. When a MU in PSP mode associates with an access point, it notifies the access point of its activity status. The access point responds by buffering packets received for the MU. PSP mode is used to extend an MU’s battery life by enabling the MU to “sleep” during periods of inactivity.
1.2.20 Statistical Displays
The access point can display robust transmit and receive statistics for the WAN and LAN ports.
WLAN stats can be displayed collectively and individually for enabled WLANs. Transmit and receive statistics are available for the access point’s 802.11a/n and 802.11b/g/n radios. An advanced radio statistics page is also available to display retry histograms for specific data packet retry information.
Associated MU stats can be displayed collectively and individually for specific MUs. An echo (ping) test is also available to ping specific MUs to assess association strength. Finally, the access point can detect and display the properties of other APs detected within its radio coverage area. The type of AP detected can be displayed as well as the properties of individual APs.
For detailed information on available access point statistical displays and the values they represent,
see Monitoring Statistics on page 7-1 .
1.2.21 Transmit Power Control
The access point has a configurable power level for each radio. This enables the network administrator to define the antenna’s transmission power level in respect to the access point’s placement or network requirements as defined in the site survey.
For detailed information on setting the radio transmit power level, see Configuring the 802.11a/n or
802.11b/g/n Radio on page 5-56 .
1-18 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
1.2.22 Advanced Event Logging Capability
The access point periodically logs system events. Logging events is useful in assessing the throughput and performance of the access point or troubleshooting problems on the access point managed Local Area Network (LAN).
For detailed information on access point events, see Logging Configuration on page 4-45 .
1.2.23 Configuration File Import/Export Functionality
Configuration settings for an access point can be downloaded from the current configuration of another access point. This affords the administrator the ability to save the current configuration before making significant changes or restoring a default configuration. A configuration file from a dual radio AP-7131N-FGR can be imported to another dual radio model AP-7131N-FGR.
For detailed information on importing or exporting configuration files, see
1.2.24 Default Configuration Restoration
The access point can restore its default configuration or a partial default configuration (with the exception of current WAN and SNMP settings). Restoring the default configuration is a good way to create new WLANs if the MUs the access point supports have been moved to different radio coverage areas.
For detailed information on restoring a default or partial default configuration, see
1.2.25 DHCP Support
The access point can use Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) to obtain a leased IP address and configuration information from a remote server. DHCP is based on the BOOTP protocol and can coexist or interoperate with BOOTP. Configure the access point to send out a DHCP request searching for a DHCP/BOOTP server to acquire HTML, firmware or network configuration files when the access point boots. Because BOOTP and DHCP interoperate, whichever responds first becomes the server that allocates information.
The access point can be set to only accept replies from DHCP or BOOTP servers or both (this is the default setting). Disabling DHCP disables BOOTP and DHCP and requires network settings to be set manually. If running both DHCP and BOOTP, do not select BOOTP Only. BOOTP should only be used when the server is running BOOTP exclusively.
Introduction 1-19
The DHCP client automatically sends a DHCP request at an interval specified by the DHCP server to renew the IP address lease as long as the access point is running (this parameter is programmed at the DHCP server). For example: Windows 2000 servers typically are set for 3 days.
1.2.26 Mesh Networking
Utilize the new mesh networking functionality to allow the access point to function as a bridge to connect two Ethernet networks or as a repeater to extend your network’s coverage area without additional cabling. Mesh networking is configurable in two modes. It can be set in a wireless client bridge mode and/or a wireless base bridge mode (which accepts connections from client bridges).
These two modes are not mutually exclusive.
In client bridge mode, the access point scans to find other access points using the selected WLAN’s
ESSID. The access point must go through the association and authentication process to establish a wireless connection. The mesh networking association process is identical to the access point’s MU association process. Once the association/authentication process is complete, the wireless client adds the connection as a port on its bridge module. This causes the access point (in client bridge mode) to begin forwarding configuration packets to the base bridge. An access point in base bridge mode allows the access point radio to accept client bridge connections.
The two bridges communicate using the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). The spanning tree determines the path to the root and detects if the current connection is part of a network loop with another connection. Once the spanning tree converges, both access points begin learning which destinations reside on which side of the network. This allows them to forward traffic intelligently.
After the access point (in client bridge mode) establishes at least one wireless connection, it will begin beaconing and accepting wireless connections (if configured to support mobile users). If the access point is configured as both a client bridge and a base bridge, it begins accepting client bridge connections. In this way, the mesh network builds itself over time and distance.
Once the access point (in client bridge mode) establishes at least one wireless connection, it establishes other wireless connections in the background as they become available. In this way, the access point can establish simultaneous redundant links. An access point (in client bridge mode) can establish up to 3 simultaneous wireless connections with other access points. A client bridge always initiates the connections and the base bridge is always the acceptor of the mesh network data proliferating the network.
Since each access point can establish up to 3 simultaneous wireless connections, some of these connections may be redundant. In that case, the STP algorithm determines which links are the redundant links and disables the links from forwarding.
1-20 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
For an overview on mesh networking as well as details on configuring the access point’s mesh
networking functionality, see Configuring Mesh Networking on page 9-1 .
1.2.27 Additional LAN Subnet
In a typical retail or small office environment (wherein a wireless network is available along with a production WLAN) it is often necessary to segment a LAN into two subnets. Consequently, a second
LAN is required to “segregate” wireless traffic.
The access point has a second LAN subnet enabling administrators to segment the access point’s
LAN connection into two separate networks. The main access point LAN screen now allows the user to select either LAN1 or LAN2 as the active LAN over the access point’s Ethernet port. Both LANs can still be active at any given time, but only one can transmit over the access point’s physical LAN connection. Each LAN has a separate configuration screen (called LAN 1 and LAN 2 by default) accessible under the main LAN screen. The user can rename each LAN as necessary. Additionally, each LAN can have its own Ethernet Type Filter configuration, and subnet access (SSH, SNMP) configuration.
For detailed information on configuring the access point for additional LAN subnet support, see
Configuring the LAN Interface on page 5-1
.
1.2.28 On-board Radius Server Authentication
The access point can function as a RADIUS Server to provide user database information and user authentication. Several new screens have been added to the access point’s menu tree to configure
RADIUS server authentication and configure the local user database and access policies. The new
RADIUS Server functionality allows an administrator to define the data source, authentication type and associate digital certificates with the authentication scheme. The LDAP screen allows the administrator to configure an external LDAP Server for use with the access point. A new Access Policy screen enables the administrator to set WLAN access based on user groups defined within the User
Database screen. Each user is authorized based on the access policies applicable to that user. Access policies allow an administrator to control access to a user groups based on the WLAN configurations.
For detailed information on configuring the access point for AAA RADIUS Server support, see
Configuring User Authentication on page 6-52
.
1.2.29 Hotspot Support
The access point allows hotspot operators to provide user authentication and accounting without a special client application. The access point uses a traditional Internet browser as a secure
Introduction 1-21 authentication device. The access point issues an IP address to the user using a DHCP Server, authenticates the user and grants the user to access the Internet.
If a tourist visits a public hotspot and wants to browse a Web page, they boot their laptop and associate with a local Wi-Fi network by entering a valid SSID. They start a browser, and the hotspot’s access controller forces the un-authenticated user to a Welcome page (from the hotspot operator) that allows the user to login with a username and password. In order to send a redirected page (a login page), a TCP termination exists locally on the access point. Once the login page displays, the user enters their credentials. The access point connects to the RADIUS server and determines the identity of the connected wireless user. Thus, allowing the user to access the Internet once successfully authenticated.
For detailed information on configuring the access point for Hotspot support, see
Hotspot Support on page 5-45 .
1.2.30 Routing Information Protocol (RIP)
RIP is an interior gateway protocol that specifies how routers exchange routing-table information.
The parent Router screen also allows the administrator to select the type of RIP and the type of RIP authentication used.
For detailed information on configuring RIP functionality as part of the access point’s Router functionality, see
Setting the RIP Configuration on page 5-71
.
1.2.31 Manual Date and Time Settings
As an alternative to defining a NTP server to provide access point system time, the access point can now have its date and time set manually. A new Manual Date/Time Setting screen can be used to set the time using a Year-Month-Day HH:MM:SS format.
For detailed information on manually setting the access point’s system time, see Configuring Network
Time Protocol (NTP) on page 4-41
.
1.2.32 Dynamic DNS
The access point supports the Dynamic DNS service. Dynamic DNS (or DynDNS) is a feature offered by www.dyndns.com allowing the mapping of domain names to dynamically assigned IP addresses.
When the dynamically assigned IP address of a client changes, the new IP address is sent to the
DynDNS service and traffic for the specified domain(s) is routed to the new IP address. For information on configuring Dynamic DNS, see
Configuring Dynamic DNS on page 5-25
.
1-22 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
1.2.33 Auto Negotiation
Auto negotiation enables the access point to automatically exchange information about data transmission speed and duplex capabilities. Auto negotiation is helpful when using the access point in an environment where different devices are connected and disconnected on a regular basis. For
information on configuring the auto negotiation feature, see Configuring the LAN Interface on page
Configuring WAN Settings on page 5-16 .
1.2.34 Adaptive AP
An adaptive AP (AAP) is an access point that can adopt like an AP300 (L3). The management of an
AAP is conducted by a switch, once the access point connects to a Motorola Solutions , RFS7000 model switch and receives its AAP configuration.
An AAP provides:
• local 802.11 traffic termination
• local encryption/decryption
• local traffic bridging
• the tunneling of centralized traffic to the wireless switch
For a information overview of the adaptive AP feature as well as how to configure it, refer to
.
1.2.35 Rogue AP Enhancements
The access point can scan for rogues over all channels on both of the access point’s radio bands. The switching of radio bands is based on a timer with no user intervention required.
For information on configuring the access point for Rogue AP support, see Configuring Rogue AP
1.2.36 Radius Time-Based Authentication
An AAA server maintains a users and groups database used by the access point for access permissions. Various kinds of access policies can be applied to each group. Individual groups can be configured with their own time-based access policy. Each group’s policy has a user defined interval defining the days and hours access is permitted. Authentication requests for users belonging to the group are honored only during these defined hourly intervals.
Introduction 1-23
For more information on defining access point access policies by group, see Defining User Access
Permissions by Group on page 6-67
.
1.2.37 QBSS Support
Each access point radio can be configured to optionally allow the access point to communicate channel usage data to associated devices and define the beacon interval used for channel utilization transmissions. The QBSS load represents the percentage of time the channel is in use by the access point and the access point’s station count. This information is very helpful in assessing the access point’s overall load on a channel, its availability for additional device associations and multi media traffic support.
For information on enabling QBSS and defining the channel utilization transmission interval, see
Configuring the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n Radio on page 5-56
.
1.3 Theory of Operations
To understand access point management and performance alternatives, users need familiarity with functionality and configuration options. The access point includes features for different interface connections and network management.
The access point uses electromagnetic waves to transmit and receive electric signals without wires.
Users communicate with the network by establishing radio links between mobile units (MUs) and access points.
The access point uses DSSS (direct sequence spread spectrum) to transmit digital data from one device to another. A radio signal begins with a carrier signal that provides the base or center frequency. The digital data signal is encoded onto carriers using a DSSS chipping algorithm. The radio signal propagates into the air as electromagnetic waves. A receiving antenna (on the MU) in the path of the waves absorbs the waves as electrical signals. The receiving MU interprets
(demodulates) the signal by reapplying the direct sequence chipping code. This demodulation results in the original digital data.
The access point uses its environment (the air and certain objects) as the transmission medium.The
access point can either transmit in the 2.4 to 2.5-GHz frequency range (802.11b/g/n radio) or the
5 GHz frequency range (802.11a/n radio), the actual range is country-dependent. Motorola Solutions devices, like other Ethernet devices, have unique, hardware encoded Media Access Control (MAC) or
IEEE addresses. MAC addresses determine the device sending or receiving data. A MAC address is a
48-bit number written as six hexadecimal bytes separated by colons. For example: 00:A0:F8:24:9A:C8
Also see the following:
1-24 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
•
•
•
•
•
•
Direct-Sequence Spread Spectrum
•
•
•
•
1.3.1 Wireless Coverage
An access point establishes an average communication range with MUs called a Basic Service Set
(BSS) or cell. When in a particular cell, the MU associates and communicates with the access point supporting the radio coverage area of that cell. Adding access points to a single LAN establishes more cells to extend the range of the network. Configuring the same ESSID (Extended Service Set
Identifier) on all access points makes them part of the same Wireless LAN.
Access points with the same ESSID define a coverage area. A valid ESSID is an alphanumeric, casesensitive identifier up to 32 characters. An MU searches for an access point with a matching ESSID and synchronizes (associates) to establish communications. This device association allows MUs within the coverage area to move about or roam. As the MU roams from cell to cell, it associates with a different access point. The roam occurs when the MU analyzes the reception quality at a location and determines a different provides better signal strength and lower MU load distribution.
If the MU does not find an access point with a workable signal, it can perform a scan to find any AP.
As MUs switch APs, the AP updates its association statistics.
The user can configure the ESSID to correspond to up to 16 WLANs on each 802.11a/n or
802.11b/g/n radio. A Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) is a data-communications system that flexibly extends the functionalities of a wired LAN. A WLAN does not require lining up devices for line-of-sight transmission, and are thus, desirable. Within the WLAN, roaming users can be handed off from one access point to another like a phone system. WLANs can therefore be configured around the needs of specific groups of users, even when they are not in physical proximity.
Introduction 1-25
1.3.2 MAC Layer Bridging
The access point provides MAC layer bridging between its interfaces. The access point monitors traffic from its interfaces and, based on frame address, forwards the frames to the proper destination.
The access point tracks source and destination addresses to provide intelligent bridging as MUs roam or network topologies change. The access point also handles broadcast and multicast messages and responds to MU association requests.
The access point listens to all packets on its LAN and WAN interfaces and builds an address database using MAC addresses. An address in the database includes the interface media that the device uses to associate with the access point. The access point uses the database to forward packets from one interface to another. The bridge forwards packets addressed to unknown systems to the Default
Interface (Ethernet).
The access point internal stack interface handles all messages directed to the access point. Each stores information on destinations and their interfaces to facilitate forwarding. When a user sends an ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) request packet, the access point forwards it over all enabled interfaces except over the interface the ARP request packet was received.
On receiving the ARP response packet, the access point database keeps a record of the destination address along with the receiving interface. With this information, the access point forwards any directed packet to the correct destination. Transmitted ARP request packets echo back to other MUs.
The access point removes from its database the destination or interface information not used for a specified time. The AP refreshes its database when it transmits or receives data from these destinations and interfaces.
1.3.3 Media Types
The access point radio interface conforms to IEEE 802.11 specifications. The access point supports multiple-cell operations with fast roaming between cells. Within a direct-sequence system, each cell can operates independently. Adding cells to the network provides an increased coverage area and total system capacity.
The serial port provides a Command Line Interface (CLI) connection. The serial link supports a direct serial connection. The access point is a Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) device with male pin connectors for the RS-232 port. Connecting the access point to a PC requires a null modem serial cable.
1-26 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
1.3.4 Direct-Sequence Spread Spectrum
Spread spectrum (broadband) uses a narrowband signal to spread the transmission over a segment of the radio frequency band or spectrum. Direct-sequence is a spread spectrum technique where the transmitted signal is spread over a particular frequency range. The access point uses
Direct-Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) for radio communication.
Direct-sequence systems communicate by continuously transmitting a redundant pattern of bits called a chipping sequence. Each bit of transmitted data is mapped into chips by the access point and rearranged into a pseudorandom spreading code to form the chipping sequence. The chipping sequence is combined with a transmitted data stream to produce the output signal.
MUs receiving a direct-sequence transmission use the spreading code to map the chips within the chipping sequence back into bits to recreate the original data transmitted by the access point.
Intercepting and decoding a direct-sequence transmission requires a predefined algorithm to associate the spreading code used by the transmitting access point to the receiving MU. This algorithm is established by IEEE 802.11b specifications. The bit redundancy within the chipping sequence enables the receiving MU to recreate the original data pattern, even if bits in the chipping sequence are corrupted by interference.
The ratio of chips per bit is called the spreading ratio. A high spreading ratio increases the resistance of the signal to interference. A low spreading ratio increases the bandwidth available to the user. The access point uses different modulation schemes to encode more bits per chip at higher data rates.
1.3.5 MU Association Process
An access point recognizes MUs as they begin the association process. An access point keeps a list of the MUs it services. MUs associate with an access point based on the following conditions:
• Signal strength between the and MU
• Number of MUs currently associated with the access point
• MUs encryption and authentication capabilities
• MUs supported data rate
MUs perform pre-emptive roaming by intermittently scanning for ’s and associating with the best available access point. Before roaming and associating, MUs perform full or partial scans to collect statistics and determine the direct-sequence channel used by the access point.
Scanning is a periodic process where the MU sends out probe messages on all channels defined by the country code. The statistics enable an MU to reassociate by synchronizing its channel to the access point. The MU continues communicating with that until it needs to switch cells or roam.
Introduction 1-27
MUs perform partial scans at programmed intervals, when missing expected beacons or after excessive transmission retries. In a partial scan, the MU scans access points classified as proximate on the access point table. For each channel, the MU tests for Clear Channel Assessment (CCA). The
MU broadcasts a probe with the ESSID and broadcast BSS_ID when the channel is transmission-free.
It sends an ACK to a directed probe response from the access point and updates the table.
An MU can roam within a coverage area by switching access points. Roaming occurs when:
• Unassociated MU attempts to associate or reassociate with an available access point
• Supported rate changes or the MU finds a better transmit rate with another access point
• RSSI (received signal strength indicator) of a potential access point exceeds the current access point
• Ratio of good-transmitted packets to attempted-transmitted packets that fall below a threshold.
An MU selects the best available access point and adjusts itself to the access point direct-sequence channel to begin association. Once associated, the access point begins forwarding frames addressed to the target MU. Each frame contains fields for the current direct-sequence channel. The MU uses these fields to resynchronize to the access point.
The scanning and association process continues for active MUs. This process allows MUs to find new access points and discard out-of-range or deactivated access points. By testing the airwaves, MUs can choose the best network connection available.
1.3.6 Operating Modes
The access point can operate in a couple of configurations.
• Access Point - As an Access Point, the access point functions as a layer 2 bridge. The wired uplink can operate as a trunk and support multiple VLANs. Up to 16 WLANs can be defined and mapped to access point WLANs. Each WLAN can be configured to be broadcast by one or both access point radios. An AP-7131N-FGR can operate in both an access point mode and Wireless Gateway/Router mode simultaneously. The network architecture and access point configuration define how the Access Point and Wireless Gateway/Router mode are negotiated.
• Wireless Gateway/Router - If operating as a Wireless Gateway/Router, the access point functions as a router between two layer 2 networks: the WAN uplink (the ethernet port) and the Wireless side. The following options are available providing a solution for single-cell deployment:
1-28 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
• PPPoE - The WAN interface can terminate a PPPoE connection, thus enabling the access point to operate in conjunction with a DSL or Cable modem to provide WAN connectivity.
• NAT - (Network Address Translation) on the Wireless interface. Using NAT, the router is able to manage a private IP scheme. NAT allows translation of private addresses to the
WAN IP address.
• DHCP - The access point can assign private IP addresses.
• Firewall - A Firewall protects against a number of known attacks.
1.3.7 Management Access Options
Managing the access point includes viewing network statistics and setting configuration options.
Statistics track the network activity of associated MUs and data transfers on the AP interfaces.
The access point requires one of the following connection methods to perform a custom installation and manage the network:
• Secure Java-Based WEB UI - (use Sun Microsystems’ JRE 1.6 available from Sun’s Web site and be sure to disable Microsoft’s Java Virtual Machine if installed)
• Command Line Interface (CLI) via Serial, and SSH
• Config file - Human-readable; Importable/Exportable via SFTP
MIB (Management Information Base) accessing the access point SNMP function using a MIB
Browser. The MIB files are available at https://portal.motorolasolutions.com/Support/US-EN . In the given portal, the user should serach for “AP7131N-GR MIBS 4.0.4.0”. For more information refer
Few acronyms used in the MIB files:
Table 1.2 Acronyms
Portal
MIB
LAN
WAN
POE
WLAN
AP
Switch
Radio of an AP
Management Information Base
Local Area Network
Wide Area Network
Power Over Ethernet
Wireless LAN
Access Point
RFS7000-GR
Introduction 1-29
Portal
MU
Table 1.2 Acronyms
Radio of an AP
Mobile Unit
Make configuration changes to access point’s individually. Optionally, use the access point import/export configuration function to download settings to other access points.
For detailed information, see Importing/Exporting Configurations on page 4-47
.
1.3.8 MAC Address Assignment
MAC address assignments are as follows:
• LAN (GE1) - The access point MAC address can be found underneath the access point chassis.
• WAN (GE2) - WAN MAC address + 1.
• LAN2 - A virtual LAN not mapped to the LAN Ethernet port. This address is the lowest of the two radio MAC addresses.
• Radio1 (802.11b/g/n) - Random address located on the Web UI, CLI and SNMP interfaces.
• Radio2 (802.11a/n) - Random address located on the Web UI, CLI and SNMP interfaces.
The access point’s BSS (virtual AP) MAC addresses are calculated as follows:
• BSS1 - The same as the corresponding base radio’s MAC address.
• BSS2 - Base radio MAC address +1
• BSS3 - Base radio MAC address +2
• BSS4 - Base radio MAC address +3
1-30 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Hardware Installation
An AP-7131N-FGR access point installation includes mounting the access point, connecting the access point to the network, connecting antennae and applying power. Installation procedures vary for different environments. See the following sections for more details:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2-2 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
CAUTION Motorola Solutions recommends conducting a radio site survey prior to installing an access point. A site survey is an excellent method of documenting areas of radio interference and providing a tool for device placement.
2.1 Precautions
Before installing an AP-7131N-FGR model access point, verify the following:
• Do not install in wet or dusty areas without additional protection. Contact a Motorola
Solutions representative for more information.
• Verify the environment has a continuous temperature range between -20° C to 50° C.
2.2 Requirements
The minimum installation requirements for a single-cell, peer-to-peer network:
!
• An AP-7131N-FGR model access point
(in either of its two available dual-radio models)
• 48 Volt Power Supply Part No. 50-14000-247R or Power Injector
(Part No. AP-PSBIAS-1P3-AFR))
• A power outlet
• Dual-band antennae or an antenna specifically supporting the AP’s 2.4 or 5 GHz band
2.3 Package Contents
Check package contents for the correct model and accessories. Each available configuration (at a minimum), contains:
• AP-7131N-FGR access point (accessories dependent on SKU ordered)
• AP-7131N-FGR Install Guide
• China ROHS compliance addendum
• Wall mount screw and anchor kit
• Accessories Bag (4 rubber feet and a LED light pipe and badge with label for above the ceiling installations)
Hardware Installation 2-3
Contact the Motorola Solutions Support Center to report missing or improperly functioning items.
NOTE The access point façade with 6 Element Antenna (Part No.
ML-2452-PTA2M3X3-1) is separately orderable and provides an integrated antenna option. The facade connects to the access point as illustrated. Once attached, the LEDs continue to illuminate through the facade. Contact your Motorola Solutions sales associate for information on ordering a facade with your access point.
2.4 Access Point Placement
For optimal performance, install the access point away from transformers, heavy-duty motors, fluorescent lights, microwave ovens, refrigerators and other industrial equipment. Signal loss can occur when metal, concrete, walls or floors block transmission. Install the access point in an open area or add access points as needed to improve coverage.
Antenna coverage is analogous to lighting. Users might find an area lit from far away to be not bright enough. An area lit sharply might minimize coverage and create dark areas. Uniform antenna placement in an area (like even placement of a light bulb) provides even, efficient coverage.
Place the access point using the following guidelines:
2-4 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
• Install the access point at an ideal height of 10 feet from the ground.
• Orient the access point antennas vertically for best reception.
• Point the access point antennas downward if attaching to the ceiling.
To maximize the access point’s radio coverage area, Motorola Solutions recommends conducting a site survey to define and document radio interference obstacles before installing the access point.
2.4.1 Site Surveys
A site survey analyzes the installation environment and provides users with recommendations for equipment and placement. The optimum placement of 802.11a/n access points differs from
802.11b/g/n access points, because the locations and number of access points required are different to support the radio coverage area.
Motorola Solutions recommends conducting a new site survey and developing a new coverage area floor plan when switching from legacy access points to a new AP-7131N-FGR model, as the device placement requirements could be significantly different.
2.4.2 Antenna Options
Motorola Solutions supports two antenna suites for AP-7131N-FGR. One antenna suite supporting the 2.4 GHz band and another antenna suite supporting the 5 GHz band. Select an antenna model best suited to the intended operational environment of your access point.
NOTE On dual-radio model AP-7131N-FGR access points, Radio 1 refers to the
2.4 GHz radio and Radio 2 refers to the 5 GHz radio. However, there could be some cases where a dual-radio access point is performing a Rogue AP detector function. In this scenario, the access point is receiving in either
2.4 GHz or 5 GHz over the Radio 1 or Radio 2 antennae depending on which radio is selected for the scan.
Hardware Installation 2-5
R1 defines the access point’s radio 1 antenna connectors and R2 defines radio 2 antenna connectors.
The 2.4 GHz antenna suite includes the following models:
Part No.
ML-2499-11PNA2-01R
Antenna Type
Wide Angle Directional 8.5
Approximate Gain (dBi)
ML-2499-BYGA2-01R
ML-2452-APA2-01
ML-2452-PTA2M3X3-1
ML-2452-PTA3M3-036
Yagi Antenna
Dual-Band
Facade with 6 Element
Antenna Module
3 Port MIMO Antenna
13.9
3/4
3/5
4.75/5.5
NOTE An additional adapter is required to use ML-2499-11PNA2-01 and
ML-2499-BYGA2-01 model antennae. Please contact Motorola Solutions for more information.
2-6 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
The 5 GHz antenna suite includes the following models:
Part No.
ML-5299-WPNA1-01R
ML-5299-HPA1-01R
ML-2452-APA2-01
ML-2452-PTA2M3X3-1
ML-2452-PTA3M3-036
ML-2452-APA6J-01
Antenna Type
Panel Antenna
Wide-Band Omni-Directional
Antenna
Dual-Band
13
5.0
Approximate Gain (dBi)
3/4
Facade with 6 Element Antenna
Module
4.75/5.5
3 Port MIMO Antenna
Dipole
5/5
2.4GHz Peak Gain: -5.76dBi
5GHz Peak Gain: band 1: -3.77dBi
band 2: -3.38dBi
band 3: -2.84dBi
band 4: -2.94dBi
2.5 Power Options
The power options for an AP-7131N-FGR include:
• 48-Volt Power Supply (Part No. 50-14000-247R)
• Power Injector (Part No. AP-PSBIAS-1P3-AFR)
CAUTION An AP-7131N-FGR and must use the 48-Volt Power Supply designed specifically for use with the AP-7131N-FGR (Part No. 50-14000-247R).
Additionally, a single-port Power of Ethernet Power Injector is available for use with the AP-7131N-FGR a (Part No. AP-PSBIAS-1P3-
AFR). Only these two powering solutions should be used with the AP-
7131N-FGR.
2.6 Power Injector System
An AP-7131N-FGR can receive power via an Ethernet cable connected to the GE1/POE (LAN) port.
Hardware Installation 2-7
When users purchase a WLAN solution, they often need to place access points in obscure locations.
In the past, a dedicated power source was required for each access point in addition to the Ethernet infrastructure. This often required an electrical contractor to install power drops at each access point location. The Power Injector merges power and Ethernet into one cable, reducing the burden of installation and allowing optimal access point placement in respect to the intended coverage area.
The Power Injector (Part No. AP-PSBIAS-1P3-AFR) is a high power POE Injector delivering up to 30 watts. The access point can only use a Power Injector when connecting the unit to the GE1/POE port.
The Power Injector is a separately ordered component and not shipped with an existing access point
SKU. A separate Power Injector is required for each access point comprising the network.
An AP-7131 and AP-7131N can also be used with the 3af power injector (AP-PSBIAS-1P2-AFR).
However, AP functionality is limited when powered by an AP-PSBIAS-1P2-AFR, since the AP has
Ethernet connectivity limited to only the GE1 port.
The Motorola Solutions access point Power Supply (Part No. 50-14000-247R) is not included with the access point and is orderable separately as an accessory. If the access point is provided both POE power over the GE1/POE connection, as well as the 50-14000-247R power supply concurrently, the access point will source power from the 50-14000-247R supply only. Disconnecting AC power from the 50-14000- 247R, causes the AP to re-boot before sourcing power from the POE power injector. If the AP is operating using injector supplied power, the AP will not automatically reboot if an AC adapter is connected. The AP continues to operate with power supplied from the AC adapter without change to the AP operating configuration. If using AC adapter supplied power and a change to the
AP’s operating configuration is warranted (for example, if needing to access the GE2 port), the AP needs to be manually rebooted by the customer.
2-8 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
CAUTION The access point supports any standards-based compliant power source (including non-Motorola Solutions power sources). However, using the wrong solution (including a POE system used on a legacy
Motorola Solutions access point) could either limit functionality or severely damage the access point and void the product warranty.
2.6.1 Installing the Power Injector
Refer to the following sections for information on planning, installing, and validating the installation:
•
Preparing for Site Installation
•
2.6.1.1 Preparing for Site Installation
The Power Injector can be installed free standing, on an even horizontal surface or wall mounted using the unit’s wall mounting key holes. The following guidelines should be adhered to before cabling the Power Injector to an Ethernet source and access point:
• Do not block or cover airflow to the Power Injector
• Keep the unit away from excessive heat, humidity, vibration and dust.
Hardware Installation 2-9
• The Power Injector is not a repeater, and does not amplify the Ethernet data signal. For optimal performance, ensure the unit is placed as close as possible to the network data port.
CAUTION To avoid problematic performance and restarts, disable POE from a wired switch port connected to an access point if mid-span power sourcing equipment (PSE) is used between the two, regardless of the manufacturer of the switch.
2.6.1.2 Cabling the Power Injector
To install a Power Injector to an Ethernet data source and an access point:
CAUTION Ensure AC power is supplied to the Power Injector using an AC cable with an appropriate ground connection approved for the country of operation.
1.
Connect an RJ-45 Ethernet cable between the network data supply (host) and the Power
Injector’s Data In connector.
2.
Connect an RJ-45 Ethernet cable between the Power Injector’s Data & Power Out connector and the access point’s GE1/POE port.
CAUTION Cabling the Power Injector to WAN port (GE2) renders the AP nonoperational. Only use a AP-PSBIAS-1P3-AFR (or AP-PSBIAS-1P2-AFR)
Power Injector with the access point’s GE1/POE (LAN) port.
Ensure the cable length from the Ethernet source (host) to the Power Injector and access point does not exceed 100 meters (333 ft). The Power Injector has no On/Off power switch.
The Power Injector receives power and is ready for access point connection and operation as soon as AC power is applied. Refer to the Installation Guide shipped with the Power
Injector for a description of the device’s LED behavior.
3.
Verify all cable connections are complete before supplying power to the access point.
2-10 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
2.7 Mounting an AP-7131N-FGR
An AP-7131N-FGR can attach to a wall, mount under a suspended T-Bar or above a ceiling (plenum or attic) following the same installation instructions. Choose one of the following mounting options based on the physical environment of the coverage area. Do not mount the access point in a location that has not been approved in a site survey.
Refer to the following, depending on how you intend to mount the access point:
•
•
Suspended Ceiling T-Bar Installations
•
Above the Ceiling (Plenum) Installations
2.7.1 Wall Mounted Installations
Wall mounting requires hanging the access point along its width (or length) using the pair of slots on the bottom of the unit and using the access point mounting template for the screws.
CAUTION An access point should be wall mounted to concrete or plaster-wallboard (dry wall) only. Do not wall mount an access point to combustible surfaces.
The hardware and tools (customer provided) required to install the access point on a wall consists of:
• Two Phillips pan head self-tapping screws (ANSI Standard) #6-18 X 0.875in. Type A or AB
Self-Tapping screw, or (ANSI Standard Metric) M3.5 X 0.6 X 20mm Type D Self-Tapping screw
• Two wall anchors
• Wall mount template (included on next page)
• Security cable (optional third part provided accessory)
1.
To mount the access point on a wall using the provided template:
Hardware Installation 2-11
2-12 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Xerox copy the template (on the previous page) to a blank piece of paper. Do not reduce or enlarge the scale of the template.
CAUTION If printing the mounting template (on the previous page) from an electronic PDF, dimensionally confirm the template by measuring each value for accuracy.
2.
Tape the template to the wall mounting surface.
• If the installation requires the antenna be positioned vertically, the centerline reference
(of the template) needs to be positioned vertically. The cabling shall exit the access point in a vertical direction.
• If the installation requires the antenna be positioned horizontally, the vertical centerline
(of the template) needs to be positioned horizontally. The cabling shall exit the access point in a horizontal direction.
3.
At mounting targets A and B, mark the mounting surface through the template at the target center.
4.
Discard the mounting template.
5.
At each point, drill a hole in the wall, insert an anchor, screw into the anchor the wall mounting screw and stop when there is 1mm between the screw head and the wall.
If pre-drilling a hole, the recommended hole size is 2.8mm (0.11in.) if the screws are going directly into the wall and 6mm (0.23in.) if wall anchors are being used.
6.
If required, install and attach a security cable to the access point’s lock port.
7.
Attach the antennas to their correct connectors.
For more information on available antennas, see Antenna Options on page 2-4
.
8.
Place the large center opening of each of the mount slots over the screw heads.
9.
Slide the access point down along the mounting surface to hang the mount slots on the screw heads.
CAUTION Ensure you are placing the antennas on the correct connectors
(depending on your dual-radio model and frequency used) to ensure the successful operation of the access point.
NOTE It is recommended the access point be mounted with the RJ45 cable connector oriented upwards or downwards to ensure proper operation.
Hardware Installation 2-13
10. Cable the access point using either the Power Injector solution or an approved line cord and power supply.
For Power Injector installations: a. Connect a RJ-45 CAT5e (or CAT6) Ethernet cable between the network data supply (host) and the Power Injector Data In connector.
b. Connect a RJ-45 CAT5e (or CAT6) Ethernet cable between the Power Injector Data &
Power Out connector and the access point’s GE1/POE port. c. Ensure the cable length from the Ethernet source to the Power Injector and access point does not exceed 100 meters (333 ft). The Power Injector has no On/Off power switch.
The Power Injector receives power as soon as AC power is applied. For more information on using the Power Injector, see
Power Injector System on page 2-6 .
For standard 48-Volt Power Adapter (Part No. 50-14000-247R) and line cord installations: a. Connect RJ-45 CAT5e (or CAT6) Ethernet cable between the network data supply (host) and the access point’s GE1/POE port.
b. Verify the power adapter is correctly rated according the country of operation.
c. Connect the power supply line cord to the power adapter.
d. Attach the power adapter cable into the power connector on the access point.
e. Plug the power adapter into an outlet.
11. Verify the behavior of the access point’s LEDs. For more information, see
The access point is ready to configure. For information on an access point default
configuration, see Getting Started on page 3-1 . For specific details on system
configurations, see
System Configuration on page 4-1 .
2.7.2 Suspended Ceiling T-Bar Installations
A suspended ceiling mount requires holding the access point up against the T-bar of a suspended ceiling grid, and twisting the chassis onto the T-bar.
The mounting tools (customer provided) and hardware required to install the access point on a ceiling
T-bar consists of:
• Safety wire (recommended and customer supplied)
• Security cable (and customer supplied)
2-14 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
To install the access point on a ceiling T-bar:
1.
Motorola Solutions recommends you loop a safety wire—with a diameter of at least 1.01 mm (.04 in.), but no more than 0.158 mm (.0625 in.) —through the tie post (above the console connector) and secure the loop.
2.
If desired, install and attach a security cable to the access point’s lock port.
3.
Attach the radio antennas to their correct connectors.
For more information on available antennas, see Antenna Options on page 2-4
.
4.
Cable the access point using either the Power Injector or an approved power supply.
CAUTION Do not supply power to the access point until the cabling of the unit is complete.
For Power Injector installations: a. Connect a RJ-45 CAT5e (or CAT6) Ethernet cable between the network data supply (host) and the Power Injector Data In connector.
b. Connect a RJ-45 CAT5e (or CAT6) Ethernet cable between the Power Injector Data &
Power Out connector and the access point’s GE1/POE port. c. Ensure the cable length from the Ethernet source to the Power Injector and access point does not exceed 100 meters (333 ft). The Power Injector has no On/Off power switch.
The Power Injector receives power as soon as AC power is applied. For more information on using the Power Injector, see
Power Injector System on page 2-6 .
For standard 48-Volt Power Adapter (Part No. 50-14000-247R) and line cord installations: a. Connect a RJ-45 CAT5e (or CAT6) Ethernet cable between the network data supply (host) and the access point’s GE1/POE port.
b. Verify the power adapter is correctly rated according the country of operation.
c. Connect the power supply line cord to the power adapter.
d. Attach the power adapter cable into the power connector on the access point.
e. Plug the power adapter into an outlet.
5.
Verify the behavior of the LEDs. For more information, see
.
6.
Align the bottom of the ceiling T-bar with the back of the access point.
7.
Orient the access point’s chassis by its length and the length of the ceiling T-bar.
8.
Rotate the access point chassis 45 degrees clockwise.
Hardware Installation 2-15
9.
Push the back of the access point chassis on to the bottom of the ceiling T-bar.
CAUTION Ensure the safety wire and cabling used in the T-Bar installation is securely fastened to the building structure in order to provide a safe operating environment.
10. Rotate the access point chassis 45 degrees counter-clockwise. The clips click as they fasten to the T-bar.
11. The access point is ready to configure. For information on an access point default
configuration, see Getting Started on page 3-1
. For specific details on access point system configurations, see
System Configuration on page 4-1 .
2.7.3 Above the Ceiling (Plenum) Installations
An above the ceiling installation requires placing the access point above a suspended ceiling and installing the provided light pipe under the ceiling tile for viewing the rear panel status LEDs of the unit. An above the ceiling installation enables installations compliant with drop ceilings, suspended ceilings and industry standard tiles from .625 to .75 inches thick.
2-16 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
NOTE The AP-7131N-FGR is Plenum rated to UL2043 and NEC1999 to support above the ceiling installations.
CAUTION Motorola Solutions does not recommend mounting the access point directly to any suspended ceiling tile with a thickness less than
12.7mm (0.5in.) or a suspended ceiling tile with an unsupported span greater than 660mm (26in.). Motorola Solutions strongly recommends fitting the access point with a safety wire suitable for supporting the weight of the device. The safety wire should be a standard ceiling suspension cable or equivalent steel wire between 1.59mm (.062in.) and 2.5mm (.10in.) in diameter.
The mounting hardware required to install the access point above a ceiling consists of:
• Light pipe
• Badge for light pipe
• Decal for badge
• Safety wire (strongly recommended)
• Security cable (optional)
To install the access point above a ceiling:
1.
If possible, remove the adjacent ceiling tile from its frame and place it aside.
2.
Install a safety wire, between 1.5mm (.06in.) and 2.5mm (.10in.) in diameter, in the ceiling space.
3.
If required, install and attach a security cable to the access point’s lock port.
4.
Mark a point on the finished side of the tile where the light pipe is to be located.
5.
Create a light pipe path hole in the target position on the ceiling tile.
6.
Use a drill to make a hole in the tile the approximate size of the LED light pipe.
CAUTION Motorola Solutions recommends care be taken not to damage the finished surface of the ceiling tile when creating the light pipe hole and installing the light pipe.
7.
Remove the light pipe’s rubber stopper before installing the light pipe.
Hardware Installation 2-17
8.
Connect the light pipe to the bottom of the access point. Align the tabs and rotate approximately 90 degrees. Do not over tighten
9.
Fit the light pipe into hole in the tile from its unfinished side.
10. Place the decal on the back of the badge and slide the badge onto the light pipe from the finished side of the tile.
11. Attach the radio antennas to their correct connectors. For more information on available
antennas, see Antenna Options on page 2-4
.
12. Motorola Solutions recommends attaching safety wire to the access point’s safety wire tie point or security cable (if used) to the access point’s lock port.
13. Align the ceiling tile into its former ceiling space.
14. Cable the access point using either a Power Injector or approved line cord and power supply.
CAUTION Do not supply power to the access point until the cabling of the unit is complete.
For Power Injector installations: a. Connect a RJ-45 CAT5e (or CAT6) Ethernet cable between the network data supply (host) and the Power Injector Data In connector.
b. Connect a RJ-45 CAT5e (or CAT6) Ethernet cable between the Power Injector Data &
Power Out connector and the access point’s GE1/POE port.
c. Ensure the cable length from the Ethernet source to the Power Injector and access point does not exceed 100 meters (333 ft). The Power Injector has no On/Off power switch.
2-18 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
The Power Injector receives power as soon as AC power is applied. For more information on using the Power Injector, see
Power Injector System on page 2-6 .
For standard 48-Volt Power Adapter (Part No. 50-14000-247R) and line cord installations: a. Connect a RJ-45 CAT5e (or CAT6) Ethernet cable between the network data supply (host) and the access point’s GE1/POE port.
b. Verify the power adapter is correctly rated according the country of operation.
c. Connect the power supply line cord to the power adapter.
d. Attach the power adapter cable into the power connector on the access point.
e. Plug the power adapter into an outlet.
15. Verify the behavior of the LEDs. For more information, see
.
16. Place the ceiling tile back in its frame and verify it is secure.
The access point is ready to configure. For information on an access point default
configuration, see Getting Started on page 3-1 . For specific details on system
configurations, see
System Configuration on page 4-1 .
2.8 LED Indicators
An AP-7131N-FGR model access point has six LEDs on the top of the access point housing, and one optional LED light pipe at the bottom of the unit. However, an AP-7131N-FGR model access point does not use LED 6, as no third radio is available. Five LEDs illuminate (on top of the housing) for dual radios models.
The access point utilizes two (different colored) lights below each LED. Only one light displays within a LED at any given time. Every light within each LED is exercised during startup to allow the user to see if an LED is non-functional. The LEDs turn on and off while rotating around in a circle. Since two
LEDs feed each light pipe, the pattern is from left to right, then right to left.
NOTE LED blink rate is proportional to activity. The busiest traffic corresponds to the fastest blink, while the slowest traffic corresponds to slowest blink.
Hardware Installation 2-19
NOTE Depending on how the 5 GHz and 2.4 GHz radios are configured, the LEDs will blink at different intervals between amber and yellow (5 GHz radio) and emerald and yellow (2.4 GHz radio).
The LEDs on the top housing of the access point are clearly visible in wall and below ceiling installations. The top housing LEDs have the following display and functionality:
2-20 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
2.8.1 Dual Radio (2.4/5 GHz) LEDs
A dual radio (2.4/5 Ghz) model access point has the following unique LED behavior:
LED 1
Blinking Red indicates booting.Solid
Red defines the diagnostic mode.
White defines normal operation.
LED 2 (LAN) LED 3 (WAN) LED 4 - 5 GHz LED 5 - 2.4 GHz
Green defines normal GE1 operation.
Green defines normal GE2 operation.
Blinking
Amber indicates
802.11a activity.
A 5 second
Amber and
Yellow blink rate defines
802.11an activity.
A 2 second
Amber and
Yellow blink rate defines
802.11an
(40 MHz) activity.
When functioning as a sensor, LED alternates between
Amber and
Yellow.
The blink interval is 0.5 seconds. It’s 1 second when no Server is connected.
Blinking
Emerald indicates
802.11bg activity.
A 5 second
Emerald and
Yellow blink rate defines
802.11bgn activity.
A 2 second
Emerald and
Yellow blink rate defines
802.11bgn
(40 MHz) activity.
When functioning as a sensor, LED alternates between
Emerald and
Yellow.
The blink interval is 0.5 seconds. It’s 1 second when no Server is connected.
LED 6
Not used
Hardware Installation 2-21
2.8.2 Rear LED
The LED on the rear (bottom) of the access point is optionally viewed using a single (customer installed) extended light pipe, adjusted as required to suit above the ceiling installations. The LED light pipe has the following color display and functionality:
LED 7
Blinking Red (160 msec) indicates a failure condition.
Solid Red defines the diagnostic mode.
White defines normal operation.
2.9 Setting Up MUs
2.9.1 Legacy MUs
For a discussion of how to initially test the access point to ensure it can interoperate with the MUs
intended for its operational environment, see Basic Configuration on page 3-4
.
Refer to the LA-5030 & LA-5033 Wireless Networker PC Card and PCI Adapter Users Guide, available from the Motorola Solutions Web site, for installing drivers and client software if operating in an
802.11a/g network environment.
Refer to the Spectrum24 LA-4121 PC Card, LA-4123 PCI Adapter & LA-4137 Wireless Networker User
Guide, available from the Motorola Solutions Web site, for installing drivers and client software if operating in an 802.11b network environment.
Use the default values for the ESSID and other configuration parameters until the network connection is verified. MUs attach to the network and interact with the AP transparently.
2-22 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
2.9.2 802.11n MUs
Third-party 802.11n clients can connect to the access point using default settings with no additional user intervention. However, there could be instances where the specific (high-performance) 802.11n settings cannot be sustained due to adverse radio traffic conditions within the network. When this occurs, Motorola Solutions recommends changing the Windows XP settings so the adapter can use settings defined for legacy (802.11a/bg) adapter operation. Once network conditions improve, use
Windows XP to re-enable the adapter for 802.11n support.
To change the access point’s settings to support legacy 802.11a/bg operation (using Windows XP):
1.
Select My Network Places.
2.
Right-click and select Properties. The Network Connections screen displays.
3.
Select (right-click on) the adapter supporting 802.11n operation with the access point and select Properties .
4.
Click on the Configure button.
The Network Connection screen displays supporting the 802.11n adapter.
5.
Select the Advanced tab.
6.
Select 802.11n Network from the Property field and select either Enable or Disable from the Value drop-down menu.
Select Disable when the 802.11n rate settings and performance values defined on the access point cannot be sustained (due to network congestion or interference). Once network conditions improve to the point where 802.11n traffic can be sustained, enable the 802.11n
Network parameter once again.
Hardware Installation 2-23
NOTE If re-enabling the adapter for 802.11 support, ensure additional 802.11n settings ( Aggregation , Channel Width , Guard Interval etc.) are also enabled to ensure optimal operation.
7.
Click OK to save the updates to the adapter’s configuration.
2-24 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Getting Started
The access point should be installed in an area tested for radio coverage using one of the site survey tools available to the field service technician. Once an installation site has been identified, the installer should carefully follow the hardware precautions, requirements, mounting guidelines and
power options outlined in Hardware Installation
.
See the following sections for more details:
•
•
•
3.1 Installing the Access Point
Make the required cable and power connections before mounting the access point in its final operating position. Test the access point with an associated MU before mounting and securing the access point. Carefully follow the mounting instructions in one of the following sections to ensure the access point is installed correctly:
3-2 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
• For instructions on mounting the access point to a wall, see
Wall Mounted Installations on page 2-10 .
•
For instructions on mounting an access point to a ceiling T-bar, see Suspended Ceiling T-Bar
.
• For instructions on installing the access point in an above the ceiling attic space, see
Above the Ceiling (Plenum) Installations on page 2-15 .
For information on the antenna suite available to the AP-7131N-FGR, see
2-4 . For more information on using a Power Injector to combine Ethernet and power in one cable to
an access point, see
Power Injector System on page 2-6 . To verify LED behavior once installed, see
.
3.2 Configuration Options
Once installed and powered, the access point can be configured using one of several connection techniques. Managing the access point includes viewing network statistics and setting configuration options. The access point requires one of the following connection methods to manage the network:
• Secure Java-Based WEB UI - (use Sun Microsystems’ JRE 1.6 available from Sun’s Web site.
Disable Microsoft’s Java Virtual Machine if installed). For information on using the Web UI to set access point default configuration, see
Basic Configuration on page 3-4
or chapters 4 through 7 of this guide.
• Command Line Interface (CLI) via Serial, and SSH. The access point CLI is accessed through the RS232 port, via SSH. The CLI follows the same configuration conventions as the device user interface with a few documented exceptions. For details on using the CLI to manage
the access point, see Connecting to the CLI on page 8-2 .
• Config file - Readable text file; Importable/Exportable via SFTP. Configuration settings for an access point can be downloaded from the current configuration of another access point meeting the import/export requirements. For information on importing or exporting
configuration files, see Importing/Exporting Configurations on page 4-47 .
MIB (Management Information Base) accessing the access point SNMP functions using a MIB
Browser. The MIB files are available at https://portal.motorolasolutions.com/Support/US-EN.
In the given portal, the user should serach for “AP7131N-GR MIBS 4.0.4.0”. For more information refer
Appendix C, Customer Support .
Getting Started 3-3
3.3 Initially Connecting to the Access Point
NOTE The procedures described below assume this is the first time you are connecting to an AP-7131N-FGR model access point.
NOTE The computer being used should be configured to use the same IP address and subnet mask as the access point.
3.3.1 Connecting to the Access Point using the WAN Port
To initially connect to the access point using the access point’s WAN port:
1.
Connect AC power to the access point, as Power-Over-Ether support is not available on the access point’s WAN (or GE2) port.
2.
Start a browser and enter the access point’s static IP address (10.1.1.1). The default password is “ motorola .”
3.
Refer to
Basic Configuration on page 3-4
for instructions on the initial (basic) configuration of the access point.
3.3.2 Connecting to the Access Point using the LAN Port
To initially connect to the access point using the access point’s LAN port:
1.
The LAN (or GE1/POE) port has a default static IP address of 192.168.0.1/24.
2.
To view the IP address, connect one end of a null modem serial cable to the access point and the other end to the serial port of a computer running HyperTerminal or similar emulation program.
3.
Configure the following settings:
• Baud Rate - 19200
• Data Bits - 8
• Stop Bits - 1
• No Parity
• No Flow Control
4.
Press <ESC> or <Enter> to access the access point CLI.
5.
Enter the default username of “ admin ” and the default password of “ motorola.
”
3-4 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
As this is the first time you are logging into the access point, you are prompted to enter a
new password and set the county code. Refer to Country Codes on page A-4 for a list of each
available countries two digit country code.
6.
At the CLI prompt (admin>), type “ summary .”
The access point’s LAN IP address will display.
7.
Using a Web browser, use the access point’s IP address to access the access point.
8.
Refer to
Basic Configuration on page 3-4
for instructions on the initial (basic) configuration of the access point.
3.4 Basic Configuration
3.4.1 Configuring Your Browser for AP-7131N-FGR Support
An AP-7131N-FGR model access point is compliant with the FIPS140-2 standard. The AP-7131N-FGR is only accessible using browsers that support the TLS 1.0 protocol. The AP-7131N-FGR is not accessible by browsers supporting the SSL 2.0 or SSL 3.0 protocols. Additionally, ensure JRE (version
1.6) is installed on the computer accessing the AP-7131N-FGR GUI applet. The following sections describe how to change your browser settings using either Internet Explorer or Mozilla Firefox in order to correctly launch and display the AP-7131N-FGR GUI applet. Without these browser modifications, you will not be able to access the AP-7131N-FGR GUI applet.
CAUTION With both the Internet Explorer and Mozilla Firefox browser configurations, screens may display stating Website certificates cannot be validated or have been certified by an unknown authority. Do not exit the browser configuration, as these messages will occur with only the initial AP-7131N-FGR browser configuration.
3.4.1.1 Accessing the AP-7131N-FGR Using Internet Explorer
To define the browser settings needed to access the AP-7131N-FGR using Windows Internet Explorer:
1.
Open the Internet Explorer browser and open the Tools > Internet Options menu.
2.
Select the Advanced tab.
3.
Scroll down to the bottom of the Advanced tab and ensure the Use TLS 1.0
option is selected. Remember, the AP-7131N-FGR does not support SSL 2.0 or SSL 3.0.
Getting Started 3-5
4.
Enter the IP address of the AP-7131N-FGR 4.0 within Internet Explorer. Select the Continue to this Website (not recommended) option. The default IP address is 10.1.1.1.
At this point in the browser configuration, a screen displays stating the Web site’s certificate cannot be verified.
5.
Click Yes to continue. The access point’s login screen displays.
6.
Log in using admin as the default User ID and motorola as the default password. If the default login is successful, the Change Admin Password window displays. You need to immediately change the password for security.
7.
For more information, see
Configuring the Access Point on page 3-5
.
3.4.1.2 Accessing the AP-7131N-FGR Using Mozilla Firefox
To define the browser settings needed to access the AP-7131N-FGR using Mozilla Firefox:
1.
Open the Mozilla Firefox browser and open the Tools > Options menu.
2.
Select the Advanced tab, then select either the Encryption or Security tab (they differ depending on the version of Firefox used).
3.
Within the Protocols field, ensure the Use TLS 1.0
option is selected. Remember, the
AP-7131N-FGR does not support SSL 2.0 or SSL 3.0.
A Website Certified by an Unknown Authority screen displays stating Firefox is unable to define a trusted site.
4.
Select either the Accept this certificate permanently or Accept this certificate temporarily for this session . Click the OK button to continue.
A Security Error: Domain Name Mismatch screen could display. Click OK to continue.
At this point in the browser configuration, a screen displays stating the Web site’s certificate cannot be verified.
5.
Click Yes to continue. The access point’s login screen displays.
6.
Log in using admin as the default User ID and motorola as the default password. If the default login is successful, the Change Admin Password window displays. You need to
immediately change the password for security. For more information, see Configuring the
3.4.2 Configuring the Access Point
For the basic setup described in this section, the Java-based Web UI will be used to configure the access point.To access the access point via the GE1/POE port,the GE1/POE port is statically assigned
3-6 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide default IP address of 192.168.0.1. The default WAN IP address for GE2 port is set to 10.1.1.1. For this example, the access point’s LAN interface (GE1 port) will be used to connect to the access point.For optimal viewing of the Web UI, the screen resolution should be set to 1024 x 768 pixels or greater.
Remember, Internet Explorer and Mozilla Firefox require unique settings be defined in order for the browser to access the AP-7131N-FGR GUI applet. For instructions on configuring these browser
settings, see Configuring Your Browser for AP-7131N-FGR Support on page 3-4
.
1.
Start a browser and enter the following IP address in the address field: https://192.168.0.1
2.
Log in using admin as the default Username and motorola as the default Password. Use your new password if it has been updated from default.
NOTE For optimum compatibility, use Sun Microsystems’ JRE 1.6 (available from
Sun’s Website), and be sure to disable Microsoft’s Java Virtual Machine if installed.
Getting Started 3-7
3.
If the default login is successful, the Change Admin Password window displays. Change the 8-19 character password to ensure the AP-7131N-FGR is using a secure password different from the default password.
Enter the current password and a new admin password in fields provided. Click Apply . Once the admin password has been updated, a warning message displays stating the access point must be set to a country. Proceed to
Configuring Device Settings on page 3-8 to validate the
country setting.
The export function will always export the encrypted Admin User password. The import function will import the Admin Password only if the access point is set to factory default. If the access point is not configured to factory default settings, the Admin User password WILL
NOT get imported.
NOTE Though the access point can have its basic settings defined using a number of different screens, Motorola Solutions recommends using the access point Quick Setup screen to set the correct country of operation and define its minimum required configuration from one convenient location.
3-8 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
3.4.3 Configuring Device Settings
Configure a set of minimum required device settings within the Quick Setup screen. The values
(LAN, WAN etc.) can often be defined in other locations within the menu tree. When you change the settings in the Quick Setup screen, the values also change within the screen where these parameters also exist. Additionally, if the values are updated in these other screens, the values initially set within the Quick Setup screen will be updated.
NOTE Beginning with the 4.0 release of the access point firmware, a new scheme for radio configuration and WIPS server management has been implemented within the Quick Setup GUI applet. These radio buttons define how WLAN and sensor functionality are supported amongst the radios available to the access point. The options available depend on the
SKU supported (and are described within this section).
To define a basic access point configuration:
1.
Select System Configuration -> Quick Setup from the menu tree, if the Quick Setup screen is not already displayed.
2.
Select the System Configuration tab to define the access point’s system, WIPS server and radio configuration.
NOTE Beginning with the 4.0 release of the access point firmware, sensor functionality is no longer configured within a designated WIPS screen.
The WIPS Server designation and radio configuration is now defined as part of the access point’s quick setup. For a description of sensor
functionality and how it relates to access point operation, see Sensor
.
Getting Started 3-9
3.
Refer to the AP-71xx System Settings field to define the following parameters:
System Name Assign a System Name to define a title for this access point. The
System Name is useful if multiple devices are being administered.
Country Select the Country for the access point’s country of operation. The access point prompts for the correct country code on the first login. A warning message also displays stating an incorrect country setting may result in illegal radio operation. Selecting the correct country is central to legally operating the access point. Each country has its own regulatory restrictions concerning electromagnetic emissions and the maximum RF signal strength that can be transmitted. To ensure compliance with national and local laws, set the country accurately. CLI and MIB users cannot configure their access point until a two character country code (for example, United States - us) is set. Refer to
for the two character country codes.
3-10 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Time Server
WIPS Servers
Optionally enter the IP address of the server used to provide system time to the access point within the Time Server field. Once the IP address is entered, the access point’s Network Time Protocol (NTP) functionality is engaged automatically. Refer to
Configuring Network Time Protocol
(if necessary) for information on setting alternate time servers and setting a synchronization interval for the access point to adjust its displayed time.
Define a primary and alternate WIPS server IP Address for WIPS Server
1 and 2. These are the addresses of the primary and secondary WIPS console server. WIPS support requires a Motorola Solutions AirDefense
WIPS Server on the network. WIPS functionality is not provided by the access point alone. The access point works in conjunction with the dedicated WIPS server(s).
NOTE The System Name and Country are also configurable within the System
Settings
screen. Refer to Configuring System Settings on page 4-2
(if necessary) to set a system location and admin email address for the access point or to view other default settings.
4.
Refer to the new Radio Configuration field to define how WLAN and WIPS are supported by the access point’s radio(s). Remember, the options available depend on the radio model
SKU deployed.
A dual radio model access point displays 7 configuration options. Refer to the following table for the options available to dual radio models.
Radio Button
2.4 GHz WLAN,
& Sensor
5.0 GHz WLAN
& Sensor
2.4 GHz WLAN &
5.0 GHz WLAN only - no Sensor
AP-7131N-FGR Dual Radio SKU
Radio1 WLAN,
Radio 2 WIPS
Radio 1 WIPS,
Radio 2 WLAN
Radio 1 WLAN,
Radio 2 WLAN
Getting Started 3-11
Sensor only Spectrum Analysis mode
(no WLAN)
2.4 GHz WLAN - no Sensor
Radio 1 WIPS,
Radio 2 WIPS
5.0 GHz WLAN - no Sensor
Radio1 WLAN,
Radio 2 Disabled
Radio1 Disabled,
Radio 2 WLAN
Radios 1 and 2 Disabled Radios Off
5.
Select the Quick Setup screen’s Network Configuration tab to define a minimum set of
WAN or LAN configuration values. The WAN tab displays by default.
Set a minimum set of parameters for using the WAN interface. a. Select the Enable WAN Interface checkbox to enable a connection between the access point and a larger network or outside world through the WAN port. Disable this
3-12 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide option to effectively isolate the access point’s WAN connection. No connections to a larger network or the Internet will be possible. MUs cannot communicate beyond the configured subnets.
b. Select the This Interface is a DHCP Client checkbox to enable DHCP for the access point’s WAN connection. This is useful, if the larger corporate network or Internet
Service Provider (ISP) uses DHCP. DHCP is a protocol that includes mechanisms for IP address allocation and delivery of host-specific configuration parameters from a DHCP server to a host. Some of these parameters are IP address, network mask, and gateway.
NOTE Motorola Solutions recommends that the WAN and LAN ports should not be configured as DHCP clients at the same time.
c. Specify an IP address for the access point’s WAN connection. An IP address uses a series of four numbers expressed in dot notation, for example, 190.188.12.1 (no DNS names supported).
d. Specify a Subnet Mask for the access point’s WAN connection. This number is available from the ISP for a DSL or cable-modem connection, or from an administrator if the access point connects to a larger network. A subnet mask uses a series of four numbers expressed in dot notation. For example, 255.255.255.0 is a valid subnet mask.
e. Define a Default Gateway address for the access point’s WAN connection. The ISP or a network administrator provides this address. f. Specify the address of a Primary DNS Server . The ISP or a network administrator provides this address.
g. Optionally, use the Enable PPP over Ethernet checkbox to enable Point-to-Point
Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) for a high-speed connection that supports this protocol.
Most DSL providers are currently using or deploying this protocol. PPPoE is a data-link protocol for dialup connections. PPPoE will allow the access point to use a broadband modem (DSL, cable modem, etc.) for access to high-speed data networks.
h. Select the Keep Alive checkbox to enable occasional communications over the WAN port even when client communications to the WAN are idle. Some ISPs terminate inactive connections, while others do not. In either case, enabling Keep-Alive maintains the WAN connection, even when there is no traffic. If the ISP drops the connection after the idle time, the access point automatically reestablishes the connection to the ISP.
i. Specify the Username entered when connecting to the ISP. When the Internet session begins, the ISP authenticates the username.
Getting Started 3-13
.
j. Specify the Password entered when connecting to the ISP. When the Internet session starts, the ISP authenticates the password.
For additional access point WAN port configuration options, see
Configuring WAN Settings on page 5-16
.
6.
Select the LAN#1 tab to set a minimum set of parameters to use the LAN#1 interface. a. Select the Enable LAN Interface checkbox to forward data traffic over the access point’s LAN connection. The LAN connection is enabled by default.
b. Use the This Interface drop-down menu to specify how network address information is defined over the LAN connection. Select DHCP Client if the larger corporate network uses DHCP. DHCP is a protocol that includes mechanisms for IP address allocation and delivery of host-specific configuration parameters from a DHCP server to a host. Some of these parameters are IP address, network mask, and gateway. Select DHCP Server to use the access point as a DHCP server over the LAN connection. Select the Bootp client option to enable a diskless system to discover its own IP address.
NOTE Motorola Solutions recommends that the WAN and LAN ports should not both be configured as DHCP clients.
c. Enter the network-assigned IP Address of the access point.
NOTE DNS names are not supported as a valid IP address for the access point.
The user is required to enter a numerical IP address. d. The Subnet Mask defines the size of the subnet. The first two sets of numbers specify the network domain, the next set specifies the subset of hosts within a larger network.
These values help divide a network into subnetworks and simplify routing and data transmission. e. If using the static or DHCP Server option, enter a Default Gateway to define the numerical IP address of a router the access point uses on the Ethernet as its default gateway.
f. If using the static or DHCP Server option, enter the Primary DNS Server numerical IP address.
g. If using the DHCP Server option, use the Address Assignment Range parameter to specify a range of IP address reserved for mapping clients to IP addresses. If a manually
(static) mapped IP address is within the IP address range specified, that IP address could
3-14 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide still be assigned to another client. To avoid this, ensure all statically mapped IP addresses are outside of the IP address range assigned to the DHCP server.
For additional access point LAN port configuration options, see Configuring the LAN
7.
Select the WLAN #1 tab (WLANs 1 - 4 are available within the Quick Setup screen) to define its ESSID and security scheme for basic operation.
NOTE A maximum of 16 WLANs are configurable within the Wireless
Configuration screen. The limitation of 16 WLANs.
a. Enter the Extended Services Set Identification (ESSID) and name associated with the
WLAN. For additional information on creating and editing up to 16 WLANs per access
point, see Creating/Editing Individual WLANs on page 5-29
.
b. Use the Available On checkboxes to define whether the target WLAN is operating in the 2.4 or 5 GHz radio band. Ensure the radio selected has been enabled (see step 8).
8.
Once the WLAN’s radio designations have been made, the radio must be configured in respect to intended 2.4 or 5 GHz radio traffic and the antennas used. Refer to
Network Configuration -> Wireless -> Radio Configuration -> Radio1 (or Radio2 ), and configure the Radio Settings field (at a minimum). If you know the radio’s Properties,
Performance and Beacon Settings, those fields can also be defined at this time.
Define the Channel Settings, Power Level and 802.11 mode in respect to the 2.4 or 5 GHz
802.11b/g/n or 802.11a/n radio traffic and anticipated gain of the antennas.
CAUTION Only a qualified wireless network administrator should set the
access point radio configuration. Refer to Configuring the
802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n Radio on page 5-56
for an understanding of additional radio values and their implications.
NOTE Even an access point configured with minimal values must protect its data against theft and corruption. A security policy should be configured for
WLAN1 as part of the basic configuration outlined in this guide. A security policy can be configured for the WLAN from within the Quick Setup screen. Policies can be defined over time and saved to be used as needed as security requirements change. Motorola Solutions recommends you familiarize yourself with the security options available on the access point before defining a security policy. Refer to
Security Settings on page 3-15 .
Getting Started 3-15
9.
Click Apply to save any changes to the access point Quick Setup screen. Navigating away from the screen without clicking Apply results in all changes to the screens being lost.
10. Click Undo Changes (if necessary) to undo any changes made. Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the access point Quick Setup screen to the last saved configuration.
3.4.3.1 Configuring Basic WLAN Security Settings
To configure a basic security policy for a WLAN:
1.
From the Quick Setup screen, click the Create button to the right of the Security Policy item.
At a minimum, a basic security scheme (in this case WPA2/CCMP) is recommended in a network environment where sensitive data is transmitted.
NOTE For information on configuring the other encryption and authentication options available to the access point, see
Configuring Security Options on page 6-2 .
2.
Ensure the Name of the security policy entered suits the intended configuration or function of the policy.
Multiple WLANs can share the same security policy, so be careful not to name security policies after specific WLANs or risk defining a WLAN to single policy. Motorola Solutions recommends naming the policy after the attributes of the authentication or encryption type selected.
3.
Select the WPA2/CCMP (802.11i) checkbox.
3-16 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
4.
Configure the Key Rotation Settings as required to set Broadcast Key Rotation and the update interval.
Broadcast Key
Rotation
Update broadcast keys every (30-
604800 seconds)
Select the Broadcast Key Rotation checkbox to enable or disable broadcast key rotation. When enabled, the key indices used for encrypting/decrypting broadcast traffic will be alternatively rotated on every interval specified in the
Broadcast Key Rotation Interval. Enabling broadcast key rotation enhances the broadcast traffic security on the
WLAN. This value is disabled by default.
Specify a time period in seconds to rotate the key index used for the broadcast key. Set the interval to a shorter duration like 3600 seconds for tighter broadcast traffic security on the wireless LAN. Set the interval to a longer duration like 86400 seconds for less broadcast traffic security requirements.
Default value is 86400 secs.
Getting Started 3-17
5.
Configure the Key Settings as needed.
256-bit Key To use a hexadecimal value (and not an ASCII passphrase), select the checkbox and enter 16 hexadecimal characters into each of the four fields displayed.
Default (hexadecimal) 256-bit keys for WP2A/CCMP include:
1011121314151617
18191A1B1C1D1E1F
2021222324252627
28292A2B2C2D2E2F
6.
Configure the Fast Roaming (802.1x only) field as required to enable additional access point roaming and key caching options. This feature is applicable only when using 802.1x
EAP authentication with WPA2/CCMP.
Pre-Authentication Selecting this option enables an associated MU to carry out an 802.1x authentication with another access point before it roams to it. The access point caches the keying information of the client until it roams to the other access point. This enables the roaming client to start sending and receiving data sooner by not having to do 802.1x authentication after it roams. This feature is only supported when 802.1x EAP authentication is enabled.
NOTE PMK key caching is enabled internally by default when 802.1x EAP authentication is enabled.
7.
Click the Apply button to save the security policy and return to the Quick Setup screen.
At this point, you can test the access point for MU interoperability.
3.4.4 Testing Connectivity
Verify the access point’s link with an MU by sending Wireless Network Management Protocol
(WNMP) ping packets to the associated MU. Use the Echo Test screen to specify a target MU and
3-18 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide configure the parameters of the test. The WNMP ping test only works with Motorola Solutions MUs.
Only use a Motorola Solutions MU to test access point connectivity using WNMP.
NOTE Before testing for connectivity, the target MU needs to be set to the same
ESSID as the access point. Since WPA2/CCMP has been configured for the access point, the MU also needs to be configured for WPA2/CCMP and use the same keys. Ensure the MU is associated with the access point before testing for connectivity.
To ping a specific MU to assess its connection with an access point:
1.
Select Status and Statistics -> MU Stats from the menu tree.
2.
Select the Echo Test button from within the MU Stats Summary screen.
3.
Define the following parameters for the test.
Station Address The station address is the IP address of the target MU.
Refer to the MU Stats Summary screen for associated MU
IP address information.
Number of pings Defines the number of packets to be transmitted to the
MU. The default is 100.
Packet Length Specifies the length of each packet transmitted to the MU during the test. The default length is 100 bytes.
4.
Click the Ping button to begin transmitting packets to the specified MU address.
Refer to the Number of Responses value to assess the number of responses from the MU versus the number of ping packets transmitted by the access point. Use the ratio of packets sent versus the number of packets received the link quality between the MU and the access point.
Click the OK button to exit the Echo Test screen and return to the MU Stats Summary screen.
3.4.5 Where to Go from Here?
Once basic connectivity has been verified, the access point can be fully configured to meet the needs of the network and the users it supports. Refer to the following:
• For detailed information on access point device access, SNMP settings, network time, importing/exporting device configurations and device firmware updates, see
Chapter 4, System Configuration on page 4-1 .
Getting Started 3-19
• For detailed information on configuring access point LAN interface (subnet) and WAN interface see,
Chapter 5, Network Management on page 5-1
.
• For detailed information on configuring specific encryption and authentication security schemes for individual access point WLANs, see
Chapter 6, Configuring Access Point Security on page 6-1 .
• To view detailed statistics on the access point and its associated MUs, see
Chapter 7, Monitoring Statistics on page 7-1 .
3-20 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
System Configuration
The access point contains a built-in browser interface for system configuration and remote management using a standard Web browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer, Netscape Navigator or Mozilla Firefox (version 0.8 or higher is recommended). The browser interface also allows for system monitoring of the access point.
Web management of the access point requires either Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 or later or
Netscape Navigator 6.0 or later.
NOTE For optimum compatibility, use Sun Microsystems’ JRE 1.6 (available from
Sun’s Web site), and be sure to disable Microsoft’s Java Virtual Machine if installed.
To connect to the access point, an IP address is required. If connected to the access point using the
WAN port, the default static IP address is 10.1.1.1. The default password is “ motorola .” If connected to the access point using the LAN port, the default static IP addrees is 192.168.0.1/24. The user is required to know the IP address to connect to the access point using a Web browser.
4-2 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
System configuration topics include:
•
•
•
•
•
Managing Certificate Authority (CA) Certificates
•
•
Configuring Network Time Protocol (NTP)
•
•
Importing/Exporting Configurations
•
•
4.1 Configuring System Settings
Use the System Settings screen to specify the name and location of the access point, assign an email address for the network administrator, restore the AP’s default configuration or restart the AP.
To configure System Settings for the access point:
CAUTION The access point’s country of operation is set from within the System
Settings screen. If the country code is changed, the access point’s power level, primary channel and secondary channel return to their default values. If changing the country code, be aware these values will require modification to their previous settings.
1.
Select System Configuration -> System Settings from the access point menu tree.
System Configuration 4-3
2.
Configure the access point System Settings field to assign a system name and location, set the country of operation and view device version information.
System Name
System Location
Specify a device name for the access point. Motorola Solutions recommends selecting a name serving as a reminder of the user base the access point supports (engineering, retail, etc.). This name will appear in the WIPS server when one of the radios is configured as a sensor and the WIPS functionality connects to the WIPS server. The WIPS module only accepts names with up to 20 characters, keep that if intending to use this AP as a sensor.
Enter the location of the access point. The System Location parameter acts as a reminder of where the AP can be found. Use the System Name field as a specific identifier of device location.
Use the System Name and System Location fields together to optionally define the AP name by the radio coverage it supports and specific physical location. For example, “second floor engineering”
Admin Email Address Specify the AP administrator's e-mail address.
4-4 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Country
Version
System Uptime
Serial Number
AP Mode
The access point prompts the user for the correct country code after the first login. A warning message also displays stating that an incorrect country setting will lead to an illegal use of the access point. Use the pull-down menu to select the country of operation.
Selecting the correct country is extremely important. Each country has its own regulatory restrictions concerning electromagnetic emissions (channel range) and the maximum RF signal strength transmitted. To ensure compliance with national and local laws, be sure to set the Country field correctly.
If using the access point configuration file, CLI or MIB to configure the access point’s country code, see
.
The displayed number is the current version of the device firmware.
Use this information to determine if the access point is running the most recent firmware available from Motorola Solutions. Use the
Firmware Update screen to keep the AP’s firmware up to date.
For more information, see Updating Device Firmware on page 4-51
.
Displays the current uptime of the access point defined in the
System Name field. System Uptime is the cumulative time since the access point was last rebooted or lost power.
Displays the access point Media Access Control (MAC) address.
The access point MAC address is hard coded at the factory and cannot be modified. The LAN and WAN port MAC addresses can be located within the LAN and WAN Stats screens. For information on
locating the access point MAC addresses, see Viewing WAN
and
Viewing LAN Statistics on page 7-6
.
Displays the access point’s mode of operation to convey whether the access point is functioning as a standalone access point
(Independent mode) or in Adaptive (thin AP) mode. If in Adaptive mode, the access point attempts to discover a switch through one or more of several mechanisms: DNS, DHCP, ICMP, CAPWAP or a statically programmed IP address. For information on adaptive AP,
see, Adaptive AP on page 10-1 .
By default DNS-Relay-Mode is enabled.
Enable DNS-Relay
3.
Refer to the Factory Defaults field to restore either a full or partial default configuration.
System Configuration 4-5
CAUTION Restoring the access point’s configuration back to default settings changes the administrative password back to “motorola.” If restoring the configuration back to default settings, be sure you change the administrative password accordingly.
Restore Default
Configuration
Restore Partial
Default Configuration
Select the Restore Default Configuration button to reset the
AP’s configuration to factory default settings. If selected, a message displays warning the user the current configuration will be lost if the default configuration is restored. Before using this feature, Motorola Solutions recommends using the Config
Import/Export screen to export the current configuration for
safekeeping, see Importing/Exporting Configurations on page 4-47 .
Select the Restore Partial Default Configuration button to restore a default configuration with the exception of the current
LAN, WAN, SNMP settings and IP address used to launch the browser. If selected, a message displays warning the user all current configuration settings will be lost with the exception of
WAN and SNMP settings. Before using this feature, Motorola
Solutions recommends using the Config Import/Export screen to
export the current configuration for safekeeping, see Importing/
Exporting Configurations on page 4-47
.
4.
Use the Reset Keys field to zeroise the key value s (if necessary).
Reset Keys to Zero In AP7131N, key zeroisation function zeroises all Cryptographic
Keys and Critical Security Parameters (CSP) by overwriting the storage area three times with an alternating pattern (i.e, three different patterns).
5.
Refer to the Self Test field to run self tests and view self test logs.
Run Self Test Select the Run Self Test button to run self tests. The AP-7131N-
FGR access points run a series of self tests. If one of the self test fails, the device transitions into an error state where all data output and cryptographic operations are disabled.
Show Self Test Logs Select the Show Self Test Logs to view the self test logs.
6.
Use the Restart field to restart the AP (if necessary).
4-6 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Restart Click the Restart button to reboot the AP-7131N-FGR. Restarting the AP-7131N-FGR resets all data collection values to zero.
Motorola Solutions does not recommend restarting the
AP-7131N-FGR during significant system uptime or data collection activities.
CAUTION After a reboot, static route entries disappear from the AP Route Table if a LAN Interface is set to DHCP Client. The entries can be retrieved
(once the reboot is done) by performing an Apply operation from the
WEB UI or a save operation from the CLI.
7.
Click Apply to save any changes to the System Settings screen. Navigating away from the screen without clicking the Apply button results in all changes to the screen being lost.
NOTE The Apply button is not needed for restoring the access point default configuration or restarting the access point.
8.
Click Undo Changes (if necessary) to undo any changes made. Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the System Settings screen to the last saved configuration.
9.
Click Logout to securely exit the access point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
4.2 Configuring Power Settings
Use the Power Setting screen to select one of two power modes, 3af or Auto. When automatic is selected, the access point safely operates within available power. Once the power configuration is determined, the access point configures its operating power characteristics based on its SKU and power configuration.
The access point uses a complex programmable logic device (CPLD). The CPLD determines proper supply sequencing, the maximum power available and other status information. One of the primary functions of the CPLD is to determine the access point’s maximum power budget. When the AP is powered on (or performing a cold reset), the CPLD determines the maximum power provided by the
POE device and the budget available to the access point. The CPLD also determines the access point hardware SKU and the number of radios. If the access point’s POE resource cannot provide sufficient power to run the access point (with all intended interfaces enabled), some of the following interfaces could be disabled or modified:
System Configuration 4-7
• The access point’s transmit and receive algorithms could be negatively impacted
• The access point’s transmit power could be reduced due to insufficient power
• The access point’s WAN port configuration could be changed (either enabled or disabled)
Automatic is the default mode. When Auto is selected, the CPLD determines how much power is available at startup (3af, 3at or Full Power for an AP-7131N-FGR model).
NOTE An AP-7131N-FGR model uses 22 watts when its power status is 3af,
23 - 26 watts when its power status is 3at and 27 watts when its power status is Full Power.
CAUTION The power modes described in the section are only obtainable using the 48-Volt Power Supply (Part No. 50-14000-247R) designed for an
AP-7131N-FGR or using the single-port Power Injector (Part No.
AP-PSBIAS-1P3-AFR).
NOTE Radio transmit power is not used as one of the factors to determine the available power budget. If an external power supply is used, it is assumed it will provide full power. When operating using full power, each radio has
3x3 antenna mode support and its intended transmit power budget.
Radios at Full Power
The table below describes the maximum transmit power available to each radio (at varying data rates) when the access point is receiving full DC power and is not compromised in its power budget. These values should be viewed as the safe limit for the access point’s radio at full power and should not be exceeded.
Rates (Mbps)
1
2
5.5
11
6
MCS Indices EVM Bandwidth
-9 20MHz
-9
-9
-9
-5
20MHz
20MHz
20MHz
20MHz
Maximum
Transmit Power
2.4 GHz
Maximum
Transmit Power
5 GHz
23
23
23
23
23
NA
NA
NA
NA
20
4-8 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Rates (Mbps)
9
12
18
24
36
48
54
MCS Indices
MCS0/MCS8
MCS1/MCS9
MCS2/MCS10
MCS3/MCS11
MCS4/MCS12
MCS5/MCS13
MCS6/MCS14
MCS7/MCS15
-10
-13
-16
-19
-19
-22
-25
-5
EVM Bandwidth
Maximum
Transmit Power
2.4 GHz
Maximum
Transmit Power
5 GHz
-8
-10
-13
-16
20MHz
20MHz
20MHz
20MHz
23
23
23
22
20
20
20
20
-22
-25
-28
20MHz
20MHz
20MHz
HT20/40
HT20/40
HT20/40
HT20/40
HT20/40
HT20/40
HT20/40
HT20/40
22
21
20
23
23
23
23
22
22
21
20
18
17
17
20
20
19
19
19
18
17
20
Radios at Low Power
The table below describes the maximum transmit power available to each radio (at varying data rates) when the access point is receiving low DC power in either af or at mode.
CAUTION Exceeding the limits listed below can cause damage to the access point or cause the radio to operate unpredictably. Thus, these values should be viewed as the safe limit for the access point’s radio and should not be exceeded in either af or at mode.
System Configuration 4-9
Rates (Mbps)
1
2
5.5
11
6
9
12
18
24
36
48
54
MCS Indices
MCS0/MCS8
MCS1/MCS9
MCS2/MCS10
MCS3/MCS11
MCS4/MCS12
MCS5/MCS13
MCS6/MCS14
MCS7/MCS15
EVM Bandwidth
-9 20MHz
-9
-9
-9
-5
-8
-10
-13
-16
-19
-22
-25
-5
-10
-13
-16
-19
-22
-25
-28
20MHz
20MHz
20MHz
20MHz
20MHz
20MHz
20MHz
20MHz
20MHz
20MHz
20MHz
HT20/40
HT20/40
HT20/40
HT20/40
HT20/40
HT20/40
HT20/40
HT20/40
Maximum
Transmit Power
2.4 GHz
Maximum
Transmit Power
5 GH
20 NA
20 NA
20 NA
20
22
22
22
22
21
20
18
17
22
22
21
21
20
19
18
17
NA
19
19
19
18
18
17
15
13
19
19
18
17
17
16
15
15
NOTE The access point could allow the operation of only one radio depending on the POE power level provided. When only one radio is operational, it is configured as either a WIPS or WLAN radio. Consequently, if the access point transitions from dual to single radio operation, a WIPS radio might not be available.
4-10 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
To define the access point’s power setting:
1.
Select System Configuration -> Power Settings from the menu tree.
a
2.
Refer to the following to assess the access point’s current power state. Once known, determine how available power resources are applied to the access point’s radios.
NOTE Within the Power Settings field, an installation professional selects a power mode as auto or 3af.
Contact Motorola Solutions Support if unsure of your access point’s optimal power management settings.
System Configuration 4-11
Power Mode
Power Status
When the access point is powered on for the first time, the system determines the power budget available to the access point. Using the Auto setting (default setting), the access point automatically determines the best power configuration based on the available power budget.
If 3af is selected, the AP assumes 12.95 watts are available. If the mode is changed, the access point requires a reset to implement the change.
Refer to the (read-only) power status field to review the power available to the AP. For an AP-7131N-FGR model, the options are:
3at, 3af, or Full Power.
3.
Click Apply to save any changes to the Power Settings screen. Navigating away from the screen without clicking the Apply button results in all changes to the screen being lost.
4.
Click Undo Changes (if necessary) to undo any changes made. Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the Power Settings screen to the last saved configuration.
5.
Click Logout to securely exit the access point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
4.3 Adaptive AP Setup
An access point needs settings defined to discover (and adopt) an available switch and establish a connection and data tunnel. It’s through this switch adoption that the access point receives its
adaptive AP (AAP) configuration. The access point has a screen to define the mechanisms used to adopt a switch and route AAP configuration information
.
NOTE For an AAP overview and a theoretical discussion of how an access point discovers a switch to creates a secure data tunnel for adaptive AP
operation, see Adaptive AP on page 10-1 .
NOTE AAP functionality is only supported on a Motorola Solutions model switch
(running firmware version 4.0) or higher and a Motorola Solutions
RFS7000 model switch (running firmware version 4.0 or higher).
NOTE The Adaptive AP Setup screen does not display the AAP’s adoption status or adopted switch. This information is available using the access point’s
CLI. To review AAP adoption status and adopted switch information, see
AP7131N>admin(system.aap-setup)>show on page 8-168 .
4-12 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
To configure the access point’s switch discovery method and connection medium:
1.
Select System Configuration -> Adaptive AP Setup from the menu tree.
2.
Define the following to prioritize a switch connection scheme and AP interface used to adopt to the switch.
Control Port Define the port used by the switch FQDN to transmit and receive with the AAP. The default control port is 24576.
Switch FQDN
PSK
Add a complete switch fully qualified domain name (FQDN) to add a switch to the 12 available switch IP addresses available for connection. The access point resolves the name to one or more IP addresses if a DNS IP address is present. This method is used when the access point fails to obtain an IP address using DHCP.
Before the access point sends a packet requesting its mode and configuration, the switch and the access point require a secure link using a pre-shared key.
System Configuration 4-13
Auto Discovery Enable When the Auto Discovery Enable checkbox is selected, the access point begins the switch discovery (adoption) process using
DHCP first, then a user provided domain name, lastly using static IP addresses. This setting is disabled by default. When disabled, the
AP functions as a standalone access point without trying to adopt a switch. Consequently, the access point will not be able to obtain an AAP configuration. For an overview of AAP and instructions on how to setup the AP and switch, see
.
Enable AP-Switch
Tunnel
Keep-alive Period
This setting is required to enable an IPSec VPN from the AAP to the
Wireless Switch.
The Keepalive interval defines a period (in seconds) the AAP uses to terminate its connection to the switch if no data is received.
Current Switch
AP adoption State
Displays the IP address of the connected switch. This is the switch from which the access point receives its adaptive configuration.
Displays whether the access point has been adopted by the switch
(whose IP address is listed in the Current Switch parameter). The access point cannot receive its adaptive configuration without association. A standalone access point can be adopted by a wireless switch. A standalone AP also supports operations without being adopted by a switch.
3.
Refer to the 12 available Switch IP Addresses to review the addresses the access point uses to adopt with a switch.
The access point contacts each switch on the list (from top to bottom) until a viable switch adoption is made. The access point first populates the list with the IP addresses received from its DHCP resource. If DHCP is not able to obtain IP addresses, the access point attempts to resolve the switch's Domain Name if provided within the Switch FQDN parameter.
However, if the access point receives one or more IP addresses from the DHCP server, it will not solicit an IP address from a user provided domain name. Lastly, provide static (manually provided) IP addresses to the list as long as there is room. The access point will defer to these addresses if DHCP and a provided domain address fail to secure a switch adoption.
4.
Click Apply to save any changes to the Adaptive AP Setup screen. Navigating away from the screen without clicking the Apply button results in all changes to the screen being lost.
5.
Click Undo Changes (if necessary) to undo any changes made. Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the Adaptive AP Setup screen to the last saved configuration.
4-14 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
6.
Click Logout to securely exit the access point Access Point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
4.4 Configuring Data Access
Use the Access screen to allow/deny management access to the access point from different subnets
(LAN1, LAN2 or WAN) using different protocols such as HTTPS, SSH2 or SNMP. The access options are either enabled or disabled. It is not meant to function as an ACL in routers or other firewalls, where you can specify and customize specific IPs to access specific interfaces.
Use the Access screen checkboxes to enable or disable LAN1, LAN2 and/or WAN access using the protocols and ports listed. If access is disabled, this effectively locks out the administrator from configuring the access point using that interface. To avoid jeopardizing the network data managed by the access point, Motorola Solutions recommends enabling only those interfaces used in the routine
(daily) management of the network, and disabling all other interfaces until they are required.
The access point displays a default login message which acts as a Access Banner. The Access screen allows customers to create a login message with customer generated text. The login message
(banner text) is displayed when the user is logging into the access point.
To configure access for the access point:
1.
Select System Configuration -> Access from the menu tree.
System Configuration 4-15
2.
Use the access point Access field checkboxes to enable/disable the following on the access point’s LAN1, LAN2 or WAN interfaces:
Applet HTTPS (port
443)
CLI SSH2 (port 22)
SNMP (port 161)
Select the LAN1, LAN2 and/or WAN checkboxes to enable access to the access point configuration applet using a Secure Sockets
Layer (SSL) for encrypted HTTP sessions.
Select the LAN1, LAN2 and/or WAN checkboxes to enable access to the access point CLI using the SSH (Secure Shell) protocol.
Select the LAN1, LAN2 and/or WAN checkboxes to enable access to the access point configuration settings from an SNMP-capable client.
3.
Refer to the Applet Timeout field to set an HTTPS timeout interval.
HTTPS Timeout Disables access to the access point if no data activity is detected over Applet HTTPS (port 443) after the user defined interval. The default value is 3 minutes.
4-16 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
4.
Configure the Secure Shell field to set timeout values to reduce network inactivity.
Authentication
Timeout
SSH Inactivity
Timeout
Defines the maximum time (between 30 - 120 seconds) allowed for
SSH authentication to occur before executing a timeout. The minimum permissible value is 30 seconds.
Terminates the SSH session to the access point if no data activity is detected over the session after the user defined interval. The default value is 2 minutes.
5.
Use the Admin Authentication buttons to specify the authentication server connection method. These settings are used if you wish to authenticate management users against a local database or remote RADIUS database. Note that when RADIUS is selected, the AP will fallback to local authentication if connection to RADIUS server is lost. It is therefore recommended to configure atleast one local account for emergency use. The default ‘admin’ can server this purpose..
Local
Radius
The access point verifies the authentication connection.
Designates that a RADIUS server is used in the authentication credential verification. If using this option, the connected PC is required to have its RADIUS credentials verified with an external
RADIUS server.Additionally, the Active Directory should have a valid user configured and the Radius Server should have a PAP based Remote Access Policy for Management User Authentication to work.
Remote Login Failure
Threshold
Defines the maximum number of attempts (between 1 - 3) allowed for remote login to occur.
Console Timeout Defines the console timeout value in seconds. This is the interval after which the console times out and the user has to login again.
6.
Use the RADIUS Server if a RADIUS server has been selected as the authentication server.
Enter the required network address information.
Radius Server IP Specify the numerical (non DNS name) IP address of the Remote
Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) Server. RADIUS is a client/server protocol and software enabling remote-access servers to communicate with a server used to authenticate users and authorize access to the requested system or service.
System Configuration 4-17
Port
Shared Secret
Specify the port on which the server is listening. The RADIUS server typically listens on ports 1812 (default port).
Define a shared secret for authentication on the server. The shared secret is required to be the same as the shared secret defined on the RADIUS server. Use shared secrets to verify RADIUS messages
(with the exception of the Access-Request message) sent by a
Radius-enabled device configured with the same shared secret.
Apply the qualifications of a well-chosen password to the generation of a shared secret. Generate a random, case-sensitive string using letters and numbers. The default is motorola.
7.
Update the Administrator Access field to change the administrative password used to access the configuration settings.
Change Admin
Password
Click the Change Admin Password button to display a screen for updating the AP administrator password. Enter and confirm a new administrator password as required.
8.
Refer to the Login Message field to optionally define a message displayed to the customer as they login into the access point.
Message Settings Click the Message Settings button to display a screen used to create a banner text message.
The user can enter a (1024 characters maximum and 10 characters minimum) message describing any usage caveat required (such as the authorization disclaimer displayed on the following page).
Thus, the login message can serve an important function by discouraging unauthorized users from illegally managing the access point. As your message is entered, the character usage counter is updated to allow you to visualize how close you are coming to the maximum allowed number of characters. Click the
Clear button at any time to remove the contents of the message and begin a new one. Once you have finished creating your message, click the OK button to return to the Access screen.
4-18 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
9.
Click Apply to save any changes to the access point Access screen. Navigating away from the screen without clicking the Apply button results in all changes to the screen being lost.
10. Click Undo Changes (if necessary) to undo any changes made. Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the access point Access screen to the last saved configuration.
11. Click Logout to securely exit the access point Access Point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
4.5 Managing Certificate Authority (CA) Certificates
Certificate management includes the following sections:
•
•
4.5.1 Importing a CA Certificate
A certificate authority (CA) is a network authority that issues and manages security credentials and public keys for message encryption. The CA signs all digital certificates that it issues with its own private key. The corresponding public key is contained within the certificate and is called a CA
System Configuration 4-19 certificate. A browser must contain this CA certificate in its Trusted Root Library so it can trust certificates “signed” by the CA's private key.
Depending on the public key infrastructure, the digital certificate includes the owner's public key, the certificate expiration date, the owner's name and other public key owner information.
.
CAUTION Loaded and signed CA certificates will be lost when changing the access point’s firmware version using either the GUI or CLI. After a certificate has been successfully loaded, export it to a secure location to ensure its availability after a firmware update.
If restoring the access point’s factory default firmware, you must export the certificate file BEFORE restoring the access point’s factory default configuration. Import the file back after the updated firmware is installed. For information on using the access point CLI to import and export the access point’s configuration, see
AP7131N>admin(system.cmgr)> impcert on page 8-187
and
AP7131N>admin(system.cmgr)> expcert on page 8-186
.
Refer to your network administrator to obtain a CA certificate to import into the access point.
NOTE Verify the access point device time is synchronized with an NTP server before importing a certificate to avoid issues with conflicting date/time
stamps. For more information, see Configuring Network Time Protocol
To import a CA certificate:
1.
Select System Configuration -> Certificate Mgmt -> CA Certificates from the menu tree.
4-20 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
2.
Copy the content of the CA Certificate message (using a text editor such as Notepad) and click on Paste from Clipboard . Note that this feature will work with Internet Explorer browser only.
The content of the certificate displays in the Import a root CA Certificate field.
3.
Click the Import root CA Certificate button to import it into the CA Certificate list.
4.
Once in the list, select the certificate ID within the View Imported root CA Certificates field to view the certificate issuer name, subject, and certificate expiration data.
5.
To delete a certificate, select the ID from the drop-down menu and click the Del button.
4.5.2 Creating Self Certificates
The access point requires two kinds of certificates CA certificates and self certificates. Self certificates are certificate requests you create, send to a Certificate Authority (CA) to be signed, then import the signed certificate into the management system.
System Configuration 4-21
CAUTION Self certificates can only be generated using the access point GUI and
CLI interfaces. No functionality exists for creating a self-certificate using the access point’s SNMP configuration option.
To create a self certificate:
1.
Select System Configuration -> Certificate Mgmt -> Self Certificates from the access point menu tree.
2.
Click on the Add button to create the certificate request.
The Certificate Request screen displays.
3.
Complete the request form with the pertinent information. Only 4 values are required, the others optional.
4-22 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Key ID
Subject
Signature Algorithm
Key Length
Enter a logical name for the certificate to help distinguish between certificates. The name can be up to 7 characters in length.
The required Subject value contains important information about the certificate. Contact the CA signing the certificate to determine the content of the Subject parameter.
• Use the drop-down menu to select the signature algorithm used for the certificate. The option is:
• SHA256-RSA - Secure Hash Algorithm 256 in combination with RSA encryption.
Defines the length of the key. The key size is always fixed at 2048 bytes.
4.
When the form is completed, click the Generate button.
The Certificate Request screen disappears and the ID of the generated certificate request displays in the drop-down list of certificates within the Self Certificates screen.
5.
Click the Generate Request button.
System Configuration 4-23
The generated certificate request displays in Self Certificates screen text box.
6.
Click the Copy to Clipboard button (Note that this feature will work with Internet Explorer browser version 6 and above only).
The content of certificate request is copied to the clipboard.
Create an e-mail to your CA, paste the content of the request into the body of the message and send it to the CA.
The CA signs the certificate and will send it back. Once received, copy the content from the e-mail into the clipboard.
7.
Click the Paste from clipboard button (Note that this feature will work with Internet
Explorer browser version 6 and above only).
The content of the e-mail displays in the window.
Click the Load Certificate button to import the certificate. The certificate ID displays in the
Signed list.
4-24 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
NOTE If the access point is restarted after a certificate request has been generated but before the signed certificate is imported, the import will not execute properly. Do not restart the access point during this process.
4.5.3 Creating a Certificate for Onboard RADIUS Authentication
The access point can use its on-board RADIUS Server loaded with certificates to authenticate MUs.
AP can generate certificate request. In addition, a Windows 2008 Server is used to sign the certificate before downloading it back to the access point’s on-board RADIUS server and loading the certificate for use with the access point.
Both a CA and Self certificate are required for Onboard RADIUS Authentication. For information on
CA Certificates, see Importing a CA Certificate on page 4-18
.
Ensure the certificate is in a Base 64
Encoded format or risk loading an invalid certificate.
CAUTION If using the RADIUS time-based authentication feature to authenticate access point user permissions, ensure the access point’s time is synchronized with the CA server used to generate certificate requests.
CAUTION Self certificates can only be generated using the access point GUI and
CLI interfaces. No functionality exists for creating a self-certificate using the access point’s SNMP configuration option.
To create a self certificate for on-board RADIUS authentication:
1.
Select System Configuration -> Certificate Mgmt -> Self Certificates from the access point menu tree.
2.
Click on the Add button to create the certificate request.
The Certificate Request screen displays.
3.
Complete the request form with the pertinent information.
Key ID (required) Enter a logical name for the certificate to help distinguish between certificates. The name can be up to 7 characters in length.
System Configuration 4-25
Subject (required)
Department
The required Subject value contains important information about the certificate. Contact the CA signing the certificate to determine the content of the Subject parameter.
Optionally enter a value for your organizations’s department name if needing to differentiate the certificate from similar certificates used in other departments within your organization.
Organization
City
State
Postal Code
Optionally enter the name of your organization for supporting information for the certificate request.
Optionally enter the name of the City where the access point (using the certificate) resides.
Optionally enter the name of the State where the access point
(using the certificate) resides.
Optionally enter the name of the Postal (Zip) Code where the access point (using the certificate) resides.
Optionally enter the access point’s Country Code.
Country Code
Domain Name
IP Address
Enter a organizational e-mail address (avoid using a personal address if possible) to associate the request with the proper requesting organization.
Ensure the Domain name is the name of the CA Server. This value must be set correctly to ensure the certificate is properly generated.
Enter the IP address of this access point (as you are using the access point’s onbard Radius server).
Signature Algorithm Use the drop-down menu to select the signature algorithm used for the certificate. Options include:SHA256-RSA - Secure Hash
Algorithm 256 in combination with RSA encryption.
Key Length Defines the length of the key. The key size is always fixed at 2048 bytes.
4.
Complete as many of the optional values within the Certificate Request screen as possible.
5.
When the form is completed, click the Generate button from within the Certificate Request screen.
4-26 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
The Certificate Request screen disappears and the ID of the generated certificate request displays in the drop-down list of certificates within the Self Certificates screen.
NOTE A Warning screen may display at this phase stating key information could be lost if you proceed with the certificate request. Click the OK button to continue, as the certificate has not been signed yet.
6.
Click the Generate Request button from within the Self Certificates screen. The certificate content displays within the Self Certificate screen.
7.
Click the Copy to clipboard button (Note that this feature will work with Internet Explorer browser version 6 and above only). Save the certificate content to a secure location.
8.
Connect to the Windows 2008 server used to sign the certificate.
9.
Select the Request a certificate option. Click Next to continue.
10. Select the Advanced request checkbox from within the Choose Request Type screen and click Next to continue.
11. From within the Advanced Certificate Requests screen, select the Submit a certificate request using a base 64 encoded PKCS #10 file or a renewal request using a base64 encoded PKCS file option. Click Next to continue.
12. Paste the content of certificate in the Saved Request field (within the Submit a Saved
Request screen).
NOTE An administrator must make sure the Web Server option is available as a selectable option for those without administrative privileges.
If you do not have administrative privileges, ensure the Web Server option has been selected from the Certificate Template drop-down menu. Click Submit.
13. Select the Base 64 encoded checkbox option from within the Certificate Issued screen and select the Download CA Certificate link.
A File Download screen displays prompting the user to select the download location for the certificate.
14. Click the Save button and save the certificate to a secure location.
15. Load the certificates on the access point
.
System Configuration 4-27
CAUTION Ensure the CA Certificate is loaded before the Self Certificate, or risk an invalid certificate load.
16. Open the certificate file and copy its contents into the CA Certificates screen by clicking the
Paste from Clipboard button. (Note that this feature will work with Internet Explorer browser version 6 and above only.)
The certificate is now ready to be loaded into the access point’s flash memory.
17. Click the Import root CA Certificate button from within the CA Certificates screen.
18. Verify the contents of the certificate file display correctly within the CA Certificates screen.
19. Open the certificate file and copy its contents into the Self Certificates screen by clicking the Paste from Clipboard button. (Note that this feature will work with Internet Explorer browser version 6 and above only.)
20. Click the Load Certificate button.
21. Verify the contents of the certificate file display correctly within the Self Certificates screen.
The certificate for the onboard Radius authentication of MUs has now been generated and loaded into the access point’s flash memory.
4.6 Configuring SNMP Settings
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) facilitates the exchange of management information between network devices. SNMP uses Management Information Bases (MIBs) to manage the device configuration and monitor Internet devices in potentially remote locations. MIB information accessed via SNMP is defined by a set of managed objects called object identifiers (OIDs). An object identifier
(OID) is used to uniquely identify each object variable of a MIB. The MIB files are available at https://portal.motorolasolutions.com/Support/US-EN.
In the given portal, the user should serach for
“AP7131N-GR MIBS 4.0.4.0”. For more information refer Appendix C, Customer Support
:
NOTE The above two MIB files have some similar information, but both MIBs will return the same values.
NOTE MIB objects under ‘apAap’ in Symbol-AP_MIB is applicable only for
AP7131N in Adaptive mode and is not applicable in Standalone mode.
4-28 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Use Symbol-AP_MIB to configure the below features
LAN Configuration
VLAN Configuration apLan apLanVlan
802.1x Port Authentication apLan802dt1xAuth
Ethernet Type Filter Configuration apLanTypeFilter
Wireless Configuration
Security Configuration
MU ACL Configuration
QOS Configuration apWlan
apWlanSecPolicyTable apWlanMuAclPolicyTable apWlanQosPolicyTable
Radio Configuration
Bandwidth Management
SNMP Trap Selection
SNMP RF Trap Thresholds
MU Authentication Stats apRadio apWlanRateLimit apTrapCtrl apTrapCtrlEnableTable apnStats
Use Symbol-CC-WS2000-MIB-2.0 to configure the below features
Subnet Configuration
DHCP Server Configuration
WAN IP Configuration
PPP Over Ethernet
NAT Address Mapping
VPN Tunnel Configuration
VPN Tunnel status
Content Filtering
Rogue AP Detection ccSubnet ccSubnetDhcpServer ccWanIpAddr ccWanPppoe ccWanNat ccWanVpn ccWanVpnTunnelStatus ccWanContentBlock ccRap
System Configuration 4-29
Firewall Configuration
Router Configuration
System Settings
NTP Server Configuration
Logging Configuration
Firmware Update
Wireless Stats
Radio Stats
MU Stats
Config Import/Export ccWanFirewall ccRouter ccAdmin ccNtp ccLogging ccLoadFw ccWlan ccPortal ccMuStats ccLoadCfg
Few acronyms used in the MIB files:
Portal
MIB
LAN
WAN
POE
WLAN
AP
Switch
MU
Radio of an AP
Management Information Base
Local Area Network
Wide Area Network
Power Over Ethernet
Wireless LAN
Access Point
RFS7000-GR
Mobile Unit
SNMP allows a network administrator to manage network performance, find and solve network problems, and plan for network growth. The access point supports SNMP management functions for gathering information from its network components, communicating that information to specified users and configuring the access point. All the fields available within the access point are also configurable within the MIB.
The access point SNMP agent functions as a command responder and is a multilingual agent responding to SNMP v3 managers (command generators). The factory default configuration maintains
SNMP v3 support of the community names, hence providing backward compatibility.
4-30 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
SNMP v3 user definitions work independently, and both use the Access Control List (ACL) of the
SNMP Access Control sub-screen.
Use the SNMP Access screen to define SNMP community definitions and SNMP v3 user definitions. SNMP version 3 (v3) further enhances protocol features, providing much improved security. SNMP v3 encrypts transmissions and provides authentication for users generating requests.
To configure SNMP v3 user definitions for the access point:
1.
Select System Configuration - > SNMP Access from the access point menu tree.
.
2.
Configure the SNMP v3 User Definitions field (if SNMP v3 is used) to add and configure
SNMP v3 user definitions.
SNMP v3 user definitions allow read-only or read/write access to management information as appropriate.
Add
Delete
Click Add to create a new entry for an SNMP v3 user.
Select Delete to remove an entry for an SNMP v3 user.
System Configuration 4-31
Username
Security Level
OID
Passwords
Access
Specify a username by typing an alphanumeric string of up to 31 characters.
Use the Security Level area to specify a security level of AuthPriv
(authorization with privacy).
The AuthPriv setting requires login authorization and uses the
Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) protocol.
Use the OID (Object Identifier) area to specify a setting of All or enter a Custom OID. Select All to assign the user access to all OIDs in the MIB. The OID field uses numbers expressed in dot notation.
Select Passwords to display the Password Settings screen for specifying authentication and password settings for an SNMP v3 user. The maximum password length is 11 characters. Use the
Authentication Algorithm drop-down menu to specify SHA1 as the authentication algorithm. Use the Privacy Algorithm drop-down menu to define an algorithm of AES-128bit .
When entering the same username on the SNMP Traps and
SNMP Access screens, the password entered on the SNMP Traps page overwrites the password entered on the SNMP Access page.
To avoid this problem, enter the same password on both pages.
Use the Access pull-down list to specify read-only (R) access or
read/write (RW) access for a user. Read-only access permits a user to retrieve access point information, while read/write access allows a user to modify access point settings.
3.
Specify the users who can read and optionally modify the SNMP-capable client.
SNMP Access Control Click the SNMP Access Control button to display the SNMP
Access Control screen for specifying which users can read
SNMP-generated information and potentially modify related settings from an SNMP-capable client.
The SNMP Access Control screen's Access Control List (ACL) uses
Internet Protocol (IP) addresses to restrict access to the AP’s SNMP interface.
For detailed instructions of configuring SNMP user access and modification privileges, see
Configuring SNMP Access Control on page 4-33
.
4.
If configuring SNMP v3 user definitions, set the SNMP v3 engine ID.
4-32 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
SNMP v3 Engine ID The access point SNMP v3 Engine ID field lists the unique SNMP v3 Engine ID for the access point. This ID is used in SNMP v3 as the source for a trap, response or report. It is also used as the destination ID when sending get, getnext, getbulk, set or inform commands.
5.
Click Apply to save any changes to the SNMP Access screen. Navigating away from the screen without clicking the Apply button results in all changes to the screen being lost.
6.
Click Undo Changes (if necessary) to undo any changes made. Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the SNMP Access screen to the last saved configuration.
7.
Click Logout to securely exit the access point Access Point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
For additional SNMP configuration information, see:
•
Configuring SNMP Access Control
•
•
Configuring Specific SNMP Traps
•
Configuring SNMP RF Trap Thresholds
System Configuration 4-33
4.6.1 Configuring SNMP Access Control
Use the SNMP Access Control screen (as launched from the SNMP Access screen) to specify which users can read SNMP generated information and, if capable, modify related settings from an
SNMP-capable client.
Use the SNMP Access Control screen's Access Control List (ACL) to limit, by Internet Protocol (IP) address, who can access the access point SNMP interface.
NOTE The ACL applies to both SNMP v3 user definitions and SNMP community definitions on the access point SNMP Access screen.
To configure SNMP user access control for the access point:
1.
Select System Configuration - > SNMP Access from the access point menu tree. Click on the SNMP Access Control button from within the SNMP Access screen.
2.
Configure the SNMP Access Control screen to add the IP addresses of those users receiving
SNMP access.
4-34 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Access Control List Enter Start IP and End IP addresses (numerical addresses only, no
DNS names supported) to specify a range of user that can access the access point SNMP interface. An SNMP-capable client can be set up whereby only the administrator (for example) can use a read/ write community definition.
Use just the Starting IP Address column to specify a SNMP user.
Use both the Starting IP Address and Ending IP Address columns to specify a range of addresses for SNMP users.
To add a single IP address to the ACL, enter the same IP address in the Start IP and End IP fields.
Leave the ACL blank to allow access to the SNMP interface from the IP addresses of all authorized users.
Add
Edit
Delete
Click
Click
Add
Edit to create a new ACL entry. to revise an existing ACL entry.
OK
Click Delete to remove a selected ACL entry for one or more SNMP users.
Click Ok to return to the SNMP Access screen. Click Apply within the SNMP Access screen to save any changes made on the SNMP
Access Control screen.
Cancel Click Cancel to undo any changes made on the SNMP Access
Control screen. This reverts all settings for this screen to the last saved configuration.
4.6.2 Enabling SNMP Traps
SNMP provides the ability to send traps to notify the administrator that trap conditions are met. Traps are network packets containing data relating to network devices, or SNMP agents, that send the traps. SNMP management applications can receive and interpret these packets, and optionally can perform responsive actions. SNMP trap generation is programmable on a trap-by-trap basis.
Use the SNMP Traps Configuration screen to enable traps and to configure appropriate settings for reporting this information. Trap configuration depends on the network machine that receives the generated traps. SNMPd v3 trap configurations function independently. In a mixed SNMP environment, generated traps can be sent using configurations for both SNMP v3.
To configure SNMP traps on the access point:
System Configuration 4-35
1.
Select System Configuration - > SNMP Access - > SNMP Trap Configuration from the access point menu tree.
CAUTION Ensure IPSec has been properly configured to protect communications with the external SNMP server. Changes will not be applied otherwise.
2.
Configure the SNMP v3 Trap Configuration field (if SNMP v3 Traps are used) to modify the following:
Add
Delete
Destination IP
Port
Click Add to create a new SNMP v3 Trap Configuration entry.
Select Delete to remove an entry for an SNMP v3 user.
Specify a numerical (non DNS name) destination IP address for receiving the traps sent by the access point SNMP agent.
Specify a destination User Datagram Protocol (UDP) port for receiving traps.
4-36 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Username
Security Level
Passwords
Enter a username specific to the SNMP-capable client receiving the traps.
Use the Security Level drop-down menu to specify security level as AuthPriv (authorization with privacy).
The “AuthPriv” setting requires login authorization and uses the
Advanced Encryption Standard (AES).
Select Passwords to display the Password Settings screen for specifying authentication and password settings for an SNMP v3 user. The maximum password length is 11 characters. Use the
Authentication Algorithm drop-down menu to specify SHA1 as the authentication algorithm. Use the Privacy Algorithm drop-down menu to define an algorithm of AES-128bit .
If entering the same username on the SNMP Traps and SNMP
Access screens, the password entered on the SNMP Traps page overwrites the password entered on the SNMP Access page. To avoid this problem, enter the same password on both pages.
3.
Click Apply to save any changes to the SNMP Trap Configuration screen. Navigating away from the screen without clicking the Apply button results in all changes being lost.
4.
Click Undo Changes (if necessary) to undo any changes made. Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on SNMP Trap Configuration screen to the last saved configuration.
5.
Click Logout to securely exit the access point Access Point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
4.6.3 Configuring Specific SNMP Traps
Use the SNMP Traps screen to enable specific traps on the access point. Motorola Solutions recommends defining traps to capture unauthorized devices operating within the access point coverage area. Trap configuration depends on the network machine that receives the generated traps.
SNMP v3 trap configurations function independently. In a mixed SNMP environment, traps can be sent using configurations for both SNMP v3. To configure specific SNMP traps on the access point:
1.
Select System Configuration - > SNMP Access - > SNMP Traps from the menu tree.
CAUTION Ensure IPSec has been properly configured to protect communications with the external SNMP server. Changes will not be applied otherwise.
System Configuration 4-37
2.
Configure the MU Traps field to generate traps for MU associations, MU association denials and MU authentication denials. When a trap is enabled, a trap is sent every 10 seconds until the condition no longer exists.
MU associated
MU unassociated
MU denied association
MU denied authentication
Generates a trap when an MU becomes associated with one of the access point’s WLANs.
Generates a trap when an MU becomes unassociated with (or gets dropped from) one of the access point’s WLANs.
Generates a trap when an MU is denied association to a access point WLAN. Can be caused when the maximum number of MUs for a WLAN is exceeded or when an MU violates the access point’s
Access Control List (ACL).
Generates a trap when an MU is denied authentication on one of the AP’s WLANs. Can be caused by the MU being set for the wrong authentication type for the WLAN or by an incorrect key or password.
4-38 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
3.
Configure the SNMP Traps field to generate traps when SNMP capable MUs are denied authentication privileges or are subject of an ACL violation. When a trap is enabled, a trap is sent every 5 seconds until the condition no longer exists.
SNMP authentication failures
Generates a trap when an SNMP-capable client is denied access to the access point’s SNMP management functions or data. This can result from an incorrect login, or missing/incorrect user credentials.
SNMP ACL violation Generates a trap when an SNMP client cannot access SNMP management functions or data due to an Access Control List (ACL) violation. This can result from a missing/incorrect IP address entered within the SNMP Access Control screen.
4.
Configure the Network Traps field to generate traps when the access point’s link status changes or when the AP’s firewall detects a DOS attack.
Physical port status change
DynDNS Update
Denial of service
(DOS) attempts
Send trap every
Generates a trap whenever the status changes on the access point.
The physical port status changes when a link is lost between the access point and a connected device.
Generates a trap whenever domain name information is updated as a result of the IP address associated with that domain being modified.
Generates a trap whenever a Denial of Service (DOS) attack is detected by the access point firewall. A new trap is sent at the specified interval until the attack has stopped.
Defines the interval in seconds the access point uses to generate a trap until the Denial of Service attack is stopped. Default is 10 seconds.
5.
Configure the System Traps field to generate traps when the access point re-initializes during transmission, saves its configuration file. When a trap is enabled, a trap is sent every
5 seconds until the condition no longer exists.
System Configuration 4-39
System Cold Start Generates a trap when the access point re-initializes while transmitting, possibly altering the SNMP agent's configuration or protocol entity implementation.
Configuration
Changes
Generates a trap whenever changes to the access point’s configuration file are saved.
Rogue AP Detection Generates a trap if a Rogue AP is detected by the access point.
AP Radar Detection Generates a trap if an AP is detected using a form of radar detection.
WPA Counter
Measure
Generates a trap if an attack is detected against the WPA Key
Exchange Mechanism.
MU Hotspot Status Generates a trap when a change to the status of MU hotspot member is detected.
VLAN
LAN Monitor
Generates a trap when a change to a VLAN state is detected.
Generates a trap when a change to the LAN monitoring state is detected.
6.
Click Enable All button to enable all traps.
7.
Click Disable All button to disable all traps.
8.
Click Apply to save any changes to the SNMP Traps screen. Navigating away from the screen without clicking the Apply button results in all changes to the screen being lost.
9.
Click Undo Changes (if necessary) to undo any changes made. Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on SNMP Traps screen to the last saved configuration.
10. Click Logout to securely exit the access point Access Point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
4.6.4 Configuring SNMP RF Trap Thresholds
Use the SNMP RF Trap Threshold screen as a means to track RF activity and the access point’s radio and associated MU performance. SNMP RF Traps are sent when RF traffic exceeds defined limits set in the RF Trap Thresholds field of the SNMP RF Traps screen. Thresholds are displayed for the access point, WLAN, selected radio and the associated MU.
To configure specific SNMP RF Traps on the access point:
1.
Select System Configuration - > SNMP Access - > SNMP RF Trap Thresholds from the menu tree.
4-40 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
CAUTION Ensure IPSec has been properly configured to protect communications with the external SNMP server. Changes will not be applied otherwise.
2.
Configure the RF Trap Thresholds field to define device threshold values for SNMP traps.
NOTE Average Bit Speed,% of Non-Unicast, Average Signal, Average Retries,%
Dropped and% Undecryptable are not access point statistics.
Pkts/s
Throughput
Enter a maximum threshold for the total throughput in Pps (Packets per second).
Set a maximum threshold for the total throughput in Mbps
(Megabits per second).
Average Bit Speed Enter a minimum threshold for the average bit speed in Mbps
(Megabits per second).
System Configuration 4-41
Average Signal
Average Retries
% Dropped
% Undecryptable
Associated MUs
Enter a minimum threshold for the average signal strength in dBm for each device.
Set a maximum threshold for the average number of retries for each device.
Enter a maximum threshold for the total percentage of packets dropped for each device. Dropped packets can be caused by poor
RF signal or interference on the channel.
Define a maximum threshold for the total percentage of packets undecryptable for each device. Undecryptable packets can be the result of corrupt packets, bad CRC checks or incomplete packets.
Set a maximum threshold for the total number of MUs associated with each device.
3.
Configure the Minimum Packets field to define a minimum packet throughput value for trap generation.
Minimum number of packets required for a trap to fire
Enter the minimum number of packets that must pass through the device before an SNMP rate trap is sent. Motorola Solutions recommends using the default setting of 1000 as a minimum setting for the field.
4.
Click Apply to save any changes to the SNMP RF Traps screen. Navigating away from the screen without clicking the Apply button results in all changes to the screen being lost.
5.
Click Undo Changes (if necessary) to undo any changes made. Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on SNMP RF Traps screen to the last saved configuration.
6.
Click Logout to securely exit the access point Access Point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
4.7 Configuring Network Time Protocol (NTP)
Network Time Protocol (NTP) manages time and/or network clock synchronization in the access pointmanaged network environment. NTP is a client/server implementation. The access point (an NTP client) periodically synchronizes its clock with a master clock (an NTP server). For example, the access point resets its clock to 07:04:59 upon reading a time of 07:04:59 from its designated NTP server.
4-42 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Time synchronization is recommended for the access point’s network operations. Use the Date and
Time Settings screen to enable NTP and specify the IP addresses and ports of available NTP servers.
NOTE The current time is not set accurately when initially connecting to the access point. Until a server is defined to provide the access point the correct time, or the correct time is manually set, the access point displays
1970-01-01 00:00:00 as the default time.
CAUTION If using the RADIUS time-based authentication feature to authenticate access point user permissions, ensure UTC has been selected from the Date and Time Settings screen’s Time Zone field. If
UTC is not selected, time based authentication will not work properly.
For information on configuring RADIUS time-based authentication,
see Defining User Access Permissions by Group on page 6-67 .
To manage clock synchronization on the access point:
1.
Select System Configuration - > Date/Time from the access point menu tree.
CAUTION Ensure IPSec has been properly configured to protect communications with the external NTP server. Changes will not be applied otherwise.
System Configuration 4-43
2.
From within the Current Time field, click the Refresh button to update the time since the screen was displayed by the user.
The Current Time field displays the current time based on the access point system clock. If
NTP is disabled or if there are no servers available, the system time displays the access point uptime starting at 1970-01-01 00:00:00, with the time and date advancing.
3.
Select the Set Date/Time button to display the Manual Date/Time Setting screen.
This screen enables the user to manually enter the access point’s system time using a
Year-Month-Day HH:MM:SS format.
This option is disabled when the Enable NTP checkbox has been selected, and therefore should be viewed as a second means to define the access point system time.
4.
If using the Manual Date/Time Setting screen to define the access point’s system time, refer to the Time Zone field to select the time used to use as complimentary information to the information entered within the Manual Date/Time Setting screen.
4-44 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
CAUTION If using the RADIUS time-based authentication feature to authenticate access point user permissions, ensure UTC has been selected from the Time Zone field. If UTC is not selected, time based authentication will not work properly. For information on configuring
RADIUS time-based authentication, see Defining User Access
Permissions by Group on page 6-67 .
5.
If using an NTP server to supply system time to the access point, configure the NTP Server
Configuration field to define the server network address information required to acquire the access point network time.
Enable NTP on access point
Select the Enable NTP on access point checkbox to allow a connection between the access point and one or more specified
NTP servers. A preferred, first alternate and second alternate NTP server cannot be defined unless this checkbox is selected.
Preferred Time Server Specify the numerical (non DNS name) IP address and port of the primary NTP server. The default port is 123.
First Alternate Time
Server
Optionally, specify the numerical (non DNS name) IP address and port of an alternative NTP server to use for time synchronization if the primary NTP server goes down.
Second Alternate
Time Server
Synchronization
Interval
Optionally, specify the numerical (non DNS name) and port of yet another NTP server for the greatest assurance of uninterrupted time synchronization.
Define an interval in minutes the access point uses to synchronize its system time with the NTP server. A synchronization interval value from 15 minutes to 65535 minutes can be specified.
6.
Click Apply to save any changes to the Date and time Settings screen. Navigating away from the screen without clicking the Apply button results in all changes to the screen being lost.
7.
Click Undo Changes (if necessary) to undo any changes made. Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on Date and Time Settings screen to the last saved configuration.
8.
Click Logout to securely exit the access point Access Point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
System Configuration 4-45
4.8 Logging Configuration
The access point provides the capability for periodically logging system events that prove useful in assessing the throughput and performance of the access point or troubleshooting problems on the access point managed Local Area Network (LAN). Use the Logging Configuration screen to set the desired logging level (standard syslog levels) and view or save the current access point system log.
To configure event logging for the access point:
1.
Select System Configuration - > Logging Configuration from the access point menu tree.
CAUTION Ensure IPSec has been properly configured to protect communications with the external Syslog server. Changes will not be applied otherwise.
2.
Configure the Log Options field to save event logs, set the log level and optionally port the access point’s log to an external server.
4-46 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
View Log
Logging Level
Click View to save a log of events retained on the access point.
The system displays a prompt requesting the administrator password before saving the log. After the password has been entered, click Get File to display a dialogue with buttons to Open or Save the log.txt file. Click Save and specify a location to save the log file.
Use the WordPad application to view the saved log.txt file on a
Microsoft Windows based computer. Do not view the log file using
Notepad, as the Notepad application does not properly display the formatting of the access point log file. Log entries are not saved in the access point. While the AP is in operation, log data temporarily resides in memory. AP memory is completely cleared each time the
AP reboots.
Use the Logging Level drop-down menu to select the desired log level for tracking system events. Eight logging levels, (0 to 7) are available. Log Level 6: Info is the access point default log level.
These are the standard UNIX/LINUX syslog levels.The levels are as follows:
0 - Emergency
1 - Alert
2 - Critical
3 - Errors
4 - Warning
5 - Notice
6 - Info
7 - Debug
Enable logging to an external syslog server
The access point can log events to an external syslog (system log) server. Select the Enable logging to an external syslog server checkbox to enable the server to listen for incoming syslog messages and decode the messages into a log for viewing.
Syslog server IP address
If the Enable logging to an external syslog server checkbox is selected, the numerical (non DNS name) IP address of an external syslog server is required in order to route the syslog events to that destination.
System Configuration 4-47
3.
Configure the Audit Log Filters field to create or delete audit log filters.
Create Click Create to create a new audit log filter. The Create Audit Log
Filter window is displayed. Provide the relevant information and click Apply to save the changes.
Unset
Unset All
Click Unset to remove a selected audit log filter
Click Unset All to delete all audit filter logs.
4.
Click Apply to save any changes to the Logging Configuration screen. Navigating away from the screen without clicking the Apply button results in all changes to the screen being lost.
5.
Click Undo Changes (if necessary) to undo any changes made. Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the Logging Configuration screen to the last saved configuration.
6.
Click Logout to securely exit the access point Access Point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
4.9 Importing/Exporting Configurations
All of the configuration settings for an access point can be obtained from another access point in the form of a text file. Additionally, all of the access point’s settings can be downloaded to another access point. Use the file-based configuration feature to speed up the setup process significantly at sites using multiple access points.
Another benefit is the opportunity to save the current AP configuration before making significant changes or restoring the default configuration. All options on the access point are deleted and updated by the imported file. Therefore, the imported configuration is not a merge with the configuration of the target access point. The exported file can be edited with any document editor if necessary.
NOTE Use the System Settings screen as necessary to restore an access point’s default configuration. For more information on restoring configurations, see
Configuring System Settings on page 4-2
.
NOTE For configuration file creation and export operations, only the set radio-config (1-7, depending on the SKU) shall be supported.
4-48 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
The export function always exports the encrypted Admin User password. The import function imports the Admin Password only if the access point is set to factory default. If the access point is not configured to factory default settings, the Admin User password WILL NOT get imported.
A configuration file from a dual radio AP-7131N-FGR can be imported to another dual radio model
AP-7131N-FGR.
NOTE When modifying the text file manually and spaces are used for wireless, security, MU policy names etc., ensure you use “\20” between the spaces.
For example, “Second\20Floor\20Lab”. When imported, the name would display as “Second Floor Lab”.
Use the Config Import/Export screen to configure an import or export operation for access point configuration settings.
CAUTION Motorola Solutions discourages importing a 1.0 baseline configuration file to a 1.1 version access point. Similarly, a 1.1 baseline configuration file should not be imported to a 1.0 version access point. Importing configuration files between different versions results in broken configurations, since new features added to the 1.1 version access point cannot be supported in a 1.0 version access point.
To create an importable/exportable access point configuration file:
1.
Select System Configuration - > Config Import/Export from the access point menu tree.
2.
Execute the command transfer_keys_cfg from Console/SSH before importing/exporting the configuration. Refer the command
AP7131N>admin(system.config)>transfer_keys_cfg on page 8-260
System Configuration 4-49
3.
Configure the SFTP Import/Export field to import/export configuration settings.
Filename
SFTP Server IP
Specify the name of the configuration file to be written to the SFTP
Server.
Enter the numerical (non-DNS name) IP address of the destination
SFTP Server where the configReuration file is imported or exported.
Filepath (optional) Defines the optional path name used to import/export the target configuration file.
Specify a username to be used when logging in to the SFTP Server.
Username
Import Configuration Click the Import Configuration button to import the configuration file from the server with the assigned filename and login information. The system displays a confirmation window indicating the administrator must log out of the access point after the operation completes for the changes to take effect. Click Yes to continue the operation. Click No to cancel the configuration file import.
4-50 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Export Configuration Click the Export Configuration button to export the configuration file from the server with the assigned filename and login information. If the IP mode is set to DHCP Client, IP address information is not exported (true for both LAN1, LAN2 and the
WAN port). For LAN1 and LAN2, IP address information is only exported when the IP mode is set to either static or DHCP Server.
For the WAN port, IP address information is only exported when the
This interface is a DHCP Client checkbox is not selected. For
more information on these settings, see Configuring the LAN
and
Configuring WAN Settings on page 5-16
.
The system displays a confirmation window prompting the administrator to log out of the access point after the operation completes for the changes to take effect. Click Yes to continue the operation. Click No to cancel the configuration file export.
NOTE Motorola Solutions recommends importing configuration files using the
CLI. If errors occur during the import process, they display all at once and are easier to troubleshoot. The access point GUI displays errors one at a time, and troubleshooting can be a more time consuming process.
NOTE When importing the configuration, a xxxxxbytes loaded status message indicates the file was downloaded successfully. An Incompatible
Hardware Type Error message indicates the configuration was not applied due to a hardware compatibility issue between the importing and exporting devices.
4.
Refer to the Status field to assess the completion of the import/export operation.
Status After executing an operation (by clicking the Import Configuration/
Export Configuration button), check the Status field for a progress indicator and messages about the success or errors in executing the operation.
5.
Click Apply to save the filename and Server IP information. The Apply button does not execute the import or export operation, only saves the settings entered.
6.
Click Undo Changes (if necessary) to undo any changes made. Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on Config Import/Export screen to the last saved configuration.
7.
Click Logout to securely exit the access point Motorola Solutions Access Point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
System Configuration 4-51
4.10 Updating Device Firmware
Motorola Solutions periodically releases updated versions of the access point device firmware to the
Motorola Solutions Web site. If the access point firmware version displayed on the System Settings page (see
Configuring System Settings on page 4-2
) is older than the version on the Web site,
Motorola Solutions recommends updating the access point to the latest firmware version for full feature functionality.
Upgrading from a legacy to a new firmware version is a two step process requiring the same upgrade procedure to be repeated twice. The first upgrade will result in a bootloader change, and the second upgrade will result in the actual firmware update. For subsequent upgrades, a single download will suffice. Using Auto Update, the access point will automatically update itself twice when upgrading.
Upgrading to a new access point firmware baseline does not retain the configuration of the previous
(lower version) firmware. Motorola Solutions recommends users export their 1.0 configuration for backup purposes prior to upgrading.
CAUTION An AP-7131N-FGR model access point only supports version 4.x firmware and above. An AP-7131N-FGR model cannot be downgraded to a 3.2 (or earlier) firmware version.
When downloading to a lower firmware version, all configuration settings are lost and the access point returns to factory default settings of the lower version.
CAUTION Loaded and signed CA certificates will be lost when changing the access point’s firmware version using either the GUI or CLI. After a certificate has been successfully loaded, export it to a secure location to ensure its availability after a firmware update.
If restoring the access point’s factory default firmware, you must export the certificate file BEFORE restoring the access point’s factory default configuration. Import the file back after the updated firmware is installed. For information on using the access point CLI to import and export the access point’s configuration, see
AP7131N>admin(system.cmgr)> impcert on page 8-187
and
AP7131N>admin(system.cmgr)> expcert on page 8-186
.
If a firmware update is required, use the Firmware Update screen to specify a filename and define a file location for updating the firmware.
4-52 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
NOTE The firmware file must be available from a SFTP site to perform the update.
CAUTION Make sure a copy of the access point’s configuration is exported before updating the firmware.
To conduct a firmware update on the access point:
1.
Export the access point current configuration settings before updating the firmware to have the most recent settings available after the firmware is updated.
Refer to
Importing/Exporting Configurations on page 4-47 for instructions on exporting the
access point’s current configuration to have it available after the firmware is updated.
2.
Select System Configuration - > Firmware Update from the access point menu tree.
Execute the command transfer_keys_fw from Console/SSH before upgrading the image from GUI. Refer
AP7131N>admin(system.fw-update)>transfer_keys_fw on page 8-264
.
System Configuration 4-53
If updating the access point manually, configure the Update Firmware fields as required to set a filename and target firmware file upload location for firmware updates.
3.
Specify the name of the target firmware file within the Filename field.
4.
If the target firmware file resides within a directory, specify a complete path for the file within the Filepath(optional) field.
5.
Enter an IP address for the SFTP server used for the update. Only numerical IP address names are supported, no DNS can be used.
6.
Set the username for the SFTP server login.
NOTE Click Apply to save the settings before performing the firmware update.
The user is not able to navigate the access point user interface while the firmware update is in process.
7.
Click the Perform Update button to initiate the update. Upon confirming the firmware update, the AP reboots and completes the update.
4-54 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
NOTE The access point must complete the reboot process to successfully update the device firmware, regardless of whether the reboot is conducted using the GUI or CLI interfaces.
8.
Confirm the access point configuration is the same as it was before the firmware update. If they are not, restore the settings. Refer to
Importing/Exporting Configurations on page 4-47
for instructions on exporting the configuration back to the access point.
9.
Click Apply to save the filename and filepath information entered into the Firmware Update screen. The Apply button does not execute the firmware, only saves the update settings entered.
10. Click Undo Changes (if necessary) to undo any changes made. Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on Firmware Update screen to the last saved configuration.
11. Click Logout to securely exit the access point Access Point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
4.11 Key Zeroisation
In AP7131N, key zeroisation function zeroises all Cryptographic Keys and Critical Security Parameters
(CSP) by overwriting the storage area three times with an alternating pattern (i.e, three different patterns).
Key zeroisation can be invoked in following ways:
• Hard reset (via AP7131N’s reset button) - When the AP7131N boots up, you will be prompted with a message "Press AP reset buton to perform key zeroization (default the config as well)
• Through a CLI command
• Through a GUI button
Once Zeroisation is invoked, AP will be rebooted after zeroisation with factory default configurations.
Once zeroisation is done, the admin password will also be zeroised, so default password motorola needs to be used to login first.
AP can be used as before after zeroisation. Admin can import the configuration and work as before if the config was exported prior to zeroise which is a recommended step.
Only constrain is 40-digit Image Verification Key will be required for firmware upgrade. Because the
Image Verification keys also zeroised as part of Key zeroisation.
System Configuration 4-55
2
3
4
5
4.11.1 Key Zeroisation Process
The following actions are taken place when zeroisation is initiated:
Step
1
6
Headline Details
Zeroise RADIUS related passwords using three patterns
Zeroise RADIUS variables using three patterns
• RADIUS proxy password
• RADIUS client password
• Hotspot RADIUS primary password
• Hotspot RADIUS secondary password
• Hotspot RADIUS accounting password
• EAP primary password
• EAP secondary password
• RADIUS accounting password
• RADIUS shared password
RADIUS related local and global variables
Zeroise DynDNS password using three patterns
Zeroise VPN (IPsec) related keys using three patterns
Kill WIPS process
DynDNS password
Zeroise AP Firmware Image Signing Keys using three patterns
AP Firmware Image Signing Keys
(40-Digit Image Verification Keys)
•
•
Security Associations (SAs)
Security Policies (SPD)
• IKE policies and keys
Kill WIPS process if it is running
4-56 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
7
8
9
Remove secret and configuration files
Restore factory default configuration
Reboot the AP
• Admin password
• RADIUS client configuration file
• EAP configuration file
• RADIUS CA certificate
• RADIUS client certificate
• RADIUS client password file
• HTTPS certificate
• Image Verification Keys file
Restore factory default configuration
Reboot the AP
Network Management
Refer to the following for network management configuration activities supported by the access point user interface:
•
•
•
Enabling Wireless LANs (WLANs)
•
•
5.1 Configuring the LAN Interface
The AP-7131N-FGR has one physical LAN port supporting two unique LAN interfaces. The
AP-7131N-FGR LAN port has its own MAC address. The LAN port MAC address is always the value of the access point WAN port MAC address plus 1. The LAN and WAN port MAC addresses can be located within the LAN and WAN Stats screens.
5-2 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
For information on locating the access point’s MAC addresses, see Viewing WAN Statistics on page
and Viewing LAN Statistics on page 7-6
.
Use the LAN Configuration screen to enable one (or both) of the access point’s LAN interfaces, assign them names, define which LAN is currently active on the access point Ethernet port and assign a timeout value to disable the LAN connection if no data traffic is detected within a defined interval.
To configure the access point LAN interface:
1.
Select Network Configuration -> LAN from the access point menu tree.
2.
Configure the LAN Settings field to enable the access point LAN1 and/or LAN2 interface, assign a timeout value, enable 802.1q trunking, configure WLAN mapping and enable
802.1x port authentication.
Network Management 5-3
Enable
LAN Name
Ethernet Port
Enable 802.1q
Trunking
VLAN Name
WLAN Mapping
Select the LAN1 and/or LAN2 checkbox to allow the forwarding of data traffic over the specified LAN connection. The LAN1 connection is enabled by default, but both LAN interfaces can be enabled simultaneously. The LAN2 setting is disabled by default.
Use the LAN Name field to modify the existing LAN name. LAN1 and LAN2 are the default names assigned to the LANs until modified by the user.
The Ethernet Port radio buttons allow you to select one of the two available LANs as the LAN actively transmitting over the access point’s LAN port. Both LANs can be active at any given time, but only one can transmit over the access point’s physical LAN connection, thus the selected LAN has priority.
Select the Enable 802.1q Trunking checkbox to enable the LAN to conduct VLAN tagging. If selected, click the WLAN Mapping button to configure mappings between individual WLANs and
LANs. If enabled, the access point is required to be connected to a trunked port.
Click the VLAN Name button to launch the VLAN Name screen to create VLANs and assign them VLAN IDs. For more information, see
Configuring VLAN Support on page 5-5
.
Click the WLAN Mapping button to launch the VLAN
Configuration screen to map existing WLANs to one of the two
LANs and define the WLAN’s VLAN membership (up to 16 mappings are possible per access point). For more information, see
Configuring VLAN Support on page 5-5 .
3.
Refer to the LAN Ethernet Timeout field to define how LAN Ethernet inactivity is processed by the access point.
Use the Ethernet Port Timeout drop-down menu to define how the access point interprets inactivity for the LAN assigned to the Ethernet port. When Enabled is selected, the access point uses the value defined in the Sec.
box (default is 30 seconds). Selecting Disabled allows the LAN to use the Ethernet port for an indefinite timeout period. Select the
Hardware Detect option to use the physical LAN port to detect activity. If the LAN port does not detect a physical connection, the radio is unavailable to the access point.
4.
Refer to the 802.1x Port Authentication field if using port authentication over the access point’s LAN port.
5-4 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
The access point only supports 802.1x authentication over its LAN port. The access point behaves as an 802.1x supplicant to authenticate to a server on the network. If using 802.1x authentication, enter the authentication server user name and password. The default password is “motorola.” For information on enabling and configuring authentication
schemes on the access point, see Enabling Authentication and Encryption Schemes on page
5.
Use the Port Settings field to define how the access point manages throughput over the
LAN port.
Auto Negotiation Select the Auto Negotiation checkbox to enable the access point to automatically exchange information (over its LAN port) about data transmission speed and duplex capabilities.
Auto negotiation is helpful when using the access point in an environment where different devices are connected and disconnected on a regular basis.
Selecting Auto Negotiate disables the Mbps and duplex checkbox options.
1000 Mbps
100 Mbps
10 Mbps half duplex
Select this option to establish a 1000 Mbps data transfer rate for the selected half duplex or full duplex transmission over the access point’s LAN port. This option is not available if Auto Negotiation is selected.
Select this option to establish a 100 Mbps data transfer rate for the selected half duplex or full duplex transmission over the access point’s LAN port. This option is not available if Auto Negotiation is selected.
Select this option to establish a 10 Mbps data transfer rate for the selected half duplex or full duplex transmission over the access point’s LAN port. This option is not available if Auto Negotiation is selected.
Select this option to transmit data to and from the access point, but not at the same time. Using a half duplex transmission, the access point can send data over its LAN port then immediately receive data from the same direction in which the data was transmitted.
Like a full-duplex transmission, a half-duplex transmission can carry data in both directions, just not at the same time.
Network Management 5-5 full duplex Select this option to transmit data to and from the access point at the same time. Using full duplex, the access point can send data over its LAN port while receiving data as well.
6.
Click Apply to save any changes to the LAN Configuration screen. Navigating away from the screen without clicking the Apply button results in all changes to the screen being lost if the prompts are ignored.
7.
Click Undo Changes (if necessary) to undo any changes made. Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the LAN configuration screen to the last saved configuration.
8.
Click Logout to securely exit the access point Access Point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
5.1.1 Configuring VLAN Support
A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) is a means to electronically separate data on the same access point from a single broadcast domain into separate broadcast domains. The access point can group devices on one or more WLANs so that they can communicate as if they were attached to the same wire, when in fact they are located on a different LAN segment. Because VLANs are based on logical instead of physical connections, they are extremely flexible. By using a VLAN, you can group by logical function instead of physical location. A maximum of 16 VLANs can be supported on the access point. An administrator can map 16 WLANs to 16 VLANs and enable or disable dynamic VLAN assignment.
VLANs enable organizations to share network resources in various network segments within large areas (airports, shopping malls, etc.). A VLAN is a group of clients with a common set of requirements independent of their physical location. VLANs have the same attributes as physical LANs, but they enable system administrators to group MUs even when they are not members of the same network segment.
NOTE A WLAN supporting a mesh network does not need to be assigned to a particular VLAN, as all the traffic proliferating the mesh network is already trunked. However, if MUs are to be connected to the Mesh WLAN, the WLAN will need to be tied to a VLAN.
The access point assignment of VLANs can be implemented using Static or Dynamic assignments
(often referred to as memberships) for individual WLANs. Both methods have their advantages and disadvantages. Static VLAN membership is perhaps the most widely used method because of the relatively small administration overhead and security it provides. With Static VLANs, you manually assign individual WLANs to individual VLANs.
5-6 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Although static VLANs are the most common form of VLAN assignments, dynamic VLAN assignment is possible per WLAN. Configuring dynamic VLANs entail the access point sending a DHCP request for device information (such as an IP address). Additional information (such as device MAC address information) is sent to the access point. The access point sends this MAC address to a host housing a copy of the Dynamic VLAN database. This database houses the records of MAC addresses and
VLAN assignments. The VLAN database looks up the MAC to determine what VLAN is assigned to it.
If it is not in the database, it simply uses a default VLAN assignment. The VLAN assignment is sent to the access point. The access point then maps the target WLAN for the assigned VLAN and traffic passes normally, allowing for the completion of the DHCP request and further traffic.
To create new VLANs or edit the properties of an existing VLAN:
1.
Select Network Configuration -> LAN from the access point menu tree.
2.
Ensure the Enable 802.1q Trunking button is selected from within the LAN Settings field.
Trunk links are required to pass VLAN information between destinations. A trunk port is by default a member of all the VLANs existing on the access point and carry traffic for all those
VLANs. Trunking is a function that must be enabled on both sides of a link.
3.
Select the VLAN Name button.
Network Management 5-7
The VLAN name screen displays. The first time the screen is launched a default VLAN name of 1 and a default VLAN ID of 1 display. The VLAN name is auto-generated once the user assigns a VLAN ID. However, the user has the option of re-assigning a name to the VLAN using New VLAN and Edit VLAN screens.
To create a new VLAN, click the Add button, to edit the properties of an existing VLAN, click the Edit button.
4.
Assign a unique VLAN ID (from 1 to 4095) to each VLAN added or modified.
The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information the access point needs to process the frame across the network. Therefore, it may be practical to assign a name to a VLAN representative or the area or type of network traffic it represents.
A business may have offices in different locations and want to extend an internal LAN between the locations. An access point managed infrastructure could provide this
5-8 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide connectivity, but it requires VLAN numbering be managed carefully to avoid conflicts between two VLANs with the same ID.
5.
Define a 32 character maximum VLAN Name .
Enter a unique name that identifies members of the VLAN. Motorola recommends selecting the name carefully, as the VLAN name should signify a group of clients with a common set of requirements independent of their physical location.
6.
Click Ok to save the changes to the new or modified VLAN.
7.
From the LAN Configuration screen, click the WLAN Mapping button. The Mapping
Configuration screen displays.
8.
Enter a Management VLAN Tag for LAN1 and LAN2.
The Management VLAN uses a default tag value of 1. The Management VLAN is used to distinguish VLAN traffic flows for the LAN. The trunk port marks the frames with special tags as they pass between the access point and its destination, these tags help distinguish data traffic.
Authentication servers (such as Radius) must be on the same Management VLAN.
Additionally, DHCP and BOOTP servers must be on the same Management VLAN as well.
9.
Define a Native VLAN Tag for LAN1 and LAN2.
A trunk port configured with 802.1Q tagging can receive both tagged and untagged traffic.
By default, the access point forwards untagged traffic with the native VLAN configured for the port. The Native VLAN is VLAN 1 by default. Motorola suggests leaving the Native VLAN set to 1 as other layer 2 devices also have their Native VLAN set to 1.
10. Define a Native VLAN Tagging Mode for LAN1 and LAN2.
11. Use the Native VLANTagging Mode drop-down menu to select the VLAN as tagged or untagged.
Motorola recommends mapping VLANs strategically in order to keep VLANs tied to the discipline they most closely match. For example, If WLAN1 is comprised of MUs supporting the sales area, then WLAN1 should be mapped to sales if a sales VLAN has been already been created.
12. Click OK to return to the LAN screen. Once at the LAN screen, click Apply to re-apply your changes.
Network Management 5-9
5.1.2 Configuring LAN1 and LAN2 Settings
Both LAN1 and LAN2 have separate sub-screens to configure the DHCP settings used by the LAN1 and LAN2 interfaces. Within each LAN screen is a button to access a sub-screen to configure
advanced DHCP settings for that LAN. For more information, see Configuring Advanced DHCP Server
Settings on page 5-13 . Additionally, LAN1 and LAN2 each have separate
Type Filter submenu items used to prevent specific (an potentially unneccesary) frames from being processed, for more
information, see Setting the Type Filter Configuration on page 5-14
.
To configure unique settings for either LAN1 or LAN2:
1.
Select Network Configuration -> LAN -> LAN1 (or LAN2) from the access point menu tree.
5-10 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
2.
Configure the DHCP Configuration field to define the DHCP settings used for the LAN.
NOTE When setting the LAN interface to be a DHCP Server and adding an IP address, the primary DNS IP address might not be updated, with only the secondary address getting updated. Ensure the primary address is the same as the IP address of the LAN.
NOTE Motorola recommends the WAN and LAN ports should not both be configured as DHCP clients.
This interface is a
DHCP Client
This interface is a
BOOTP Client
This interface uses static IP Address
This interface is a
DHCP Server
Select this button to enable DHCP to set network address information via this LAN1 or LAN2 connection. This is recommended if the access point resides within a large corporate network or the Internet Service Provider (ISP) uses DHCP. This setting is enabled for LAN1 by default.
DHCP is a protocol that includes mechanisms for IP address allocation and delivery of host-specific configuration parameters from a DHCP server to a host. If DHCP Client is selected, the first
DHCP or BOOTP server to respond sets the IP address and network address values since DHCP and BOOTP are interoperable.
Select this button to enable BOOTP to set access point network address information via this LAN1 or LAN2 connection.
When selected, only BOOTP responses are accepted by the access point. If both DHCP and BOOTP services are required, do not select
BOOTP Client.
Select the This interface uses static IP Address button, and manually enter static network address information in the areas provided.
The access point can be configured to function as a DHCP server over the LAN1 or LAN2 connection. Select the This interface is a
DHCP Server button and manually enter static network address information in the areas provided.
Network Management 5-11
Address Assignment
Range
Advanced DHCP
Server
IP Address
Use the address assignment parameter to specify a range of numerical (non DNS name) IP addresses reserved for mapping client MAC addresses to IP addresses. If a manually (static) mapped IP address is within the IP address range specified, that IP address could still be assigned to another client. To avoid this, ensure all statically mapped IP addresses are outside of the IP address range assigned to the DHCP server.
Click the Advanced DHCP Server button to display a screen used for generating a list of static MAC to IP address mappings for reserved clients. A separate screen exists for each of the LANs. For more information, see
Configuring Advanced DHCP Server Settings on page 5-13 .
The network-assigned numerical (non DNS name) IP address of the access point.
Network Mask
Default Gateway
The first two sets of numbers specify the network domain, the next set specifies the subset of hosts within a larger network. These values help divide a network into subnetworks and simplify routing and data transmission. The subnet mask defines the size of the subnet.
The Default Gateway parameter defines the numerical (non DNS name) IP address of a router the access point uses on the Ethernet as its default gateway.
Domain Name Enter the name assigned to the primary DNS server.
Primary DNS Server Enter the Primary DNS numerical (non DNS name) IP address.
Secondary DNS
Server
WINS Server
Motorola recommends entering the numerical IP address of an additional DNS server (if available), used if the primary DNS server goes down. A maximum of two DNS servers can be used.
Enter the numerical (non DNS name) IP address of the WINS server.
WINS is a Microsoft NetBIOS name server. Using a WINS server eliminates the broadcasts needed to resolve computer names to IP addresses by providing a cache or database of translations.
5-12 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Mesh STP
Configuration
Click the Mesh STP Configuration button to define bridge settings for this specific LAN. Each of the access point’s two LANs can have a separate mesh configuration. As the Spanning Tree
Protocol (STP) mentions, each mesh network maintains hello, forward delay and max age timers. These settings can be used as is using the current default settings, or be modified. However, if these settings are modified, they need to be configured for the LAN connecting to the mesh network WLAN.
For information on mesh networking capabilities, see
.
3.
Refer to the IP Filtering field to optionally enable the IP filtering feature, and (if enabled) apply existing IP filters (and their rules and permissions) to LAN1 or LAN2.
Enable IP Filtering Selecting this checkbox allows the LAN to employ filter policies and rules to determine which IP packets are processed normally over the LAN and which are discarded. If discarded, a packet is deleted and ignored (as if never received).
IP Filtering Select the IP Filtering button to display a screen where existing IP filter policies can be applied to the LAN to allow or deny IP packets in either an incoming or outgoing direction based on the rules defined for the policy.
NOTE For an overview of IP Filtering and how to create a filter, see
. For information on applying an existing filter to
the IP packet flow of a WLAN, see Applying a Filter to LAN1, LAN2 or a
4.
Click Apply to save any changes to the LAN1 or LAN2 screen. Navigating away from the screen without clicking the Apply button results in all changes to the screen being lost if the prompts are ignored.
5.
Click Undo Changes (if necessary) to undo any changes made. Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the LAN1 or LAN2 screen to the last saved configuration.
6.
Click Logout to securely exit the Access Point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
Network Management 5-13
5.1.2.1 Configuring Advanced DHCP Server Settings
Use the Advanced DHCP Server screen to specify (reserve) static (or fixed) IP addresses for specific devices. Every wireless, 802.11x-standard device has a unique Media Access Control (MAC) address.
This address is the device's hard-coded hardware number (shown on the bottom or back). An example of a MAC address is 00:A0:F8:45:9B:07.
The DHCP server can grant an IP address for as long as it remains in active use. The lease time is the number of seconds an IP address is reserved for re-connection after its last use. Using very short leases, DHCP can dynamically reconfigure networks in which there are more computers than available IP addresses. This is useful, for example, in education and customer environments where
MU users change frequently. Use longer leases if there are fewer users.
To generate a list of client MAC address to IP address mappings for the access point:
1.
Select Network Configuration -> LAN -> LAN1 (or LAN2) from the access point menu tree.
2.
Click the Advanced DHCP Server button from within the LAN1 or LAN2 screen.
5-14 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
3.
Specify a lease period in seconds for available IP addresses using the DHCP Lease Time
(Seconds) parameter. An IP address is reserved for re-connection for the length of time you specify. The default interval is 86400 seconds.
4.
Click the Add button to create a new table entry within the Reserved Clients field.
If a statically mapped IP address is within the IP address range in use by the DHCP server, that IP address may still be assigned to another client. To avoid this, ensure all statically mapped IP addresses are outside of the IP address range assigned to the DHCP server.
If multiple entries exist within the Reserved Clients field, use the scroll bar to the right of the window to navigate.
5.
Click the Del (delete) button to remove a selected table entry.
6.
Click OK to return to the LAN1 or LAN2 page, where the updated settings within the
Advanced DHCP Server screen can be saved by clicking the Apply button.
7.
Click Cancel to undo any changes made. Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed to the last saved configuration.
5.1.2.2 Setting the Type Filter Configuration
Each access point LAN (either LAN1 or LAN2) can keep a list of frame types that it forwards or discards. The Type Filtering feature prevents specific (a potentially unneccesary) frames from being processed by the access point in order to improve throughput. These include certain broadcast frames from devices that consume bandwidth, but are unnecessary to access point operations.
Use the Ethernet Type Filter Configuration screen to build a list of filter types and configure them as either allowed or denied for use with the this particular LAN.
To configure type filtering on the access point:
1.
Select Network Configuration -> LAN -> LAN1 (or LAN2) -> Type Filter from the access point menu tree.
The Ethernet Type Filter Configuration screen displays for the LAN. No Ethernet types are displayed (by default) when the screen is first launched.
Network Management 5-15
2.
Use the all ethernet types, except drop-down menu to designate whether the Ethernet
Types defined for the LAN are allowed or denied for use by the access point.
3.
To add an Ethernet type, click the Add button.
The Add Ethernet Type screen displays. Use this screen to add one type filter option at a time, for a list of up to 16 entries.
5-16 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Packet types supported for the type filtering function include 16-bit DIX Ethernet types as well as Motorola proprietary types. Select an Ethernet type from the drop down menu, or enter the Ethernet type’s hexadecimal value. See your System Administrator if unsure of the implication of adding or omitting a type from the list for either LAN1 or LAN2.
4.
To optionally delete a type filtering selection from the list, highlight the packet type and click the Delete button.
5.
Click Apply to save any changes to the LAN1 or LAN2 Ethernet Type Filter Configuration screen. Navigating away from the screen without clicking Apply results in all changes to the screens being lost.
6.
Click Cancel to securely exit the LAN1 or LAN2 Ethernet Type Filter Configuration screen without saving your changes.
7.
Click Logout to securely exit the Access Point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
5.2 Configuring WAN Settings
A Wide Area Network (WAN) is a widely dispersed telecommunications network. The AP-7131N-FGR includes one WAN port. The access point WAN port has its own MAC address. In a corporate environment, the WAN port might connect to a larger corporate network. For a small business, the
WAN port might connect to a DSL or cable modem to access the Internet.
Use the WAN screen to set the WAN IP configuration and Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet
(PPPoE) parameters.
To configure WAN settings for the access point:
1.
Select Network Configuration -> WAN from the access point menu tree.
Network Management 5-17
2.
Refer to the WAN IP Configuration field to enable the WAN interface, and set network address information for the WAN connection.
NOTE Motorola recommends that the WAN and LAN ports should not both be configured as DHCP clients.
Enable WAN Interface Select the Enable WAN Interface checkbox to enable a connection between the access point and a larger network or outside world through the WAN port.
Disable this option to effectively isolate the access point ’s WAN.
No connections to a larger network or the Internet are possible.
MUs cannot communicate beyond the LAN.
By default, the WAN port is static with an IP address of 10.1.1.1.
5-18 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
This interface is a
DHCP Client
IP Address
This checkbox enables DHCP for the access point WAN connection.
This is useful, if the larger corporate network or Internet Service
Provider (ISP) uses DHCP.
DHCP is a protocol that includes mechanisms for IP address allocation and delivery of host-specific configuration parameters from a DHCP server to a host. Some of these parameters are IP address, network mask, and gateway.
If DHCP client mode is enabled, the other WAN IP configuration parameters are grayed out.
Specify a numerical (non DNS name) IP address for the access point’s WAN connection. This address defines the AP's presence on a larger network or on the Internet.
Obtain a static (dedicated) IP address from the ISP or network administrator. An IP address uses a series of four numbers expressed in dot notation, for example, 190.188.12.1.
Subnet Mask Specify a subnet mask for the access point’s WAN connection. This number is available from the ISP for a DSL or cable-modem connection, or from an administrator if the access point connects to a larger network.
A subnet mask uses a series of four numbers expressed in dot notation (similar to an IP address). For example, 255.255.255.0 is a valid subnet mask.
Default Gateway
Primary DNS Server Specify the address of a primary Domain Name System (DNS) server. The ISP or a network administrator provides this address.
A DNS server translates a domain name (for example,
www.motorola.com) into an IP address that networks can use.
Secondary DNS
Server
Specify the gateway address for the access point’s WAN connection. The ISP or a network administrator provides this address.
Specify the address of a secondary DNS server if one is used. A secondary address is recommended if the primary DNS server goes down.
Network Management 5-19
More IP Addresses
Refresh
Click the More IP Addresses button to specify additional static IP addresses for the access point. Additional IP addresses are required when users within the WAN need dedicated IP addresses, or when servers need to be accessed (addressed) by the outside world. The More IP Addresses screen allows the administrator to enter up to seven additional WAN IP addresses for the access point
WAN. Only numeric, non-DNS names can be used.
If PPP over Ethernet is enabled from within the WAN screen, the
VPN WAN IP Configuration portion of the More IP Addresses screen is enabled. Enter the IP address and subnet mask used to provide the PPPoE connection over the access point’s WAN port.
Ensure the IP address is a numerical (non DNS) name.
Click the Refresh button to update the network address information displayed within the WAN IP Configuration field.
3.
Use the Port Settings field to define how the access point manages throughput over the
WAN port.
Auto Negotiation Select the Auto Negotiation checkbox to enable the access point to automatically exchange information (over its WAN port) about data transmission speed and duplex capabilities.
Auto negotiation is helpful when using the access point in an environment where different devices are connected and disconnected on a regular basis.
Selecting Auto Negotiate disables the Mbps and duplex checkbox options.
1000 Mbps
100 Mbps
10 Mbps
Select this option to establish a 1000 Mbps data transfer rate for the selected half duplex or full duplex transmission over the access point’s WAN port. This option is not available if Auto Negotiation is selected.
Select this option to establish a 100 Mbps data transfer rate for the selected half duplex or full duplex transmission over the access point’s WAN port. This option is not available if Auto Negotiation is selected.
Select this option to establish a 10 Mbps data transfer rate for the selected half duplex or full duplex transmission over the access point’s WAN port. This option is not available if Auto Negotiation is selected.
5-20 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide half duplex full duplex
Select this option to transmit data to and from the access point, but not at the same time. Using a half duplex transmission, the access point can send data over its WAN port then immediately receive data from the same direction in which the data was transmitted.
Like a full-duplex transmission, a half-duplex transmission can carry data in both directions, just not at the same time.
Select this option to transmit data to and from the access point at the same time. Using full duplex, the access point can send data over its WAN port while receiving data as well.
4.
Configure the PPP over Ethernet field to enable high speed dial-up connections to the access point WAN port.
NOTE Be aware that the access point can (incorrectly) carry over previously configured static IP information and maintain two connected routes once it gets an IP address from a PPPOE connection.
Enable
Username
Password
PPPoE State
Use the checkbox to enable Point-to-Point over Ethernet (PPPoE) for a high-speed connection that supports this protocol. Most DSL providers are currently using or deploying this protocol.
PPPoE is a data-link protocol for dialup connections. PPPoE allows a host PC to use a broadband modem (DSL) for access to highspeed data networks.
Specify a username entered when connecting to the ISP. When the
Internet session begins, the ISP authenticates the username.
Specify a password entered when connecting to the ISP. When the
Internet session starts, the ISP authenticates the password.
Displays the current connection state of the PPPoE client. When a
PPPoE connection is established, the status displays Connected.
When no PPPoE connection is active, the status displays
Disconnected .
Network Management 5-21
Keep-Alive Select the Keep-Alive checkbox to maintain the WAN connection indefinitely (no timeout interval). Some ISPs terminate inactive connections. Enabling Keep-Alive keeps the access point’s WAN connection active, even when there is no traffic. If the ISP drops the connection after an idle period, the access point automatically reestablishes the connection to the ISP. Enabling Keep-Alive mode disables (grays out) the Idle Time field.
Idle Time (seconds) Specify an idle time in seconds to limit how long the access point’s
WAN connection remains active after outbound and inbound traffic is not detected. The Idle Time field is grayed out if Keep-Alive is enabled.
Authentication Type Use the Authentication Type menu to specify the authentication protocol(s) for the WAN connection. Choices include PAP or CHAP,
PAP, or CHAP.
Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) and Challenge Handshake
Authentication Protocol (CHAP) are competing identify-verification methods.
PAP sends a username and password over a network to a server that compares the username and password to a table of authorized users. If the username and password are matched in the table, server access is authorized. WatchGuard products do not support the PAP protocol because the username and password are sent as clear text that a hacker can read.
CHAP uses secret information and mathematical algorithms to send a derived numeric value for login. The login server knows the secret information and performs the same mathematical operations to derive a numeric value. If the results match, server access is authorized. After login, one of the numbers in the mathematical operation is changed to secure the connection. This prevents any intruder from trying to copy a valid authentication session and replaying it later to log in.
5.
Click Apply to save any changes to the WAN screen. Navigating away from the screen without clicking the Apply button results in all changes to the screen being lost.
6.
Click Undo Changes (if necessary) to undo any changes made. Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the WAN screen to the last saved configuration.
7.
Click Logout to securely exit the Access Point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
5-22 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
5.2.1 Configuring Network Address Translation (NAT) Settings
Network Address Translation (NAT) converts an IP address in one network to a different IP address or set of IP addresses in another network. The access point router maps its local (inside) network addresses to WAN (outside) IP addresses, and translates the WAN IP addresses on incoming packets to local IP addresses. NAT is useful because it allows the authentication of incoming and outgoing requests, and minimizes the number of WAN IP addresses needed when a range of local IP addresses is mapped to each WAN IP address. NAT can be applied in one of two ways:
• One-to-one mapping with a private side IP address
The private side IP address can belong to any of the private side subnets.
• One-to-many mapping with a configurable range of private side IP addresses
Ranges can be specified from each of the private side subnets.
To configure IP address mappings for the access point:
1.
Select Network Configuration -> WAN -> NAT from the access point menu tree.
2.
Configure the Address Mappings field to generate a WAN IP address, define the NAT type and set outbound/inbound NAT mappings.
WAN IP Address
NAT Type
The WAN IP addresses on the NAT screen are dynamically generated from address settings applied on the WAN screen.
Specify the NAT Type as 1 to 1 to map a WAN IP address to a single host (local) IP address. 1 to 1 mapping is useful when users need dedicated addresses, and for public-facing servers connected to the access point.
Set the NAT Type as 1 to Many to map a WAN IP address to multiple local IP addresses. This displays the mappings button in the adjacent Outbound Mappings field. This button displays a screen for mapping the LAN IP addresses that are associated with each subnet.
Define the NAT Type as none when routable IP addresses are used on the internal network.
Network Management 5-23
Outbound Mappings When 1 to 1 NAT is selected, a single IP address can be entered in the Outbound Mappings area. This address provides a 1 to 1 mapping of the WAN IP address to the specified IP address.
When 1 to Many is selected as the NAT Type, the Outbound
Mappings area displays a 1 to Many Mappings button. Click the button to select the LAN1 or LAN2 IP address used to set the outbound IP address or select none to exclude the IP address.
If none is selected as the NAT Type, The Outbound Mappings area is blank.
Inbound Mappings
Port Forwarding
When 1 to 1 or 1 to Many is selected, the Inbound Mappings option displays a Port Forwarding button.
Click the Port Forwarding button to display a screen of port forwarding parameters for inbound traffic from the associated
WAN IP address. for information on configuring port forwarding, see
Configuring Port Forwarding on page 5-23
.
3.
Click Apply to save any changes to the NAT screen. Navigating away from the screen without clicking the Apply button results in all changes to the screens being lost.
4.
Click Undo Changes (if necessary) to undo any changes made. Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the NAT screen to the last saved configuration.
5.
Click Logout to securely exit the Access Point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
5.2.1.1 Configuring Port Forwarding
Use the Port Forwarding screen to configure port forwarding parameters for inbound traffic from the associated WAN IP address.
To configure port forwarding for the access point:
1.
Select Network Configuration -> WAN -> NAT from the access point menu tree.
2.
Select 1 to 1 or 1 to Many from the NAT Type drop-down menu.
3.
Click on the Port Forwarding button within the Inbound Mappings area.
5-24 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
4.
Configure the Port Forwarding screen to modify the following:
Add
Del
Name
Click Add to create a local map that includes the name, transport protocol, start port, end port, IP address and Translation Port for incoming packets.
Click Del to remove a selected local map entry.
Enter a name for the service being forwarded. The name can be any alphanumeric string and is used for identification of the service.
Transport Use the Transport pull-down menu to specify the transport protocol used in this service. The choices are ALL, TCP, UDP, ICMP,
AH, ESP, and GRE.
Start Port and End Port Enter the port or ports used by the port forwarding service. To specify a single port, enter the port number in the Start Port area.
To specify a range of ports, use both the Start Port and End Port options to enter the port numbers. For example, enter 110 in the
Start Port field and 115 in the End Port field.
Network Management 5-25
IP Address
Translation Port
Forward all unspecified ports to
Enter the numerical (non DNS name) IP address to which the specified service is forwarded. This address must be within the specified NAT range for the associated WAN IP address.
Specify the port number used to translate data for the service being forwarded.
Use the Forward all unspecified ports to checkbox to enable port forwarding for incoming packets with unspecified ports. In the adjacent area, enter a target forwarding IP address for incoming packets. This number must be within the specified NAT range for the associated WAN IP address.
5.
Click OK to return to the NAT screen. Within the NAT screen, click Apply to save any changes made on the Port Forwarding screen.
6.
Click Cancel to undo any changes made on Port Forwarding screen. This reverts all settings for the Port Forwarding screen to the last saved configuration.
5.2.2 Configuring Dynamic DNS
The access point supports the Dynamic DNS service. Dynamic DNS (or DynDNS) is a feature offered by www.dyndns.com which allows the mapping of domain names to dynamically assigned IP addresses via the WAN port. When the dynamically assigned IP address of a client changes, the new
IP address is sent to the DynDNS service and traffic for the specified domain(s) is routed to the new
IP address.
NOTE DynDNS supports only the primary WAN IP address.
To configure dynamic DNS for the access point:
1.
Select Network Configuration -> WAN -> DynDNS from the access point menu tree.
2.
Select the Enable checkbox to allow domain name information to be updated when the IP address associated with that domain changes.
A username, password and hostname must be specified for domain name information to be updated.
5-26 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
NOTE The username, password and hostname are required to be registered at http://www.dyndns.com
.
3.
Enter the DynDNS Username for the account you wish to use for the access point.
4.
Enter the DynDNS Password for the account you wish to use for the access point.
5.
Provide the Hostname for the DynDNS account you wish to use for the access point.
6.
Click the Update DynDNS button to update the access point’s current WAN IP address with the DynDNS service.
NOTE DynDNS supports devices directly connected to the Internet. Having VPN enabled, and the DynDNS Server on the other side of the VPN is not supported.
7.
Once the DynDNS configuration has been updated, click the Show Update Response button to open a sub-screen displaying the hostname, IP address and any messages received during an update from the DynDNS Server.
8.
Click Apply to save any changes to the Dynamic DNS screen. Navigating away from the screen without clicking the Apply button results in all changes to the screens being lost.
9.
Click Undo Changes (if necessary) to undo any changes made. Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the screen to the last saved configuration.
5.3 Enabling Wireless LANs (WLANs)
A Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) is a data-communications system that flexibly extends the functionalities of a wired LAN. A WLAN does not require lining up devices for line-of-sight transmission, and are thus, desirable. Within the WLAN, roaming users can be handed off from one access point to another like a cellular phone system. WLANs can therefore be configured around the needs of specific groups of users, even when they are not in physical proximity.
Use the access point’s Wireless Configuration screen to create new WLANs, edit the properties of existing WLANs or delete a WLAN to create space for a new WLAN. Sixteen WLANs are available on the AP-7131N-FGR.
To configure WLANs on the access point:
1.
Select Network Configuration -> Wireless from the access point menu tree.
Network Management 5-27
If a WLAN is defined, that WLAN displays within the Wireless Configuration screen. When the access point is first booted, WLAN1 exists as a default WLAN available immediately for connection.
2.
Refer to the information within the Wireless Configuration screen to view the name, ESSID, access point radio designation, VLAN ID and security policy of existing WLANs.
WLAN Name
ESSID
The Name field displays the name of each WLAN that has been defined. The WLAN names can be modified within individual
WLAN configuration screens. See
WLANs on page 5-29 to change the name of a WLAN.
Displays the Extended Services Set Identification (ESSID) associated with each WLAN. The ESSID can be modified within
individual WLAN configuration screens. See Creating/Editing
Individual WLANs on page 5-29 to change the ESSID of a specific
WLAN.
5-28 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Radio
VLAN
Security Policy
QoS Policy
The Radio field displays the name of the access point radio the
WLAN is mapped to (either the 802.11a/n radio or the
802.11b/g/n radio). To change the radio designation for a specific
WLAN, see Creating/Editing Individual WLANs on page 5-29
.
The VLAN field displays the specific VLAN the target WLAN is mapped to. For information on VLAN configuration for the WLAN, see
Configuring VLAN Support on page 5-5
.
The Security Policy field displays the security profile configured for the target WLAN. For information on configuring security for a
WLAN, see Enabling Authentication and Encryption Schemes on page 6-4 .
The QoS Policy field displays the quality of service currently defined for the WLAN. This policy outlines which data types receive priority for the user base comprising the WLAN. For
information on QoS configuration for the WLAN, see Setting the
WLAN Quality of Service (QoS) Policy on page 5-39 .
3.
Click the Create button (if necessary) to launch the New WLAN screen. Use the New
WLAN screen to define the properties of a new WLAN that would display and be selectable within the Wireless Configuration
screen. For additional information, see Creating/
Editing Individual WLANs on page 5-29 .
4.
Click the Edit button (if necessary) to launch the Edit WLAN screen. Use the Edit WLAN screen to revise the properties of an existing WLAN that would continue display and be selectable within the Wireless Configuration screen. For additional information, see
Creating/Editing Individual WLANs on page 5-29 .
5.
Consider using the Delete button to remove an existing WLAN if it has become outdated and is no longer required or if you are coming close the maximum 16 WLANs available per access point.
6.
Click Logout to securely exit the Access Point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
Network Management 5-29
5.3.1 Creating/Editing Individual WLANs
If the WLANs displayed within the Wireless Configuration screen do not satisfy your network requirements, you can either create a new WLAN or edit the properties of an existing WLAN.
NOTE Before editing the properties of an existing WLAN, ensure it is not being used by an access point radio, or is a WLAN that is needed in its current configuration. Once updated, the previous configuration is not available unless saved.
Use the New WLAN and Edit WLAN screens as required to create/modify a WLAN. To create a new
WLAN or edit the properties of an existing WLAN:
1.
Select Network Configuration -> Wireless from the access point menu tree.
The Wireless Configuration screen displays.
2.
Click the Create button to configure a new WLAN, or highlight a WLAN and click the Edit button to modify an existing WLAN. Either the New WLAN or Edit WLAN screen displays.
5-30 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
3.
Set the parameters in the Configuration field as required for the WLAN.
CAUTION When using the access point’s hotspot functionality, ensure MUs are re-authenticated when changes are made to the characteristics of a hotspot enabled WLAN, as MUs within the WLAN will be dropped from device association.
Network Management 5-31
ESSID
Name
Available On
Max MUs
MU Idle Timeout
Enter the Extended Services Set Identification (ESSID) associated with the WLAN. The WLAN name is auto-generated using the
ESSID until changed by the user. The maximum number of characters that can be used for the ESSID is 32. Do not use any of the following characters for an ESSID < > | " & \ ? ,
Define or revise the name for the WLAN. The name should be logical representation of WLAN coverage area (engineering, marketing etc.). The maximum number of characters that can be used for the name is 31.
Use the Available On checkboxes to define whether the WLAN you are creating or editing is available to clients on either the
802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n radio (or both radios). The Available On checkbox should only be selected for a mesh WLAN if this target access point is to be configured as a base bridge or repeater (base and client bridge) on the radio. If the radio for the WLAN is to be defined as a client bridge only, the Available On checkbox should not be selected . For more information on defining a WLAN for mesh support, see
Configuring a WLAN for Mesh Networking
.
Use the Max MUs field to define the number of MUs permitted to interoperate within the new or revised WLAN. The maximum (and default) is 127. However, each access point can only support a maximum 127 MUs spanned across its 16 available WLANs. If you intend to define numerous WLANs, ensure each is using a portion of the 127 available MUs and the sum of the supported MUs across all WLANs does not exceed 127.
Set an MU Idle Timeout the access point uses to timeout idle mobile units from WLAN inclusion. When exceeded, the MU must re-establish its credentials to assume operation within the
WLAN. Set a value between 1 - 65535 minutes. the default value is 30 minutes.
5-32 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Enable Client Bridge
Backhaul
Enable Hotspot
Select the Enable Client Bridge Backhaul checkbox to make the
WLAN available in the WLAN drop-down menu within the Radio
Configuration screen. This checkbox can be ignored for WLANs not supporting mesh networking, to purposely exclude them from the list of WLANs available in the Radio Configuration page selected specifically for mesh networking support. Only WLANs defined for mesh networking support should have this checkbox selected.
Select the Enable Hotspot checkbox to allow this WLAN (whether it be a new or existing WLAN) to be configured for hotspot support.
Clicking the Configure Hotspot button launches a screen wherein the parameters of the hotspot can be defined. For information on configuring a target WLAN for hotspot support, see
WLAN Hotspot Support on page 5-45 . For an overview of what a
hotspot is and what it can provide your wireless network, see
Hotspot Support on page 1-20 .
CAUTION A WLAN cannot be enabled for both mesh and hotspot support at the same time. Only one of these two options can be enabled at one time, as the GUI and CLI will prevent both from being enabled.
4.
Configure the Security field as required to set the data protection requirements for the
WLAN.
Security Policy Use the scroll down Security Policies menu to select the security scheme best suited for the new or revised WLAN. Click the Create button to launch the New Security Policy screen where a new policy can be created to suit the needs of the WLAN. For more
information, see Configuring WLAN Security Policies on page 5-34 .
MU Access Control Select an ACL policy suiting the WLAN‘s MU introperability requirements from the drop-down menu. If the existing ACL policies do not satisfy the requirements of the WLAN, a new ACL policy can be created by pressing the Create button. For more
information, see Configuring a WLAN Access Control List (ACL) on page 5-35
.
5.
Configure the Advanced field as required to set MU interoperability permissions, secure beacon transmissions, broadcast ESSID acceptance and Quality of Service (QoS) policies.
Network Management 5-33
Disallow MU to MU
Communication
The MU-MU Disallow feature prohibits MUs from communicating with each other even if they are on different WLANs, assuming one of the WLAN’s is configured to disallow MU-MU communication.
Therefore, if an MU’s WLAN is configured for MU-MU disallow, it will not be able to communicate with any other MUs connected to this access point.
Use Secure Beacon Select the Use Secure Beacon checkbox to not transmit the access point’s ESSID. If a hacker tries to find an ESSID via an MU, the ESSID does not display since the ESSID is not in the beacon.
Motorola recommends keeping the option enabled to reduce the likelihood of hacking into the WLAN.
Accept Broadcast
ESSID
Select the Accept Broadcast ESSID checkbox to associate an
MU that has a blank ESSID (regardless of which ESSID the access point is currently using). Sites with heightened security requirements may want to leave the checkbox unselected and configure each MU with an ESSID. The default is selected.
enable Rate Limiting Select this checkbox to set MU rate limiting values for this WLAN in both the upstream and downstream direction. Once selected, two fields display enabling you to set MU radio bandwidth for each associated MU in both the wired-to-wireless and wireless-towired directions. Set an allocation between 100 and 300,000 kbps.
The default value is 1000 kbps. For more information, see
Configuring MU Rate Limiting on page 5-67 .
Quality of Service
Policy
If QoS policies are undefined (none), select the launch the New QoS Policy
Create button to screen. Use this screen to create a
QoS policy, wherein data traffic for the new or revised WLAN can be prioritized to best suit the MU transmissions within that WLAN.
For more information, see
Setting the WLAN Quality of Service
.
6.
Refer to the IP Filtering field to optionally enable the IP filtering feature, and (if enabled) apply existing IP filters (and their rules and permissions) to the WLAN.
Enable IP Filtering Selecting this checkbox allows the WLAN to employ filter policies and rules to determine which IP packets are processed normally over the WLAN and which are discarded. If discarded, a packet is deleted and ignored (as if never received).
5-34 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
IP Filtering Select the IP Filtering button to display a screen where existing IP filter policies can be applied to the WLAN to allow or deny IP packets in either an incoming or outgoing direction based on the rules defined for the policy.
NOTE For an overview of IP Filtering and how to create a filter, see
. For information on applying an existing filter to
the IP packet flow of a WLAN, see Applying a Filter to LAN1, LAN2 or a
7.
Click Apply to save any changes to the WLAN screen. Navigating away from the screen without clicking Apply results in all changes to the screens being lost.
8.
Click Cancel to securely exit the New WLAN or Edit WLAN screen and return to the
Wireless Configuration screen.
5.3.1.1 Configuring WLAN Security Policies
As WLANs are being defined for an access point, a security policy can be created or an existing policy edited (using the Create or Edit buttons within the Security Configuration screen) to best serve the security requirements of the WLAN. Once new policies are defined, they are available within the
New WLAN or Edit WLAN screens and can be mapped to any WLAN. A security policy can be used by more than one WLAN if its logical to do so. For example, there may be two or more WLANs within close proximity of each other requiring the same data protection scheme.
To create a new security policy or modify an existing policy:
1.
Select Network Configuration -> Wireless -> Security from the access point menu tree.
The Security Configuration screen appears with existing policies and their attributes displayed.
Network Management 5-35
NOTE When the access point is first launched, a single security policy (default) is available and mapped to WLAN 1. It is anticipated numerous additional security policies will be created as the list of WLANs grows.
Configuring a WLAN security scheme with a discussion of all the authentication and
encryption options available is beyond the scope of this chapter. See Chapter 6, Configuring
Access Point Security on page 6-1 for more details on configuring access point security.
For detailed information on the authentication and encryption options available specifically to AP-7131N-FGR model access points and how to configure them, see to
.
2.
Click Logout to exit the Security Configuration screen.
5.3.1.2 Configuring a WLAN Access Control List (ACL)
An Access Control List (ACL) affords a system administrator the ability to grant or restrict MU access by specifying a MU MAC address or range of MAC addresses to either include or exclude from access
5-36 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide point connectivity. Use the Mobile Unit Access Control List Configuration screen to create new
ACL policies (using the New MU ACL Policy sub-screen) or edit existing policies (using the Edit MU
ACL Policy sub-screen). Once new policies are defined, they are available for use within the New
WLAN or Edit WLAN screens to assign to specific WLANs based on MU interoperability requirements.
Motorola recommends using the New MU ACL Policy or Edit MU ACL Policy screens strategically to name and configure ACL policies meeting the requirements of the particular WLANs they may map to. However, be careful not to name policies after specific WLANs, as individual ACL policies can be used by more than one WLAN. For detailed information on assigning ACL policies to specific WLANs,
see Creating/Editing Individual WLANs on page 5-29
.
To create or edit ACL policies for WLANs:
1.
Select Network Configuration -> Wireless -> MU ACL from the access point menu tree.
The Mobile Unit Access Control List Configuration screen displays with existing ACL policies and their current WLAN (if mapped to a WLAN).
NOTE When the access point is first launched, a ACL policy (default) is available and mapped to WLAN 1. It is anticipated numerous additional ACL policies will be created as the list of WLANs grows.
Network Management 5-37
2.
Click the Create button to configure a new ACL policy, or select a policy and click the Edit button to modify an existing ACL policy. The access point supports a maximum of 16 MU ACL policies.
5-38 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Either the New MU ACL Policy or Edit MU ACL Policy screens display.
3.
Assign a name to the new or edited ACL policy that represents an inclusion or exclusion policy specific to a particular type of MU traffic you may want to use with a single or group of WLANs. More than one WLAN can use the same ACL policy.
4.
Configure the parameters within the Mobile Unit Access Control List field to allow or deny MU access to the access point.
The MU adoption list identifies MUs by their MAC address. The MAC address is the MU's unique Media Access Control number printed on the device (for example, 00:09:5B:45:9B:07) by the manufacturer. A maximum of 200 MU MAC addresses can be added to the New/Edit
MU ACL Policy screen.
Access for the listed
Mobile Units
Use the drop-down list to select Allow or Deny . This rule applies to the MUs listed in the table. For example, if the adoption rule is to Allow, access is granted for all MUs except those listed in the table.
Network Management 5-39
Add
Delete
Click the Add button to create a new entry using only the Start
MAC column to specify a MAC address, or uses both the Start
MAC and End MAC columns to specify a range of MAC addresses.
Click the Delete button to remove a selected list entry.
5.
Click Apply to save any changes to the New MU ACL Policy or Edit MU ACL Policy screen and return to the Mobile Unit Access Control List Configuration screen. Navigating away from the screen without clicking Apply results in changes to the screens being lost.
6.
Click Cancel to securely exit the New MU ACL Policy or Edit MU ACL Policy screen and return to the Mobile Unit Access Control List Configuration screen.
7.
Click Logout within the Mobile Unit Access Control List Configuration screen to securely exit the Access Point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
5.3.1.3 Setting the WLAN Quality of Service (QoS) Policy
The access point can keep a list of QoS policies that can be used from the New WLAN or Edit
WLAN screens to map to individual WLANs. Use the Quality of Service Configuration screen to configure WMM policies that can improve the user experience for audio, video and voice applications by shortening the time between packet transmissions for higher priority (multimedia) traffic.
Use the Quality of Service Configuration screen to define the QoS policies for advanced network traffic management and multimedia applications support. If the existing QoS policies are insufficient, a new policy can be created or an existing policy can be modified using the New QoS Policy or Edit
QoS Policy screens. Once new policies are defined, they are available for use within the New
WLAN or Edit WLAN screens to assign to specific WLANs based on MU interoperability requirements.
Motorola recommends using the New QoS Policy and Edit QoS Policy screens strategically to name and configure QoS policies meeting the requirements of the particular WLANs they may to. However, be careful not to name policies after specific WLANs, as individual QoS policies can be used by more than one WLAN. For detailed information on assigning QoS policies to specific WLANs, see
Creating/Editing Individual WLANs on page 5-29 .
To configure QoS policies:
1.
Select Network Configuration -> Wireless -> QoS from the access point menu tree.
The Quality of Service Configuration screen displays with existing QoS policies and their current WLAN (if mapped to a WLAN).
5-40 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
NOTE When the access point is first launched, a single QoS policy (default) is available and mapped to WLAN 1. It is anticipated additional QoS policies will be created as the list of WLANs grows.
2.
Click the Create button to configure a new QoS policy, or select a policy and click the Edit button to modify an existing QoS policy. The access point supports a maximum of 16 QoS policies.
Network Management 5-41
3.
Assign a name to the new or edited QoS policy that makes sense to the access point traffic receiving priority. More than one WLAN can use the same QoS policy.
4.
Select the Support Voice prioritization checkbox to allow legacy voice prioritization.
Certain products may not receive priority over other voice or data traffic. Consequently, ensure the Support Voice Prioritization checkbox is selected if using products that do not support Wi-Fi Multimedia (WMM) to provide preferred queuing for these VOIP products.
If the Support Voice Prioritization checkbox is selected, the access point will detect non-
WMM capable (legacy) phones that connect to the access point and provide priority queueing for their traffic over normal data.
5-42 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
NOTE Wi-fi functionality requires both the access point and its associated clients are WMM-capable and have WMM enabled. WMM enabled devices can take advantage of their QoS functionality only if using applications that support WMM, and can assign an appropriate priority level to the traffic streams they generate.
5.
Use the two Multicast Address fields to specify one or two MAC addresses used for multicast applications. Some VoIP devices make use of multicast addresses. Using this mechanism ensures multicast packets for these devices are not delayed by the packet queue. Only the first four bytes are used.
6.
Use the drop-down menu to select the radio traffic best representing the network requirements of this WLAN. Options include: manual
11n - wifi
11b - wifi
11n - default
11b - default
11n voice
11b voice
Select the manual option if intending to manually set the Access
Categories for the radio traffic within this WLAN. Only advanced users should manually configure the Access Categories, as setting them inappropriately could negatively impact the access point’s performance.
Use this setting for high-end multimedia devices that using the high rate 802.11n radio.
Use this setting for high-end devices multimedia devices that use the 802.11b radio.
Use this setting for typical “data-centric” MU traffic over the high rate 802.11n radio.
Use this setting for typical “data-centric” MU traffic over the
802.11b radio.
Use this setting for “Voice-Over-IP” traffic over the high rate
802.11n radio.
Use this setting for “Voice-Over-IP” traffic over the 802.11b radio.
CAUTION Motorola recommends using the drop-down menu to define the intended radio traffic within the WLAN. Once an option is selected, you do not need to adjust the values for the Access Categories, unless qualified to do so. Changing the Access Category default values could negatively impact the performance of the access point.
Network Management 5-43
7.
Select the Enable Wi-Fi Multimedia (WMM) QoS Extensions checkbox to configure the access point’s QoS Access Categories. The Access Categories are not configurable unless the checkbox is selected. Access Categories include:
Background
Best Effort
Video
Voice
Backgrounds traffic is typically of a low priority (file transfers, print jobs ect.). Background traffic typically does not have strict latency
(arrival) and throughput requirements.
Best Effort traffic includes traffic from legacy devices or applications lacking QoS capabilities. Best Effort traffic is negatively impacted by data transfers with long delays as well as multimedia traffic.
Video traffic includes music streaming and application traffic requiring priority over all other types of network traffic.
Voice traffic includes VoIP traffic and typically receives priority over
Background and Best Effort traffic.
8.
Configure the CW min and CW max (contention windows), AIFSN (Arbitrary Inter-Frame
Space Number) and TXOPs Time (opportunity to transmit) for each Access Category. Their values are explained as follows.
CW Min
CW Max
AIFSN
The contention window minimum value is the least amount of time the MU waits before transmitting when there is no other data traffic on the network. The longer the interval, the lesser likelihood of collision. This value should be set to a smaller increment for higher priority traffic. Reduce the value when traffic on the WLAN is anticipated as being smaller.
The contention window maximum value is the maximum amount of time the MU waits before transmitting when there is no other data traffic on the network. The longer the interval, the lesser likelihood of collision, but the greater propensity for longer transmit periods.
The AIFSN is the minimum interframe space between data packets transmitted for the selected Access Category. This value should be set to a smaller increment for higher priority traffic to reduce packet delay time.
5-44 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
TXOPs Time 32usec The TXOPs Time is the interval the transmitting MU is assigned for transmitting. The default for Background traffic is 0. The same
TXOPs values should be used for either the 802.11a/n or
802.11b/g/n radio, there is no difference.
TXOPs Time ms TXOP times range from 0.2 ms (background priority) to 3 ms (video priority) in a 802.11a/n network, and from 1.2 ms to 6 ms in an
802.11b/g/n network. The TXOP bursting capability greatly enhances the efficiency for high rate traffic such as streaming video.
9.
Click Apply to save any changes to the New QoS Policy or Edit QoS Policy screen to return to the Quality of Service Configuration screen. Navigating away from the screen without clicking Apply results in all changes to the screens being lost.
10. Click Cancel to securely exit the New QoS Policy or Edit QoS Policy screen and return to the
Quality of Service Configuration screen.
11. Click Logout within the Quality of Service Configuration screen to securely exit the Access
Point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
U-APSD (WMM Power Save) Support
The access point now supports Unscheduled Automatic Power Save Delivery (U-APSD), often referred to as WMM Power Save. U-APSD provides a periodic frame exchange between a voice capable MU and the access point during a VoIP call, while legacy power management is still utilized for typical data frame exchanges. The access point and its associated MU activate the new U-APSD power save approach when a VoIP traffic stream is detected. The MU then buffers frames from the voice traffic stream and sends a VoIP frame with an implicit "poll" request to its associated access point. The access point responds to the poll request with buffered VoIP stream frame(s). When a voice-enabled
MU wakes up at a designated VoIP frame interval, it sends a VoIP frame with an implicit "poll" request to its associated access point. The access point responds to the poll request with buffered VoIP stream frame(s).
NOTE The access point ships with the U-APSD feature disabled by default. It is automatically enabled when WMM is enabled for a WLAN. Thus, U-APSD is only functional when WMM is enabled. If WMM is disabled, then
U-APSD is disabled as well.
Network Management 5-45
5.3.1.4 Configuring WLAN Hotspot Support
The access point enables hotspot operators to provide user authentication and accounting without a special client application. The access point uses a traditional Internet browser as a secure authentication device. The access point issues an IP address to the user using a DHCP server, authenticates the user and grants the user to access the Internet.
When a user visits a public hotspot and wants to browse to a Web page, they boot up their laptop and associate with the local Wi-Fi network by entering the correct SSID. They then start a browser.
The hotspot access controller forces this un-authenticated user to a Welcome page from the hotspot
Operator that allows the user to login with a username and password.
The access point hotspot functionality requires the following:
• HTTP Redirection - Redirects unauthenticated users to a specific page specified by the
Hotspot provider.
• User authentication - Authenticates users using a Radius server.
• Walled garden support - Enables a list of IP address (not domain names) accessed without authentication.
• Billing system integration - Sends accounting records to a Radius accounting server.
CAUTION When using the access point’s hotspot functionality, ensure MUs are re-authenticated when changes are made to the characteristics of a hotspot enabled WLAN, as MUs within the WLAN will be dropped from access point device association.
To configure hotspot functionality for an access point WLAN:
1.
Ensure the Enable Hotspot checkbox is selected from within the target WLAN screen, and ensure the WLAN is properly configured.
Any of the sixteen WLANs on the access point can be configured as a hotspot. For hotspot enabled WLANs, DHCP, DNS, HTTP and HTTPS traffic is allowed (before you login to the hotspot), while TCP/IP packets are redirected to the port on the subnet to which the WLAN is mapped. For WLANs not hotspot-enabled, all packets are allowed.
2.
Click the Configure Hotspot button within the WLAN screen to display the Hotspot
Configuration screen for that target WLAN.
5-46 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
.
3.
Refer to the HTTP Redirection field to specify how the Login, Welcome, and Fail pages are maintained for this specific WLAN. The pages can be hosted locally or remotely
.
Use Default Files Select the Use Default Files checkbox if the login, welcome and fail pages reside on the access point.
Network Management 5-47
Use External URL Select the Use External URL checkbox to define a set of external
URLs for hotspot users to access the login, welcome and fail pages.
To create a redirected page, you need to have a TCP termination locally. On receiving the user credentials from the login page, the access point connects to a radius server, determines the identity of the connected wireless user and allows the user to access the
Internet based on successful authentication.
4.
Use the External URL field to specify the location of the login page, welcome page and fail page used for hotspot access. Defining these settings is required when the Use External
URL checkbox has been selected within the HTTP Redirection field
.
NOTE If an external URL is used, the external Web pages are required to forward user credentials to the access point, which in turn forwards them to the authentication Server (either onboard or external server) in order to grant users Web access.
Login Page URL
Welcome Page URL Define the complete URL for the location of the Welcome page. The
Welcome page asserts the hotspot user has logged in successfully and can access the Internet.
Fail Page URL
Define the complete URL for the location of the Login page. The
Login screen will prompt the hotspot user for a username and password to access the Welcome page.
Define the complete URL for the location of the Fail page. The Fail screen asserts the hotspot authentication attempt failed, you are not allowed to access the Internet and you need to provide correct login information to access the Internet.
5.
Select the Enable Hotspot User Timeout checkbox to define a timeout interval forcing users (when exceeded) to re-establish their login credentials to continue using the access point supported hotspot.
Leaving the checkbox unselected is not recommended unless you plan to provide unlimited hotspot support to users.
If this option is selected, enter an interval (between 15 and 180 minutes). When the provided interval is exceeded, the user is logged out of their hotspot session and forced to login to the hotspot again to access to the hotspot supported WLAN. The default timeout interval is
15 minutes.
5-48 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
NOTE The Enable Hotspot User Timeout option is only available if using the access point’s internal Radius Server for user authentication.
6.
Click the White List Entries button (within the WhiteList Configuration field) to create a set of allowed destination IP addresses. These allowed destination IP addresses are called a White List. Ten configurable IP addresses are allowed for each WLAN. For more
information, see Defining the Hotspot White List on page 5-49
.
NOTE If using an external Web Server over the WAN port, and the hotspot’s
HTTP pages (login or welcome) redirect to the access point’s WAN IP address for CGI scripts, the IP address of the external Web server and the access point’s WAN IP address should be entered in the White List.
7.
Refer to the Radius Accounting field to enable Radius accounting and specify the a timeout and retry value for the Radius server.
Enable Accounting
Server Address
Radius Port
Shared Secret
Timeout
Retries
Select the Enable Accounting checkbox to enable a Radius
Accounting Server used for Radius authentication for a target hotspot user.
Specify an IP address for the external Radius Accounting server used to provide Radius accounting for the hotspot. If using this option, an internal Radius server cannot be used. The IP address of the internal Radius server is fixed at 127.0.0.1 and cannot be used for the external Radius server.
Specify the port on which the Radius accounting server is listening.
Specify a shared secret for accounting authentication for the hotspot. The shared secret is required to match the shared secret on the external Radius accounting server.
Set the timeout value in seconds (1-255) used to timeout users accessing the Radius Accounting server if they have not successfully accessed the Accounting Server.
Define the number of retries (1-10) the user is allowed to access the Radius Accounting Server if the first attempt fails.
The default is 1.
Network Management 5-49
8.
Refer to the Radius Configuration field to define a primary and secondary Radius server port and shared secret password.
Select mode
Pri Server IP
Pri Port
Pri Secret
Sec Server IP
Sec Port
Sec Secret
Use the Select mode drop-down menu to define whether an
Internal or External server is to be used for the primary server.
Define the IP address of the primary Radius server. This is the address of your first choice for Radius server.
Enter the TCP/IP port number for the server acting as the primary
Radius server. The default port is 1812.
Enter the shared secret password used with the primary Radius
Server.
Define the IP address of the secondary Radius server. This is the address of your second choice for Radius server.
Enter the TCP/IP port number for the server acting as the secondary
Radius server. The default port is 1812.
Enter the shared secret password used with the secondary Radius
Server.
9.
Click OK to save any changes to the Hotspot Configuration screen. Navigating away from the screen without clicking Apply results in all changes to the screens being lost.
10. Click Cancel (if necessary) to undo any changes made. Cancel reverts the settings displayed on the Hotspot Configuration screen to the last saved configuration.
Defining the Hotspot White List
To host a Login, Welcome or Fail page on the external Web server, the IP address of that Web server should be in access point’s White List.
NOTE If using an external Web Server over the WAN port, and the hotspot’s
HTTP pages (login or welcome) redirect to the access point’s WAN IP address for CGI scripts, the IP address of the external Web server and the access point’s WAN IP address should be entered in the White List.
5-50 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
When a client requests a URL from a Web server, the login handler returns an HTTP redirection status code (for example, 301 Moved Permanently), which indicates to the browser it should look for the page at another URL. This other URL can be a local or remote login page (based on the hotspot configuration). The login page URL is specified in the location’s HTTP header.
To host a Login page on the external Web server, the IP address of the Web server should be in the
White list (list of IP addresses allowed to access the server) configuration. Ensure the Login page is designed so the submit action always posts the login data on the access point.
To define the White List for a target WLAN:
1.
Click the White List Entries button from within the WLAN’s Hotspot Config screen.
2.
Click the Add button to define an IP address for an allowed destination IP address.
3.
Select a White List entry and click the Del button to remove the address from the White List.
4.
Click OK to return to the Hotspot Config screen where the configuration can be saved by clicking the Apply button.
Now user enters his/her credentials on Login page and submits the page. Login Handler will execute a CGI script, which will use this data as input.
5.
Click Cancel to return to the Hotspot Config screen without saving any of the White List entries defined within the White List Entries screen.
Network Management 5-51
5.3.2 Setting the WLAN’s Radio Configuration
Each AP-7131N-FGR WLAN can have a separate 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n radio configured and mapped to that WLAN. This enables each WLAN to optimize its radio configuration in respect to its intended client needs.
With dual-radio model AP-7131N-FGR access points, the Radio Configuration screen enables you to configure one radio for 802.11a (or a/n) use and the other for 802.11b/g (or b/g/n) support.
The new AP-7131N-FGR model access point is available in two different dual radio models. The two models available to the AP-7131N-FGR series include:
• AP-7131N-66040-FGR (802.11a/n and 802.11b/g/n capable)
• AP-7131N-44040-FGR (802.11a and 802.11b/g capable)
NOTE With this most recent 4.0 release of the access point firmware, WIPS functionality is no longer configured within a designated WIPS screen.
The WIPS Server designation and radio configuration is now set as part of the access point’s quick setup. For more information on the quick setup configuration and how to define WIPS radio support, see
Device Settings on page 3-8 . For a description of WIPS functionality and
how it relates to access point operation, see
.
For radios 1 and 2, WIPS and WLAN modes are mutually exclusive. In WLAN mode, a radio functions as a traditional access point, providing wireless bridging. In WIPS mode a radio provides no wireless bridging. Instead, the radio performs the following functionality:
• Wireless Termination - The access point attempts to force an unwanted (or unauthorized) connection to disconnect.
• Wireless Sniffing - All received frames are reported to the WIPS server. This feature provides the WIPS server with visibility into the activity on the wireless network. The WIPS server processes the received traffic and provides the IT administrator with useful information about the 802.11 RF activities in the enterprise.
• Spectrum Analysis - The data needed to provide the current RF Spectrum is provided to the
WIPS server. The access point does not display the data, but it is available to the WIPS server. Spectrum analysis can operate only when there are no WLAN radios configured. The
WIPS daemon and server are responsible for limiting operation only when there is no radio in WLAN mode. When a configuration change is made at the AP, the Spectrum Analysis operation stops.
5-52 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
• Live View- The WIPS application (commonly referred to as Motorola Enterprise) provides a live view of the sensors, APs and MUs operating in a WLAN. Live view support exists throughout the WIPS application, wherever a device icon appears in an information panel or navigation tree. Access Live View by right-clicking on the device, which automatically limits the data to the specific device your choose.
The Radio Configuration screen displays with tabs for each access point radio. Verify tabs are selected and configured separately to enable the radio(s), and optionally set their mesh network definitions.
To set the access point radio configuration:
1.
Select Network Configuration -> Wireless -> Radio Configuration from the access point menu tree.
Review the Radio Function to assess if this radio is currently functioning as a WLAN radio or has been dedicated as a WIPS sensor.
Network Management 5-53
Refer to RF Band of Operation parameter to ensure you are enabling the correct radio. After the settings are applied within this Radio Configuration screen, the Radio
Status and MUs connected values update. If this is an existing radio within a mesh network, these values update in real-time.
NOTE This section describes mesh networking (setting the radio’s base and client bridge configuration) at a high level. For a detailed overview on the theory of mesh networking, see
Mesh Networking Overview on page 9-1
.
For detailed information on the implications of setting the mesh
configuration, see Configuring Mesh Networking Support on page 9-7 . To
review mesh network deployment scenarios, see Mesh Network
Deployment - Quick Setup on page 9-20 .
2.
Set the Maximum MUs between 0 - 127.
The maximum number of MUs that can associate to an AP-7131N-FGR is 127. Therefore, the possible number of MUs that can associate to each radio must be negotiated between 0 and
127.
NOTE The AP does not support MU radio associations if its Maximum MUs value is set to 0. Alternatively, if you set the value to 127 for one radio, you risk shutting out MU associations for the other radio, as the AP does not validate the logic of a user’s MU association distribution.
3.
Select the Base Bridge checkbox to allow the radio to accept client bridge connections from other access points in client bridge mode. The base bridge is the acceptor of mesh network data from those client bridges within the mesh network and never the initiator.
4.
If the Base Bridge checkbox has been selected, use the Max# Client Bridges parameter to define the client bridge load on a particular base bridge.
The maximum number of client bridge connections per radio is 12, with 24 representing the maximum for dual-radio models.
CAUTION An access point is Base Bridge mode logs out whenever a Client
Bridge associates to the Base Bridge over the LAN connection. This problem is not experienced over the access point’s WAN connection. If this situation is experienced, log-in to the access point again.
Once the settings within the Radio Configuration screen are applied (for an initial deployment), the current number of client bridge connections for this specific radio displays
5-54 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide within the CBs Connected field. If this is an existing radio within a mesh network, this value updates in real-time.
CAUTION A problem could arise if a Base Bridge’s Indoor channel is not available on an Outdoor Client Bridge's list of available channels. As long as an Outdoor Client Bridge has the Indoor Base Bridge channel in its available list of channels, it can associate to the Base Bridge.
5.
Select the Client Bridge checkbox to enable the access point radio to initiate client bridge connections with other mesh network supported access point’s using the same WLAN.
If the Client Bridge checkbox has been selected, use the Mesh Network Name drop-down menu to select the WLAN (ESS) the client bridge uses to establish a wireless link. The default setting, is (WLAN1). Motorola recommends creating (and naming) a WLAN specifically for mesh networking support to differentiate the Mesh supported WLAN from non-Mesh supported WLANs.
CAUTION An access point in client bridge mode cannot use a WLAN configured with EAP 802.1x based security scheme, as these authentication types secure user credentials not the mesh network itself.
NOTE Ensure you have verified the radio configuration for both Radio 1 and
Radio 2 before saving the existing settings and exiting the Radio
Configuration screen.
Once the settings within the Radio Configuration screen are applied (for an initial deployment), the current number of base bridges visible to the radio displays within the BBs
Visible field, and the number of base bridges currently connected to the radio displays within the BBs Connected field. If this is an existing radio within a mesh network, these values update in real-time.
6.
Click the Advanced button to define a prioritized list of access points to define Mesh
Connection links. For a detailed overview on mesh networking and how to configure the radio for mesh networking support, see
Configuring Mesh Networking Support on page 9-7 .
7.
With dual-radio model AP-7131N-FGR access points, refer to the Mesh Timeout dropdown menu to define whether one of the radio’s beacons on an existing WLAN or if a client bridge radio uses an uplink connection. The following drop-down menu options are available:
Network Management 5-55
Disabled
Uplink Detect
Enabled
When disabled, both radios are up at boot time and beaconing. If one radio (radio 1) does not have a mesh connection, the other radio (radio 2) is not affected. Radio 2 continues to beacon and associate MUs, but MU's can only communicate amongst themselves using the access point. Disabled is the default value.
When Uplink Detect is selected, the access point only boots up the radio configured as a client bridge. The access point boots up the second radio as soon as the first mesh connection is established.
However, if the client bridge radio loses its uplink connection, the second radio shuts down immediately. Uplink detect is the recommended setting within a multi-hop mesh network.
If the mesh connection is down on one radio (radio 1), the other radio (radio 2) is brought down and stops beaconing after the timeout period (45 - 65535 seconds). This allows the client bridge
(radio 1) to roam without dropping the MU's associated to radio 2.
The disadvantage is that radio 2 may beacon for the timeout period and have to drop associated MU's because radio 1 could not establish its uplink. The default timeout period is 45 seconds.
NOTE The Mesh Time Out variable overrides the Ethernet Port Time Out (EPTO) setting on the LAN page when the access point is in bridge mode. As long as the mesh is down, the access point acts in accordance to the Mesh
Time Out setting regardless of the state of the Ethernet. However, if the
Ethernet goes down and the mesh link is still up, the EPTO takes effect.
For a detailed overview on mesh networking and how to configure the radio for mesh networking support, see
Configuring Mesh Networking Support on page 9-7 .
8.
Click Apply to save any changes to the Radio Configuration screen. Navigating away from the screen without clicking Apply results in all changes to the screens being lost.
5-56 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
CAUTION When defining a Mesh configuration and changes are saved, the mesh network temporarily goes down. The Mesh network is unavailable because the access point radio is reconfigured when applying changes. This can be problematic for users making changes within a deployed mesh network. If updating the mesh network using a LAN connection, the access point applet loses connection and the connection must be re-instated. If updating the mesh network using a
WAN connection, the access point applet does not lose connection, but the mesh network is unavailable until the changes have been applied.
9.
Click Undo Changes (if necessary) to undo any changes made. Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the Radio Configuration screen to the last saved configuration.
10. Click Logout to securely exit the Access Point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
Once the target radio has been enabled from the Radio Configuration screen, configure the radio’s properties by selecting it from the access point menu tree.
For more information, see
Configuring the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n Radio on page 5-56 .
5.3.2.1 Configuring the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n Radio
Configure an 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n radio by selecting the radio’s name (as defined using the
802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n radio configuration screen described below) as a sub-menu item under the
Radio Configuration menu item. Use the radio configuration screen to set the radio’s placement properties, define the radio’s threshold and QoS settings, set the radio’s channel and antenna settings and define beacon and DTIM intervals.
To configure the access point’s 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n radio:
1.
Select Network Configuration -> Wireless -> Radio Configuration -> Radio1 (default name) from the access point menu tree.
Network Management 5-57
2.
Configure the Properties field to assign a name and placement designation for the radio.
Placement
MAC Address
Radio Type
Use the Placement drop-down menu to specify whether the radio is located outdoors or indoors. Default placement depends on the country of operation selected for the access point.
The access point, like other Ethernet devices, has a unique, hardware encoded Media Access Control (MAC) or IEEE address.
MAC addresses determine the device sending or receiving data. A
MAC address is a 48-bit number written as six hexadecimal bytes separated by colons. For example: 00:A0:F8:24:9A:C8. For additional information on access point MAC address assignments, see
MAC Address Assignment on page 1-29
.
The Radio Type parameter simply displays the radio type as
802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n. This field is read only and always displays the radio type selected from the access point menu tree under the Radio Configuration item.
5-58 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
ERP Protection
HT Protection
Extended Rate PHY (ERP) allows 802.11g MUs to interoperate with
802.11b only MUs. ERP Protection is managed automatically by the access point and informs users when 802.11b MUs are present within the access point’s coverage area. The presence of 802.11b
MUs within the 802.11g coverage area negatively impacts network performance, so this feature should looked to as an indicator of why network performance has been degraded.
Displays the HT Protection state, and whether a non HT protected
MU is currently associated with the access point.
3.
Configure the Channel, Power and Rate Settings field to assign a channel, antenna diversity setting, radio transmit power level and data rate.
802.11 b/g/n mode For radio1, specify B, G and N , B and G , G Only , B only or N Only to define whether the 802.11b/g/n radio transmits in the 2.4 Ghz band exclusively for 802.11b (legacy) clients or transmits in the 2.4
Ghz band for 802.11g/n clients. Selecting b and g enables the access point to transmit to both b and g clients if legacy clients
(802.11b) partially comprise the network. Select accordingly based on the MU requirements of the network.
The rates for the access point’s 2.4 GHz radio are as follows:
B, G and N - Allows only basic rates (default setting).
B and G - Allows 11b basic rates. Does not allow MCS rates.
G and N - Requires basic rates (either 6, 12, 24 or 1, 2, 5.5, 11, 6,
12, 24).
G Only - Requires one 11g basic rate. Does not allow MCS rates.
B Only - Allows for 11b rates only. Does not allow G or N rates.
N Only - Requires basic MCS rates.
Note: If the mode is B and G, the Channel Width option is not available, and a Secondary Channel cannot be defined.
For the 5 GHz radio, specify A and N , A Only or N Only to define whether the 802.11a/n radio transmits in the 5 Ghz band exclusively for 802.11a clients, 802.11n clients or transmits in the
5 Ghz band for both 802.11a/n clients.
A Only - Allows 11a rates.
N Only - Requires basic MCS rates.
A and N - Allows only 11a basic rates (default setting).
Network Management 5-59
Channel Width
Channel Selection
Power Level
Select the Channel Width (MHz) from the drop-down menu.
The
AP radio can support 20 and 40 MHz channel widths. 20 MHz is the default setting for the 2.4 GHz radio. 20/40 MHz operation (the default setting for the 5 GHz radio) allows the access point to receive packets from clients using 20 MHz of bandwidth while transmitting a packet using 40 MHz bandwidth. This mode is supported for 11n users on both the 2.4 and 5 GHz radios. If an 11n user selects two channels (a Primary and Secondary channel), the system is configured for dynamic 20/40 operation.
When 20/40 is selected, clients can take advantage of “wider channels.” 802.11n clients experience improved throughput using
40 MHz while legacy clients (either 802.11a or 802.11b/g depending on the radio selected) can still be serviced without interruption using 20 MHz. Define a value as needed depending on the channel used. This field is not available when B and G is selected as the 802.11 b/g/n mode.
The following channel selection options exist:
User Selected - This is the default setting. If 20/40 MHz is selected as the Channel Width (supporting 11n), the Secondary
Channel drop-down menu becomes enabled. The user must define the primary channel first. Then, depending on the primary channel defined, the secondary channel list is filled with channels making the combination of primary and secondary channels valid. The actual channels available depend on regulatory domain requirements.
Automatic - When the access point is booted, the access point scans non-overlapping channels listening for beacons from other access points. After the channels are scanned, it will select the channel with the fewest access points. In the case of multiple access points on the same channel, it will select the channel with the lowest average power level.
The Random option is available for use with the 802.11a/n radio.
To comply with Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) requirements in the European Union, the 802.11a/n radio uses a randomly selected channel each time the access point is powered on.
Use the drop-down menu to defines the transmit power of the
802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n antenna(s). The values are expressed in dBm and mW.
5-60 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Set Rates Click the Set Rates button to define minimum and maximum data transmit rates for the radio.
Use the Basic Rates drop-down menu to select the rates available for either the 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz radio band. The menu options differ, based on the radio band.
For 2.4 GHz, the following options are available:
• 1 and 2 Mbps
• 1, 2, 5.5 and 11 Mbps (default setting)
• 1, 2, 5.5, 11 and 6, 12, 24 Mbps
• 1, 2, 5.5, 11 and 6, 12, 24 Mbps and MCS 0-7
• 6, 12 and 24 Mbps
• 6, 12 and 24 Mbps and MCS 0-7
• MCS 0-7
For 5 Ghz, the following options are available:
• 6, 12 and 24 Mbps
• 6, 12 and 24 Mbps and MCS 0-7
• MCS 0-7
When a basic rate option is selected (from the drop-down menu), the rates are automatically selected and grayed out in the
Supported Rates radio boxes. Select remaining rates as needed for additional supported rates.
Enable the Support Short Guard Interval checkbox to set a guard interval (for interference protection) for 20 MHz and 40 MHz channel widths. When enabled, the AP’s radio defines values to enable a packet to be transmitted with guard interval based on the configuration and capabilities of associated clients. Clients can associate to an access point regardless of whether they support a short guard interval.
If supporting 802.11n, select a Supported MCS index (0-15). Set a MCS (modulation and coding scheme) in respect to the radio’s channel width and guard interval. A MCS defines (based on RF channel conditions) an optimal combination of 8 data rates, bonded channels, multiple spatial streams, different guard intervals and modulation types. MUs can associate as long as they support basic
MCS (as well as non-11n basic rates).
Click OK to implement the selected rates and return to the radio configuration screen. Clicking Cancel reverts the Set Rates screen to the last saved configuration.
Network Management 5-61
4.
Configure the Performance field to set the preamble, thresholds values and QoS values for the radio.
5-62 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Support Short
Preamble
RTS Threshold
Set RF QoS
The preamble is approximately 8 bytes of packet header generated by the access point and attached to a packet prior to transmission from the 802.11b radio. The preamble length for 802.11b transmissions is rate dependant. A short preamble is 50% shorter than a long preamble. Leave the checkbox unselected if in a mixed
MU/AP environment, as MUs and the access point are required to have the same RF Preamble settings for interoperability. The default is Disabled. The preamble length for 802.11a and 802.11g transmissions is the same, with no long or short preamble lengths.
RTS allows the access point to use RTS (Request To Send) on frames longer than the specified length.
The default is 2341bytes.
Click the Set RF QoS button to display the Set RF QOS screen to set QoS parameters for the radio. Do not confuse with the QoS configuration screen used for a WLAN. The Set RF QoS screen initially appears with default values displayed.
Select manual from the Select Parameter set drop-down menu to edit the CW min and CW max (contention window), AIFSN
(Arbitrary Inter-Frame Space Number) and TXOPs Time for each
Access Category. These are the QoS policies for the 802.11a/n or
802.11b/g/n radio, not the QoS policies configured for the WLAN
(as created or edited from the Quality of Service Configuration screen).
Motorola recommends only advanced users manually set these values. If the type of data-traffic is known, use the drop-down menu to select an option representative of the intended radio band support. Wifi represents multimedia traffic, default is typical data traffic and voice is for “Voice-Over-IP” supported wireless devices.
Click OK to implement the selected QoS values and return to the
802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n radio configuration screen. Clicking
Cancel reverts the screen to the last saved configuration.
Network Management 5-63
Set Aggregation Select the Enable Transmit A-MSDU checkbox (within the
A-MSDU Aggregation field) to enable the aggregation of MAC
Service frames. When enabled, long frames can be both sent and received (up to 4 KB). The A-MSDU buffer limit is not user configurable. If disabled, no AMSDU packets are transmitted by the access point.
Select the Enable Transmit A-MPDU checkbox (within the
A-MPDU Aggregation field) to allow the aggregation of MAC
Protocol frames. When enabled, long frames can be both sent and received (up to 64 KB). When enabled, define an A-MPDU Transmit
Size Limit (default is 2 bytes), A-MPDU Receive Size Limit (default is 65535 bytes) and an A-MPDU Minimum Spacing Time (default is
0 usec). Set these values as appropriate to broadcast the maximum length A-MPDU transmit and receive intervals that can be used.
5-64 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
5.
Refer to the Beacon Settings field to set the radio beacon and DTIM intervals.
Beacon Interval
DTIM Interval
The beacon interval controls the performance of power save stations. A small interval may make power save stations more responsive, but it will also cause them to consume more battery power. A large interval makes power save stations less responsive, but could increase power savings. The default is 100. Avoid changing this parameter as it can adversely affect performance.
The DTIM interval defines how often broadcast frames are delivered for each of the four access point BSSIDs. If a system has an abundance of broadcast traffic and it needs to be delivered quickly, Motorola recommends decreasing the DTIM interval for that specific BSSID. However, decreasing the DTIM interval decreases the battery life on power save stations. The default is 10 for each BSSID. Motorola recommends using the default value unless qualified to understand the performance risks of changing it.
Network Management 5-65
6.
Refer to the QBSS Load Element Settings field to determine whether channel usage data is transmitted to associated devices.
Enable QBSS load element
When enabled, the access point communicates channel usage data to associated devices using an interval you define. The QBSS load represents the percentage of time the channel is in use by the access point and the access point’s MU count. This information is helpful in assessing the access point’s overall load on a channel, its availability for additional device associations and multi media traffic support. This setting is enabled by default.
QBSS Beacon Interval Set the QBSS beacon (transmission) interval the access point uses for sending QBSS data to associated devices.
7.
Select the Advanced Settings tab to strategically map BSSIDs to WLANs in order to define them as primary WLANs.
Defining Primary WLANs allows an administrator to dedicate BSSIDs (4 BSSIDs are available for mapping) to WLANs. From that initial BSSID assignment, Primary WLANs can
5-66 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide be defined from within the WLANs assigned to BSSID groups 1 through 4. Each BSSID beacons only on the primary WLAN.
The user should assign each WLAN to its own BSSID. In cases where more than four WLANs are required, WLANs should be grouped according to their security policies so all of the
WLANs on a BSSID have the same security policy. It is generally a bad idea to have WLANs with different security policies on the same BSSID, as this will result in warning or error messages.
NOTE When using a AP-7131N-FGR dual-radio access point, 4 BSSIDs for the
802.11b/g/n radio and 4 BSSIDs for the 802.11a/n radio are available.
WLAN
BSSID
BC/MC Cipher
Status
Lists the WLAN names available to the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n radio that can be assigned to a BSSID.
Assign a BSSID value of 1 through 4 to a WLAN in order to map the
WLAN to a specific BSSID.
A read only field displaying the downgraded BC/MC (Broadcast/
Multicast) cipher for a WLAN based on the BSSID and VLAN ID to which it has been mapped.
Displays the following color coded status:
Message
Red - Error (Invalid Configuration)
Yellow - Warning (Broadcast Downgrade)
Green - Good (Configuration is OK)
Displays the verbal status of the WLAN and BSSID assignments. If the Status column displays green, the Message will typically be
Configuration is OK . If yellow, a description of invalid configuration displays.
8.
Use the Primary WLAN drop-down menu to select a WLAN from those WLANs sharing the same BSSID. The selected WLAN is the primary WLAN for the specified BSSID.
9.
Click Apply to save any changes to the Radio Settings and Advanced Settings screens.
Navigating away from the screen without clicking Apply results in changes to the screens being lost.
10. Click Undo Changes (if necessary) to undo any changes made to the screen and its subscreens. Undo Changes reverts the settings to the last saved configuration.
Network Management 5-67
11. Click Logout to securely exit the Access Point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
5.3.3 Configuring MU Rate Limiting
Use the Rate Limiting screen to control the MU rate limit allotted to individual WLANs. MU rate limiting enables an administrator to determine how much radio bandwidth is allowed to each MU within any one of the 16 supported AP WLANs.
To define MU rate limits for specific WLANs on an access point radio:
1.
Select Network Configuration -> Wireless -> Rate Limit from the access point menu tree.
2.
Select the enable Rate Limiting option to globally enable MU rate limiting for each of the access point’s 16 WLANs.
5-68 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Once enabled, MU rate limiting still needs to be enabled for a specific WLAN, then the rate limit allocation needs to be defined for MU traffic within that specific WLAN. To modify a
WLAN-to-radio assignment, see Creating/Editing Individual WLANs on page 5-29 .
3.
Refer to the Per WLAN Rate Limits field to review the rate limits defined thus far for any of the access point’s 16 WLANs.
The rates are displayed in Kbps for both wired to wireless and wireless to wired traffic flows from the WLAN and its radio configuration.
4.
Click Apply to save any changes to the Bandwidth Management screen. Navigating away from the screen without clicking Apply results in all changes to the screens being lost.
5.
Click Undo Changes (if necessary) to undo any changes made. Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the Bandwidth Management screen to the last saved configuration.
6.
Click Logout to securely exit the Access Point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
NOTE Though the Rogue AP and Firewall features appear after the Bandwidth
Management features within the access point menu tree, they are
described in Chapter 6, Configuring Access Point Security on page 6-1
, as both items are data protection functions. More specifically, see,
Configuring Firewall Settings on page 6-13 and
5.4 Configuring Router Settings
The access point router uses routing tables and protocols to forward data packets from one network to another. The access point router manages traffic within the network, and directs traffic from the
WAN to destinations on the access point managed LAN. Use the access point Router screen to view the router's connected routes. To access the Router screen.
1.
Select Network Configuration -> Router from the access point menu tree.
Network Management 5-69
2.
Refer to the access point Router Table field to view existing routes.
The access point Router Table field displays a list of connected routes between an enabled subnet and the router. These routes can be changed by modifying the IP address and subnet masks of the enabled subnets.
The information in the access point Router Table is dynamically generated from settings applied on the WAN screen. The destination for each subnet is its IP address. The subnet mask (or network mask) and gateway settings are those belonging to each subnet. Displayed interfaces are those associated with destination IP addresses. To change any of the network address information within the WAN screen, see
Configuring WAN Settings on page 5-16 .
3.
From the Use Default Gateway drop-down menu, select the WAN or either of the two
LANs (if enabled) to server as the default gateway to forward data packets from one network to another.
4.
To set or view the RIP configuration, click the RIP Configuration button.
Routing Information Protocol (RIP) is an interior gateway protocol that specifies how routers exchange routing-table information. The Router screen also allows the administrator to
5-70 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide select the type of RIP and the type of RIP authentication used by the switch. For more information on configuring RIP, see
Setting the RIP Configuration on page 5-71 .
5.
Use the User Defined Routes field to add or delete static routes.
The User Defined Routes field allows the administrator to view, add or delete internal static
(dedicated) routes.
a. Click the Add button to create a new table entry.
b. Highlight an entry and click the Del (delete) button to remove an entry.
c. Specify the destination IP address, subnet mask, and gateway information for the internal static route.
d. Select an enabled subnet from the Interface(s) column’s drop-down menu to complete the table entry. Information in the Metric column is a user-defined value (from 1 to
65535) used by router protocols to determine the best hop routes.
6.
Click the Apply button to save the changes.
7.
Click Logout to securely exit the access point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
Network Management 5-71
5.4.1 Setting the RIP Configuration
To set the RIP configuration:
1.
From within the RIP Configuration field, select the RIP Type from the drop-down menu. The following options are available:
No RIP
RIP v1
RIP v2 (v1 compat)
RIP v2
The No RIP option prevents the access point’s router from exchanging routing information with other routers. Routing information may not be appropriate to share, for example, if the access point manages a private LAN.
RIP version 1 is a mature, stable, and widely supported protocol. It is well suited for use in stub networks and in small autonomous systems that do not have enough redundant paths to warrant the overhead of a more sophisticated protocol.
RIP version 2 (compatible with version 1) is an extension of RIP v1’s capabilities, but it is still compatible with RIP version 1. RIP version
2 increases the amount of packet information to provide the a simple authentication mechanism to secure table updates.
RIP version 2 enables the use of a simple authentication mechanism to secure table updates. More importantly, RIP version
2 supports subnet masks, a critical feature not available in RIP version 1. This selection is not compatible with RIP version 1 support.
2.
Select a routing direction from the RIP Direction drop-down menu. Both (for both directions), Rx only (receive only), and TX only (transmit only) are available options.
5-72 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
3.
If RIP v2 or RIP v2 (v1 compat) is the selected RIP type, the RIP v2 Authentication field becomes active. Select the type of authentication to use from the Authentication Type drop-down menu. Available options include:
None
Simple
MD5
This option disables the RIP authentication.
This option enable RIP version 2’s simple authentication mechanism. This setting activates the Password (Simple
Authentication) field.
This option enables the MD5 algorithm for data verification. MD5 takes as input a message of arbitrary length and produces a 128bit fingerprint. The MD5 setting activates the RIP v2 Authentication settings for keys (below).
If a RIP type is set, a message displays warning of compromises to the LAN or LAN firewall.
Select Yes to acknowledge the risk and continue or No to return to the Router screen.
Network Management 5-73
4.
If the Simple authentication method is selected, specify a password of up to 15 alphanumeric characters in the Password (Simple Authentication) area.
5.
If the MD5 authentication method is selected, fill in the Key #1 field (Key #2 is optional).
Enter any numeric value between 0 and 256 into the MD5 ID area. Enter a string consisting of up to 16 alphanumeric characters in the MD5 Auth Key area.
6.
Click the OK button to return to the Router screen. From there, click Apply to save the changes.
5.5 Configuring IP Filtering
Use the access point’s IP filtering functionality to determine which IP packets are processed normally by the access point and which are discarded. If discarded, a packet is deleted and ignored (as if never received). The allow/deny mechanism used by IP filtering makes it similar to an access control list
(ACL).
IP filtering supports the creation of up to 20 filter rules enforced at layer 3. Once defined (using the access point’s SNMP, GUI or CLI), filtering rules can be enforced on the access point’s LAN1 or LAN2 interfaces and within any of the 16 access point WLANs. An additional default action is also available denying traffic when filter rules fail. Lastly, imported and exported configurations retain their defined
IP filtering configurations.
IP filtering is a network layer facility. The IP filtering mechanism does not know anything about the application using the network connections, only the connections themselves. For example, you can deny user access to an internal network on the default telnet port, but if you rely on IP filtering alone, you cannot stop people from using the telnet program with a port you allow to pass through your firewall.
There are a couple of important rules a packet adheres to when its compared with the filter policy list:
• Packets are always filtered in sequential order (filtering always begins with the first filter policy displayed in the IP Filtering screen, then the second, third, and so on). The IP Filtering screen is invoked for LANs within the LAN1 or LAN2 screen and for WLANs within the New
WLAN or Edit WLAN screen. It’s from this screen that allow or deny designations are set for
IP filtering.
5-74 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
• Packets are compared with lines of the filter policy list until a match is made. Once a packet matches a line of the list, it's acted upon, and no further comparisons take place. If inspected packets are determined to not be IP packets, it permitted by the access point for its inbound or outbound destination.
Once you create a filter policy, apply it to an interface in either an incoming or outgoing direction.
• Traffic entering the access point’s LAN1, LAN2 or WLAN (1-16) from a client is classified as
Incoming traffic.
• Traffic leaving the access point’s LAN1, LAN2 or WLAN (1-16) in route to a client is classified as Outgoing traffic.
To filter packets to better segregate desired versus undesired data traffic:
1.
Select Network Configuration -> IP Filtering from the access point menu tree.
When the IP Filtering screen is initially displayed, there are no default filtering policies, and they must be created.
Network Management 5-75
NOTE With IP Filtering, users can only define a destination port, not a source port.
2.
Click the Add button to define the attributes of a new IP Filtering policy. The following policy
(or filtering rule) attributes require definition.
Filter name Create a name for the filter policy unique to its function in order to differentiate it from others that may have somewhat similar configurations.
Protocol
Port Start
Port End
Src Start
Src End
Dst Start
Dst End
Specify the protocol used for the filter policy. The options are ALL,
TCP, UDP, ICMP, PIM, GRE, RSVP, IDP, PUP, EGP, IPIP, ESP, AH, IGMP,
IPVG, COMPR_H and RAW_IP. The protocol number can also be used as the protocol name. This allows the use or protocols that are not within the drop-down menu.
Defines the socket number (or port) number representing the beginning protocol port range either allowed or denied permission to the target LAN1, LAN2 or WLAN.
Defines the socket number (or port) number representing the ending protocol port range either allowed or denied permission to the target LAN1, LAN2 or WLAN.
Creates a range beginning source IP address to be either allowed or denied IP packet forwarding. The source address is where the packet originated. Setting the Src End value the same as the Src
Start allows or denies just this address without defining a range.
Providing this address completes a range of source (data origination) addresses than can either be allowed or denied access to the LAN1, LAN2 or WLAN.
Creates a range beginning destination IP address to be either allowed or denied IP packet forwarding. Setting the Dst End value the same as the Dst Start allows or denies just this address without defining a range.
Providing this address completes a range of destination addresses than can either be allowed or denied access to the LAN1, LAN2 or
WLAN.
5-76 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
In Use Displays YES if the listed filter policy is currently being utilized by
LAN1, LAN2 or a WLAN. NO is displayed if the listed policy is currently not be utilized by either of the LAN ports or any of the access point’s 16 WLANs.
NOTE Once filter policies have been defined, they can then be applied to traffic on either of the two access point LAN ports or any of the 16 access point
WLANs. The procedure for applying a filtering policy is the same, as both the LAN1/LAN2 and WLAN screens display the same IP Filtering sub screen for this operation. For more information, see
LAN1, LAN2 or a WLAN (1-16) on page 5-76
.
3.
If necessary, select an existing policy and select the Del button to permanently remove the filtering policy from those available.
4.
Click Apply to save any changes to the IP Filtering screen. Navigating away from the screen without clicking Apply results in all changes to the screens being lost.
5.
Click Undo Changes to securely exit the IP Filtering screen without saving your changes.
6.
Click Logout to securely exit the Access Point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
5.5.1 Applying a Filter to LAN1, LAN2 or a WLAN (1-16)
Once filter polices are defined, they must be applied to a LAN or WLAN within the LAN1 or LAN2 screens, or within the WLAN’s New/Edit screens, not from within the main IP Filtering menu.
To apply an existing IP filter policy to LAN1, LAN2 or a WLAN:
1.
Display the IP Filtering menu.
From the LAN1 or LAN2 screen: a. Select Network Configuration -> LAN -> LAN1 (or LAN2) from the access point menu tree.
b. Select the Enable IP Filtering button in the lower, right-hand side of the screen.
c. Select the IP Filtering button.
From the Wireless screen: a. Select Network Configuration -> Wireless from the access point menu tree. b. Click the Create button to apply the filter to a new WLAN, or highlight an existing WLAN and click the Edit button. Either the New WLAN or Edit WLAN screen displays.
Network Management 5-77 c. Select the Enable IP Filtering button in the lower portion of the screen.
d. Select the IP Filtering button.
The screen displays with both the Default Incoming Deny and Default Outgoing Deny checkboxes selected by default. Consequently, if you enable IP filtering but do not apply any filters that allow IP traffic, then no IP traffic will be forwarded, as the default deny settings have precedence.
2.
Use the Filter name drop menu to select an existing filter.
3.
Set the Direction as Incoming or Outgoing as required.
4.
Apply an Action of Allow or Deny to permit or restrict the rules of this filter in the direction selected.
5.
Select Add to apply the filter(s) (and their rules and permissions) to the LAN or WLAN.
6.
Click Insert to insert the filter(s) to the LAN or WLAN.
7.
Click OK add the IP filter to the LAN or WLAN. Navigating away from the screen without clicking OK results in all changes to the screens being lost.
8.
Click Cancel to securely exit the IP Filtering screen without saving your changes.
5-78 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Configuring Access Point Security
Security measures for the AP-7131N-FGR and its ‘WLANs are critical. Use the available
AP-7131N-FG security options to protect the access point LAN from wireless vulnerabilities, and safeguard the transmission of RF packets between the access point and its associated MUs.
WLAN security can be configured on an ESS by ESS basis on the access point. Sixteen separate
ESSIDs (WLANs) can be supported on an access point, and must be managed (if necessary) between the 802.11a/n and 802.11b/g/n radio. The user has the capability of configuring separate security policies for each WLAN. Each security policy can be configured based on the authentication (802.1x
EAP) or encryption (WPA2/CCMP) scheme best suited to the coverage area that security policy supports.
The access point can also create VPN tunnels to securely route traffic through a IPSEC tunnel and block transmissions with devices interpreted as Rogue APs.
6-2 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
NOTE Security for the access point can be configured in various locations throughout the access point menu structure. This chapter outlines the security options available to the AP-7131N-FGR, and the menu locations and steps required to configure specific security measures.
6.1 Configuring Security Options
To configure the data protection options available on the access point, refer to the following:
• To set an administrative password for secure access point logins, see
Setting Passwords on page 6-2 .
• To display security policy screens used to configure the authetication and encryption schemes available to the access point, see
• To create a security policy supporting 802.1x EAP, see
Configuring 802.1x EAP Settings on page 6-6 .
• To create a security policy supporting WPA2-CCMP, see
Configuring WPA2-CCMP (802.11i) on page 6-11
.
• To configure the access point to block specific kinds of HTTP, SMTP and FTP data traffic, see
Configuring Firewall Settings on page 6-13 .
• To create VPN tunnels allowing traffic to route securely through a IPSEC tunnel to a private network, see
Configuring VPN Tunnels on page 6-22
.
• To configure the access point to block transmissions with devices detected as Rogue AP’s
(hostile devices), see
Configuring Rogue AP Detection on page 6-42
.
6.2 Setting Passwords
Before setting the access point security parameters, verify an administrative password for the access point has been created to restrict access to the device before advanced device security is configured.
To password protect and restrict access point device access:
1.
Connect a wired computer to the access point LAN port using a standard CAT-5 cable.
2.
Set up the computer for TCP/IP DHCP network addressing and make sure the DNS settings are not hardcoded.
Configuring Access Point Security 6-3
3.
Start Internet Explorer (with Sun Micro Systems’ Java Runtime Environment (JRE) 1.6 or higher installed) and type in the default IP address in the address field.
To connect to the access point, the IP address is required. If connected to the access point using the WAN port, the default static IP address is 10.1.1.1. The default password is
“ motorola .” If connected to the access point using the LAN port, the default static IP address is 192.168.0.1/24. The user is required to know the IP address to connect to the access point using a Web browser.
The access point Login screen displays.
NOTE For optimum compatibility use Sun Microsystems’ JRE 1.6 (available from
Sun’s Web site), and be sure to disable Microsoft’s Java Virtual Machine if it is installed.
NOTE DNS names are not supported as a valid IP address for the access point.
The user is required to enter a numerical IP address.
4.
Log in using the “ admin ” as the default Username and “ motorola ” as the default
Password.
If the default login is successful, the Change Admin Password window displays. Change the default login and password to significantly decrease the likelihood of hacking.
6-4 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
CAUTION Restoring the access point’s configuration back to default settings changes the administrative password back to “motorola.” If restoring the configuration back to default settings, be sure you change the administrative password accordingly.
5.
Enter the previous password and the new admin password in the two fields provided. Click the Apply button.
Once the admin password has been created/updated, the System Settings screen displays. If the access point has not had its System Settings (device name, location etc.) configured, see
Configuring System Settings on page 4-2
.
Once the password has been set, refer back to
Configuring Security Options on page 6-2 to
determine which access point security feature to configure next.
6.2.1 Resetting the Access Point Password
The access point has a means of restoring its password to its default value. Doing so also reverts the access point’s security, radio and power management configuration to their default settings. Only an installation professional should reset the access point’s password and promptly define a new restrictive password.
CAUTION Only a qualified installation professional should set or restore the access point’s radio and power management configuration in the event of a password reset.
6.3 Enabling Authentication and Encryption Schemes
To complement the built-in firewall filters on the WAN side of the access point, the WLAN side of the access point supports authentication and encryption schemes. Authentication is a challengeresponse procedure for validating user credentials such as username, password, and sometimes secret-key information.
Encryption applies a specific algorithm to alter its appearance and prevent unauthorized reading.
Decryption applies the algorithm in reverse to restore the data to its original form. Sender and receiver must employ the same encryption/decryption method to interoperate.
Each WLAN (16 WLANs available in total to an access point regardless of the model) can have a separate security policy. However, more than one WLAN can use the same security policy. Therefore, to avoid confusion, do not name security policies the same name as WLANs. Once security policies
Configuring Access Point Security 6-5 have been created, they are selectable within the Security field of each WLAN screen. If the existing default security policy does not satisfy the data protection requirements of a specific WLAN, a new security policy (using the authentication and encryption schemes discussed above) can be created.
CAUTION Mesh configurations do not support mismatched security policies when operating using a mixed mode scheme. Ensure the encryptions and authentication schemes used by APs in a mesh network are complimentary with one another.
To enable an existing WLAN security policy or create a new policy:
1.
Select Network Configuration -> Wireless -> Security from the access point menu tree.
The Security Configuration screen displays .
2.
If a new security policy is required, click the Create button.
NOTE An existing security policy can be edited from the Security Configuration screen by selecting an existing policy and clicking the Edit button. Use the
Edit Security Policy screen to edit the policy. For more information on editing an existing security policy, refer to security configuration sections described in steps 4 and 5.
3.
Use the Name field to define a logical security policy name.
Remember, multiple WLANs can share the same security policy, so be careful not to name security policies after specific WLANs or risk defining a WLAN to single policy. Motorola recommends naming the policy after the attributes of the authentication or encryption type selected.
4.
Enable and configure an Authentication option if necessary for the target security policy.
Manually Pre-Shared
Key / No
Authentication
Select this button to disable authentication. This is the default value for the Authentication field.
802.1x EAP Select the 802.1x EAP button to display the 802.1x EAP Settings field within the New Security Policy screen. For specific information on configuring EAP, see
5.
Enable and configure an Encryption option if necessary for the target security policy.
6-6 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
WPA2/CCMP
(802.11i)
Select the WPA2/CCMP (802.11) button to display the WPA2/
CCMP Settings field within the New Security Policy screen. For detailed information on configuring WPA2/CCMP, see
WPA2-CCMP (802.11i) on page 6-11
.
6.
Click Apply to keep changes made within the New Security Policy screen (if any).
Configure AP-7131N-FGR encryption or authentication security policies by referring to the following:
access point authentication:
• To define a security policy supporting 802.1x EAP, see
Configuring 802.1x EAP Settings on page 6-6 .
access point encryption:
• To create a security policy supporting WPA2/CCMP, see
7.
Click Cancel to return to the target WLAN screen without keeping any of the changes made within the New Security Policy screen.
6.4 Configuring 802.1x EAP Settings
The IEEE 802.1x standard ties the 802.1x EAP authentication protocol to both wired and wireless LAN applications.
The EAP process begins when an unauthenticated supplicant (client device) tries to connect with an authenticator (in this case, the authentication server). The access point passes EAP packets from the client to an authentication server on the wired side of the access point. All other packet types are blocked until the authentication server (typically, a Radius server) verifies the MU’s identity.
To configure 802.1x EAP authentication on the access point:
1.
Select Network Configuration -> Wireless -> Security from the access point menu tree.
If security policies supporting 802.1x EAP exist, they appear within the Security
Configuration screen. These existing policies can be used as is, or their properties edited by clicking the Edit button. To configure a new security policy supporting 802.1x EAP, continue to step 2.
2.
Click the Create button to configure a new policy supporting 802.1x EAP.
Configuring Access Point Security 6-7
The New Security Policy screen displays with no authentication or encryption options selected.
3.
Select the 802.1x EAP radio button.
The 802.1x EAP Settings field displays within the New Security Policy screen.
4.
Ensure the Name of the security policy entered suits the intended configuration or function of the policy.
5.
If using the access point’s Internal Radius server, leave the Radius Server drop-down menu in the default setting of Internal . If an external Radius server is used, select External from the drop-down menu.
CAUTION When using external radius authentication with admin users, when the connectivity to the Radius server is lost, they will fallback to local authentication.
6-8 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
6.
Configure the Server Settings field as required to define address information for the authentication server. The appearance of the Server Settings field varies depending on whether Internal or External has been selected from the Radius Server drop-down menu.
Radius Server
Address
RADIUS Port
RADIUS Shared
Secret
If using an External Radius Server, specify the numerical (non-DNS)
IP address of a primary Remote Dial-In User Service (Radius) server.
Optionally, specify the IP address of a secondary server. The secondary server acts as a failover server if the primary server cannot be contacted. An ISP or a network administrator provides these addresses.
Radius is a client/server protocol and software enabling remoteaccess clients to communicate with a server used to authenticate users and authorize access to the requested system or service. This setting is not available if Internal has been selected from the
Radius Server drop-down menu.
If using an External Radius Server, specify the port on which the primary Radius server is listening. Optionally, specify the port of a secondary (failover) server. Older Radius servers listen on ports
1645 and 1646. Newer servers listen on ports 1812 and 1813. Port
1645 or 1812 is used for authentication. Port 1646 or 1813 is used for accounting. The ISP or a network administrator needs to confirm the appropriate primary and secondary port numbers for authentication. This setting is not available if Internal has been selected from the Radius Server drop-down menu.
Specify a shared secret for authentication on the Internal or
Primary Radius server (External Radius Server only). The shared secret is required to match the shared secret on the Radius server.
Optionally, specify a shared secret for a secondary (failover) server.
Use shared secrets to verify Radius messages (with the exception of the Access-Request message) sent by a Radius enabled device configured with the same shared secret.
Apply the qualifications of a well-chosen password to the generation of a shared secret. Generate a random, case-sensitive string using letters and numbers. Verify the shared secret is at least
22 characters to protect the Radius server from brute-force attacks.
An example of a strong and secure shared secret is:
8d#>9fq4bV)H7%a3-zE13sW.
Configuring Access Point Security 6-9
7.
Select the Accounting tab as required to define a timeout period and retry interval Syslog for MUs interoperating with the access point and EAP authentication server. The items within this tab could be enabled or disabled depending on whether Internal or External has been selected from the Radius Server drop-down menu.
MU Timeout
Retries
Enable Syslog
Syslog Server IP
Address
Specify the time (in seconds) for the access point’s retransmission of EAP-Request packets. The default is 10 seconds. If this time is exceeded, the authentication session is terminated.
Specify the number of retries for the MU to retransmit a missed frame to the Radius server before it times out of the authentication session. The default is 2 retries.
Select the Enable Syslog checkbox to enable Radius accounting syslog messages relating to EAP events to be written to the specified syslog server.
Enter the IP address of the destination syslog server to be used to log EAP events.
8.
Select the Reauthentication tab as required to define authentication connection policies, intervals and maximum retries. The items within this tab are identical regardless of whether
Internal or External is selected from the Radius Server drop-down menu.
Enable
Reauthentication
Select the Enable Reauthentication checkbox to configure a wireless connection policy so MUs are forced to reauthenticate periodically. Periodic repetition of the EAP process provides ongoing security for current authorized connections.
Period (30-9999) secs Set the EAP reauthentication period to a shorter interval for tighter security on the WLAN's connections. Set the EAP reauthentication period to a longer time interval (at most, 9999 seconds) to relax security on wireless connections. The default interval of 3600 seconds is recommended.
Max. Retries (1-99) retries
Define the maximum number of MU retries to reauthenticate after failing to complete the EAP process. Failure to reauthenticate in the specified number of retries results in a terminated connection. The default is 2 retries.
6-10 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
NOTE The default values described are the recommended values. Do not change these values unless consulted otherwise by an administrator.
9.
Select the Advanced Settings tab as required to specify a MU quiet period, timeout interval, transmit period, and retry period for MUs and the authentication server. The items within this tab are identical regardless of whether Internal or External is selected from the
Radius Server drop-down menu.
MU Quiet Period
(1-65535) secs
MU Timeout
(1-255) secs
MU Tx Period
(1-65635) secs
MU Max Retries
(1-10) retries
Server Timeout
(1-255) secs
Server Max Retries
(1-255 retries)
Specify an idle time (in seconds) between MU authentication attempts, as required by the authentication server. The default is
10 seconds.
Define the time (in seconds) for the access point’s retransmission of EAP-Request packets. The default is 10 seconds.
Specify the time period (in seconds) for the access point's retransmission of the EAP Identity Request frame. The default is 5 seconds.
Specify the maximum number of times the access point retransmits an EAP-Request frame to the client before it times out the authentication session. The default is 2 retries.
Specify the time (in seconds) for the access point's retransmission of EAP-Request packets to the server. The default is 5 seconds. If this time is exceeded, the authetnication session is terminated.
Specify the maximum number of times for the access point to retransmit an EAP-Request frame to the server before it times out the authentication session. The default is 2 retries.
10. Click the Apply button to save any changes made within the 802.1x EAP Settings field
(including all 5 selectable tabs) of the New Security Policy screen.
11. Click the Cancel button to undo any changes made within the 802.1x EAP Settings field and return to the WLAN screen. This reverts all settings for the 802.1x EAP Settings field to the last saved configuration.
Configuring Access Point Security 6-11
6.5 Configuring WPA2-CCMP (802.11i)
WPA2 is a newer 802.11i standard that provides even stronger wireless security than Wi-Fi Protected
Access (WPA). CCMP is the security standard used by the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES).
CCMP computes a Message Integrity Check (MIC) using the proven Cipher Block Chaining (CBC) technique. Changing just one bit in a message produces a totally different result.
WPA2/CCMP is based on the concept of a Robust Security Network (RSN), which defines a hierarchy of keys with a limited lifetime. The keys the administrator provides are used to derive other keys.
Messages are encrypted using a 128-bit secret key and a 128-bit block of data. The end result is an encryption scheme as secure as any the access point provides.
To configure WPA2-CCMP on the AP-7131N-FGR:
1.
Select Network Configuration -> Wireless -> Security from the access point menu tree.
If security policies supporting WPA2-CCMP exist, they appear within the Security
Configuration screen. These existing policies can be used as is, or their properties edited by clicking the Edit button. To configure a new security policy supporting WPA2-CCMP, continue to step 2.
2.
Click the Create button to configure a new policy supporting WPA2-CCMP.
The New Security Policy screen displays with no authentication or encryption options selected.
3.
Select the WPA2/CCMP (802.11i) checkbox.
The WPA2/CCMP Settings field displays within the New Security Policy screen.
4.
Ensure the Name of the security policy entered suits the intended configuration or function of the policy.
6-12 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
5.
Configure the Key Rotation Settings field as required to set Broadcast Key Rotation and the update interval.
Broadcast Key
Rotation
Select the Broadcast Key Rotation checkbox to enable or disable broadcast key rotation. When enabled, the key indices used for encrypting/decrypting broadcast traffic will be alternatively rotated on every interval specified in the Broadcast Key Rotation
Interval. Enabling broadcast key rotation enhances the broadcast traffic security on the WLAN. This value is disabled by default.
Update broadcast keys every (30-604800 seconds)
Specify a time period in seconds to rotate the key index used for the broadcast key. Set the interval to a shorter duration like 3600 seconds for tighter broadcast traffic security on the wireless LAN.
Set the interval to a longer duration like 86400 seconds for less broadcast traffic security requirements. Default value is 86400 secs.
Configuring Access Point Security 6-13
6.
Configure the Key Settings area as needed.
256-bit Key To use a hexadecimal value (and not an ASCII passphrase), select the checkbox and enter 16 hexadecimal characters into each of the four fields displayed.
Default (hexadecimal) 256-bit keys for WP2A/CCMP include:
1011121314151617
18191A1B1C1D1E1F
2021222324252627
28292A2B2C2D2E2F
7.
Configure the Fast Roaming (802.1x only) field as required to enable additional access point roaming and key caching options. This feature is applicable only when using 802.1x
EAP authentication with WPA2/CCMP.
Pre-Authentication Selecting this option enables an associated MU to carry out an
802.1x authentication with another access point before it roams to it. The access point caches the keying information of the client until it roams to the other access point. This enables the roaming client to start sending and receiving data sooner by not having to do
802.1x authentication after it roams. This feature is only supported when 802.1x EAP authentication is enabled.
NOTE PMK key caching is enabled internally by default when 802.1x EAP authentication is enabled.
8.
Click the Apply button to save any changes made within this New Security Policy screen.
9.
Click the Cancel button to undo any changes made within the WPA2/CCMP Settings field and return to the WLAN screen. This reverts all settings to the last saved configuration.
6.6 Configuring Firewall Settings
The access point's firewall is a set of related programs located in the gateway on the WAN side of the access point. The firewall uses a collection of filters to screen information packets for known types of system attacks. Some of the access point's filters are continuously enabled, others are configurable.
6-14 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Use the access point’s Firewall screen to enable or disable the configurable firewall filters. Enable each filter for maximum security. Disable a filter if the corresponding attack does not seem a threat in order to reduce processor overhead. Use the WLAN Security screens as required for setting user authentication and data encryption parameters.
To configure the access point firewall settings:
1.
Select Network Configuration -> Firewall from the access point menu tree.
2.
Refer to the Timeout Configuration field to define a timeout interval to terminate IP address translations.
NAT Timeout Network Address Translation (NAT) converts an IP address in one network to a different IP address or set of IP addresses in a different network. Set a NAT Timeout interval (in minutes) the access point uses to terminate the IP address translation process if no translation activity is detected after the specified interval.
Configuring Access Point Security 6-15
3.
Refer to the DOS Attack Checks field to set the following firewall filters:
SYN Flood Attack
Check
Source Routing
Check
Winnuke Attack
Check
FTP Bounce Attack
Check
IP Unaligned
Timestamp Check
A SYN flood attack requests a connection and then fails to promptly acknowledge a destination host's response, leaving the destination host vulnerable to a flood of connection requests.
A source routing attack specifies an exact route for a packet's travel through a network, while exploiting the use of an intermediate host to gain access to a private host.
A "Win-nuking" attack uses the IP address of a destination host to send junk packets to its receiving port.
An FTP bounce attack uses the PORT command in FTP mode to gain access to arbitrary ports on machines other than the originating client.
An IP unaligned timestamp attack uses a frame with the IP timestamp option, where the timestamp is not aligned on a 32-bit boundary.
Sequence Number
Prediction Check
Mime Flood Attack
Check
A sequence number prediction attack establishes a three-way TCP connection with a forged source address. The attacker guesses the sequence number of the destination host response.
A MIME flood attack uses an improperly formatted MIME header in "sendmail" to cause a buffer overflow on the destination host.
Max Header Length
(>=256)
Use the Max Header Length field to set the maximum allowable header length (at least 256 bytes).
Max Headers
(>=12)
Use the Max Headers field to set the maximum number of headers allowed (at least 12 headers).
4.
Click Apply to save any changes to the Firewall screen. Navigating away from the screen without clicking the Apply button results in all changes to the screens being lost.
5.
Click Undo Changes (if necessary) to undo any changes made. Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the Firewall screen to the last saved configuration.
6.
Click Logout to securely exit the Access Point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
6-16 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
6.6.1 Configuring LAN to WAN Access
The access point LAN can be configured to communicate with the WAN side of the access point. Use the Subnet Access screen to control access from the LAN1 (or LAN2) interfaces to the WAN interface. This access level will function as an ACL in a router to allow/deny certain IP addresses or subnets to access certain interfaces (or subnets belonging to those interfaces) by creating access policies.
To configure access point subnet access:
1.
Select Network Configuration -> Firewall -> Subnet Access from the access point menu tree.
2.
Refer to the Overview field to view rectangles representing subnet associations. The three possible colors indicate the current access level, as defined, for each subnet association.
Green
Color
Yellow
Red
Access Type
Full Access
Description
No protocol exceptions (rules) are specified. All traffic may pass between these two areas.
Limited Access One or more protocol rules are specified. Specific protocols are either enabled or disabled between these two areas.
Click the table cell of interest and look at the exceptions area in the lower half of the screen to determine the protocols that are either allowed or denied.
No Access All protocols are denied, without exception. No traffic will pass between these two areas.
Configuring Access Point Security 6-17
3.
Click Apply to save any changes to the Subnet Access screen. Navigating away from the screen without clicking the Apply button results in all changes to the screens being lost.
4.
Click Undo Changes (if necessary) to undo any changes made. Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the Subnet Access screen to the last saved configuration.
5.
Click Logout to securely exit the Access Point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
6.6.1.1 Available Protocols
Protocols that are not pre-configured can be specified using the drop down list within the Transport column within the Subnet Access and Advanced Subnet Access screens. They include:
• ALL - Enables all of the protocol options displayed in the drop-down menu (as described below).
6-18 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
• TCP - Transmission Control Protocol is a set of rules for sending data as message units over the Internet. TCP manages individual data packets. Messages are divided into packets for efficient routing through the Internet.
• UDP - User Datagram Protocol is used for broadcasting data over the Internet. Like TCP, UDP runs on top of Internet Protocol (IP) networks. Unlike TCP/IP, UDP/IP provides few error recovery services. UDP offers a way to directly connect, and then send and receive datagrams over an IP network.
• ICMP - Internet Control Message Protocol is tightly integrated with IP. ICMP messages are used for out-of-band messages related to network operation. ICMP packet delivery is unreliable. Hosts cannot count on receiving ICMP packets for a network problem.
• AH - Authentication Header is one of the two key components of IP Security Protocol (IPsec).
The other key component is Encapsulating Security Protocol (ESP).
AH provides authentication, proving the packet sender really is the sender, and the data really is the data sent. AH can be used in transport mode, providing security between two end points. Also, AH can be used in tunnel mode, providing security like that of a Virtual
Private Network (VPN).
• ESP - Encapsulating Security Protocol is one of two key components of IP Security Protocol
(IPsec). The other key component is Authentication Header (AH). ESP encrypts the packets and provides authentication services. ESP can be used in transport mode, providing security between two end points. ESP can also be used in tunnel mode, providing security like that of a Virtual Private Network (VPN).
• GRE - General Routing Encapsulation supports VPNs across the Internet. GRE is a mechanism for encapsulating network layer protocols over any other network layer protocol.
Such encapsulation allows routing of IP packets between private IP networks across an
Internet using globally assigned IP addresses.
6.6.2 Configuring Advanced Subnet Access
Use the Advanced Subnet Access screen to configure complex access rules and filtering based on source port, destination port, and transport protocol. To enable advanced subnet access, the subnet access rules must be overridden. However, the Advanced Subnet Access screen allows you to import existing subnet access rules into the advanced subnet access rules.
To configure access point Advanced Subnet Access:
1.
Select Network Configuration -> Firewall -> Advanced Subnet Access from the access point menu tree.
Configuring Access Point Security 6-19
2.
Configure the Settings field as needed to override the settings in the Subnet Access screen and import firewall rules into the Advanced Subnet Access screen.
Override Subnet
Access settings
Import rules from
Subnet Access
Select this checkbox to enable advanced subnet access rules and disable existing subnet access rules, port forwarding, and 1 to many mappings from the system. Only enable advanced subnet access rules if your configuration requires rules that cannot be configured within the Subnet Access screen.
Select this checkbox to import existing access ruls (NAT, packet forwarding, VPN rules etc.) into the Firewall Rules field. This rule import overrides any existing rules configured in the Advanced
Subnet Access screen. A warning box displays stating the operation cannot be undone.
6-20 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
3.
Configure the Firewall Rules field as required add, insert or delete firewall rules into the list of advanced rules.
Inbound or Outbound Select Inbound or Outbound from the drop-down menu to specify if a firewall rule is intended for inbound traffic to an interface or outbound traffic from that interface.
Add Click the Add button to insert a new rule at the bottom of the table.
Click on a row to display a new window with configuration options for that field.
Insert
Del (Delete)
Click the Insert button to insert a new rule directly above a selected rule in the table. Clicking on a field in the row displays a new window with configuration options.
Click Del to remove the selected rule from the table. The index numbers for all the rows below the deleted row decrease by 1.
Move Up Clicking the Move Up button moves the selected rule up by one row in the table. The index numbers for the affected rows adjust to reflect the new order.
Configuring Access Point Security 6-21
Move Down
Index
Rule Id
Source IP
Clicking the Move Down button moves the selected rule down by one row in the table. The index numbers for the affected rows adjust to reflect the new order.
The index number determines the order firewall rules are executed.
Rules are executed from the lowest number to the highest number.
Rule Id is read-only and automatically set when Apply button is clicked. For Inbound policies Rule Id starts from 1245 and for
Outbound policies Rule Id starts from 10.
The Source IP range defines the origin address or address range for the firewall rule. To configure the Source IP range, click on the field. A new window displays for entering the IP address and range.
Destination IP
Transport
The Destination IP range determines the target address or address range for the firewall rule. To configure the Destination IP range, click on the field. A new window displays for entering the IP address and range.
Select a protocol from the drop-down list. For a detailed description of the protocols available, see
Available Protocols on page 6-17 .
Src. Ports (Source
Ports)
The source port range determines which ports the firewall rule applies to on the source IP address. Click on the field to configure the source port range. A new window displays to enter the starting and ending port ranges. For rules where only a single port is necessary, enter the same port in the start and end port fields.
Dst. Ports (Destination
Ports
The destination port range determines which ports the firewall rule applies to on the destination IP address. Click on the field to configure the destination port range. A new window displays to enter the starting and ending ports in the range. For rules where only a single port is necessary, enter the same port in the start and end port fields.
4.
Click Apply to save any changes to the Advanced Subnet Access screen. Navigating away from the screen without clicking Apply results in all changes to the screens being lost.
5.
Click Undo Changes (if necessary) to undo any changes made. Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the Advanced Subnet Access screen to the last saved configuration.
6.
Click Logout to securely exit the Access Point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
6-22 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
6.7 Configuring VPN Tunnels
Create a VPN tunnel to ensure data privacy between two end points, even while using an insecure communication medium like the Internet. VPNs use a secure tunnel between two end points as if they are directly connected over a secure connection.
The access point allows up to 25 VPN tunnels to either a VPN endpoint or to another access point.
VPN tunnels allow all traffic on a local subnet to route securely through an IPSec tunnel to a private network. A VPN port is a virtual port which handles tunneled traffic.
When connecting to another site using a VPN, the traffic is encrypted so if anyone intercepts the traffic, they cannot see what it is unless they can break the encryption. The traffic is encrypted from your computer through the network to the VPN. At that point the traffic is decrypted.
Use the VPN screen to add and remove VPN tunnels.
To configure an existing VPN tunnel, select it from the list in the VPN Tunnels field. The selected tunnel’s configuration displays in a VPN Tunnel
Config field.
To configure a VPN tunnel on the access point:
1.
Select Network Configuration -> WAN -> VPN from the access point menu tree.
Configuring Access Point Security 6-23
2.
Use the VPN Tunnels field to add or delete a tunnel to the list of available tunnels, list tunnel network address information and display key exchange information for each tunnel.
Add
Del
Tunnel Name
Remote Subnet
Click Add to add a VPN tunnel to the list. To configure a specific tunnel, select it from the list and use the parameters within the
VPN Tunnel Config field to set its properties.
Click Del to delete a highlighted VPN tunnel. There is no confirmation before deleting the tunnel.
The Tunnel Name column lists the name of each VPN tunnel on the access point .
The Remote Subnet column lists the remote subnet for each tunnel. The remote subnet is the subnet the remote network uses for connection.
6-24 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Remote Gateway The Remote Gateway column lists a remote gateway IP address for each tunnel. The numeric remote gateway is the gateway IP address on the remote network the VPN tunnel connects to. Ensure the address is the same as the WAN port address of the target gateway AP or switch.
Key Exchange Type The Key Exchange Type column lists the key exchange type for passing keys between both ends of a VPN tunnel. If Manual Key
Exchange is selected, this column displays Manual. If Auto (IKE)
Key Exchange is selected, the field displays Automatic .
NOTE When creating a tunnel, the remote subnet and remote subnet mask must be that of the target device’s LAN settings. The remote gateway must be that of the target device’s WAN IP address.
If access point #1 has the following values:
• WAN IP address: 20.1.1.2
• LAN IP address: 10.1.1.1
• Subnet Mask: 255.0.0.0
Then, the VPN values for access point #2 should be:
• Remote subnet: 10.1.1.0 or 10.0.0.0
• Remote subnet mask: 255.0.0.0
• Remote gateway: 20.1.1.2
3.
If a VPN tunnel has been added to the list of available access point tunnels, use the VPN
Tunnel Config field to optionally modify the tunnel’s properties.
Tunnel Name
Interface name
Enter a name to define the VPN tunnel. The tunnel name is used to uniquely identify each tunnel. Select a name best suited to that tunnel’s function so it can be selected again in the future if required in a similar application.
Use the drop-down menu to specify the LAN1, LAN2 or WAN connection used for routing VPN traffic. Remember, only one LAN connection can be active on the access point Ethernet port at a time. The LAN connection specified from the LAN screen to receive priority for Ethernet port connectivity may be the better subnet to select for VPN traffic.
Configuring Access Point Security 6-25
Local WAN IP Enter the WAN’s numerical (non-DNS) IP address in order for the tunnel to pass traffic to a remote network.
Specify the numerical (non-DNS) IP address for the Remote Subnet.
Remote Subnet
Remote Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask for the tunnel’s remote network for the tunnel. The remote subnet mask is the subnet setting for the remote network the tunnel connects to.
Remote Gateway Enter a numerical (non-DNS) remote gateway IP address for the tunnel. The remote gateway IP address is the gateway address on the remote network the VPN tunnel connects to.
Default Gateway Displays the WAN interface's default gateway IP address.
Manual Key Exchange Selecting Manual Key Exchange requires you to manually enter keys for AH and/or ESP encryption and authentication. Click the
Manual Key Settings button to configure the settings.
Manual Key Settings Select Manual Key Exchange and click the Manual Key
Settings button to open a screen where AH authentication and
ESP encryption/authentication can be configured and keys entered.
For more information, see
Configuring Manual Key Settings on page 6-28
.
Auto (IKE) Key
Exchange
Select the Auto (IKE) Key Exchange checkbox to configure AH and/ or ESP without having to manually enter keys. The keys automatically generate and rotate for the authentication and encryption type selected.
Auto Key Settings
IKE Settings
Select the Auto (IKE) Key Exchange checkbox, and click the Auto
Key Settings button to open a screen where AH authentication and ESP encryption/authentication can be configured. For more information, see
Configuring Auto Key Settings on page 6-32 .
After selecting Auto (IKE) Key Exchange, click the IKE Settings button to open a screen where IKE specific settings can be configured. For more information, see
Configuring IKE Key Settings on page 6-34 .
4.
Click Apply to save any changes to the VPN screen as well as changes made to the Auto
Key Settings, IKE Settings and Manual Key Settings screens. Navigating away from the screen without clicking the Apply button results in all changes to the screens being lost.
6-26 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
5.
Click Undo Changes (if necessary) to undo any changes made. Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the VPN, Auto Key Settings, IKE Settings and Manual Key Settings screens to the last saved configuration.
6.
Click Logout to securely exit the Access Point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
6.7.1 Creating a VPN Tunnel between Two Access Points
This section describes how to define a simple configuration using two access points to create an
IPSec tunnel.
To create a IPSec VPN tunnel between two access points:
1.
Ensure the WAN ports are connected via the internet
2.
Select Network Configuration -> WAN -> VPN from the access point menu tree.
3.
Enter any tunnel name (tunnel names do not need to match).
4.
Enter the WAN port IP address of AP #1 in the Local WAN IP field
5.
Enter the LAN IP subnet and mask of AP #2 in the Remote Subnet and Remote Subnet Mask fields,
6.
Enter the WAN port IP address of AP #2 in the Remote Gateway field
7.
Click Add to add the tunnel to the list.
8.
Select the Auto (IKE) Key Exchange button.
9.
Select Auto Key Settings .
Configuring Access Point Security 6-27
10. Select ESP with Authentication and AES 128-bit . Click OK .
11. Select the IKE Settings button.
12. Select Pre Shared Key (PSK) .
13. Enter the Passphrase.
Passphrases must match on both VPN devices.
14. Select AES 128-bit .
15. Select Group 2 .
16. Click OK .
This will take you back to the main VPN configuration screen.
17. Click Apply to save the updates
18. Select Network Configuration -> WAN -> VPN -> VPN Status from the access point menu tree. Check the VPN status on the access point.
6-28 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Notice the status displays "NOT_ACTIVE". This screen automatically refreshes to get the current status of the VPN tunnel. Once the tunnel is active, the IKE_STATE changes from
NOT_CONNECTED to SA_MATURE.
19. On AP #2, repeat the same steps as above. However, replace AP #2 information with AP #1 information.
20. Once both tunnels are established, ping each side to ensure connectivity.
6.7.2 Configuring Manual Key Settings
A transform set is a combination of security protocols and algorithms applied to IPSec protected traffic. During security association (SA) negotiation, both gateways agree to use a particular transform set to protect data flow.
A transform set specifies one or two IPSec security protocols (either AH, ESP, or both) and specifies the algorithms to use for the selected security protocol. If you specify an ESP protocol in a transform set, specify just an ESP encryption transform or both an ESP encryption transform and an ESP authentication transform.
When the particular transform set is used during negotiations for IPSec SAs, the entire transform set
(the combination of protocols, algorithms, and other settings) must match a transform set at the remote end of the gateway.
Use the Manual Key Settings screen to specify the transform sets used for VPN access.
To configure manual key settings for the access point:
1.
Select Network Configuration -> WAN -> VPN from the access point menu tree.
2.
Refer to the VPN Tunnel Config field, select the Manual Key Exchange radio button and click the Manual Key Settings button.
Configuring Access Point Security 6-29
3.
Configure the Manual Key Settings screen to modify the following:
NOTE When entering Inbound or Outbound encryption or authentication keys, an error message could display stating the keys provided are “weak”. Some attack tools invoke a dictionary to hack keys based on commonly used words. To avoid entering a weak key, try to not to produce a key using commonly used terms and attempt to mix alphabetic and numerical key attributes when possible.
6-30 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AH Authentication
Inbound AH
Authentication Key
Outbound AH
Authentication Key
AH provides data authentication and anti-replay services for the
VPN tunnel. Select the required authentication method from the drop-down menu:
• None - Disables AH authentication. The rest of the fields are not active.
• SHA1 - Enables Secure Hash Algorithm 1, requiring 160-bit
(40-character hexadecimal) keys.
Configure a key for computing the integrity check on inbound traffic with the selected authentication algorithm. The key must be 32/40 hexadecimal (0-9, A-F) characters in length. The key value must match the corresponding outbound key on the remote security gateway.
Configure a key for computing the integrity check on outbound traffic with the selected authentication algorithm. The key must be
32/40 hexadecimal (0-9, A-F) characters in length. The key value must match the corresponding inbound key on the remote security gateway.
Inbound SPI (Hex)
Outbound SPI (Hex) Provide an up to six-character hexadecimal value to identify the outbound security association created by the AH algorithm. The value must match the corresponding inbound SPI value configured on the remote security gateway.
ESP Type
Enter an up to six-character hexadecimal value to identify the inbound security association created by the AH algorithm. The value must match the corresponding outbound SPI value configured on the remote security gateway.
ESP provides packet encryption, optional data authentication and anti-replay services for the VPN tunnel. Use the drop-down menu to select the ESP type. Options include:
• ESP - Enables ESP for the tunnel.
• ESP with Authentication - Enables ESP with authentication.
Configuring Access Point Security 6-31
ESP Encryption
Algorithm
Inbound ESP
Encryption Key
Outbound ESP
Encryption Key
ESP Authentication
Algorithm
Select the encryption and authentication algorithms for the VPN tunnel using the drop-down menu.
• AES 128-bit - Uses the Advanced Encryption Standard algorithm with 128-bit (32-character hexadecimal) keys.
• AES 192-bit - Uses the Advanced Encryption Standard algorithm with 192-bit (48-character hexadecimal) keys.
• AES 256-bit - Uses the Advanced Encryption Standard algorithm with 256-bit (64-character hexadecimal) keys.
Enter a key for inbound traffic. The length of the key is determined by the selected encryption algorithm. The key must match the outbound key at the remote gateway.
Define a key for outbound traffic. The length of the key is determined by the selected encryption algorithm. The key must match the inbound key at the remote gateway.
This option is available only when ESP with Authentication was selected for the ESP type. Options include:
• SHA1 - Enables Secure Hash Algorithm 1, which requires
160-bit (40-character hexadecimal) keys.
Inbound ESP
Authentication Key
Outbound ESP
Authentication Key
Define a key for computing the integrity check on the inbound traffic with the selected authentication algorithm. The key must be
32/40 hexadecimal (0-9, A-F) characters in length. The key must match the corresponding outbound key on the remote security gateway.
Enter a key for computing the integrity check on outbound traffic with the selected authentication algorithm. The key must be 32/40 hexadecimal (0-9, A-F) characters in length. The key must match the corresponding inbound key on the remote security gateway.
Inbound SPI (Hex) Define an (up to) six-character (maximum) hexadecimal value to identify the inbound security association created by the encryption algorithm. The value must match the corresponding outbound SPI value configured on the remote security gateway.
Outbound SPI (Hex) Enter an (up to) six-character (maximum) hexadecimal value to identify the outbound security association created by the encryption algorithm. The value must match the corresponding inbound SPI value configured on the remote security gateway.
6-32 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
The Inbound and Outbound SPI settings are required to be interpolated to function correctly.
For example:
• AP1 Inbound SPI = 800
• AP1 Outbound SPI = 801
• AP2 Inbound SPI = 801
• AP2 Outbound SPI = 800
4.
Click Ok to return to the VPN screen. Click Apply to retain the settings made on the Manual
Key Settings screen.
5.
Click Cancel to return to the VPN screen without retaining the changes made to the
Manual Key Settings screen.
6.7.3 Configuring Auto Key Settings
The access point’s Network Management System can automatically set encryption and authentication keys for VPN access. Use the Auto Key Settings screen to specify the type of encryption and authentication, without specifying the keys. To manually specify keys, cancel out of the Auto Key Settings screen, select the Manual Key Exchange radio button, and set the keys within the Manual Key Setting screen.
To configure auto key settings for the access point:
1.
Select Network Configuration -> WAN -> VPN from the access point menu tree.
2.
Refer to the VPN Tunnel Config field, select the Auto (IKE) Key Exchange radio button and click the Auto Key Settings button.
3.
Configure the Auto Key Settings screen to modify the following:
Use Perfect Forward
Secrecy
Security Association
Life Time
Forward secrecy is a key-establishment protocol guaranteeing the discovery of a session key or long-term private key does not compromise the keys of other sessions. Select Yes to enable
Perfect Forward Secrecy. Select No to disable Perfect Forward
Secrecy.
The Security Association Life Time is the configurable interval used to timeout association requests that exceed the defined interval.
This is an IPsec Phase 2 SA lifetime having the default value of 300 seconds. The configurable range is from 300 to 28800 seconds.
Configuring Access Point Security 6-33
AH Authentication
ESP Type
ESP Encryption
Algorithm
ESP Authentication
Algorithm
AH provides data authentication and anti-replay services for the
VPN tunnel. Select the desired authentication method from the drop-down menu.
• SHA1 - Enables Secure Hash Algorithm 1. No keys are required to be manually provided.
ESP provides packet encryption, optional data authentication and anti-replay services for the VPN tunnel. Use the drop-down menu to select the ESP type.
• ESP - Enables ESP for this tunnel.
• ESP with Authentication - Enables ESP with authentication.
Use this menu to select the encryption and authentication algorithms for this VPN tunnel.
• AES 128-bit - Selects the Advanced Encryption Standard algorithm with 128-bit. No keys are required to be manually provided.
• AES 192-bit - Selects the Advanced Encryption Standard algorithm with 192-bit. No keys are required to be manually provided.
• AES 256-bit - Selects the Advanced Encryption Standard algorithm with 256-bit. No keys are required to be manually provided.
This menu is only active when ESP with Authentication was selected for the ESP type.
• SHA1 - Enables Secure Hash Algorithm. No keys are required to be manually provided.
4.
Click Ok to return to the VPN screen. Click Apply to retain the settings made on the Auto
Key Settings screen.
5.
Click Cancel to return to the VPN screen without retaining the changes made to this screen.
6-34 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
6.7.4 Configuring IKE Key Settings
The Internet Key Exchange (IKE) is an IPsec standard protocol used to ensure security for VPN negotiation and remote host or network access. IKE provides an automatic means of negotiation and authentication for communication between two or more parties. In essence, IKE manages IPSec keys automatically for the parties.
To configure IKE key settings for the access point:
1.
Select Network Configuration -> WAN -> VPN from the access point menu tree.
2.
Refer to the VPN Tunnel Config field, select the Auto (IKE) Key Exchange radio button and click the IKE Settings button.
3.
Configure the IKE Key Settings screen to modify the following:
Configuring Access Point Security 6-35
Operation Mode
Local ID Type
Local ID Data
Remote ID Type
Remote ID Data
IKE Authentication
Mode
IKE Authentication
Algorithm
The Phase I protocols of IKE is based on the ISAKMP identityprotection. IKE main mode refers to the identity-protection exchange.
• Main - Standard IKE mode for communication and key exchange.
Select the type of ID to be used for the access point end of the SA.
• IP - Select IP if the local ID type is the IP address specified as part of the tunnel.
• FQDN - Use FQDN if the local ID is a fully qualified domain name (such as sj.motorola.com
).
• UFQDN - Select UFQDN if the local ID is a user fully-qualified email (such as [email protected]
).
Specify the FQDN or UFQDN based on the Local ID type assigned.
Select the type of ID to be used for the access point end of the tunnel from the Remote ID Type drop-down menu.
• IP - Select the IP option if the remote ID type is the IP address specified as part of the tunnel.
• FQDN - Select FQDN if the remote ID type is a fully qualified domain name (such as sj.motorola.com). The setting for this field does not have to be fully qualified, however it must match the setting for the Certificate Authority.
• UFQDN - Select this item if the remote ID type is a user unqualified email address (such as [email protected]).
The setting for this field does not have to be unqualified, it just must match the setting of the field of the Certificate
Authority.
If FQDN or UFQDN is selected, specify the data (either the qualified domain name or the user name) in the Remote ID Data field.
Select the IKE authentication mode:
• Pre-Shared Key (PSK) - Specify an authenticating algorithm and passcode used during authentication.
IKE provides data authentication and anti-replay services for the
VPN tunnel.
• SHA1 - Enables Secure Hash Algorithm. No keys are required to be manually provided.
6-36 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
IKE Authentication
Passphrase
IKE Encryption
Algorithm
If you selected Pre-Shared Key as the authentication mode, you must provide a passphrase.
Select the encryption and authentication algorithms for the VPN tunnel from the drop-down menu.
• AES 128-bit - Uses the Advanced Encryption Standard algorithm with 128-bit. No keys are required to be manually provided.
• AES 192-bit - Enables the Advanced Encryption Standard algorithm with 192-bit. No keys are required to be manually provided.
• AES 256-bit - Uses the Advanced Encryption Standard algorithm with 256-bit. No keys are required to be manually provided.
Key Lifetime The number of seconds the key is valid. At the end of the lifetime, the key is renegotiated.
This is an IPsec Phase 1 SA lifetime has the default value of 3600 seconds. User can configure this lifetime from 300 - 86400 seconds
The access point forces renegotiation every configured lifetime seconds.
Diffie Hellman Group Select a Diffie-Hellman Group to use. The Diffie-Hellman key agreement protocol allows two users to exchange a secret key over an insecure medium without any prior secrets. Only Group 14- 2048
bit is supported.
4.
Click Ok to return to the VPN screen. Click Apply to retain the settings made on the IKE
Settings screen.
5.
Click Cancel to return to the VPN screen without retaining the changes made to the IKE
Settings screen.
6.7.5 Viewing VPN Status
Use the VPN Status screen to display the status of the tunnels configured on the access point as well as their lifetime, transmit and receive statistics. The VPN Status screen is read-only with no configurable parameters. To configure a VPN tunnel, use the VPN configuration screen in the WAN section of the access point menu tree.
Configuring Access Point Security 6-37
To view VPN status:
1.
Select Network Configuration -> WAN -> VPN -> VPN Status from the access point menu tree.
2.
Reference the Security Associations field to view the following:
Tunnel Name
Status
Outb SPI
The Tunnel Name column lists the names of all the tunnels
configured on the access point. For information on configuring a
tunnel, see Configuring VPN Tunnels on page 6-22
.
The Status column lists the status of each configured tunnel.
When the tunnel is not in use, the status reads NOT_ACTIVE .
When the tunnel is connected, the status reads ACTIVE .
The Outb SPI column displays the outbound Security Parameter
Index (SPI) for each tunnel. The SPI is used locally by the access point to identify a security association. There are unique outbound and inbound SPIs.
6-38 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Inb SPI
Life Time
Tx Bytes
Rx Bytes
The Inb SPI column displays the inbound Security Parameter Index
(SPI) for each of the tunnels. The SPI is used locally by the access point to identify a security association. There are unique outbound and inbound SPIs.
Use the Life Time column to view the lifetime associated with a particular Security Association (SA). Each SA has a finite lifetime defined. When the lifetime expires, the SA can no longer be used to protect data traffic. The maximum SA lifetime is 65535 seconds.
The Tx Bytes column lists the amount of data (in bytes) transmitted through each configured tunnel.
The Rx Bytes column lists the amount of data (in bytes) received through each configured tunnel.
3.
Click the Reset VPNs button to reset active VPNs. Selecting Reset VPNs forces renegotiation of all the Security Associations and keys. Users could notice a slight pause in network performance.
4.
Reference the IKE Summary field to view the following:
Tunnel Name
IKE State
Destination IP
Remaining Life
Displays the name of each of the tunnels configured to use IKE for automatic key exchange.
Lists the state for each of the tunnels configured to use IKE for automatic key exchange. When the tunnel is not active, the IKE
State field displays NOT_CONNECTED.
When the tunnel is active, the IKE State field displays CONNECTED .
Displays the destination IP address for each tunnel configured to use IKE for automatic key exchange.
Lists the remaining life of the current IKE key for each tunnel. When the remaining life on the IKE key reaches 0, IKE initiates a negotiation for a new key. IKE keys associated with a renegotiated tunnel.
5.
Click Logout to securely exit the access point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
Configuring Access Point Security 6-39
6.8 Configuring Content Filtering Settings
Content filtering allows system administrators to block specific commands and URL extensions from going out through the access point’s WAN port. Therefore, content filtering affords system administrators selective control on the content proliferating the network and is a powerful data and network screening tool. Content filtering allows the blocking of up to 10 files or URL extensions and allows blocking of specific outbound requests.
To configure content filtering for the access point:
1.
Select Network Configuration -> WAN -> Content Filtering from the access point menu tree.
2.
Configure the HTTP field to configure block Web proxies and URL extensions.
6-40 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Block Outbound HTTP HyperText Transport Protocol (HTTP) is the protocol used to transfer information to and from Web sites. HTTP Blocking allows for blocking of specific HTTP commands going outbound on the access point WAN port. HTTP blocks commands on port 80 only.
The Block Outbound HTTP option allows blocking of the following
(user selectable) outgoing HTTP requests:
• Web Proxy - Blocks the use of Web proxies by clients
• ActiveX - Blocks all outgoing ActiveX requests by clients.
Selecting ActiveX only blocks traffic (scripting language) with an .ocx extension.
Block Outbound URL
Extensions
Enter a URL extension or file name per line in the format of
filename.ext. An asterisk (*) can be used as a wildcard in place of the filename to block all files with a specific extension.
3.
Configure the SMTP field to disable or restrict specific kinds of network mail traffic.
Configuring Access Point Security 6-41
Block Outbound SMTP
Commands
Simple Mail Transport Protocol (SMTP) is the Internet standard for host-to-host mail transport. SMTP generally operates over TCP on port 25. SMTP filtering allows the blocking of any or all outgoing
SMTP commands. Check the box next to the command to disable that command when using SMTP across the access point’s WAN port.
• HELO - (Hello) Identifies the SMTP sender to the SMTP receiver.
• MAIL- Initiates a mail transaction where data is delivered to one or more mailboxes on the local server.
• RCPT - (Recipient) Identifies a recipient of mail data.
• DATA - Tells the SMTP receiver to treat the following information as mail data from the sender.
• QUIT - Tells the receiver to respond with an OK reply and terminate communication with the sender.
• SEND - Initiates a mail transaction where mail is sent to one or more remote terminals.
• SAML - (Send and Mail) Initiates a transaction where mail data is sent to one or more local mailboxes and remote terminals.
• RESET - Cancels mail transaction and informs the recipient to discard data sent during transaction.
• VRFY - Asks receiver to confirm the specified argument identifies a user. If argument does identify a user, the full name and qualified mailbox is returned.
• EXPN - (Expand) Asks receiver to confirm a specified argument identifies a mailing list. If the argument identifies a list, the membership list of the mailing list is returned.
4.
Configure the FTP field to block or restrict various traffic on the network.
6-42 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Block Outbound FTP
Actions
File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is the Internet standard for host-to-host mail transport. FTP generally operates over TCP port 20 and 21. FTP filtering allows the blocking of any or all outgoing FTP functions.
Check the box next to the command to disable the command when using FTP across the access point ’s WAN port.
• Storing Files - Blocks the request to transfer files sent from the client across the AP’s WAN port to the FTP server.
• Retrieving Files - Blocks the request to retrieve files sent from the FTP server across the AP’s WAN port to the client.
• Directory List - Blocks requests to retrieve a directory listing sent from the client across the AP’s WAN port to the FTP server.
• Create Directory - Blocks requests to create directories sent from the client across the AP’s WAN port to the FTP server.
• Change Directory - Blocks requests to change directories sent from the client across the AP's WAN port to the FTP server.
• Passive Operation - Blocks passive mode FTP requests sent from the client across the AP's WAN port to the FTP server.
5.
Click Apply to save any changes to the Content Filtering screen. Navigating away from the screen without clicking the Apply button results in all changes to the screens being lost.
6.
Click Undo Changes (if necessary) to undo any changes made. Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the Content Filtering screen to the last saved configuration.
7.
Click Logout to securely exit the Access Point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
6.9 Configuring Rogue AP Detection
It is possible that not all of the devices identified by the access point are operating legitimately within the access point’s radio coverage area. A rogue AP is a device located nearby an authorized Motorola access point but recognized as having properties rendering its operation illegal and threatening to the access point and the LAN. Rogue AP detection can be configured independently for both access point
802.11a/n and 802.11b/g/n radios (if using a dual radio sku access point). A rogue detection interval is the user-defined interval the access point waits to search for rogue APs. Additionally, the access point does not detect rogue APs on illegal channels (channels not allowed by the regulatory requirements of the country the access point is operating in).
Configuring Access Point Security 6-43
The rogue detection interval is used in conjunction with Motorola MUs that identify themselves as rogue detection capable to the access point. The detection interval defines how often the access point requests these MUs to scan for a rogue AP. A shorter interval can affect the performance of the
MU, but it will also decrease the time it takes for the access point to scan for a rogue AP. A longer interval will have less of an impact to the MU’s, but it will increase the amount of time used to detect rogue APs. Therefore, the interval should be set according to the perceived risk of rogue devices and the criticality of MU performance.
CAUTION Using an antenna other than the Dual-Band Antenna (Part No.
ML-2452-APA2-01) could render the access point’s Rogue AP Detector
Mode feature inoperable. Contact your Motorola sales associate for specific information.
To configure Rogue AP detection for the access point:
1.
Select Network Configuration -> Wireless -> Rogue AP Detection from the access point menu tree.
6-44 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
CAUTION Users cannot define a rogue detection method when one of the access point radios is functioning as a WIPS sensor. To use one of the radios as a detector, you must disable WIPS sensor mode first, then set a radio for the desired detection method.
2.
Configure the Detection Method field to set the detection method (MU or access point) and define the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n radio to conduct the rogue AP search.
Configuring Access Point Security 6-45
RF Scan by MU
RF On-Channel
Detection
RF Scan by Detector
Radio
RF A/BG Scan
Select the RF Scan by MU checkbox to enable MUs to scan for potential rogue APs within the network. Define an interval in the
Scan Interval field for associated MUs to beacon in an attempt to locate a rogue AP. Set the interval to a value sooner than the default if a large volume of device network traffic is anticipated within the coverage area of the target access point. The Scan
Interval field is not available unless the RF Scan by MU checkbox is selected. Motorola clients must be associated and have rogue
AP detection enabled.
Select the RF On-Channel Detection checkbox to enable the access point to detect rogue APs on its current (legal) channel setting.
If the access point is a dual-radio model, select the RF Scan by
Detector Radio checkbox to enable the selected 11a or 11b/g radio to scan for rogue APs. For example, if 11b/g is selected, the existing 11a radio would act as the “detector radio,” scanning on all 11b/g channels while the existing 11b/g radio continues to service MUs. The assumption is, when planning to do an all channel scan on one band, the MUs would also be on that band.
The radio on the other band is used as the “detector radio.”
Select this checkbox to scan for rouges over all channels on both of the access point’s 11a and 11bg radio bands. The switching of radio bands is based on a timer with no user intervention required. This option provides a good opportunity to detect rogues, as rogues often roam from one association to a stronger one regardless of the current operating channel.
3.
Use the Allowed AP List field to restrict Motorola AP’s from Rogue AP detection and create a list of device MAC addresses and ESSID’s approved for interoperability with the access point.
Authorize Any AP
Having Motorola
Defined MAC Address
Select this checkbox to enable all access points with a Motorola
MAC address to interoperate with the access point conducting a scan for rogue devices.
Add Click Add to display a single set of editable MAC address and ESS address values.
6-46 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Del (Delete)
Delete All
Any MAC
MAC
Any ESSID
ESSID
Click the Delete button to remove the highlighted line from the
Rule Management field. The MAC and ESS address information previously defined is no longer applicable unless the previous configuration is restored.
Click the Delete All button to remove all entries from the Rule
Management field. All MAC and ESS address information previously defined is no longer applicable unless the previous configuration is restored.
Select the Any MAC checkbox to prevent a device’s MAC address
(whether it is a known device MAC address or not) from being considered a rogue device.
Click Add, and enter the device MAC address to be excluded from classification as a rogue device.
Select the Any ESSid checkbox to prevent a device’s ESSID
(whether it is a known device ESSID or not) from being considered a rogue device
Click Add , and enter the name of a device ESSID to be excluded from classification as a rogue device. Do not use < > | " & \ ? as characters for the ESSID name.
4.
Click Apply to save any changes to the Rogue AP Detection screen. Navigating away from the screen without clicking Apply results in all changes to the screens being lost.
5.
Click Undo Changes (if necessary) to undo any changes made. Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the Rogue AP Detection screen to the last saved configuration.
6.
Click Logout to securely exit the Access Point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
6.9.1 Moving Rogue APs to the Allowed AP List
The Active APs screen enables the user to view the list of detected rogue APs and, if necessary, select and move an AP into a list of allowed devices. This is helpful when the settings defined within the Rogue AP Detection screen inadvertently detect and define a device as a rogue AP.
To move detected rogue APs into a list of allowed APs:
1.
Select Network Configuration -> Wireless -> Rogue AP Detection -> Active APs from the access point menu tree.
Configuring Access Point Security 6-47
The Active APs screen displays with detected rogue devices displayed within the Rogue
APs table.
2.
Enter a value (in minutes) in the Allowed APs Age Out Time field to indicate the number of elapsed minutes before an AP will be removed from the approved list and reevaluated. A zero (0) for this value (default value) indicates an AP can remain on the approved AP list permanently.
3.
Enter a value (in minutes) in the Rogue APs Age Out Time field to indicate the number of elapsed minutes before an AP will be removed from the rogue AP list and reevaluated. A zero (0) for this value (default value) indicates an AP can remain on the rogue AP list permanently.
4.
Highlight an AP from within the Rogue APs table and click the Add to Allowed APs List button to move the device into the list of Allowed APs.
5.
Click the Add All to Allowed APs List button to move each of the APs displayed within the Rogue APs table to the list of allowed APs.
6-48 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
6.
Highlight a rogue AP and click the Details button to display a screen with device and detection information specific to that rogue device. This information is helpful in determining if a rogue AP should be moved to the Allowed APs table.
For more information on the displaying information on detected rogue APs, see
.
7.
To remove the Rogue AP entries displayed within the e Rogue APs field, click the Clear
Rogue AP List button.
Motorola only recommends clearing the list of Rogue APs when the devices displaying within the list do not represent a threat to the access point managed network.
8.
Click Apply to save any changes to the Active APs screen. Navigating away from the screen without clicking Apply results in all changes to the screen being lost.
9.
Click Undo Changes (if necessary) to undo any changes made. Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the Active APs screen to the last saved configuration.
10. Click Logout to securely exit the Access Point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
6.9.1.1 Displaying Rogue AP Details
Before moving a rogue AP into the list of allowed APs within the Active APs screen, the device address and rogue detection information for that AP should be evaluated.
To evaluate the properties of a rogue AP:
1.
Select Network Configuration -> Wireless -> Rogue AP Detection -> Active APs from the access point menu tree.
2.
Highlight a target rogue AP from within Rogue APs table and click the Details button.
The Detail screen displays for the rogue AP.
Configuring Access Point Security 6-49
3.
Refer to the Rogue AP Detail field for the following information:
BSSID/MAC
ESSID
RSSI
Displays the MAC address of the rogue AP. This information could be useful if the MAC address is determined to be a Motorola MAC address and the device is interpreted as non-hostile and the device should be defined as an allowed AP.
Displays the ESSID of the rogue AP. This information could be useful if the ESSID is determined to be non-hostile and the device should be defined as an allowed AP.
Shows the Relative Signal Strength (RSSI) of the rogue AP. Use this information to assess how close the rogue AP is. The higher the
RSSI, the closer the rogue AP. If multiple access point’s have detected the same rogue AP, RSSI can be useful in triangulating the location of the rogue AP.
4.
Refer to the Rogue Detector Detail field for the following information:
Finder’s MAC The MAC address of the access point detecting the rogue AP.
6-50 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Detection Method
First Heard
(days:hrs:min)
Last Heard
(days:hrs:min)
Channel
Displays the RF Scan by MU , RF On-Channel Detection or RF
Scan by Detector Radio method selected from the Rogue AP screen to detect rogue devices. For information on detection methods, see
Configuring Rogue AP Detection on page 6-42
.
Defines the time in (days:hrs:min) that the rogue AP was initially heard by the detecting AP.
Defines the time in (days:hrs:min) that the rogue AP was last heard by the detecting AP.
Displays the channel the rogue AP is using.
5.
Click OK to securely exit the Detail screen and return to the Active APs screen.
6.
Click Cancel (if necessary) to undo any changes made and return to the Active APs screen.
6.9.2 Using MUs to Detect Rogue Devices
The access point can use an associated MU that has its rogue AP detection feature enabled to scan for rogue APs. Once detected, the rogue AP(s) can be moved to the list of allowed devices (if appropriate) within the Active APs screen. When adding an MU’s detection capabilities with the access point’s own rogue AP detection functionality, the rogue detection area can be significantly extended.
To use associated rogue AP enabled MUs to scan for rogue APs:
1.
Select Network Configuration -> Wireless -> Rogue AP Detection -> MU Scan from the access point menu tree.
The On Demand MU Scan screen displays with associated MUs with rogue AP detection enabled
Configuring Access Point Security 6-51
2.
Highlight an MU from within the Rogue AP enabled MUs field and click the scan button.
The target MU begins scanning for rogue devices using the detection parameters defined within the Rogue AP Detection screen. To modify the detection parameters, see
Rogue AP Detection on page 6-42 .
Those devices detected as rogue APs display within the Scan Result table. Use the displayed AP MAC, ESSID and RSSI values to determine the device listed in the table is truly a rogue device or one inadvertently detected as a rogue AP.
3.
If necessary, highlight an individual MU from within the Scan Result field and click the Add to Allowed AP List button to move the AP into the Allowed APs table within the Active
APs screen.
4.
Additionally, if necessary, click the Add All to Allowed APs List button to move every device within the Scan Result table into the Allowed APs table within the Active APs screen. Only use this option if you are sure all of the devices detected and displayed within the Scan Results table are non-hostile APs.
6-52 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
5.
Highlight a different MU from the Rogue AP enabled MUs field as needed to scan for additional rogue APs.
6.
Click Logout to return to the Rogue AP Detection screen.
6.10 Configuring User Authentication
The access point can work with Radius and external LDAP Servers (AAA Servers) to provide user database information and user authentication.
6.10.1 Configuring the Radius Server
The Radius Server screen enables an administrator to define data sources and specify authentication information for the Radius Server.
To configure the Radius Server:
1.
Select System Configuration -> User Authentication -> Radius Server from the menu tree.
CAUTION Ensure IPSec has been properly configured to protect communications with the external Radius server. Changes will not be applied otherwise.
Configuring Access Point Security 6-53
2.
From within the Data Source Configuration field, use the Data Source drop-down menu to select the data source for the Radius server.
Local
LDAP
An internal user database serves as the data source. Use the User
Database screen to enter the user data. For more information, see
Managing the Local User Database on page 6-61 .
If LDAP is selected, the switch will use the data in an LDAP server.
Configure the LDAP server settings on the LDAP screen under
Radius Server on the menu tree. For more information, see
Configuring LDAP Authentication on page 6-57
.
NOTE When using LDAP, only PEAP-GTC and TTLS/PAP are supported.
6-54 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
3.
Use the TTLS/PEAP Configuration field to specify the Radius Server default EAP type,
EAP authentication type and a Server or CA certificate (if used).
EAP Type Use the EAP Type checkboxes to enable the default EAP type(s) for the Radius server. Options include:
• PEAP - Select the PEAP checkbox to enable both PEAP types
(GTC and MSCHAP-V2) available to the access point. PEAP uses a TLS layer on top of EAP as a carrier for other EAP modules. PEAP is an ideal choice for networks using legacy
EAP authentication methods.
• TTLS - Select the TTLS checkbox to enable all three TTLS types (MD5, PAP and MSCHAP-V2) available to the access point.TTLS is similar to EAP-TLS, but the client authentication portion of the protocol is not performed until after a secure transport tunnel is established. This allows
EAP-TTLS to protect legacy authentication methods used by some RADIUS servers.
• TLS - The TLS checkbox is selected but disabled by default and resides in the background as it does not contain user configurable parameters.
Configuring Access Point Security 6-55
Default
Authentication Type
Server Certificate
Specify a PEAP and/or TTLS Authentication Type for EAP to use from the drop-down menu to the right of each checkbox item. PEAP options include:
• GTC - EAP Generic Token Card (GTC) is a challenge handshake authentication protocol using a hardware token card to provide the response string.
• MSCHAP-V2 - Microsoft CHAP (MSCHAP-V2) is an encrypted authentication method based on Microsoft's challenge/ response authentication protocol.
TTLS options include:
• PAP - Password Authentication Protocol sends a username and password over a network to a server that compares the username and password to a table of authorized users. If the username and password are matched in the table, server access is authorized.
WatchGuard products do not support the PAP protocol because the username and password are sent as clear text that a hacker can read.
• MSCHAP-V2 - Microsoft CHAP (MSCHAP-V2) is an encrypted authentication method based on Microsoft's challenge/response authentication protocol.
• MD5 - This option enables the MD5 algorithm for data verification. MD5 takes as input a message of arbitrary length and produces a 128- bit fingerprint. The MD5 algorithm is intended for digital signature applications, in which a large file must be compressed in a secure manner before being encrypted with a private (secret) key under a public-key cryptographic system.
If you have a server certificate from a CA and wish to use it on the
Radius server, select it from the drop-down menu. Only certificates imported to the access point are available in the menu. For
information on creating a certificate, see Creating Self Certificates on page 4-20 .
6-56 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
CA Certificate You can also choose an imported CA Certificate to use on the
Radius server. If using a server certificate signed by a CA, import that CA's root certificate using the CA certificates screen (for information, see
Importing a CA Certificate on page 4-18 ). After a
valid CA certificate has been imported, it is available from the CA
Certificate drop-down menu.
WARNING! If you have imported a Server or CA certificate, the certificate will not be saved when updating the access point’s firmware. Export your certificates before upgrading the access point’s firmware. From the access point CLI, use the admin(system.cmgr)> expcert command to export the certificate to a secure location.
4.
Use the Radius Client Authentication table to configure multiple shared secrets based on the subnet or host attempting to authenticate with the Radius server. Use the Add button to add entries to the list.Usethe Delete button to delete entries from the list.Modify the following information as needed within the table.
Subnet/Host
Netmask
Shared Secret
Defines the IP address of the subnet or host that will be authenticating with the Radius server. If a WLAN has been created to support mesh networking, then enter the IP address of mesh client bridge in order for the MU to authenticate with a base bridge.
Defines the netmask (subnet mask) of the subnet or host authenticating with the Radius server.
Click the Passwords button and set a shared secret used for each host or subnet authenticating against the RADIUS server. The shared secret must be 8 to 16 characters in length.
5.
Click Apply to save any changes to the Radius Server screen. Navigating away from the screen without clicking Apply results in all changes to the screen being lost.
6.
Click Undo Changes (if necessary) to undo any changes made. Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the Radius Server screen to the last saved configuration.
7.
Click Logout to securely exit the Access Point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
Configuring Access Point Security 6-57
6.10.2 Configuring LDAP Authentication
When the Radius Data Source is set to use an external LDAP server (see Configuring the Radius
), the LDAP screen is used to configure the properties of the external LDAP server.
To configure the LDAP server:
1.
Select System Configuration -> User Authentication -> RADIUS Server -> LDAP from the menu tree.
CAUTION Ensure IPSec has been properly configured to protect communications with the external LDAP server. Changes will not be applied otherwise.
NOTE For the onboard Radius server to work with Windows Active Directory or open LDAP as the database, the user has to be present in a group within the organizational unit. The same group must be present within the onboard Radius server’s database. The group configured within the onboard Radius server is used for group policy configuration to support a new Time Based Rule restriction feature.
NOTE The LDAP screen displays with unfamiliar alphanumeric characters (if new to LDAP configuration). Motorola recommends only qualified administrators change the default values within the LDAP screen.
6-58 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
2.
Enter the appropriate information within the LDAP Configuration field to allow the access point to interoperate with the LDAP server. Consult with your LDAP server administrator for details on how to define the values in this screen.
LDAP Server IP
Port
Enter the IP address of the external LDAP server acting as the data source for the Radius server. The LDAP server must be accessible from the WAN port or from the access point’s active subnet.
Enter the TCP/IP port number for the LDAP server acting as a data source for the Radius. The default port is 389.
Login Attribute Specify the login attribute used by the LDAP server for authentication. In most cases, the default value should work.
Windows Active Directory users must use “sAMAccountName” as their login attribute to successfully login to the LDAP server.
Password Attribute Enter the password used by the LDAP server for authentication.
Configuring Access Point Security 6-59
Bind Distinguished
Name
Password
Base Distinguished
Name
Group Attribute
Group Filter
Group Member
Attribute
Specify the distinguished name used to bind with the LDAP server.
Enter a valid password for the LDAP server. The password length must be 8 to 16 characters.
Enter a name that establishes the base object for the search. The base object is the point in the LDAP tree at which to start searching.
Define the group attribute used by the LDAP server.
Specify the group filters used by the LDAP server.
Enter the Group Member Attribute sent to the LDAP server when authenticating users.
CAUTION Windows Active Directory users must set their Login Attribute to
“sAMAccountName” in order to successfully login to the LDAP server.
3.
Click Apply to save any changes to the LDAP screen. Navigating away from the screen without clicking Apply results in all changes to the screen being lost.
4.
Click Undo Changes (if necessary) to undo any changes made. Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the LDAP screen to the last saved configuration.
5.
Click Logout to securely exit the Access Point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
6.10.3 Configuring a Proxy Radius Server
The access point has the capability to proxy authentication requests to a remote Radius server based on the suffix of the user ID (such as myisp.com or company.com). The access point supports up to 10 proxy servers.
CAUTION If using a proxy server for Radius authentication, the Data Source field within the Radius server screen must be set to Local . If set to
LDAP, the proxy server will not be successful when performing the
authentication. To verify the existing settings, see Configuring the
.
6-60 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
CAUTION When configuring the credentials of an MU, ensure its login (or user) name is a Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN), or it cannot be authenticated by the access point’s proxy server. For example;
To configure the proxy Radius server for the access point:
1.
Select System Configuration -> User Authentication -> RADIUS Server -> Proxy from the menu tree.
CAUTION Ensure IPSec has been properly configured to protect communications with the external Proxy server. Changes will not be applied otherwise.
2.
Refer to the Proxy Configuration field to define the proxy server’s retry count and timeout values.
Configuring Access Point Security 6-61
Retry Count
Timeout
Enter a value between 3 and 6 to indicate the number of times the access point attempts to reach a proxy server before giving up.
Enter a value between 5 and 10 to indicate the number of elapsed seconds causing the access point to time out on a request to a proxy server.
3.
Use the Add button to add a new proxy server. Define the following information for each entry
:
Suffix
RADIUS Server IP
Port
Shared Secret
Enter the domain suffix (such as myisp.com or mycompany.com) of the users sent to the specified proxy server.
Specify the IP address of the Radius server acting as a proxy server.
Enter the TCP/IP port number for the Radius server acting as a proxy server. The default port is 1812.
Set a shared secret used for each suffix used for authentication with the Radius proxy server.
4.
To remove a row, select the row and click the Del (Delete) button.
5.
Click Apply to save any changes to the Proxy screen. Navigating away from the screen without clicking Apply results in all changes to the screen being lost.
6.
Click Undo Changes (if necessary) to undo any changes made. Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the Proxy screen to the last saved configuration.
7.
Click Logout to securely exit the Access Point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
6.10.4 Managing the Local User Database
6.10.4.1 Wireless Users
Use the User Database screen to create groups for use with the Radius server. The database of groups is employed if Local is selected as the Data Source from the Radius Server screen. For information on selecting Local as the Data Source, see
Configuring the Radius Server on page 6-52 .
To add groups to the User database:
6-62 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
NOTE Each group can be configured to have its own access policy using the
Access Policy screen. For more information, see
Permissions by Group on page 6-67
.
1.
Select System Configuration -> User Authentication -> User Database from the menu tree.
Refer to the Groups field for a list of all groups in the local Radius database. The groups are listed in the order added. Although groups can be added and deleted, there is no capability to edit a group name.
2.
Click the Add button and enter the name of the group in the new blank field in the Groups table.
3.
To remove a group, select the group from the table and click the Del (Delete) key.
The Users table displays the entire list of users. Up to 100 users can be entered here. The users are listed in the order added. Users can be added and deleted, but there is no capability to edit the name of a group.
4.
Click the List of Groups cell. A new screen displays enabling you to associate groups with
.
5.
Click Apply to save any changes to the Users screen. Navigating away from the screen without clicking Apply results in all changes to the screen being lost.
6.
Click Undo Changes (if necessary) to undo any changes made. Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the Users screen to the last saved configuration.
7.
Click Logout to securely exit the Access Point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
Configuring Access Point Security 6-63
6.10.4.2 Management Users
1.
The Management Users table displays the list of management users.
ClearAll button is available for default management user account only.
2.
The Add and Delete buttons are read only for all managment users, except the default
management user. The admin account is the default management user account.
NOTE The default ‘admin’ user has the following special privileges compared to other management users:
• Add/Delete/Edit operations are only allowed for (default) ‘admin’ user, other management users can only view the list of users.
• Only the (default) ‘admin’ user can change other management users password. Other management users can only edit their own password.
3.
To add a new user, click the Add button at the bottom of the Management Users. Upto 24 users can be added for managing the AP. So, there can be a total of 25 management users
(including the default ‘admin’ user).
6-64 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
4.
In the new line, type a User ID (user name).
5.
Click the Change Login Password button. A small window displays. Enter a new password for the user and click Apply button to save the changes. Change Login
Password button is available for non default management user accounts only.
6.
Click Apply to save any changes to the Users screen. Navigating away from the screen without clicking Apply results in all changes to the screen being lost.
Configuring Access Point Security 6-65
7.
Click Undo Changes (if necessary) to undo any changes made. Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the Users screen to the last saved configuration.
8.
Click Logout to securely exit the Access Point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
6.10.4.3 Mapping Users to Groups
This applies to wireless users only. Once users have been created within the Users screen, their access privileges need to be configured for inclusion to one, some or all of the groups also created within the Users screen.
To map users to groups for group authentication privileges:
1.
If you are not already in the Users screen, select System Configuration -> User
Authentication -> User Database from the menu tree.
Existing users and groups display within their respective fields. If user or group requires creation or modification, make your changes before you begin to map them.
2.
Refer to the Users field and select the List of Groups column for the particular user you wish to map to one or more groups.
The Users Group Setting screen displays with the groups available for user inclusion displayed within the Available column.
6-66 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
3.
To add the user to a group, select the group in the Available list (on the right) and click the
<-Add button.
Assigned users will display within the Assigned table. Map one or more groups as needed for group authentication access for this particular user.
4.
To remove the user from a group, select the group in the Assigned list (on the left) and click the Delete-> button.
5.
Click the OK button to save your user and group mapping assignments and return to the
Users screen.
Configuring Access Point Security 6-67
6.10.5 Defining User Access Permissions by Group
This applies to wireless users only. An AAA server maintains the users and groups database used by the access point for access permissions. Various kinds of access policies can be applied to each group. Individual groups can be associated with their own time-based access policy. Each group’s policy has a user defined interval defining the days and hours access is permitted. Authentication requests for users belonging to the group are honored only during these defined hourly intervals.
Refer to the Access Policy screen to define WLAN access for the user group(s) defined within the
Users screen. Each group created within the Users screen displays in the Access Policy screen within the groups column. Similarly, existing WLANs can be individually mapped to user groups by clicking the WLANs button to the right of each group name. For more information on creating groups and users, see
Managing the Local User Database on page 6-61 . For information on creating a new WLAN
or editing the properties of an existing WLAN, see Creating/Editing Individual WLANs on page 5-29 .
CAUTION If using the Radius time-based authentication feature to authenticate access point user permissions, ensure UTC has been selected from the Date and Time Settings screen’s Time Zone field. If UTC is not selected, time based authentication will not work properly. For information on setting the time zone for the access point, see
Configuring Network Time Protocol (NTP) on page 4-41
.
1.
Select User Authentication -> Radius Server -> Access Policy from the menu tree.
6-68 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
The Access Policy screen displays the following fields:
Groups The Groups field displays the names of those existing groups that can have access intervals applied to them. Click the Edit button to display a screen designed to create access intervals for specific days and hours. A mechanism also exists for mapping specific
WLANs to these intervals. For more information, see Editing Group
Access Permissions on page 6-69 . For information on creating a
new group, see
Managing the Local User Database on page 6-61
.
Time of Access The Time of Access field displays the days of the week and the hours defined for group access to access point resources. This data is defined for the group by selecting the Edit button from within the groups field.
Configuring Access Point Security 6-69
Associated WLANs The Associated WLANs field displays the WLANs assigned the user group access permissions listed within the filters and grid fields. Add additional WLANs to a group by selecting the Edit button within the groups field.
grid Refer to the grid field to review a bar graph of the selected group’s access privileges. Revise the selected group’s privileges as needed to
2.
Review the existing access intervals assigned to each group by selecting the group from amongst those displayed. To modify a group’s permissions, see
.
3.
Click Logout to securely exit the access point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
6.10.5.1 Editing Group Access Permissions
The Access Policy screen provides a mechanism for modifying an existing group’s access permissions.
A group’s permissions can be set for any day of the week and include any hour of the day. Ten unique access intervals can be defined for each existing group.
To update a group’s access permissions:
1.
Select User Authentication -> Radius Server -> Access Policy from the menu tree.
2.
Select an existing group from within the groups field.
3.
Select the Edit button.
The Edit Access Policy screen displays.
6-70 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
4.
Define up to 10 access policies for the selected group within the Time Based Access
Policy field.
Use the drop-down menus on the left-hand side of the screen to define the day of the week for which each policy applies. If continual access is required, select the All Days option. If continual access is required during Monday through Friday, but not Saturday or Sunday, select the Weekdays option.
Use the Start Time and End Time values to define the access interval (in HHMM format) for each access policy. Each policy for a given group should have unique intervals. Policies can be created for different intervals on the same day of the week.
Configuring Access Point Security 6-71
NOTE Groups have a strict start and end time (as defined using the Edit Access
Policy screen). Only during this period of time can authentication requests from users be honored (with no overlaps). Any authentication request outside of this defined interval is denied regardless of whether a user’s credentials match or not.
5.
Refer to the WLANs field to select existing WLANs to apply to the selected group’s set of access permissions.
The group’s existing WLANs are already selected within the Edit screen. Select those additional WLANs requiring the access permissions specified in options 1-10 within the
Time Based Access Policy field.
6.
Click Apply to save any changes to the Edit Access Policy screen. Navigating away from the screen without clicking Apply results in all changes to the screen being lost.
7.
Click Cancel if necessary) to undo any changes made. Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the Edit Access Policy screen to the last saved configuration.
6-72 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Monitoring Statistics
The access point has functionality to display robust transmit and receive statistics for its WAN and
LAN port. Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) stats can also be displayed collectively for each enabled WLAN as well as individually for up to 16 specific WLANs.
Transmit and receive statistics can also be displayed for the access point’s 802.11a/n and
802.11b/g/n radios. An advanced radio statistics page is also available to display retry histograms for specific data packet retry information.
Associated MU stats can be displayed collectively for associated MUs and individually for specific
MUs. An echo (ping) test is also available to ping specific MUs to assess the strength of the AP association.
Finally, the access point can detect and display the properties of other APs detected within the access point radio coverage area. The type of AP detected can be displayed as well as the properties of individual APs.
7-2 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
See the following sections for more details on viewing statistics for the access point:
•
•
•
•
Viewing Radio Statistics Summary
•
•
Viewing the Mesh Statistics Summary
•
Viewing Known Access Point Statistics
7.1 Viewing WAN Statistics
Use the access point WAN Stats screen to view real-time statistics for monitoring the access point activity through its Wide Area Network (WAN) port.
The Information field of the WAN Stats screen displays basic WAN information, generated from settings on the WAN screen. The Received and Transmitted fields display statistics for the cumulative packets, bytes, and errors received and transmitted through the WAN interface since it was last enabled or the AP was last rebooted. The access point WAN Stats screen is view-only with no configurable data fields.
To view access point WAN Statistics:
1.
Select Status and Statistics -> WAN Stats from the access point menu tree.
Monitoring Statistics 7-3
2.
Refer to the Information field to reference the following access point WAN data:
Status
HW Address
IP Addresses
The Status field displays Enabled if the WAN interface is enabled on the WAN screen. If the WAN interface is disabled on the WAN screen, the WAN Stats screen displays no connection information and statistics. To enable the WAN connection, see
The Media Access Control (MAC) address of the access point WAN port. The WAN port MAC address is hard coded at the factory and cannot be changed. For more information on how access point
MAC addresses are assigned, see MAC Address Assignment on page 1-29
.
The displayed Internet Protocol (IP) addresses for the access point
WAN port.
7-4 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Mask
Link
Speed
The Mask field displays the subnet mask number for the access point’s WAN connection. This value is set on the WAN screen.
Refer to
Configuring WAN Settings on page 5-16
to change the subnet mask.
The Link parameter displays Up if the WAN connection is active between the access point and network, and Down if the WAN connection is interrupted or lost. Use this information to assess the current connection status of the WAN port.
The WAN connection speed is displayed in Megabits per second
(Mbps), for example, 54Mbps. If the throughput speed is not achieved, examine the number of transmit and receive errors, or consider increasing the supported data rate. To change the data rate of the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n radio, see
802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n Radio on page 5-56
.
3.
Refer to the Received field to reference data received over the access point WAN port.
RX Packets
RX Bytes
RX Errors
RX Dropped
RX Overruns
RX packets are data packets received over the WAN port. The displayed number is a cumulative total since the WAN interface was last enabled or the access point was last restarted.
RX bytes are bytes of information received over the WAN port. The displayed number is a cumulative total since the WAN interface was last enabled or the access point was last restarted. To restart the access point to begin a new data collection, see
RX errors include dropped data packets, buffer overruns, and frame errors on inbound traffic. The number of RX errors is a total of RX
Dropped, RX Overruns and RX Carrier errors. Use this information to determine performance quality of the current WAN connection.
The RX Dropped field displays the number of data packets that fail to reach the WAN interface. If this number appears excessive, consider a new connection to the device.
RX overruns are buffer overruns on the WAN connection. RX overruns occur when packets are received faster than the WAN port can handle them. If RX overruns are excessive, consider
reducing the data rate, for more information, see Configuring the
802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n Radio on page 5-56
.
Monitoring Statistics 7-5
RX Frame The RX Frame field displays the number of TCP/IP data frame errors received.
4.
Refer to the Transmitted field to reference data received over the access point WAN port.
TX Packets
TX Bytes
TX Errors
TX Dropped
TX Overruns
TX Carrier
TX packets are data packets sent over the WAN connection. The displayed number is a cumulative total since the WAN was last enabled or the access point was last restarted. To begin a new data collection, see
Configuring System Settings on page 4-2
.
TX bytes are bytes of information sent over the WAN connection.
The displayed number is a cumulative total since the WAN interface was last enabled or the access point was last restarted.
To begin a new data collection, see Configuring System Settings on page 4-2 .
TX errors include dropped data packets, buffer overruns, and carrier errors on outbound traffic. The displayed number of TX errors is the total of TX Dropped, TX Overruns and TX Carrier errors. Use this information to assess access point location and transmit speed.
The TX Dropped field displays the number of data packets that fail to get sent from the WAN interface.
TX overruns are buffer overruns on the WAN connection. TX overruns occur when packets are sent faster than the WAN interface can handle. If TX overruns are excessive, consider
reducing the data rate, for more information, see Configuring the
802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n Radio on page 5-56
.
The TX Carrier field displays the number of TCP/IP data carrier errors.
5.
Click the Clear WAN Stats button to reset each of the data collection counters to zero in order to begin new data collections. The RX/TX Packets and RX/TX Bytes totals remain at their present values and are not cleared.
Do not clear the WAN stats if currently in an important data gathering activity or risk losing all data calculations to that point.
6.
Click Logout to securely exit the access point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
7-6 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
7.2 Viewing LAN Statistics
Use the LAN Stats screen to monitor the activity of the access point’s LAN1 or LAN2 connection. The
Information field of the LAN Stats screen displays network traffic information as monitored over the access point LAN1 or LAN2 port. The Received and Transmitted fields of the screen display statistics for the cumulative packets, bytes, and errors received and transmitted over the LAN1 or
LAN2 port since it was last enabled or the access point was last restarted. The LAN Stats screen is view-only with no user configurable data fields.
To view access point LAN connection stats:
1.
Select Status and Statistics -> LAN Stats -> LAN1 Stats (or LAN2 Stats) from the access point menu tree.
2.
Refer to the Information field to view the following access point device address information:
Monitoring Statistics 7-7
Status
IP Address
Network Mask
Ethernet Address
Link
Speed
Duplex
WLANs Mapped
Displays whether this particular LAN has been enabled as viable subnet from within the LAN Configuration screen.
The Internet Protocol (IP) addresses for the access point LAN port.
The first two sets of numbers specify the network domain, the next set specifies the subset of hosts within a larger network. These values help divide a network into subnetworks and simplify routing and data transmission.
The Media Access Control (MAC) address of the access point. The
MAC address is hard coded at the factory and cannot be changed.
For more information on how access point MAC addresses are assigned, see
MAC Address Assignment on page 1-29
.
The Link parameter displays Up if the LAN connection is active between the access point and network, and Down if the LAN connection is interrupted or lost. Use this information to assess the current connection status of LAN 1 or LAN2.
The LAN 1 or LAN 2 connection speed is displayed in Megabits per second (Mbps), for example, 54Mbps. If the throughput speed is not achieved, examine the number of transmit and receive errors, or consider increasing the supported data rate. To change the data rate of the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n radio, see
802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n Radio on page 5-56
.
Displays whether the current LAN connection is full or half duplex.
The WLANs Mapped table lists the WLANs mapped to this LAN
(either LAN1 or LAN2) as their LAN interface.
3.
Refer to the Received field to view data received over the access point LAN port.
RX Packets
RX Bytes
RX packets are data packets received over the access point LAN port. The number is a cumulative total since the LAN connection was last enabled or the access point was last restarted. To begin a new data collection, see
Configuring System Settings on page 4-2
.
RX bytes are bytes of information received over the LAN port. The value is a cumulative total since the LAN connection was last enabled or the access point was last restarted. To begin a new data collection, see
Configuring System Settings on page 4-2
.
7-8 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
RX Errors
RX Dropped
RX Overruns
RX Frame
RX errors include dropped data packets, buffer overruns, and frame errors on inbound traffic. The number of RX errors is a total of RX
Dropped, RX Overruns and RX Carrier errors. Use this information to determine performance quality of the current LAN connection.
The RX Dropped field displays the number of data packets failing to reach the LAN port. If this number appears excessive, consider a new connection to the device.
RX overruns are buffer overruns on the access point LAN port. RX overruns occur when packets are received faster than the LAN connection can handle them. If RX overruns are excessive, consider
reducing the data rate, for more information, see Configuring the
802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n Radio on page 5-56
.
The RX Frame field displays the number of TCP/IP data frame errors received.
4.
Refer to the Transmitted field to view statistics transmitted over the access point LAN port.
TX Packets
TX Bytes
TX Errors
TX Dropped
TX Overruns
TX packets are data packets sent over the access point LAN port.
The displayed number is a cumulative total since the LAN connection was last enabled or the access point was last restarted.
To begin a new data collection, see Configuring System Settings on page 4-2 .
TX bytes are bytes of information sent over the LAN port. The displayed number is a cumulative total since the LAN Connection was last enabled or the access point was last restarted. To begin a new data collection, see
Configuring System Settings on page 4-2
.
TX errors include dropped data packets, buffer overruns, and carrier errors on outbound traffic. The displayed number of TX errors is a total of TX Dropped, TX Overruns and TX Carrier errors. Use this information to re-assess AP location and transmit speed.
The TX Dropped field displays the number of data packets that fail to get sent from the access point LAN port.
TX overruns are buffer overruns on the LAN port. TX overruns occur when packets are sent faster than the LAN connection can handle.
If TX overruns are excessive, consider reducing the data rate, for more information, see
Configuring the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n
.
Monitoring Statistics 7-9
TX Carrier The TX Carrier field displays the number of TCP/IP data carrier errors.
5.
Click the Clear LAN Stats button to reset each of the data collection counters to zero in order to begin new data collections. The RX/TX Packets and RX/TX Bytes totals remain at their present values and are not cleared.
6.
Click the Logout button to securely exit the Access Point applet. There will be a prompt confirming logout before the applet is closed.
7.2.1 Viewing a LAN’s STP Statistics
Each access point LAN has the ability to track its own unique STP statistics. Refer to the LAN STP
Stats page when assessing mesh networking functionality for each of the two access point LANs.
Access points in bridge mode exchange configuration messages at regular intervals (typically 1 to 4 seconds). If a bridge fails, neighboring bridges detect a lack of configuration messaging and initiate a spanning-tree recalculation (when spanning tree is enabled).
To view access point LAN’s STP statistics:
1.
Select Status and Statistics -> LAN Stats -> LAN1 Stats (or LAN2 Stats) > STP Stats from the access point menu tree.
7-10 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
2.
Refer to the Spanning Tree Info field to for details on spanning tree state, and root access point designation.
Spanning Tree State Displays whether the spanning tree state is currently enabled or disabled. The spanning tree state must be enabled for a unique spanning-tree calculation to occur when the bridge is powered up or when a topology change is detected.
Designated Root Displays the access point MAC address of the bridge defined as the root bridge in the Bridge STP Configuration screen. For information on defining an access point as a root bridge, see
Configuration for Mesh Networking Support on page 9-7 .
Bridge ID
Root Port Number
The Bridge ID identifies the priority and ID of the bridge sending the message
Identifies the root bridge by listing its 2-byte priority followed by its
6-byte ID.
Monitoring Statistics 7-11
Root Path Cost
Bridge Max Msg. Age The Max Msg Age measures the age of received protocol information recorded for a port, and to ensure the information is discarded when it exceeds the value set for the Maximum
Message age timer. For information on setting the Maximum
Message Age. For information on setting the Bridge Max Msg.
Age, see
Setting the LAN Configuration for Mesh Networking
.
Bridge Hello Time
Bridge message traffic contains information identifying the root bridge and the sending bridge. The root path cost represents the distance (cost) from the sending bridge to the root bridge.
The Bridge Hello Time is the time between each bridge protocol data unit sent. This time is equal to 2 seconds (sec) by default, but can tuned between 1 and 10 sec. For information on setting the
Bridge Hello Time, see Setting the LAN Configuration for Mesh
Networking Support on page 9-7 . The 802.1d specification
recommends the Hello Time be set to a value less than half of the
Max Message age value.
Bridge Forward Delay The Bridge Forward Delay value is the time spent in a listening and learning state. This time is equal to 15 sec by default, but you can tune the time to be between 4 and 30 sec. For information on setting the Bridge Forward Delay, see
Configuration for Mesh Networking Support on page 9-7 .
3.
Refer to the Port Interface Table to assess the state of the traffic over the ports listed within the table for the root and bridge and designated bridges.
Port ID
State
Path Cost
Designated Root
Identifies the port from which the configuration message was sent.
Displays whether a bridge is forwarding traffic to other members of the mesh network (over this port) or blocking traffic. Each viable member of the mesh network must forward traffic to extent the coverage area of the mesh network.
The root path cost is the distance (cost) from the sending bridge to the root bridge.
Displays the MAC address of the access point defined with the lowest priority within the Mesh STP Configuration screen.
7-12 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Designated Bridge
Designated Port
Designated Cost
There is only one root bridge within each mesh network. All other bridges are designated bridges that look to the root bridge for several mesh network timeout values. For information on root and
bridge designations, see Setting the LAN Configuration for Mesh
Networking Support on page 9-7
.
Each designated bridge must use a unique port. The value listed represents the port used by each bridge listed within the table to route traffic to other members of the mesh network.
Displays the unique distance between each access point MAC address listed in the Designated Bridge column and the access point MAC address listed in the Designated Root column.
4.
Click the Logout button to securely exit the Access Point applet. There will be a prompt confirming logout before the applet is closed.
7.3 Viewing Wireless Statistics
Use the WLAN Statistics Summary screen to view overview statistics for active (enabled) WLANs on the access point. The WLAN Summary field displays basic information such as number of Mobile
Units (MUs) and total throughput for each of the active WLANs. The Total RF Traffic section displays basic throughput information for all RF activity on the access point. The WLAN Statistics Summary screen is view-only with no user configurable data fields.
If a WLAN is not displayed within the Wireless Statistics Summary screen,
to enable the WLAN. For information on configuring the properties of individual
WLANs, see Creating/Editing Individual WLANs on page 5-29
.
To view access point WLAN Statistics:
1.
Select Status and Statistics -> Wireless Stats from the access point menu tree.
Monitoring Statistics 7-13
2.
Refer to the WLAN Summary field to reference high-level data for each enabled WLAN.
Name
MUs
T-put
ABS
Displays the names of all the enabled WLANs on the access point.
For information on enabling a WLAN, see Configuring WAN
.
Displays the total number of MUs currently associated with each enabled WLAN. Use this information to assess if the MUs are properly grouped by function within each enabled WLAN. To adjust the maximum number of MUs permissible per WLAN, see
Creating/Editing Individual WLANs on page 5-29
.
Displays the total throughput in Megabits per second (Mbps) for each active WLAN.
Displays the Average Bit Speed (ABS) in Megabits per second
(Mbps) for each active WLAN displayed.
7-14 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
% NU
Retries
Displays a percentage of the total packets for each active WLAN that are non-unicast. Non-unicast packets include broadcast and multicast packets.
Displays the average number of retries per packet. An excessive number could indicate possible network or hardware problems.
Clear All WLAN Stats Click this button to reset each of the data collection counters to zero in order to begin new data collections.
Do not clear the WLAN stats if currently in an important data gathering activity or risk losing all data calculations to that point.
3.
Refer to the Total AP RF Traffic field to view throughput information for the access point and WLAN.
Total pkts per second Displays the average number of RF packets sent per second across all active WLANs on the access point. The number in black represents packets for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents total pkts per second for the last hour.
Total bits per second Displays the average bits sent per second across all active WLANs on the access point. The number in black displays this statistic for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue displays this statistic for the last hour.
Total associated MUs Displays the current number of MUs associated with the active
WLANs on the access point. If the number is excessive, reduce the maximum number of MUs that can associate with the access point, for more information, see
Creating/Editing Individual WLANs on page 5-29
.
Clear all RF Stats Click the Clear all RF Stats button to reset statistic counters for each WLAN, and the Total AP RF totals to 0. Do not clear RF stats if currently in an important data gathering activity or risk losing all data calculations to that point.
4.
Click the Clear RF Stats button to reset each of the data collection counters to zero in order to begin new data collections.
5.
Click the Logout button to securely exit the access point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
Monitoring Statistics 7-15
7.3.1 Viewing WLAN Statistics
Use the WLAN Stats screen to view detailed statistics for individual WLANs.The WLAN Stats screen is separated into four fields; Information, Traffic, RF Status, and Errors. The Information field displays basic information such as number of associated Mobile Units, ESSID and security information. The Traffic field displays statistics on RF traffic and throughput. The RF Status field displays information on RF signal averages from the associated MUs. The Error field displays RF traffic errors based on retries, dropped packets, and undecryptable packets. The WLAN Stats screen is view-only with no user configurable data fields.
To view statistics for an individual WLAN:
1.
Select Status and Statistics -> Wireless Stats -> WLANx Stats (x = target WLAN) from the access point menu tree.
2.
Refer to the Information field to view specific WLAN address, MU and security scheme information for the WLAN selected from the access point menu tree.
7-16 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
ESSID
Radio/s
Displays the Extended Service Set ID (ESSID) for the target WLAN.
Displays the name of the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n radio the target
WLAN is using for access point transmissions.
Authentication Type Displays the authentication type defined for the WLAN. If the authentication type does not match the desired scheme for the
WLAN or needs to be enabled, see Enabling Authentication and
Encryption Schemes on page 6-4 .
Encryption Type Displays the encryption method defined for the WLAN. If the encryption type does not match the desired scheme for the WLAN
or needs to be enabled, see Enabling Authentication and
Encryption Schemes on page 6-4 .
Num. Associated MUs Displays the total number of MUs currently associated with the
WLAN. If this number seems excessive, consider segregating MU’s to other WLANs if appropriate.
3.
Refer to the Traffic field to view performance and throughput information for the WLAN selected from the access point menu tree.
Packets per second The Total column displays the average total packets per second crossing the selected WLAN. The Rx column displays the average total packets per second received on the selected WLAN. The Tx column displays the average total packets per second sent on the selected WLAN. The number in black represents this statistic for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents this statistic for the last hour.
Throughput The Total column displays average throughput in Mbps for a given time period on the selected WLAN. The Rx column displays average throughput in Mbps for packets received on the selected
WLAN. The Tx column displays average throughput for packets sent on the selected WLAN. The number in black represents statistics for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents statistics for the last hour. Use this information to assess whether the current access point data rate is sufficient to support required network traffic.
Monitoring Statistics 7-17
Avg. Bit Speed The Total column displays the average bit speed in Mbps for a given time period on the selected WLAN.This includes all packets that are sent and received. The number in black represents statistics for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents statistics for the last hour. If the bit speed is significantly slower than the selected data rate, refer to the RF Statistics and Errors fields to troubleshoot.
% Non-unicast pkts Displays the percentage of the total packets that are non-unicast.
Non-unicast packets include broadcast and multicast packets.The number in black represents packets for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents packets for the last hour.
4.
Refer to the RF Status field to view the following MU signal, noise and performance information for the WLAN selected from the access point menu tree.
Avg MU Signal
Avg MU Noise
Avg MU SNR
Displays the average RF signal strength in dBm for all MUs associated with the selected WLAN. The number in black represents this statistic for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents this statistic for the last hour. If the signal is low, consider mapping the MU to a different WLAN if a better functional grouping of MUs can be determined.
Displays the average RF noise for all MUs associated with the selected WLAN. The number in black represents MU noise for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents MU noise for the last hour. If MU noise is excessive, consider moving the MU closer to the access point, or in area with less conflicting network traffic.
Displays the average Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR) for all MUs associated with the selected WLAN. The Signal to Noise Ratio is an indication of overall RF performance on your wireless networks.
5.
Refer to the Errors field to view MU association error statistics for the WLAN selected from the access point menu tree.
Avg Num of Retries Displays the average number of retries for all MUs associated with the selected WLAN. The number in black represents average retries for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents average retries for the last hour.
7-18 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Dropped Packets
% of Undecryptable
Pkts
Displays the percentage of packets which the AP gave up on for all
MUs associated with the selected WLAN. The number in black represents this statistic for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents this statistic for the last hour.
Displays the percentage of undecryptable packets for all MUs associated with the selected WLAN. The number in black represents undecryptable pkts for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents undecryptable pkts for the last hour.
NOTE The Apply and Undo Changes buttons are not available on the WLAN
Statistics screen as this screen is view only with no configurable data fields.
6.
Click the Clear WLAN Stats button to reset each of the data collection counters to zero in order to begin new data collections.
Do not clear the WLAN stats if currently in an important data gathering activity or risk losing all data calculations to that point.
7.
Click the Logout button to securely exit the access point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
7.4 Viewing Radio Statistics Summary
Select the Radio Stats Summary screen to view high-level information (radio name, type, number of associated MUs, etc.) for the radio(s) enabled on an access point. Individual radio statistics can be displayed as well by selecting a specific radio from within the access point menu tree.
To view high-level access point radio statistics:
1.
Select Status and Statistics -> Radio Stats from the access point menu tree.
Monitoring Statistics 7-19
2.
Refer to the Radio Summary field to reference access point radio information.
Type
MUs
T-put
ABS
RF Util
Displays the type of radio (either 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n) currently deployed by the access point. To configure the radio type, see
Setting the WLAN’s Radio Configuration on page 5-51
.
Displays the total number of MUs currently associated with each access point radio.
Displays the total throughput in Megabits per second (Mbps) for each access point radio listed. To adjust the data rate for a specific
radio, see Configuring the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n Radio on page
.
Displays the Average Bit Speed (ABS) in Megabits per second
(Mbps) for each access point radio.
Displays the approximate RF Utilization for each access point radio
7-20 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
% NU
Retries
Displays the percentage of the total packets that are non-unicast.
Non-unicast packets include broadcast and multicast packets.
Displays the average number of retries per packet on each radio. A high number could indicate network or hardware problems.
3.
Click the Clear All Radio Stats button to reset each of the data collection counters to zero in order to begin new data collections.
Do not clear the radio stats if currently in an important data gathering activity or risk losing all data calculations to that point.
For information on viewing radio statistics particular to the access point radio type displayed
within the AP Stats Summary screen, see Viewing Radio Statistics on page 7-20 .
4.
Click the Logout button to securely exit the Access Point applet.
7.4.1 Viewing Radio Statistics
Refer to the Radio Stats screen to view detailed information for the access point radio (either
802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n) displayed within the Radio Summary screen. There are four fields within the screen. The Information field displays device address and location information, as well as channel and power information. The Traffic field displays statistics for cumulative packets, bytes, and errors received and transmitted. The Traffic field does not add retry information to the stats displayed. Refer to the RF Status field for an average MU signal, noise and signal to noise ratio information. Finally, the Errors field displays retry information as well as data transmissions the access point radio either dropped or could not decrypt. The information within the 802.11a/n Radio
Statistics screen is view-only with no configurable data fields.
To view detailed radio statistics:
1.
Select Status and Statistics -> Radio Stats -> Radio1(802.11b/g/n) Stats from the access point menu tree.
Monitoring Statistics 7-21
2.
Refer to the Information field to view the access point 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n radio’s
MAC address, placement and transmission information.
HW Address
Radio Type
Power
Active WLANs
The Media Access Control (MAC) address of the access point housing the 802.11a/n radio. The MAC address is set at the factory and can be found on the bottom of the access point. For more information on how access point MAC addresses are assigned, see
MAC Address Assignment on page 1-29 .
Displays the radio type (either 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n).
The power level in milliwatts (mW) for RF signal strength. To
change the power setting for the radio, see Configuring the
802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n Radio on page 5-56
.
Lists the access point WLANs adopted by the 802.11a/n or
802.11b/g/n radio.
7-22 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Placement
Current Channel
Lists whether the access point radio is indoors or outdoors. To change the placement setting, see
802.11b/g/n Radio on page 5-56 .
Indicates the channel for communications between the access point radio and its associated MUs. To change the channel setting, see
Configuring the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n Radio on page 5-56
.
Num Associated MUs Lists the number of mobile units (MUs) currently associated with the access point 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n radio.
3.
Refer to the Traffic field to view performance and throughput information for the target access point 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n radio.
Packets per second The Total column displays the average total packets per second crossing the radio. The Rx column displays the average total packets per second received. The Tx column displays the average total packets per second transmitted. The number in black represents this statistic for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents this statistic for the last hour.
Throughput The Total column displays average throughput on the radio. The Rx column displays average throughput in Mbps for packets received.
The Tx column displays average throughput for packets transmitted. The number in black represents statistics for the last
30 seconds and the number in blue represents statistics for the last hour. Use this information to assess whether the current throughput is sufficient to support required network traffic.
Avg. Bit Speed
Approximate RF
Utilization
The Total column displays the average bit speed in Mbps for the radio This includes all packets transmitted and received. The number in black represents statistics for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents statistics for the last hour.
The approximate RF utilization of the access point radio. This value is calculated as throughput divided by average bit speed. The number in black represents this statistic for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents this statistic for the last hour.
% Non-unicast pkts Displays the percentage of total radio packets that are non-unicast.
Non-unicast packets include broadcast and multicast packets.The number in black represents packets for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents packets for the last hour.
Monitoring Statistics 7-23
4.
Refer to the RF Status field to view the following MU signal, noise and performance information for the target access point 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n radio.
Avg MU Signal
Avg MU Noise
Avg MU SNR
Displays the average RF signal strength in dBm for all MUs associated with the radio. The number in black represents the average signal for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents the average signal for the last hour. If the signal is low, consider mapping the MU to a different WLAN, if a better functional grouping of MUs can be determined.
Displays the average RF noise for all MUs associated with the access point radio. The number in black represents MU noise for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents MU noise for the last hour. If MU noise is excessive, consider moving the MU closer to the access point, or in area with less conflicting network traffic.
Displays the average Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR) for all MUs associated with the access point radio. The Signal to Noise Ratio is an indication of overall RF performance on your wireless network.
5.
Refer to the Errors field to reference retry information as well as data transmissions the target access point 802.11a/n or 802.11 b/g radio either gave up on could not decrypt.
Avg Num. of Retries Displays the average number of retries for all MUs associated with the access point 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n radio. The number in black represents retries for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents retries for the last hour.
Dropped Packets Displays the percentage of packets the AP gave up on for all MUs associated with the access point 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n radio.
The number in black represents this statistic for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents this statistic for the last hour.
% of Undecryptable
Pkts
Displays the percentage of undecryptable packets for all MUs associated with the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n radio. The number in black represents packets for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents packets for the last hour.
6.
Click the Clear Radio Stats button to reset each of the data collection counters to zero in order to begin new data collections.
7-24 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
7.
Click the Logout button to securely exit the Access Point applet.
7.4.1.1 Retry Histogram
Refer to the Retry Histrogram screen for an overview of the retries transmitted by an access point radio and whether those retries contained any data packets. Use this information in combination with the error fields within a Radio Stats screen to assess overall radio performance.
To display a Retry Histogram screen for an access point radio:
1.
Select Status and Statistics -> Radio Stats -> Radio1(802.11b/g/n) Stats -> Retry
Histogram from the access point menu tree.
A Radio Histogram screen is available for each access point radio (regardless of single or dual-radio model).
The table’s first column shows 0 under Retries . The value under the Packets column directly to the right shows the number of packets transmitted by this access point radio that required 0 retries (delivered on the first attempt). As you go down the table you can see the number of packets requiring 1 retry, 2 retries etc. Use this information to assess whether an
Monitoring Statistics 7-25 abundance of retries warrants reconfiguring the access point radio to achieve better performance.
2.
Click Apply to save any changes to the Radio Histogram screen. Navigating away from the screen without clicking Apply results in changes to the screens being lost.
3.
Click Undo Changes (if necessary) to undo any changes made to the screen. Undo Changes reverts the settings to the last saved configuration.
4.
Click Logout to securely exit the Access Point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
7.5 Viewing MU Statistics Summary
Use the MU Stats Summary screen to display overview statistics for mobile units (MUs) associated with the access point. The MU List field displays basic information such as IP Address and total throughput for each associated MU. The MU Stats screen is view-only with no user configurable data fields. However, individual MUs can be selected from within the MU Stats Summary screen to either ping to assess interoperability or display authentication statistics.
To view access point overview statistics for all of the MUs associated to the access point:
1.
Select Status and Statistics - > MU Stats from the access point menu tree.
7-26 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
2.
Refer to the MU List field to reference associated MU address, throughput and retry information.
IP Address
MAC Address
WLAN
Radio
T-put
ABS
Retries
Displays the IP address of each of the associated MU.
Displays the MAC address of each of the associated MU.
Displays the WLAN name each MU is interoperating with.
Displays the name of the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n radio each MU is associated with.
Displays the total throughput in Megabits per second (Mbps) for each associated MU.
Displays the Average Bit Speed (ABS) in Megabits per second
(Mbps) for each associated MU.
Displays the average number of retries per packet. A high number retries could indicate possible network or hardware problems.
Monitoring Statistics 7-27
Hotspot Displays whether this radio is currently supporting a hotspot.
3.
Click the Refresh button to update the data collections displayed without resetting the data collections to zero.
4.
Click the Echo Test button to display a screen for verifying the link with an associated MU.
.
NOTE An echo test initiated from the access point MU Stats Summary screen uses WNMP pings. Therefore, target clients that are not Motorola MUs are unable to respond to the echo test.
5.
Click the MU Authentication Statistics button to display a screen with detailed authentication statistics for the an MU.
For information on individual MU authentication statistics, see
MU Authentication Statistics on page 7-31
.
6.
Click the MU Details button to display a screen with detailed statistics for a selected MU.
For detailed information on individual MU authentication statistics, see
7.
Click the Clear All MU Stats button to reset each of the data collection counters to zero in order to begin new data collections.
8.
Click the Logout button to securely exit the Access Point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
7.5.1 Viewing MU Details
Use the MU Details screen to display throughput, signal strength and transmit error information for a specific MU associated with the access point.
The MU Details screen is separated into four fields; MU Properties, MU Traffic, MU Signal, and MU
Errors. The MU Properties field displays basic information such as hardware address, IP address, and associated WLAN and AP. Reference the MU Traffic field for MU RF traffic and throughput data.
Use the RF Status field to reference information on RF signal averages from the target MU. The Error field displays RF traffic errors based on retries, dropped packets and undecryptable packets. The MU
Details screen is view-only with no user configurable data fields.
To view details specific to an individual MU:
7-28 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
1.
Select Status and Statistics -> MU Stats from the access point menu tree.
2.
Highlight a specific MU.
3.
Select the MU Details button.
4.
Refer to the MU Properties field to view MU address information.
IP Address
WLAN Association
PSP State
HW Address
Radio Association
QoS Client Type
Displays the IP address of the MU.
Displays the name of the WLAN the MU is associated with. Use this information to assess whether the MU is properly grouped within that specific WLAN.
Displays the current PSP state of the MU. The PSP Mode field has two potential settings. PSP indicates the MU is operating in Power
Save Protocol mode. In PSP, the MU runs enough power to check for beacons and is otherwise inactive. CAM indicates the MU is continuously aware of all radio traffic. Motorola recommends CAM for those MUs transmitting with the AP frequently and for periods of time of two hours.
Displays the Media Access Control (MAC) address for the MU.
Displays the name of the AP MU is currently associated with. If the name of the access point requires modification, see
Displays the data type transmitted by the mobile unit. Possible types include Legacy , Voice , WMM Baseline and Power Save .
For more information, see
Setting the WLAN Quality of Service
.
Displays the encryption scheme deployed by the associated MU. Encryption
5.
Refer to the Traffic field to view individual MU RF throughput information.
Packets per second The Total column displays average total packets per second crossing the MU. The Rx column displays the average total packets per second received on the MU. The Tx column displays the average total packets per second sent on the MU. The number in black represents Pkts per second for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents Pkts per second for the last hour.
Monitoring Statistics 7-29
Throughput
Avg. Bit Speed
The Total column displays the average total packets per second crossing the selected MU. The Rx column displays the average total packets per second received on the MU. The Tx column displays the average total packets per second sent on the MU. The number in black represents throughput for the last 30 seconds, the number in blue represents throughput for the last hour.
The Total column displays the average bit speed in Mbps for a given time period on the MU. This includes all packets sent and received. The number in black represents average bit speed for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents average bit speed for the last hour. Consider increasing the data rate of the AP if the current bit speed does not meet network requirements. For more information, see
Configuring the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n
. The associated MU must also be set to the higher rate to interoperate with the access point at that data rate.
% of Non-unicast pkts Displays the percentage of the total packets for the selected mobile unit that are non-unicast. Non-unicast packets include broadcast and multicast packets. The number in black represents packets for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents packets for the last hour.
6.
Refer to the RF Status field to view MU signal and signal disturbance information.
Avg MU Signal
Avg MU Noise
Avg MU SNR
Displays RF signal strength in dBm for the target MU. The number in black represents signal information for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents signal information for the last hour.
Displays RF noise for the target MU. The number in black represents noise for the last 30 seconds, the number in blue represents noise for the last hour.
Displays the Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR) for the target MU. The
Signal to Noise Ratio is an indication of overall RF performance on your wireless network.
7.
Refer to the Errors field to view MU retry information and statistics on packets not transmitted.
7-30 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Avg Num of Retries Displays the average number of retries for the MU. The number in black represents average retries for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents average retries for the last hour.
Dropped Packets Displays the percentage of packets the AP gave up as not received on for the selected MU. The number in black represents the percentage of packets for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents the percentage of packets for the last hour.
% of Undecryptable
Pkts
Displays the percentage of undecryptable packets for the MU. The number in black represents the percentage of undecryptable packets for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents the percentage of undecryptable packets for the last hour.
8.
Click OK to exit the screen.
7.5.2 Pinging Individual MUs
The access point can verify its link with an MU by sending WNMP ping packets to the associated MU.
Use the Echo Test screen to specify a target MU and configure the parameters of the ping test.
NOTE An echo test initiated from the access point MU Stats Summary screen uses WNMP pings. Therefore, target clients that are not Motorola MUs are unable to respond to the echo test.
To ping a specific MU to assess its connection with an access point:
1.
Select Status and Statistics - > MU Stats from the access point menu tree.
2.
Select the Echo Test button from within the MU Statistics Summary screen.
3.
Specify the following ping test parameters.
Station Address
Number of ping
Packet Length
Packet Data
The IP address of the target MU. Refer to the MU Statistics
Summary screen for associated MU IP address information.
Specify the number of ping packets to transmit to the target MU.
The default is 100.
Specify the length of each data packet transmitted to the target
MU during the ping test. The default is 100 bytes.
Defines the data to be transmitted as part of the test.
Monitoring Statistics 7-31
4.
Click the Ping button to begin transmitting ping packets to the station address specified.
Refer to the Number of Responses parameter to assess the number of responses from the target MU versus the number of pings transmitted by the access point. Use the ratio of packets sent versus packets received to assess the link quality between MU and the access point
Click the Ok button to exit the Echo Test screen and return to the MU Stats Summary screen.
7.5.3 MU Authentication Statistics
The access point can access and display authentication statistics for individual MUs.
To view access point authentication statistics for a specific MU:
1.
Select Status and Statistics - > MU Stats from the access point menu tree.
2.
Highlight a target MU from within the MU List field.
3.
Click the MU Authentication Statistics button
Use the displayed statistics to determine if the target MU would be better served with a different access point WLAN or access point radio.
4.
Click Ok to return to the MU Stats Summary screen.
7-32 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
7.6 Viewing the Mesh Statistics Summary
The access point has the capability of detecting and displaying the properties of other access points in mesh network (either base bridges or client bridges) mode. This information is used to create a list of known wireless bridges.
To view detected mesh network statistics:
1.
Select Status and Statistics -> Mesh Stats from the access point menu tree.
The Mesh Statistics Summary screen displays the following information:
Conn Type Displays whether the bridge has been defined as a base bridge or a client bridge. For information on defining configuring the access point as either a base or client bridge, see
Networking Support on page 9-7 .
Monitoring Statistics 7-33
MAC Address
WLAN
Radio
T-put
ABS
Retries
The unique 48-bit, hard-coded Media Access Control address, known as the devices station identifier. This value is hard coded at the factory by the manufacturer and cannot be changed.
Displays the WLAN name each wireless bridge is interoperating with.
Displays the name of the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n radio each bridge is associated with.
Displays the total throughput in Megabits per second (Mbps) for each associated bridge.
Displays the Average Bit Speed (ABS) in Megabits per second
(Mbps) for each associated bridge.
Displays the average number of retries per packet. A high number retries could indicate possible network or hardware problems.
2.
Click the Refresh button to update the display of the Mesh Statistics Summary screen to the latest values.
3.
Click the Details button to display AP properties and radio information for those access points in a mesh configuration with this detecting access point.
7-34 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
4.
Click the Logout button to securely exit the Access Point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
7.7 Viewing Known Access Point Statistics
The access point has the capability of detecting and displaying the properties of other Motorola access points located within its coverage area. Detected access point’s transmit a WNMP message
Monitoring Statistics 7-35 indicating their channel, IP address, firmware version, etc. This information is used to create a known
AP list. The list has field indicating the properties of the access point discovered.
NOTE The Known AP Statistics screen only displays statistics for access points located on the same subnet.
To view detected access point statistics:
1.
Select Status and Statistics -> Known AP Stats from the access point menu tree.
The Known AP Statistics screen displays the following information:
IP Address
MAC Address
The network-assigned Internet Protocol address of the located AP.
The unique 48-bit, hard-coded Media Access Control address, known as the devices station identifier. This value is hard coded at the factory by the manufacturer and cannot be changed.
7-36 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
MUs
Unit Name
The number MUs associated with the located access point.
Displays the name assigned to the access point using the System
Settings screen. For information on changing the unit name, see
Configuring System Settings on page 4-2 .
2.
Click the Clear Known AP Stats button to reset each of the data collection counters to zero in order to begin new data collections.
3.
Click the Details button to display access point address and radio information.
The Known AP Details screen displays the target AP’s MAC address, IP address, radio channel, number of associated MUs, packet throughput per second, radio type(s), model, firmware version, ESS and client bridges currently connected to the AP radio. Use this information to determine whether this AP provides better MU association support than the locating access point or warrants consideration as a member of a different mesh network.
4.
Click the Ping button to display a screen for verifying the link with a highlighted access point.
NOTE A ping test initiated from the access point Known AP Statistics screen uses WNMP pings. Therefore, target devices that are not Motorola access points are unable to respond to the ping test.
5.
Click the Start Flash button to flash the LEDs of other access points detected and displayed within the Known AP Statistics screen.
Use the Start Flash button to determine the location of the devices displayed within the
Known AP Statistics screen. When an access point is highlighted and the Start Flash button is selected, the LEDs on the selected access point flash. When the Stop Flash button is selected, the LEDs on the selected access point go back to normal operation.
6.
Click the Logout button to securely exit the Access Point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
CLI Reference
The access point Command Line Interface (CLI) is accessed through the serial port or a SSH session. The access point CLI follows the same conventions as the Web-based user interface. The CLI does, however, provide an “escape sequence” to provide diagnostics for problem identification and resolution.
The CLI treats the following as invalid characters:
< > | " & \ ? ,
In order to avoid problems when using the CLI, these characters should be avoided.
8-2 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
8.1 Connecting to the CLI
8.1.1 Accessing the CLI through the Serial Port
To connect to the access point CLI through the serial port:
1.
Connect one end of a null modem serial cable to the access point’s serial connector.
2.
Attach the other end of the null modem serial cable to the serial port of a PC running HyperTerminal or a similar emulation program.
3.
Set the HyperTerminal program to use 19200 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity, no flow control, and auto-detect for terminal emulation.
4.
Press <ESC> or <Enter> to enter into the CLI.
5.
Enter the default username of admin and the default password of motorola . If this is your first time logging into the access point, you are unable to access any of the access point’s commands until the country code is set. A new password will also need to be created.
8.1.2 Accessing the CLI via SSH
To connect to the access point CLI through a SSH connection:
1.
If this is your first time connecting to your access point, keep in mind the access point uses a static IP WAN address (10.1.1.1).
Additionally, the access point’s LAN port default static IP address is 192.168.0.1/24.
2.
Enter the default username of admin and the default password of motorola . If this is your first time logging into the access point, you are unable to access any of the access point’s commands until the country code is set. A new password will also need to be created. login as: admin
AP-713x Access Point 4.0.4.0-031GRN
Copyright (c) 2006-2011 Motorola Solutions, Inc.
This Device Is Running In Common Criteria Mode
Attention:
This is a protected and private wireless system. No un-authorized access is allowed.
You must have proper rights to access and manage this system from authorized personnel.
Using keyboard-interactive authentication.
Password: admin>
8.2 Admin and Common Commands
AP7131N>admin>
Description:
Displays admin configuration options. The items available under this command are shown below.
Syntax: help passwd summary network
/
..
system stats save quit
Displays general user interface help.
Changes the admin password.
Shows a system summary.
Goes to the network submenu
Goes to the system submenu.
Goes to the stats submenu.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
CLI Reference 8-3
8-4 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin>help
Description:
Displays general CLI user interface help.
Syntax: help Displays command line help using combinations of function keys for navigation.
Example: admin> help
?
* Restriction of “?”:
: display command help - Eg. ?, show ?, s?
: “?” after a function argument is treated
: as an argument
: Eg. admin<network.lan> set lan enable?
: (Here “?” is an invalid extra argument,
: because it is after the argument
<ctrl-q>
<ctrl-p>
* Note admin>
: go backwards in command history
: go forwards in command history
: 1) commands can be incomplete
: - Eg. sh = sho = show
: 2) “//” introduces a comment and gets no
: resposne from CLI.
CLI Reference 8-5
AP7131N>admin>passwd
Description:
Changes the password for the admin login.
Syntax: passwd Changes the admin password for access point access. This requires typing the old admin password and entering a new password and confirming it. Passwords can be between 8 and19 characters. The access point CLI treats the following as invalid characters:
' " \ & $ ^ * + ? [ ( { | , < >
In order to avoid problems when using the access point CLI, these characters should be avoided.
Example: admin> passwd
Old Admin Password:******
New Admin Password (8 - 19 characters):******
Verify Admin Password (8 - 19 characters):******
Password successfully verified
For information on configuring passwords using the applet (GUI), see
Setting Passwords on page 6-2 .
8-6 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin>summary
Description:
Displays the access point’s system summary.
Syntax: summary Displays a summary of high-level characteristics and settings for the WAN, LAN and WLAN.
Example: admin> summary
AP-713x firmware version : 4.0.2.0-021GRN country code : in ap-mode : independent serial number : 9211520900
Warning: This will display secure information,
Do you want to continue? (n/y?)y
WLAN 1:
WLAN Name
ESS ID
Radio Band(s)
VLAN
Security Policy
QoS Policy
Rate Limiting
WLAN1
101
2.4 and 5.0 GHz
VLAN1
Default
Default disabled
LAN1 Name: LAN1
LAN1 Mode: enable
LAN1 IP: 0.0.0.0
LAN1 Mask: 0.0.0.0
LAN1 DHCP Mode: client
LAN2 Name: LAN2
LAN2 Mode: enable
LAN2 IP: 192.235.1.1
LAN2 Mask: 255.255.255.0
LAN2 DHCP Mode: client
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
WAN Interface IP Address Network Mask Default Gateway DHCP Client
----------------------------------------------------------------------------enable 172.20.23.10
255.255.255.192
172.20.23.20
enable
.
CLI Reference 8-7
AP7131N>admin>..
Description:
Displays the parent menu of the current menu.
This command appears in all of the submenus under admin. In each case, it has the same function, to move up one level in the directory structure.
Example: admin(network.lan)> ..
admin(network)>
8-8 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin> /
Description:
Displays the root menu, that is, the top-level CLI menu.
This command appears in all of the submenus under admin. In each case, it has the same function, to move up to the top level in the directory structure.
Example: admin(network.lan)> / admin>
CLI Reference 8-9
AP7131N>admin>save
Description:
Saves the configuration to system flash.
The save command appears in all of the submenus under admin. In each case, it has the same function, to save the current configuration.
Syntax: save Saves configuration settings. The save command works at all levels of the CLI. The save command must be issued before leaving the CLI for updated settings to be retained.
Example: admin> save admin>
8-10 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin>quit
Description:
Exits the command line interface session and terminates the session.
The quit command appears in all of the submenus under admin. In each case, it has the same function, to exit out of the CLI. Once the quit command is executed, the login prompt displays again.
Example: admin> quit
8.3 Network Commands
AP7131N>admin(network)>
Description:
Displays the network submenu. The items available under this command are shown below.
lan Goes to the LAN submenu.
wan Goes to the WAN submenu.
wireless Goes to the Wireless Configuration submenu.
firewall Goes to the Firewall submenu.
/
..
router ipfilter save quit
Goes to the Router submenu.
Goes to the IP Filter submenu
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the current configuration to the system flash.
Quits the CLI and exits the current session.
CLI Reference 8-11
8-12 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
8.3.1 Network LAN Commands
AP7131N>admin(network.lan)>
Description:
Displays the LAN submenu. The items available under this command are shown below.
show set
Shows current access point LAN parameters.
Sets LAN parameters. bridge Goes to the mesh configuration submenu.
wlan-mapping Goes to the WLAN/Lan/Vlan Mapping submenu.
dhcp type-filter ipfpolicy
..
/ save quit
Goes to the LAN DHCP submenu.
Goes to the Ethernet Type Filter submenu.
Goes to the LAN IP Filter Policy submenu.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
For an overview of the LAN configuration options using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring the LAN Interface on page 5-1
.
AP7131N>admin(network.lan)> show
Description:
Displays the access point LAN settings.
Syntax: show <LAN-idx> Shows the settings for the access point LAN1 and LAN2 interfaces.
Displays information about individual LAN
Example: admin(network.lan)> show
Warning: This will display secure information,
Do you want to continue? (n/y?)y
LAN On Ethernet Port
LAN Ethernet Timeout
802.1x Port Authentication:
Username
Password
Auto-negoitation
Speed
Duplex
** LAN1 Information **
LAN Name
LAN Interface
802.11q Trunking
: LAN1
: disable
: admin
: ********
: enable
: 100M
: full
: LAN1
: enable
: disable
LAN IP mode
IP Address
Network Mask
Default Gateway
Domain Name
Primary DNS Server
Secondary DNS Server
: DHCP client
: 192.168.0.1
: 255.255.255.255
: 192.168.0.1
:
: 192.168.0.1
: 192.168.0.2
WINS Server : 192.168.0.254
Native VLAN Tag Mode : untagged
** LAN2 Information **
LAN Name
LAN Interface
802.11q Trunking
: LAN2
: disable
: disable
Native VLAN Tag Mode : untagged
CLI Reference 8-13
8-14 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
LAN IP mode
IP Address
Network Mask
Default Gateway
Domain Name
Primary DNS Server
Secondary DNS Server
WINS Server admin(network.lan)>
: DHCP server
: 192.168.1.1
: 255.255.255.255
: 192.168.1.1
:
: 192.168.0.2
: 192.168.0.3
: 192.168.0.255
CLI Reference 8-15
AP7131N>admin(network.lan)> set
Description:
Sets the LAN parameters for the LAN port.
Syntax: set lan name ethernet-port-lan timeout trunking native-vlan-tag
<mode>
<idx-name >
<idx>
<seconds>
<mode>
<mode>
Enables or disables the access point LAN interface.
Defines the LAN name by index.
Defines which LAN (LAN1 or LAN2) is active on the Ethernet port.
Sets the interval (in seconds) the access point uses to terminate its LAN interface if no activity is detected for the specified interval.
Enables or disables 802.11q Trunking over the access point LAN port.
Specifies 802.1q native vlan tag mode as tagged/untagged auto-negotiation speed duplex username passwd ip-mode ipadr mask dgw domain dns wins
<mode>
<mbps>
<mode>
<name>
<password>
<ip>
<ip>
<ip>
<ip>
<name>
<ip>
<ip>
Example: admin(network.lan)>
Enables or disables auto-negotiation for the access point LAN port.
Defines the access point LAN port speed as either 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps.
Defines the access port LAN port duplex as either half or full.
Specifies user name for 802.1x port authentication over the LAN interface.
The 0-32 character password for the username for the 802.1x port.
Defines the access point LAN port IP mode.
Sets the IP address used by the LAN port.
Defines the IP address used for access point LAN port network mask.
Sets the Gateway IP address used by the LAN port.
Specifies the domain name used by the access point LAN port.
Sets the IP address of the primary and secondary DNS servers.
Defines the IP address of the WINS server used by the LAN port.
admin(network.lan)> set lan 1 enable admin(network.lan)> set name 1 engineering admin(network.lan)> set ethernet-port-lan 1 admin(network.lan)> set timeout 45 admin(network.lan)> set trunking 1 disable admin(network.lan)>set native-vlan-tag 1 untagged admin(network.lan)> set auto-negotiation disable admin(network.lan)> set speed 100M admin(network.lan)> set duplex full admin(network.lan)> set dns 1 192.168.0.1
admin(network.lan)> set wins 1 192.168.0.254
admin(network.lan)> set trunking disable admin(network.lan)> set username phil admin(network.lan)> set passwd ea0258c1 admin(network.lan)>set native-vlan-tag 1 untagged admin(network.lan)>show 1
8-16 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Warning: This will display secure information.
Do you want to continue [n/y]?y
LAN On Ethernet Port : LAN1
LAN Ethernet Timeout : disable
802.1x Port Authentication:
Username : admin
Password : ********
Auto-negotiation : enable
Speed : N/A
Duplex : N/A
** LAN1 Information**
LAN Name : LAN1
LAN Interface : enable
802.1q Trunking : disable
Native VLAN Tag Mode : untagged
LAN IP mode : Static IP
IP Address : 172.16.10.22
Network Mask : 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway : 192.168.0.1
Domain Name :
Primary DNS Server : 192.168.0.1
Secondary DNS Server : 192.168.0.1
WINS Server : 192.168.0.254
admin(network.lan)>
Related Commands: show Shows the current settings for the access point LAN port.
CLI Reference 8-17
8.3.1.1 Network LAN, Bridge Commands
AP7131N>admin(network.lan.bridge)>
Description:
Displays the access point Bridge submenu.
/ show set
..
save quit
Displays the mesh configuration parameters for the access point’s LANs.
Sets the mesh configuration parameters for the access point’s LANs..
Moves to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI and exits the session.
.
8-18 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.lan.bridge)> show
Description:
Displays the mesh bridge configuration parameters for the access point’s LANs.
Syntax: show Displays mesh bridge configuration parameters for the access point’s LANs.
Example: admin(network.lan.bridge)> show
** LAN1 Bridge Configuration **
Bridge Priority :65500
Hello Time (seconds)
Message Age Time (seconds)
:2
:20
Forward Delay Time (seconds) :15
Entry Ageout Time (seconds) :300
** LAN2 Bridge Configuration **
Bridge Priority :65500
Hello Time (seconds) :2
Message Age Time (seconds) :20
Forward Delay Time (seconds) :15
Entry Ageout Time (seconds) :300
.
CLI Reference 8-19
AP7131N>admin(network.lan.bridge)> set
Description:
Sets the mesh configuration parameters for the access point’s LANs.
Syntax: set priority hello
<LAN-idx> <seconds> Sets bridge priority time in seconds (0-65535) for specified LAN.
<LAN-idx> <seconds> Sets bridge hello time in seconds (1-10) for specified LAN.
msgage <LAN-idx> <seconds> Sets bridge message age time in seconds (6-40) for specified LAN.
fwddelay <LAN-idx> <seconds> Sets bridge forward delay time in seconds (4-30) for specified LAN.
ageout <LAN-idx> <seconds> Sets bridge forward table entry time in seconds (4-3600) for specified LAN.
Example: admin(network.lan.bridge)> set priority 2 63335 admin(network.lan.bridge)> set hello 2 2 admin(network.lan.bridge)> set msgage 2 20 admin(network.lan.bridge)> set fwddelay 2 15 admin(network.lan.bridge)> set ageout 2 300 admin(network.lan.bridge)> show
** LAN1 Mesh Configuration **
Bridge Priority :63335
Hello Time (seconds)
Message Age Time (seconds)
:2
:20
Forward Delay Time (seconds) :15
Entry Ageout Time (seconds) :300
** LAN2 Mesh Configuration **
Bridge Priority :63335
Hello Time (seconds) :2
Message Age Time (seconds) :20
Forward Delay Time (seconds) :15
Entry Ageout Time (seconds) :300
.
8-20 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
8.3.1.2 Network LAN, WLAN-Mapping Commands
AP7131N>admin(network.lan.wlan-mapping)>
Description:
Displays the WLAN/Lan/Vlan Mapping submenu.
show set create edit
Displays the VLAN list currently defined for the access point.
Sets the access point VLAN configuration.
Creates a new access point VLAN.
Edits the properties of an existing access point VLAN.
delete lan-map
Deletes a VLAN.
Maps access point existing WLANs to an enabled LAN.
vlan-map Maps access point existing WLANs to VLANs.
..
Moves to the parent menu.
/ save quit
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI and exits the session.
CLI Reference 8-21
AP7131N>admin(network.lan.wlan-mapping)> show
Description:
Displays the VLAN list currently defined for the access point.. These parameters are defined with the set command.
Syntax: show name vlan-cfg lan-wlan wlan
Displays the existing list of VLAN names.
Shows WLAN-VLAN mapping and VLAN configuration.
Displays a WLAN-LAN mapping summary.
Displays the WLAN summary list.
Example: admin(network.lan.wlan-mapping)> show name
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Index VLAN ID VLAN Name
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
VLAN_1
VLAN_2
VLAN_3
VLAN_4 admin(network.lan.wlan-mapping)> show vlan-cfg
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
LAN No.
Management VLAN Tag Native VLAN Tag
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1
2
WLAN mapped to VLAN
VLAN Mode
:WLAN1
:<none>
:static
1
1
1
1 admin(network.lan.wlan-mapping)> show lan-wlan
WLANs on LAN1:
:WLAN1
:WLAN2
WLANs on LAN2:
:WLAN3
8-22 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide admin(network.lan.wlan-mapping)> show wlan
Warning: This will display secure information,
Do you want to continue? (n/y?)y
WLAN1:
WLAN Name
ESSID
Radio Bands
VLAN
Security Policy
QoS Policy
Rate Limiting
:WLAN1
:101
:2.4 and 5.0 GHz
:
:Default
:Default
:disabled
.
CLI Reference 8-23
AP7131N>admin(network.lan.wlan-mapping)> set
Description:
Sets VLAN parameters for the access point.
Syntax: set mgmt- tag <id> native-tag <id> mode
Defines the Management VLAN tag index (1 or 2) to tag number (1-4095).
Sets the Native VLAN tag index (1 or 2) to tag number (1-4095).
<wlan-idx> Sets WLAN VLAN mode (WLAN 1-16) to either dynamic or static.
Example: admin(network.lan.wlan-mapping)> set mgmt-tag 1 10 admin(network.lan.wlan-mapping)> set native-tag 1 12 admin(network.lan.wlan-mapping)> set mode 1 static admin(network.lan.wlan-mapping)> show vlan-cfg
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
LAN No.
Management VLAN Tag Native VLAN Tag
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1
2
WLAN mapped to VLAN
VLAN Mode
:WLAN1
:<none>
:static
10
1
12
1
For information on configuring VLANs using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring VLAN Support on page 5-5 .
8-24 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.lan.wlan-mapping)> create
Description:
Creates a VLAN for the access point.
Syntax: create vlan-id <id> vlan-name <name>
Defines the VLAN ID (1-4095).
Specifies the name of the VLAN (1-31 characters in length).
Example: admin(network.lan.wlan-mapping)> admin(network.lan.wlan-mapping)> create 5 vlan-5
For information on creating VLANs using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring VLAN Support on page 5-5
.
AP7131N>admin(network.lan.wlan-mapping)> edit
Description:
Modifies a VLAN’s name and ID.
Syntax: edit name id
<name>
<id>
Modifies an exisiting VLAN name (1-31 characters in length)
Modifies an existing VLAN ID (1-4095) characters in length)
For information on editing VLANs using the applet (GUI), see Configuring VLAN Support on page 5-5 .
CLI Reference 8-25
8-26 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.lan.wlan-mapping)> delete
Description:
Deletes a specific VLAN or all VLANs.
Syntax: delete < VLAN id> Deletes a specific VLAN ID (1-16).
all Deletes all defined VLAN entries.
For information on deleting VLANs using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring VLAN Support on page 5-5
.
CLI Reference 8-27
AP7131N>admin(network.lan.wlan-mapping)> lan-map
Description:
Maps an access point VLAN to a WLAN.
Syntax: lan-map <wlan name>
<lan name>
Maps an existing WLAN to an enabled LAN. All names and IDs are case-sensitive.
Defines enabled LAN name. All names and IDs are case-sensitive.
admin(network.lan.wlan-mapping)> lan-map wlan1 lan1
For information on mapping VLANs using the applet (GUI), see Configuring VLAN Support on page 5-5 .
8-28 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.lan.wlan-mapping)> vlan-map
Description:
Maps an access point VLAN to a WLAN.
Syntax: vlan-map <wlan name>
<vlan name>
Maps an existing WLAN to an enabled LAN. All names and IDs are case-sensitive.
Defines the existing VLAN name. All names and IDs are case-sensitive.
admin(network.lan.wlan-mapping)> vlan-map wlan1 vlan1
For information on mapping VLANs using the applet (GUI), see Configuring VLAN Support on page 5-5 .
8.3.1.3 Network LAN, DHCP Commands
AP7131N>admin(network.lan.dhcp)>
Description:
Displays the access point DHCP submenu. The items available are displayed below.
show set add delete list
..
/ save quit
Displays DHCP parameters.
Sets DHCP parameters.
Adds static DHCP address assignments.
Deletes static DHCP address assignments.
Lists static DHCP address assignments.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI and exits the session.
CLI Reference 8-29
8-30 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.lan.dhcp)> show
Description:
Shows DHCP parameter settings.
Syntax: show Displays DHCP parameter settings for the access point. These parameters are defined with the set command.
Example: admin(network.lan.dhcp)> show
**LAN1 DHCP Information**
DHCP Address Assignment Range:
Starting IP Address : 192.168.0.100
Ending IP Address : 192.168.0.254
Lease Time : 86400
**LAN2 DHCP Information**
DHCP Address Assignment Range:
Starting IP Address : 192.168.0.100
Ending IP Address : 192.168.0.254
Lease Time : 86400
For information on configuring DHCP using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring the LAN Interface on page 5-1
.
CLI Reference 8-31
AP7131N>admin(network.lan.dhcp)> set
Description:
Sets DHCP parameters for the LAN port.
Syntax: set range <LAN-idx> <ip1> lease <LAN-idx> <lease>
<ip2> Sets the DHCP assignment range from IP address <ip1> to IP address <ip2> for the specified LAN (1-lan1, 2-lan2).
Sets the DHCP lease time <lease> in seconds ( 120 999999 ) for the specified LAN.
Example: admin(network.lan.dhcp)> set range 1 192.168.0.100 192.168.0.254
admin(network.lan.dhcp)> set lease 1 86400 admin(network.lan.dhcp)> show
**LAN1 DHCP Information**
DHCP Address Assignment Range:
Starting IP Address : 192.168.0.100
Ending IP Address : 192.168.0.254
Lease Time : 86400
For information on configuring DHCP using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring the LAN Interface on page 5-1
.
8-32 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.lan.dhcp)> add
Description:
Adds static DHCP address assignments.
Syntax: add <LAN-idx> <mac> <ip> Adds a reserved static IP address to a MAC address for the specified LAN
Example: admin(network.lan.dhcp)> add 1 00A0F8112233 192.160.24.6
admin(network.lan.dhcp)> add 1 00A0F1112234 192.169.24.7
admin(network.lan.dhcp)> list 1
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Index MAC Address IP Address
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1
2
00A0F8112233 192.160.24.6
00A0F8112234 192.169.24.7
For information on adding client MAC and IP address information using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring Advanced DHCP Server Settings on page 5-13 .
CLI Reference 8-33
AP7131N>admin(network.lan.dhcp)> delete
Description:
Deletes static DHCP address assignments.
Syntax: delete <LAN-idx> <entry>
<LAN-idx> all
Deletes the static DHCP address entry (1-30) for the specified LAN.
Deletes all static DHCP addresses.
Example: admin(network.lan.dhcp)> list 1
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Index MAC Address IP Address
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1
2
3
4
5
00A0F8112233
00A0F8112236
10.1.2.4
00A0F8102030 10.10.1.2
00A0F8112234 10.1.2.3
00A0F8112235 192.160.24.6
192.169.24.7
admin(network.lan.dhcp)> delete 1
3
4
1
2
----------------------------------------------------------------------------index mac address ip address
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
00A0F8102030
00A0F8112234
00A0F8112235
00A0F8112236
10.10.1.2
10.1.2.3
192.160.24.6
192.169.24.7
admin(network.lan.dhcp)> delete 1 all
----------------------------------------------------------------------------index mac address ip address
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
For information on deleting client MAC and IP address information using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring Advanced DHCP Server Settings on page 5-13 .
8-34 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.lan.dhcp)> list
Description:
Lists static DHCP address assignments.
Syntax: list <LAN-idx> <cr> Lists the static DHCP address assignments for the specified LAN (1-LAN1, 2 LAN2).
Example: admin(network.lan.dhcp)> list 1
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Index MAC Address IP Address
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1
2
3
4
5
00A0F8112233 10.1.2.4
00A0F8102030 10.10.1.2
00A0F8112234 10.1.2.3
00A0F8112235 192.160.24.6
00A0F8112236 192.169.24.7
admin(network.lan.dhcp)>
For information on listing client MAC and IP address information using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring Advanced DHCP Server Settings on page 5-13 .
8.3.1.4 Network Type Filter Commands
AP7131N>admin(network.lan.type-filter)>
Description:
Displays the access point Type Filter submenu. The items available under this command include: show set add delete
/
..
save quit
Displays the current Ethernet Type exception list.
Defines Ethernet Type Filter parameters.
Adds an Ethernet Type Filter entry.
Removes an Ethernet Type Filter entry.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
CLI Reference 8-35
8-36 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.lan.type-filter)> show
Description:
Displays the access point’s current Ethernet Type Filter configuration.
Syntax: show <LAN-idx> Displays the existing Type-Filter configuration for the specified LAN.
Example: admin(network.lan.type-filter)> show 1
Ethernet Type Filter mode : allow
----------------------------------------------------------------------------index ethernet type
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 8137
.
CLI Reference 8-37
AP7131N>admin(network.lan.type-filter)> set
Description:
Defines the access point Ethernet Type Filter configuration.
Syntax: set mode <LAN-idx> <mode> allow or deny
Allows or denies the access point from processing a specified Ethernet data type for the specified LAN.
Example: admin(network.lan.type-filter)> set mode 1 allow
For information on configuring the type filter settings using the applet (GUI), see
Setting the Type Filter Configuration on page 5-14 .
8-38 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.lan.type-filter)> add
Description:
Adds an Ethernet Type Filter entry.
Syntax: add <LAN-idx> <type> Adds entered Ethernet Type to list of data types either allowed or denied access point processing permissions for the specified LAN (either LAN1 or LAN2).
Example: admin(network.lan.type-filter)> admin(network.wireless.type-filter)> add 1 8137 admin(network.wireless.type-filter)> add 2 0806 admin(network.wireless.type-filter)> show 1
3
4
1
2
Ethernet Type Filter mode : allow
----------------------------------------------------------------------------index ethernet type
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
8137
0806
0800
8782
For information on configuring the type filter settings using the applet (GUI), see
Setting the Type Filter Configuration on page 5-14 .
CLI Reference 8-39
AP7131N>admin(network.lan.type-filter)> delete
Description:
Removes an Ethernet Type Filter entry individually or the entire Type Filter list.
Syntax: delete <LAN-idx>
<LAN-idx>
<index> all
Deletes the specified Ethernet Type index entry (1 through 16).
Deletes all Ethernet entries currently in list.
Example: admin(network.lan.type-filter)> delete 1 1 admin(network.lan.type-filter)> show 1
Ethernet Type Filter mode : allow
----------------------------------------------------------------------------index ethernet type
2
3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 0806
0800
8782 admin(network.lan.type-filter)> delete 2 all admin(network.lan.type-filter)> show 2
Ethernet Type Filter mode : allow
----------------------------------------------------------------------------index ethernet type
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
For information on configuring the type filter settings using the applet (GUI), see
Setting the Type Filter Configuration on page 5-14 .
8-40 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
8.3.2 Network WAN Commands
AP7131N>admin(network.wan)>
Description:
Displays the WAN submenu. The items available under this command are shown below. show set nat vpn
/ content dyndns
..
save quit
Displays the access point WAN configuration and the access point’s current PPPoE configuration.
Defines the access point’s WAN and PPPoE configuration.
Displays the NAT submenu, wherein Network Address Translations (NAT) can be defined.
Goes to the VPN submenu, where the access point VPN tunnel configuration can be set.
Goes to the outbound content filtering menu.
Displays the Dynamic DNS submenu, wherein dyndns settings can be defined.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the current configuration to the access point system flash.
Quits the CLI and exits the current session.
.
AP7131N>admin(network.wan)> show
Description:
Displays the access point WAN port parameters.
Syntax: show Shows the general IP parameters for the WAN port along with settings for the WAN interface.
Example: admin(network.wan)> show
Warning: This will display secure information,
Do you want to continue? (n/y?)y
Status : enable
WAN DHCP Client Mode : disable
IP Address : 10.1.1.1
Network Mask : 255.0.0.0
Default Gateway : 0.0.0.0
Primary DNS Server : 0.0.0.0
Secondary DNS Server : 0.0.0.0
Auto-negotiation
Speed
Duplex
WAN IP 2
WAN IP 3
WAN IP 4
WAN IP 5
WAN IP 6
WAN IP 7
WAN IP 8
PPPoE Mode
PPPoE User Name
PPPoE Password
PPPoE keepalive mode
PPPoE Idle Time
PPPoE Authentication Type
PPPoE State
: enable
: 100M
: full
: disable
: disable
: disable
: disable
: disable
: disable
: disable
: enable
: JohnDoe
: *******
: enable
: 600
: pap/chap admin(network.wan)>
For an overview of the WAN configuration options available using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring WAN Settings on page 5-16
.
CLI Reference 8-41
8-42 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.wan)> set
Description:
Defines the configuration of the access point WAN port.
Syntax: set wan dhcp ipadr mask dgw dns duplex pppoe enable / disable enable / disable
<idx>
<a.b.c.d>
<a.b.c.d>
<idx>
<mode> mode user passwd ka idle type
Example: admin(network.wan)>
<a.b.c.d>
<a.b.c.d>
Enables or disables the access point WAN port.
Enables or disables WAN DHCP Client mode.
Sets up to 8 (using <indx> from 1 to 8 ) IP addresses <a.b.c.d> for the access point WAN interface.
Sets the subnet mask for the access point WAN interface.
Sets the default gateway IP address to <a.b.c.d>.
Sets the IP address of one or two DNS servers, where <indx> indicates either the primary ( 1 ) or secondary ( 2 ) server, and <a.b.c.d> is the IP address of the server.
Enables or disables auto-negotiation for the access point WAN port.
autonegotiation speed enable / disable
<mbps> Defines the access point WAN port speed as either 10 Mbps or 100
Mbps or 1000Mbps.
Defines the access port WAN port duplex as either half or full.
enable / disable Enables or disables PPPoE.
<name>
<password>
Sets PPPoE user name.
Defines the PPPoE password.
enable / disable Enables or disables PPPoE keepalive.
<time> Sets PPPoE idle time.
<auth-type> Sets PPPoE authentication type.
admin(network.wan)> set dhcp disable admin(network.wan)> set ipadr 157.169.22.5
admin(network.wan)> set dgw 157.169.22.1
admin(network.wan)> set dns 1 157.169.22.2
admin(network.wan)> set auto-negotiation disable admin(network.wan)> set speed 10M admin(network.wan)> set duplex half admin(network.wan)> set mask 255.255.255.000
admin(network.wan)> set pppoe mode enable admin(network.wan)> set pppoe type chap admin(network.wan)> set pppoe user jk admin(network.wan)> set pppoe passwd @#$goodpassword%$# admin(network.wan)> set pppoe ka enable admin(network.wan)> set pppoe idle 600 admin(network.wan)> set pppoe type pap
For an overview of the WAN configuration options available using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring WAN Settings on page 5-16 .
8.3.2.1 Network WAN NAT Commands
AP7131N>admin(network.wan.nat)>
Description:
Displays the NAT submenu. The items available under this command are shown below.
show set add delete list
..
/ save quit
Displays the access point’s current NAT parameters for the specified index.
Defines the access point NAT settings.
Adds NAT entries.
Deletes NAT entries.
Lists NAT entries.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
For an overview of the NAT configuration options available using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring Network Address Translation (NAT) Settings on page 5-22 .
CLI Reference 8-43
8-44 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.wan.nat)> show
Description:
Displays access point NAT parameters.
Syntax: show <idx> <cr> Displays access point NAT parameters for the specified NAT index (1-8).
Example: admin(network.wan.nat)> show 2
WAN IP Mode
WAN IP Address
NAT Type
Inbound Mappings
: enable
: 157.235.91.2
: 1-to-many
: Port Forwarding unspecified port forwarding mode : enable unspecified port fwd. ip address : 111.223.222.1
one to many nat mapping
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
LAN No.
WAN IP
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 157.235.91.2
2 157.235.91.2
admin(network.wan.nat)>
For an overview of the NAT options available using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring Network Address Translation (NAT) Settings on page
CLI Reference 8-45
AP7131N>admin(network.wan.nat)> set
Description:
Sets NAT inbound and outbound parameters.
Syntax: set type ip inb outb
<index>
<index>
<index>
<index>
<type>
<ip>
<ip>
<mode>
<ip>
<map>
Sets the type of NAT translation for WAN address index <idx> ( 1 8 ) to
<type> (none, 1-to-1, or 1-to-many).
Sets NAT IP mapping associated with WAN address <idx> to the specified IP address <ip>.
Sets inbound IP address for specified index <index> <ip address>
Sets inbound mode for specified index <index> <enable/disable>
Sets outbound IP address for specified index <index> <ip address>
Sets outbound NAT destination <LAN1 or LAN2> <WAN ip 1-8 or None>.
Example: admin(network.wan.nat)> set type 2 1-to-many admin(network.wan.nat)> set ip 2 10.1.1.1 (this command is used when NAT is 1-to-1) admin(network.wan.nat)> show 2
WAN IP Mode
WAN IP Address
NAT Type
Inbound Mappings
: enable
: 157.235.91.2
: 1-to-many
: Port Forwarding unspecified port forwarding mode : enable unspecified port fwd. ip address : 111.223.222.1
one to many nat mapping
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
LAN No.
WAN IP
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 157.235.91.2
2 10.1.1.1
For an overview of the NAT options available using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring Network Address Translation (NAT) Settings on page
8-46 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.wan.nat)> add
Description:
Adds NAT entries.
Syntax: add <idx> <name> <tran> <port1> <port2> <ip> <dst_port>
Sets an inbound network address translation (NAT) for WAN address <idx>, where <name> is the name of the entry
(1 to 7 characters), <tran> is the transport protocol (one of tcp , udp , icmp , ah , esp , gre , or all ), <port1> is the starting port number in a port range, <port2> is the ending port number in a port range, <ip> is the internal IP address, and
<dst_port> is the (optional) internal translation port.
Example: admin(network.wan.nat)> add 1 indoors udp 20 29 10.10.2.2 admin(network.wan.nat)> list 1
----------------------------------------------------------------------------- index name Transport start port end port internal ip translation
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 indoor udp 20 29 10.10.2.2
0
Related Commands: delete list
Deletes one of the inbound NAT entries from the list.
Displays the list of inbound NAT entries.
For an overview of the NAT options available using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring Network Address Translation (NAT) Settings on page
CLI Reference 8-47
AP7131N>admin(network.wan.nat)> delete
Description:
Deletes NAT entries.
Syntax: delete <idx> <entry>
<idx> all
Deletes a specified NAT index entry <entry> associated with the WAN.
Deletes all NAT entries associated with the WAN.
Example: admin(network.wan.nat)> list 1
----------------------------------------------------------------------------- index name Transport start port end port internal ip translation
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 special tcp 20 21 192.168.42.16
21 admin(network.wan.nat)> delete 1 1 admin(network.wan.nat)> list 1
----------------------------------------------------------------------------- index name Transport start port end port internal ip translation
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Related Commands: add list
Adds entries to the list of inbound NAT entries.
Displays the list of inbound NAT entries.
For an overview of the NAT options available using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring Network Address Translation (NAT) Settings on page
8-48 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.wan.nat)> list
Description:
Lists access point NAT entries for the specified index.
Syntax: list <idx> Lists the inbound NAT entries associated with the WAN index (1-8).
Example: admin(network.wan.nat)> list 1
----------------------------------------------------------------------------- index name Transport start port end port internal ip translation
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 special tcp 20 21 192.168.42.16
21
Related Commands: delete add
Deletes inbound NAT entries from the list.
Adds entries to the list of inbound NAT entries.
For an overview of the NAT options available using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring Network Address Translation (NAT) Settings on page
8.3.2.2 Network WAN, VPN Commands
AP7131N>admin(network.wan.vpn)>
Description:
Displays the VPN submenu. The items available under this command include: add set delete list reset stats ikestate
..
/ save quit
Adds VPN tunnel entries.
Sets key exchange parameters.
Deletes VPN tunnel entries.
Lists VPN tunnel entries
Resets all VPN tunnels.
Lists security association status for the VPN tunnels.
Displays an Internet Key Exchange (IKE) summary.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
For an overview of the VPN options available using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring VPN Tunnels on page 6-22
.
CLI Reference 8-49
8-50 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.wan.vpn)> add
Description:
Adds a VPN tunnel entry.
Syntax: add <name> <idx> <LWANIP> <RSubnetIP> <RSubnetMask> <RGatewayIP>
Creates a tunnel <name> (1 to 13 characters) to gain access through local WAN IP <LWanIP> from the remote subnet with address <RSubnetIP> and subnet mask <RSubnetMask> using the remote gateway <RGatewayIP>.
Example: admin(network.wan.vpn)> add 2 SJSharkey 209.235.44.31 206.107.22.46 255.255.255.224
206.107.22.1
If tunnel type is Manual, proper SPI values and Keys must be configured after adding the tunnel admin(network.wan.vpn)>
CLI Reference 8-51
AP7131N>admin(network.wan.vpn)> set
Description:
Sets VPN entry parameters.
Syntax: set type <name> <tunnel type> authalgo <name> <authalgo> authkey <name> <dir> <authkey> esp-type esp-encalgo esp-enckey esp-authalgo esp-authkey
<name>
<name>
<name>
<name>
<name>
<esptype>
<escalgo>
<dir> <enckey>
<authalgo>
<dir> <authkey> spi <name> <algo> <dir> <value> usepfs salife
<name>
<name>
<mode>
<lifetime>
Sets the tunnel type <name> to Auto or Manual for the specified tunnel name.
Sets the authentication algorithm for <name> to
SHA1.
Sets the AH authentication key (if type is
Manual) for tunnel <name> with the direction set to IN or OUT, and the manual authentication key set to <authkey>. (The key size is 40 hex characters for SHA1).
Sets the Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) type. Options include ESP , or ESP-AUTH .
Sets the ESP encryption algorithm. Options include
AES128 , AES192 , or AES256 ).
Sets the Manual Encryption Key in ASCII for tunnel
<name> and direction IN or OUT to the key <enckey>. The size of the key depends on the encryption algorithm.
- 32 hex characters for AES128
- 48 hex characters for AES192
- 64 hex characters for AES256
Sets the ESP authentication algorithm. Option is r
SHA1 .
Sets ESP Authentication key <name> either for IN or OUT direction to <auth-key>, an ASCII string of hex characters. If authalgo is set to SHA1 , provide
40 hex characters.
Sets 6 character IN (bound) or OUT (bound) for
AUTH (Manual Authentication) or ESP for
<name> to <spi> (a hex value more than 0xFF)
<value>.
Enables or disables Perfect Forward Secrecy for
<name>.
Defines the name of the tunnnel <name> the
Security Association Life Time <300-28800> applies to in seconds.
8-52 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide ike opmode <name> <opmode> myidtype <name> remidtype myiddata remiddata authtype authalgo phrase encalgo lifetime group
<name>
<name>
<name>
<name>
<name>
<name>
<name>
<name>
<name>
<idtype>
<idtype>
<idtype>
<idtype>
<authtype>
<authalgo>
<phrase>
<encalgo>
<lifetime>
<group>
Sets the Operation Mode of IKE for <name> to
Main or Aggr (essive).
Sets the Local ID type for IKE authentication for
<name> (1 to 13 characters) to <idtype> ( IP , FQDN , or UFQDN ).
Sets the Remote ID type for IKE authentication for
<name> (1 to 13 characters) to <idtype> ( IP , FQDN , or UFQDN ).
Sets the Local ID data for IKE authentication for
<name> to <idtype>. This value is not required when the ID type is set to IP.
Sets the Local ID data for IKE authentication for
<name> to <idtype>. This value is not required when the ID type is set to IP.
Sets the IKE Authentication type for <name> to
<authtype> ( PSK ).
Sets the IKE Authentication Algorithm for <name> to SHA1 .
Sets the IKE Authentication passphrase for
<name> to <phrase>.
Sets the IKE Encryption Algorithm for <name> to
<encalgo> (one of AES128 , AES192 , or AES256 ).
Sets the IKE Key life time in seconds for <name> to
<lifetime>. The IKE key life time is between 300-
86400 seconds.
Sets the IKE Diffie-Hellman Group for <name> to
G2048 .
CLI Reference 8-53
AP7131N>admin(network.wan.vpn)> delete
Description:
Deletes VPN tunnel entries.
Syntax: delete all Deletes all VPN entries.
<name> Deletes VPN entries <name>.
Example: admin(network.wan.vpn)> list
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Tunnel Name Type Remote IP/Mask Remote Gateway Local WAN IP
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Eng2EngAnnex Manual 192.168.32.2/24 192.168.33.1
192.168.24.198
SJSharkey Manual 206.107.22.45/27 206.107.22.2
209.235.12.55
admin(network.wan.vpn)> delete Eng2EngAnnex admin(network.wan.vpn)> list
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Tunnel Name Type Remote IP/Mask Remote Gateway Local WAN IP
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
SJSharkey Manual 206.107.22.45/27 206.107.22.2
209.235.12.55
admin(network.wan.vpn)>
8-54 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.wan.vpn)> list
Description:
Lists VPN tunnel entries.
Syntax: list <cr> Lists all tunnel entries.
<name> Lists detailed information about tunnel named <name>. The <name> must match case with the name of the VPN tunnel entry.
Example: admin(network.wan.vpn)> list
Warning: This will display secure information,
Do you want to continue? (n/y?)y
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Tunnel Name Type Remote IP/Mask Remote Gateway Local WAN IP
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Eng2EngAnnex Manual 192.168.32.2/24
SJSharkey Manual 206.107.22.45/27
192.168.33.1
206.107.22.2
192.168.24.198
209.235.12.55
admin(network.wan.vpn)> list SJSharkey
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Detail listing of VPN entry:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name : SJSharkey
Local Subnet
Tunnel Type
: 1
: Manual
Remote IP
Remote IP Mask
: 206.107.22.45
: 255.255.255.224
Remote Security Gateway : 206.107.22.2
Local Security Gateway : 209.239.160.55
AH Algorithm
Encryption Type
Encryption Algorithm
ESP Inbound SPI
ESP Outbound SPI
: None
: ESP
: AES
: 0x00000100
: 0x00000100
.
AP7131N>admin(network.wan.vpn)> reset
Description:
Resets all of the access point’s VPN tunnels.
Syntax: reset Resets all VPN tunnel states.
Example: admin(network.wan.vpn)> reset
VPN tunnels reset. admin(network.wan.vpn)>
CLI Reference 8-55
8-56 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.wan.vpn)> stats
Description:
Lists statistics for all active tunnels.
Syntax: stats Display statistics for all VPN tunnels.
Example: admin(network.wan.vpn)> stats
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Tunnel Name Status SPI(OUT/IN) Life Time Bytes(Tx/Rx)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Eng2EngAnnex Not Active
SJSharkey Not Active
.
CLI Reference 8-57
AP7131N>admin(network.wan.vpn)> ikestate
Description:
Displays statistics for all active tunnels using Internet Key Exchange (IKE).
Syntax: ikestate Displays status about Internet Key Exchange (IKE) for all tunnels. In particular, the table indicates whether IKE is connected for any of the tunnels, it provides the destination IP address, and the remaining lifetime of the IKE key.
Example: admin(network.wan.vpn)> ikestate
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Tunnel Name IKE State Dest IP Remaining Life
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Eng2EngAnnex Not Connected --- ---
SJSharkey Not Connected --- --- admin(network.wan.vpn)>
For information on configuring IKE using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring IKE Key Settings on page 6-34 .
8-58 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.wan.content)>
Description:
Displays the Outbound Content Filtering menu. The items available under this command include: addcmd delcmd list
..
/ save quit
Adds control commands to block outbound traffic.
Deletes control commands to block outbound traffic.
Lists application control commands.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
CLI Reference 8-59
AP7131N>admin(network.wan.content)> addcmd
Description:
Adds control commands to block outbound traffic.
Syntax: addcmd web smtp ftp proxy activex file helo mail rcpt data quit send saml reset vrfy expn put get ls mkdir cd pasv
Adds WEB commands to block outbound traffic.
Adds a Web proxy command.
Adds activex files.
Adds Web URL extensions (10 files maximum). The filename should be 1-15 characters.
Adds SMTP commands to block outbound traffic.
helo command mail command rcpt command data command quit command send command saml command reset command vrfy command expn command
Adds FTP commands to block outbound traffic.
store command retreive command directory list command create directory command change directory command passive mode command
Example: admin(network.wan.content)> addcmd web proxy admin(network.wan.content)> addcmd smtp data admin(network.wan.content)> addcmd ftp put
8-60 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.wan.content)> delcmd
Description:
Deletes control commands to block outbound traffic.
Syntax: delcmd web smtp ftp proxy activex file helo mail rcpt data quit send saml reset vrfy expn put get ls mkdir cd pasv
Deletes WEB commands to block outbound traffic.
Deletes a Web proxy command.
Deletes activex files.
Deletes Web URL extensions (10 files maximum)
Deletes SMTP commands to block outbound traffic.
helo command mail command rcpt command data command quit command send command saml command reset command vrfy command expn command
Deletes FTP commands that block outbound traffic.
store command retreive command directory list command create directory command change directory command passive mode command
Example: admin(network.wan.content)> delcmd web proxy admin(network.wan.content)> delcmd smtp data admin(network.wan.content)> delcmd ftp put
AP7131N>admin(network.wan.content)> list
Description:
Lists application control commands.
Syntax: list web smtp ftp
Lists WEB application control record.
Lists SMTP application control record.
Lists FTP application control record.
Example: admin(network.wan.content)> list web
HTTP Files/Commands
Web Proxy
ActiveX filename
: deny
: allow
: admin(network.wan.content)> list smtp
SMTP Commands
HELO
RCPT
DATA
QUIT
SEND
SAML
RESET
VRFY
EXPN
: deny
: allow
: allow
: deny
: allow
: allow
: allow
: allow
: allow
: allow admin(network.wan.content)> list ftp
FTP Commands
Storing Files
Retreiving Files
Directory Files
Create Directory
Change Directory
Passive Operation
: deny
: allow
: allow
: allow
: allow
: allow
CLI Reference 8-61
8-62 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
8.3.2.3 Network WAN, Dynamic DNS Commands
AP7131N>admin(network.wan.dyndns)>
Description:
Displays the Dynamic DNS submenu. The items available under this command include: set update show
..
/ save quit
Sets Dynamic DNS parameters.
Sets key exchange parameters.
Shows the Dynamic DNS configuration.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
For an overview of the Dynamic DNS options available using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring Dynamic DNS on page 5-25 .
CLI Reference 8-63
AP7131N>admin(network.wan.dyndns)> set
Description:
Sets the access point’s Dynamic DNS configuration.
Syntax: set mode enable/disable Enables or disbales the Dynamic DNS service for the access point.
username <name> Enter a 1 - 32 character username for the account used for the access point.
password <password> hostname <host>
Enter a 1 - 32 character password for the account used for the access point.
Enter a 1 - 32 character hostname for the account used for the access point.
Example: admin(network.wan.dyndns)> set mode enable admin(network.wan.dyndns)> set username percival admin(network.wan.dyndns)> set password mudskipper admin(network.wan.dyndns)> set host greengiant
For an overview of the Dynamic DNS options available using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring Dynamic DNS on page 5-25 .
8-64 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.wan.dyndns)> update
Description:
Updates the access point’s current WAN IP address with the DynDNS service.
Syntax: update Updates the access point’s current WAN IP address with the DynDNS service.
Example: admin(network.wan.dyndns)> update
IP Address
Hostname
: 157.235.91.231
: greengiant
For an overview of the Dynamic DNS options available using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring Dynamic DNS on page 5-25 .
CLI Reference 8-65
AP7131N>admin(network.wan.dyndns)> show
Description:
Shows the current Dynamic DNS configuration.
Syntax: show Shows the access point’s current Dynamic DNS configuration.
Example: admin(network.wan.dyndns)> show
Warning: This will display secure information,
Do you want to continue? (n/y?)y
DynDNS Configuration
Mode
Username
Password
Hostname
DynDNS Update Response
: enable
: percival
: ********
: greengiant
IP Address
Hostname
Status
: 157.235.91.231
: greengiant
: OK
For an overview of the Dynamic DNS options available using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring Dynamic DNS on page 5-25 .
8-66 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
8.3.3 Network Wireless Commands
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless)
Description:
Displays the access point wireless submenu. The items available under this command include: wlan security
Displays the WLAN submenu used to create and configure up to 16 WLANs per access point.
Displays the security submenu used to create encryption and authentication based security policies for use with access point WLANs.
acl radio
Displays to the Access Control List (ACL) submenu to restrict or allow MU access to access point WLANs.
Displays the radio configuration submenu used to specify how the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g radio is used with specific WLANs.
Displays the Quality of Service (QoS) submenu to prioritize specific kinds of data traffic within a WLAN.
qos rate-limiting Displays the Rate Limiting submenu.
rogue-ap Displays the Rogue-AP submenu to configure devices located by the access point as friendly or threatening for interoperablity.
wips Goes to the Wireless Intrusion Protection System (WIPS) submenu.
mu-locationing Displays the MU locationing submenu.
..
Goes to the parent menu.
/ save quit
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
CLI Reference 8-67
8.3.3.1 Network WLAN Commands
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.wlan)>
Description:
Displays the access point wireless LAN (WLAN) submenu. The items available under this command include: show create edit delete
Displays the access point’s current WLAN configuration.
Defines the parameters of a new WLAN.
Modifies the properties of an existing WLAN.
Deletes an existing WLAN.
/
..
hotspot Displays the WLAN hotspot menu.
ipfpolicy Goes to the WLAN IP Filter Policy menu.
save quit
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
.
8-68 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.wlan)> show
Description:
Displays the access point’s current WLAN configuration.
Syntax: show summary wlan
Displays the current configuration for existing WLANs.
<number> Displays the configuration for the requested WLAN (WLAN 1 through 16).
Example: admin(network.wireless.wlan)> show summary
Warning: This will display secure information,
Do you want to continue? (n/y?)y
WLAN1
WLAN Name
ESSID
Radio Bands
VLAN
Security Policy
QoS Policy
Rate Limiting
: Lobby
: 101
: 2.4 and 5.0 GHz
: <none>
: Default
: Default
: disabled admin(network.wireless.wlan)> show wlan 1
Warning: This will display secure information,
Do you want to continue? (n/y?)
ESS Identifier
WLAN Name
802.11n (5.0 GHz) Radio
802.11n (2.4 GHz) Radio
Client Bridge Mesh Backhaul
Hotspot
Maximum MUs
MU Idle Timeout
: 101
: Lobby
: available
: not available
: available
: not available
: 127
: 30
Security Policy
MU Access Control
: Default
: Default disallow MU to MU Communication : disable
Use Secure Beacon : disable answer Broadcast ESSID
QoS Policy
: enable
: Default per-mu rate limiting : disabled per-mu rate limit (wired-to-wl) : 1000 kb per-mu rate limit (wl-to-wired) : 1000 kb
For information on displaying WLAN infromation using the applet (GUI), see
Click Undo Changes (if necessary) to undo any changes made.
.
CLI Reference 8-69
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.wlan)> create
Description:
Defines the parameters of a new WLAN.
Syntax: create show set add-wlan wlan security
<number> Displays newly created WLAN and policy number.
Displays security policy summary.
acl qos ess wlan-name
Displays MU ACL policy summary.
Displays QoS policy summary.
<essid> Defines the ESSID for a target WLAN.
5.0GHz
2.4Ghz
mesh hotspot max-mu
<name> Determines the name of this particlular WLAN (1-31).
<mode> Enables or disables access to the access point 5.0 GHz radio.
<mode> Enables or disables access to the access point 2.4 GHz radio.
<mode>
<mode>
Enables or disables the Client Bridge Mesh Backhaul option.
Enables or disables the Hotspot mode.
<number> Defines the maximum number of MU able to operate within the WLAN
(default = 127 MUs).
idle- timeout <minutes> Sets the interval the access point uses to timeout idle MUs from WLAN inclusion. Set between 1 -65535 minutes. Default is 30 minutes.
security <name> Sets the security policy to the WLAN (1-31).
acl no-mu-mu
<name> Sets the MU ACL policy to the WLAN (1-31).
<mode> Enables or disables MUs associated to the same WLAN to not communicate with each other.
sbeacon bcast
<mode> Enables or disables the AP from transmitting the ESSID in the beacon.
<mode> Enables or disables the access point from accepting broadcast IDs from
MUs. Broadcast IDs are transmitted without security.
qos <name> The index name representing the QoS policy used with this WLAN.
rate-limiting <mode> Enables or disables MU Rate Limiting limit w2wl limit wl2w
<rate limit> Sets the per-mu rate limit in kb (in the wired-to-wireless direction)
<rate limit> Sets the per-mu rate limit in kb (in the wireless-to-wired direction)
Apply the changes to the modified WLAN and exit.
Example: admin(network.wireless.wlan.create)> show wlan
ESS Identifier
WLAN Name
802.11n (5.0 GHz) Radio
802.11n (2.4 GHz) Radio
Client Bridge Mesh Backhaul
Hotspot
Maximum MUs
MU Idle Timeout
Security Policy
MU Access Control disallow MU to MU
Use Secure Beacon answer Broadcast ESSID
:
:
: available
: not available
: not available
: not available
: 127
: 30
: Default
:
: disable
: disable
: disable
8-70 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
QoS Policy per-mu rate limiting
: Default
: disabled per-mu rate limit (wired-to-wl) : 1000 kb per-mu rate limit (wl-to-wired) : 1000 kb admin(network.wireless.wlan.create)> show security
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Secu Policy Name Authen Encryption Associated WLANs
----------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Default Manual WPA2/CCMP Front Lobby
WPA Countermeasure enable admin(network.wireless.wlan.create)> show acl
----------------------------------------------------------------------
ACL Policy Name Associated WLANs
----------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Default
2 Admin
3 Demo Room
Front Lobby
3rd Floor
5th Floor admin(network.wireless.wlan.create)> show qos
----------------------------------------------------------------------
QOS Policy Name Associated WLANs
----------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Default
2 Voice
3 Video
Front Lobby
Audio Dept
Video Dept
The CLI treats the following as invalid characters, thus they should not be used in the creation of an ESSID (or other):
' " \ & $ ^ * + ? [ ( { | , < >
For information on creating a WLAN using the applet (GUI), see
Creating/Editing Individual WLANs on page 5-29 .
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.wlan)> edit
Description:
Edits the properties of an existing WLAN policy.
Syntax: edit <index> Edits the properties of an existing (and specified) WLAN policy (1 -16).
CLI Reference 8-71
8-72 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.wlan)> delete
Description:
Deletes an existing WLAN.
Syntax: delete <wlan-name> Deletes a target WLAN using the name supplied.
all Deletes all WLANs defined (except default WLAN).
Example admin(network.wireless.wlan)>delete all admin(network.wireless.wlan)>
For information on deleting a WLAN using the applet (GUI), see
Creating/Editing Individual WLANs on page 5-29 .
CLI Reference 8-73
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.wlan.hotspot)>
Description:
Displays the Hotspot submenu. The items available under this command include: show redirection radius white-list
/
..
save quit
Show hotspot parameters.
Goes to the hotspot redirection menu.
Goes to the hotspot Radius menu.
Goes to the hotspot white-list menu.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
For information on configuring the Hotspot options available to the using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring WLAN Hotspot Support on page
8-74 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.wlan.hotspot)> show
Description:
Displays the current access point Rogue AP detection configuration.
Syntax: show hotspot <idx> Shows hotspot parameters per wlan index (1-16).
Example: admin(network.wireless.wlan.hotspot)> show hotspot 1
Warning: This will display secure information,
Do you want to continue? (n/y?)y
WLAN1
Hotspot Mode
Hotspot Page Location
External Login URL
External Welcome URL
External Fail URL
: enable
: default
: www.sjsharkey.com
:
:
Primary Server Ip adr
Primary Server Port
Primary Server Secret
Secondary Server Ip adr
Secondary Server Port
Secondary Server Secret
Accounting Mode
Accounting Server Ip adr
Accounting Server Port
Accounting Server Secret
Accoutning Timeout
Accoutning Retry-count
Session Timeout Mode
Session Timeout
:157.235.21.21
:1812
:******
:157.235.32.12
:1812
:******
:disable
:0.0.0.0
:1813
:********
:10
:3
:enable
:15
Whitelist Rules?
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Idx IP Address
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 157.235.121.12
For information on configuring the Hotspot options available to the access point using the applet (GUI), see
.
CLI Reference 8-75
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.wlan.hotspot)> redirection
Description:
Goes to the hotspot redirection menu.
Syntax: redirection set show save
/ quit
..
<page-loc> Sets the hotspot http-re-direction by index (1-16) for the specified URL.
<exturl> Shows hotspot http-redirection details for specifiec index (1-16) for specified page (login, welcome, fail) and target URL..
Shows hotspot http-redirection details.
Saves the updated hotspot configuration to flash memory.
Quits the CLI session.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Example: admin(network.wireless.wlan.hotspot.redirection)> set page-loc 1 www.sjsharkey.com
admin(network.wireless.wlan.hotspot.redirection)> set exturl 1 fail www.sjsharkey.com
For information on configuring the hotspot options available to the access point using the applet (GUI), see
.
8-76 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.wlan.hotspot)> radius
Description:
Goes to the hotspot Radius menu.
Syntax:
/
..
set show save quit
Sets the Radius hotspot configuration.
Shows Radius hotspot server details.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
For information on configuring the Hotspot options available to the access point using the applet (GUI), see
.
CLI Reference 8-77
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.wlan.hotspot.radius)> set
Description:
Sets the Radius hotspot configuration.
Syntax: set server <idx> <srvr_type> <ipadr> Sets the Radius hotpost server IP address per wlan index (1-16) secret acct-mode
<idx> <srvr_type> <secret> Sets the Radius hotspot server shared secret password.
<idx> <mode> Sets the Radius hotspot server accounting mode
(enable/disable) acct-server <idx> <ipadr> Sets the Radius hotspot accounting server IP address per wlan index (1-16).
acct-secret <idx> <secret> acct-timeout <idx> <timeout> acct-retry sess-mode
<idx> <retry_count>
<idx> <mode> sess-timeout <idx> <timeout>
Sets the Radius hotspot server shared secret password per wlan index (1-16).
Sets the Radius hotspot server accounting timeout period in seconds (1-25).
Sets the Radius hotspot server accounting accounting retry interval (1-10).
Enables or disbales the use of a hotspot timeout interval for the specified wlan index (1-16).
Sets the Radius hotspot server timeout interval for the specified index (1-16) between 15 - 180 minutes.
Example: admin(network.wireless.wlan.hotspot.radius)> set server 1 primary 157.235.121.1
admin(network.wireless.wlan.hotspot.radius)> set secret 1 primary sjsharkey admin(network.wireless.wlan.hotspot.radius)> set acct-mode 1 enable admin(network.wireless.wlan.hotspot.radius)> set acct-server 1 157.235.14.14
admin(network.wireless.wlan.hotspot.radius)> set acct-secret 1 londonfog admin(network.wireless.wlan.hotspot.radius)> set acct-timeout 1 25 admin(network.wireless.wlan.hotspot.radius)> set acct-retry 1 10 admin(network.wireless.wlan.hotspot.radius)> set sess-mode 1 enable admin(network.wireless.wlan.hotspot.radius)> set sess-timeout 1 15
For information on configuring the Hotspot options available to the access ointusing the applet (GUI), see
.
8-78 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.wlan.hotspot.radius)> show
Description:
Shows Radius hotspot server details.
Syntax: show radius <idx> Displays Radius hotspot server details per index (1-16)
Example: admin(network.wireless.wlan.hotspot.radius)> show radius 1
Warning: This will display secure information,
Do you want to continue? (n/y?)y
WLAN 1
Hotspot Mode
Primary Server Ip adr
Primary Server Port
Primary Server Secret
Secondary Server Ip adr
Secondary Server Port
Accounting Mode
Accounting Server Ip adr
Accounting Server Port
Accounting Server Secret
Accounting Timeout
Accounting Retry-count
Session Timeout Mode
: enable
: 157.235.12.12
: 1812
: ******
: 0.0.0.0
: 1812
: enable
: 157.235.15.16
: 1813
: ******
: 10
: 3
: enable admin(network.wireless.wlan.hotspot.radius)>
For information on configuring the Hotspot options available to the access point using the applet (GUI), see
.
CLI Reference 8-79
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.wlan.hotspot)> white-list
Description:
Goes to the hotspot white-list menu.
Syntax: white-list add clear show save
/ quit
..
<rule> Adds hotspot whitelist rules by index (1-16) for specified IP address.
Clears hotspot whitelist rules for specified index (1-16).
Shows hotspot whitelist rules for specified index (1-16).
Saves the updated hotspot configuration to flash memory.
Quits the CLI session.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Example: admin(network.wireless.wlan.hotspot.whitelist)> add rule 1 157.235.21.21
admin(network.wireless.wlan.hotspot.whitelist)> show white-rule 1
WLAN 1
Hotspot Mode
WhiteList Rules
disable
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Idx IP Address
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 157.235.21.21
For information on configuring the Hotspot options available to the access point using the applet (GUI), see
.
8-80 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
8.3.3.2 Network Security Commands
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.security)>
Description:
Displays the access point wireless security submenu. The items available under this command include: show create edit delete
/
..
save quit
Displays the access point’s current security configuration.
Creates a security policy.
Edits the properties of an existing security policy.
Removes a specific security policy.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
.
CLI Reference 8-81
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.security)>show
Description:
Displays the access point’s current security configuration.
Syntax: show summary policy <id>
Displays list of existing security policies (1-16).
Displays the specified security policy <id>.
Example: admin(network.wireless.security)> show summary
Warning: This will display secure information,
Do you want to continue? (n/y?)y
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Secu Policy Name Authen Encryption Associated WLANs
----------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Default 802.1x
WPA2/CCMP Lobby
3 Open 802.1x
WPA2/CCMP 1st Floor
WPA Countermeasure enable admin(network.wireless.security)>show policy 1
Warning: This will display secure information.
Do you want to continue [n/y]?y
Policy Name : Default
Authentication type : 802.1x EAP
Server Settings:
primary radius server : 0.0.0.0
secondary radius server : 0.0.0.0
primary radius server port : 1812
secondary radius server port : 1812
primary radius shared secret : ********
secondary radius shared secret : ********
Reauthentication:
eap reauth mode : disable
Radius Accounting:
accounting mode : disable
Advanced Settings:
eap mu quiet period : 10 (1-65535) seconds.
eap mu timeout : 10 (1-255) seconds.
eap mu tx period : 5 (1-65535) seconds.
8-82 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
eap mu retries : 2 (1-10) retries.
eap server timeout : 5 (1-255) seconds.
eap server retries : 2 (1-255) retries.
Encryption type : WPA2/CCMP (802.11i)
ccmp broadcast key rotate mode : disable
802.11i ccmp preauthentication : disable
WPA2 PTK timeout : 2 admin(network.wireless.security)>
Related Commands: create Defines security parameters for the specified WLAN.
.
CLI Reference 8-83
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.security)>create
Description:
Defines the parameter of access point security policies.
Syntax: create show set sec-name <name> auth <authtype> eap server secret reauth
<sidx>
<sidx> mode period retry accounting mode server secret timeout
<ip>
<secret>
<mode>
<time>
<number>
<mode>
<ip>
<secret>
<period>
Defines the parameters of a security policy.
Displays new or existing security policy parameters.
Sets the name of the security policy.
Sets the authentication type for WLAN <idx> to
<type> ( none or eap )
Sets the radius server ( 1 -primary or as 2 secondary) IP address <ip>.
Sets the EAP shared secret <secret> ( 0 -95 characters) for server <sidx> ( 1 -primary or 2 secondary).
The default password is now “motorola” instead of “symbol.” Be cognizant of this when importing a configuration from the 1.1 baseline, as this shared secret will have to be changed to motorola (after the import) to avoid MU authentication failures. This change can only be made using the access point CLI.
Enables or disables EAP reauthentication.
Sets the reauthentication period <period> in seconds ( 30 9999 ).
Sets the maximum number of reauthentication retries <retry> ( 1 99 ).
Enable or disable Radius accounting.
Set external Radius server IP address.
Set external Radius server shared secret password.
Defines MU timout period in seconds (1-255).
8-84 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide enc ccmp adv
<idx> rotate-mode interval type retry syslog ip mu-quiet mu-timeout mu-tx mu-retry svr-timeout svr-retry
<type>
<mode>
<time>
<key type>
<number>
<mode>
<ip>
<time>
<timeout>
<time>
<count>
<time>
<count>
Sets the maximum number of MU retries to
<retry> ( 1 10 ).
Enable or disable syslog messages.
Defines syslog server IP address.
Set the EAP MU/supplicant quiet period to
<time> seconds ( 1 65535 ).
Sets the EAP MU/supplicant timeout in seconds
( 1 255 ).
Sets the EAP MU/supplicant TX period <time> in seconds ( 1 65535 ).
Sets the EAP maximum number of MU retries to
<count> ( 1 10 ).
Sets the server timeout <time> in seconds ( 1 -
255 ).
Sets the maximum number of server retries to
<count> ( 1 255 ).
Sets the encryption type to <type> for the WLAN
<idx>.
Enables or disabled the broadcast key.
Sets the broadcast key rotation interval to <time> in seconds ( 300 604800 ).
Sets the CCMP key type.
add-policy key preauth pkt-timeout
<256 bit key>
<mode>
<time>
Sets the CCMP key to <256 bit key>.
Enables or disables preauthentication (fast roaming).
Set packet timeout in seconds (1-10)
Adds the policy and exits.
..
CLI Reference 8-85
Disregards the policy creation and exits the CLI session.
For information on configuring the encryption and authentication options available to the access point using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring Security Options on page 6-2
.
8-86 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.security)>edit
Description:
Edits the properties of a specific security policy.
Syntax: set show change
..
<index> Edits security policy parameters. The values subject to modification, are the same ones created using the AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.security)>create command.
Displays security policy parameters
Completes policy edit and exit
Cancels the edit and exit
Example: admin(network.wireless.security)> edit 1 admin(network.wireless.security.edit)> show
Warning: This will display secure information,
Do you want to continue? (n/y?)y admin(network.wireless.security)>edit 1 admin(network.wireless.security.edit)>
For information on configuring the encryption and authentication options available to the access point using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring Security Options on page 6-2
.
CLI Reference 8-87
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.security)> delete
Description:
Deletes a specific security policy.
Syntax: delete <sec-name> Removes the specified security policy from the list of supported policies.
<all> Removes all security policies except the default policy.
Example admin(network.wireless.security)>delete all
Deleting all of your security policies...
Note that all WLANs will be assigned the default security policy.
admin(network.wireless.security)>
For information on configuring the encryption and authentication options available to the access point using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring Security Options on page 6-2
.
8-88 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
8.3.3.3 Network ACL Commands
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.acl)>
Description:
Displays the access point Mobile Unit Access Control List (ACL) submenu. The items available under this command include: show create edit delete
/
..
save quit
Displays the access point’s current ACL configuration.
Creates an MU ACL policy.
Edits the properties of an existing MU ACL policy.
Removes an MU ACL policy.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
CLI Reference 8-89
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.acl)> show
Description:
Displays the access point’s current ACL configuration.
Syntax: show summary policy <index>
Displays the list of existing MU ACL policies.
Displays the requested MU ACL index policy.
Example: admin(network.wireless.acl)> show summary
----------------------------------------------------------------------
ACL Policy Name Associated WLANs
----------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Default Front Lobby, WLAN1
2 Admin
3 Demo Room
Administration
Customers admin(network.wireless.acl)> show policy 1
Policy Name
Policy Mode
: Default
: allow
----------------------------------------------------------------------------index start mac end mac
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 00A0F8348787 00A0F8348798
For information on configuring the ACL options available to the access point using the applet (GUI), see
Control List (ACL) on page 5-35 .
8-90 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.acl)> create
Description:
Creates an MU ACL policy.
Syntax: create show set add-addr delete add-policy
..
acl-name mode
<mac1> or
<mac1> <mac2>
<index>
<acl-name> Displays the parameters of a new ACL policy.
<index> Sets the MU ACL policy name.
<acl-mode> Sets the ACL mode for the defined index (1-16). Allowed MUs can access the access point managed LAN. Options are deny and allow .
Adds specified MAC address to list of ACL MAC addresses.
<all> Removes either a specified ACL index or all ACL entries.
Completes the policy creation and exits the CLI.
Cancels the creation of the ACL and exits the CLI.
Example: admin(network.wireless.acl.create)> show
Policy Name
Policy Mode
: Front Lobby
: allow
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1
2 index start mac end mac
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
00A0F8334455
00A0F8400000
00A0F8334455
00A0F8402001 admin(network.wireless.acl.create)> set acl-name engineering admin(network.wireless.acl.create)> set mode deny admin(network.wireless.acl.create)> add-addr 00A0F843AABB admin(network.wireless.acl.create)> add-policy
For information on configuring the ACL options available to the access point using the applet (GUI), see
Control List (ACL) on page 5-35 .
CLI Reference 8-91
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.acl.edit)>
Description:
Edits the properties of an existing MU ACL policy.
Syntax: show set add-addr delete change
..
Displays MU ACL policy and its parameters.
Modifies the properties of an existing MU ACL policy.
Adds an MU ACL table entry.
Deletes an MU ACL table entry, including starting and ending MAC address ranges.
Completes the changes made and exits the session.
Cancels the changes made and exits the session.
For information on configuring the ACL options available to the access point using the applet (GUI), see
Control List (ACL) on page 5-35 .
8-92 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.acl)> delete
Description:
Removes an MU ACL policy.
Syntax: delete <idx> all
Deletes a partilcular MU ACL policy index.
Deletes all MU ACL policies.
For information on configuring the ACL options available to the access point using the applet (GUI), see
Control List (ACL) on page 5-35 .
8.3.3.4 Network Radio Configuration Commands
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.radio)>
Description:
Displays the access point Radio submenu. The items available under this command include: show set radio1 radio2
/
..
save quit
Summarizes access point radio parameters at a high-level.
Defines the access point radio configuration.
Displays the 2.4 GHz radio submenu.
Displays the 5.0 GHz radio submenu.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
CLI Reference 8-93
8-94 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.radio)> show
Description:
Displays the access point’s current radio configuration.
Syntax: show Displays the access point’s current radio configuration.Displays whether sensor-only mode status is enabled/ displayed also.
Example: admin(network.wireless.radio)> show
Sensor-only Mode : disable
Radio Configuration
Radio 1
Name
Radio Mode
Radio Function
RF Band of Operation
Maximum MUs
Wireless AP Configuration:
Base Bridge Mode
Max Wireless AP Clients
Client Bridge Mode
Roaming Client Bridge Mode
Client Bridge WLAN
Mesh Connection Timeout
Radio 2
Name
Radio Mode
Radio Function
RF Band of Operation
Roaming Client Bridge Mode
Wireless Mesh Configuration:
Base Bridge Mode
Max Wireless AP Clients
Client Bridge Mode
Roaming Client Bridge Mode
Client Bridge WLAN
Mesh Connection Timeout
Dot11 Auth Algorithm
: Radio 1
: enable
: WLAN
: 802.11n(2.4 GHz)
: 127
: enable
: 6
: disable
: disable
: WLAN1
: enable
: Radio 2
: enable
: WIPS
: 802.11n(5 GHz)
: disabled
: enable
: 5
: disable
: enable
: WLAN1
: enable
: open-system-only
CLI Reference 8-95
DSCP QOS Mappings:
DSCP value : Wireless Traffic ID (WMM AC)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 : 0 (best-effort)
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 : 1 (background)
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 : 2 (background)
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 : 3 (best-effort)
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 : 4 (video)
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 : 5 (video)
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 : 6 (voice)
56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 : 7 (voice) admin(network.wireless.radio)>
For information on configuring the Radio Configuration options available to the access point using the applet (GUI), see
Radio Configuration on page 5-51
.
8-96 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.radio)> set
Description:
Sets the access point’s radio configuration and defines the RF band of operation.
Syntax: set radio-config sensor-only max-mus
<mode>
<mode>
<mus>>
Sets the radio configuration.
Sets sensor only mode as enabled/disabled. When sensor-only is enabled then the users will be blocked from choosing radio configurations with a data radio.
Defines the maximum number of MUs assigned to the specified radio (idx 1 or 2).
The range can be defined between 0 and 127. This command does not apply to single radio access points.
mesh-base mesh-max mesh-client
<mode> <idx>
<clients>
<mode> mesh-roaming-client <mode>
Enables or disables base bridge mode based on radio index.
Sets the maximum number of wireless bridge clients.
Enables or Disables client bridge mode.
Enables or disables the mesh roaming client mode. For information on the Mesh
Roaming Client feature, see
Mesh Roaming Client on page 1-9
. mesh-timeout mesh-wlan dot11-auth qos-mapping
<mode>
<name>
Sets the client bridge link timeout.
Defines the client bridge WLAN name.
<auth-algorithm> Defines dot11 level authentication algorithm to either open-system-only or shared-key-allowed .
<mode> Sets the QoS mapping from wired to wireless.
(wired-to-wireless) dscp Configures mapping of DSCP values to wireless traffic ID
<dscp-num> Specify the DSCP value(0-63) to be configured.
<tid-num> tid0: best effort category traffic tid1: background category traffic tid2: background category traffic tid3: best effort category traffic tid4: video traffic category traffic tid5: video traffic category traffic tid6: voice traffic category traffic tid7: voice traffic category traffic
Example: admin(network.wireless.radio)> set sensor-only enable
*************************** WARNING ************************************
** Conversion to Sensor-only mode is irreversible.
**************************************************************************
Are you sure you want to convert the AP-713x to Sensor-only mode? (yes/no): yes
Please type yes or no admin(network.wireless.radio)> admin(network.wireless.radio)> show
Radio Configuration
Sensor-only Mode : enable
CLI Reference 8-97
Radio1
Name : Radio1
Radio Mode : enable
Radio2
Name : Radio2
Radio Mode : enable admin(network.wireless.radio)> admin(network.wireless.radio)> set max-mus 127 admin(network.wireless.radio)> set mesh-base 1 enable admin(network.wireless.radio)> set mesh-max 1 11 admin(network.wireless.radio)> set mesh-client 1 disable admin(network.wireless.radio)> set mesh-roaming-client 1 enable admin(network.wireless.radio)> set mesh-wlan wlan1 admin(network.wireless.radio)> set dot11-auth shared-key-allowed
Two Radio SKU set radio-config <value 1-7>
3
4
1
2
5
6
7
Radio 1 WLAN, Radio 2 WIPS
Radio 1 WIPS, Radio 2 WLAN
Radio 1 WLAN, Radio 2 WLAN
Radio 1 WIPS, Radio 2 WIPS
Radio 1 WLAN, Radio 2 Disabled
Radio 1 Disabled, Radio 2 WLAN
Radio 1 Disabled, Radio 2 Disabled
For information on the options available to the access point, see
Setting the WLAN’s Radio Configuration on page 5-51 .
8-98 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz])>
Description:
Displays a specific 802.11n 2.4 GHz radio 1 submenu. The items available under this command include:
Syntax:
/
..
show set
Displays 802.11n (2.4 GHz) radio settings.
Defines specific 802.11n (2.4 GHz) radio parameters.
advanced Displays the Adavanced radio settings submenu.
mesh Goes to the Wireless AP Connections submenu.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
save quit
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
Radio Configuration on page 5-51
.
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz])>show
Description:
Displays specific 802.11n (2.4 GHz) radio settings.
Syntax: show radio rates aggr qos
Displays specific 802.11n (2.4 GHz) radio settings.
Displays specific 802.11n (2.4 GHz) radio rate settings.
Displays specific 802.11n (2.4 GHz) aggregation settings.
Displays specific 802.11n (2.4 GHz) radio WMM QoS settings.
Example: admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz])> show radio
Radio Setting Information
Placement
MAC Address
Radio Type
ERP Protection
HT Protection Mode
Channel Setting
Power Level
: indoor
: 00A0F8715920
: 802.11n (2.4 GHz)
: Off
: Pure HT
: user selection
: 5 dbm (4 mW)
802.11 rate compatibility mode : B, G, and N
Beacon Interval
DTIM Interval short preamble
RTS Threshold
: 100 K-usec
: 10 beacon intvls
: disable
: 2341 bytes
QBSS Channel Util Beacon Intervl : 10 beacon intvls
QBSS Load Element Mode : enable
Single Anetenna : disable
CLI Reference 8-99
8-100 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz])> show rates
10
11
12
13
14
15
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
Basic Rates
Supported Rates
1 2 5.5 11
1 2 5.5 6 9 11 12 18 24 36 48 54
Short Guard Interval disable
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
0
1
MCS Index Basic/Supported 20 MHz Rate 40 MHz Rate
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Supported
Supported
6.5 Mbps
13.0 Mbps
13.5 Mbps
27.0 Mbps
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
19.5 Mbps
26.0 Mbps
39.0 Mbps
52.0 Mbps
58.5 Mbps
65.0 Mbps
13.0 Mbps
26.0 Mbps
40.5 Mbps
54.0 Mbps
81.0 Mbps
108.0 Mbps
121.5 Mbps
135.0 Mbps
27.0 Mbps
54.0 Mbps
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
39.0 Mbps
52.0 Mbps
78.0 Mbps
104.0 Mbps
117.0 Mbps
130.0 Mbps
81.0 Mbps
108.0 Mbps
162.0 Mbps
216.0 Mbps
243.0 Mbps
270.0 Mbps admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz])> admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz])> show aggr
Radio Aggregation Settings
Enable Transmit A-MSDU
Receive A-MSDU Buffer Limit
Enable Transmit A-MPDU
Transmit A-MPDU Size Limit
Receive A-MPDU Size Limit
Receive A-MPDU Minimum Spacing
:enable
:3839 bytes
:enable
:65536 bytes
:65536 bytes
:0 usec admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz])>
CLI Reference 8-101 admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz])> show qos
Radio QOS Parameter Set 11n-default
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Access Category CWMin CWMax AIFSN TXOPs (32 usec) TXOPs ms
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Background
Best Effort
Video
Voice
15
15
7
3
1023
63
15
7
7
3
1
1
0
31
94
47
0.000
0.992
3.008
1.504
CAUTION If you do NOT include the index number (for example, "set dtim 50"), the DTIMs for all four BSSIDs will be changed to 50. To change individual DTIMs for BSSIDs, specify the BSS Index number (for example,
"set dtim 2 50). This will change the DTIM for BSSID 2 to 50.
WLAN Access Control List (ACL) on page 5-35 .
8-102 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz])> set
Description:
Defines specific 802.11n (2.4 GHz) radio parameters.
Syntax: set placement ch-mode channel power rf-mode rates beacon dtim aggr shortgi preamble rts
Defines the access point radio placement as indoors or outdoors.
Determines how the radio channel is selected (user, auto-20 or auto-40).
Defines the radio channel used. Channel allowed depends on actual country of operation.
Defines the antenna power transmit level. Depends on radio type, channel and country.
Sets the default rates for the 802.11 mode selected (b-only, g-only, n-only, b-and-g, or bg-and-n).
Sets the supported orbasic radio transmit rates.
Sets the beacon interval used by the radio.
Defines the DTIM interval (by index) used by the radio.
Sets the radio’s aggregation.
Enables/disables a short guard interval of 40MHz.
Enables/disables short preamble support for the radio (this is 2.4 GHz radio specific).
Defines the RTS Threshold value for the radio.
range qos
Sets the radio’s extended range (in miles 0-50).
Defines the param-set,cwmin, cwmax, aifsn and txops levels for the QoS policy used for the radio.
qbss-beacon Sets the QBSS Channel Util Beacon Interval in kilo-usec (10 - 200).
qbss-mode Enables/disables the QBSS load element.
single-antenna Enables/disables single antenna support. Enable (default setting) to decrease sensitivity and device retries.
Example: admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz])> set placement indoor admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz])> set ch-mode user admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz])> set channel 11 admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz])> set power 4 admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz])> set rf-mode b-only admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz])> set rates admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz])> set beacon 100 admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz])> set dtim 1 40 admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz])> set aggr ampdu enable admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz])> set shortgi disable admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz])> set single-antenna disable admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz])> set preamble disable admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz])> set rts 2341 admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz])> set qos cwmin 125 admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz])> set qos cwmax 255 admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz])> set qos aifsn 7 admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz])> set qos txops 0 admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz])> set qbss-beacon 110 admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz])> set qbss-mode enable
For information on configuring the Radio 1 Configuration options available to the access point using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n Radio on page 5-56 .
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz].advanced)>
Description:
Displays the advanced submenu for the 802.11n (2.4 GHz) radio. The items available under this command include:
Syntax:
/
..
show set save quit
Displays advanced radio settings for the 802.11n (2.4 GHz) radio.
Defines advanced parameters for the 802.11n (2.4 GHz) radio.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
CLI Reference 8-103
8-104 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz].advanced)> show
Description:
Displays the BSSID to WLAN mapping for the 802.11n (2.4 GHz) radio.
Syntax: show advanced wlan
Displays advanced settings for the 802.11n (2.4 GHz) radio.
Displays WLAN summary list for the 802.11n (2.4 GHz) radio.
Example: admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz].advanced)> show advanced
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
WLAN BSS ID BC/MC Cipher Status Message
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Lobby
HR
Office
1
2
3
Open
Open
Open good good good configuration is ok configuration is ok configuration is ok
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
BSSID Primary WLAN
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1
2
3
Lobby
HR
Office admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz].advanced)> show wlan
Warning: This will display secure information,
Do you want to continue? (n/y?)y
WLAN 1:
WLAN name
ESS ID
Radio Band(s)
VLAN
Security Policy
QoS Policy
Rate Limiting
: WLAN1
: 101
: 2.4 and 5.0 GHz
: <none>
: Default
: Default
: disabled
802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n Radio on page 5-56 .
CLI Reference 8-105
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz].advanced)> set
Description:
Defines advanced parameters for the target 802.11n (2.4 GHz) radio.
Syntax: set wlan bss
<wlan-name>
<bss-id>
<bssid> Defines advanced WLAN to BSSID mapping for the target radio.
<wlan name> Sets the BSSID to primary WLAN definition.
Example: admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz].advanced)> set wlan demoroom 1 admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz].advanced)> set bss 1 demoroom
802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n Radio on page 5-56 .
8-106 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz].mesh)>
Description:
Displays the mesh configuration submenu for the 802.11n (2.4 GHz) radio. The items available under this command include:
Syntax:
/
..
show set add delete save quit
Displays mesh settings and status for the 802.11n (2.4 GHz) radio.
Defines mesh parameters for the 802.11n (2.4 GHz) radio.
Adds a 802.11n (2.4 GHz) radio mesh connection.
Deletes a 802.11n (2.4 GHz) radio mesh connection.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
CLI Reference 8-107
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz].mesh)> show
Description:
Displays mesh settings and status for the 802.11n (2.4 GHz) radio.
Syntax: show config status
Displays the connection list configuration.
Shows the available mesh connection status.
Example: admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz].mesh)> show config
Mesh Connection Auto Select : enable admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz].mesh)> show status
----------------------------------------------------------------------------idx AP MAC Address Channel Signal (dBm)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz].mesh)>
8-108 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz].mesh)> set
Description:
Defines mesh parameters for the 802.11n (2.4 GHz) radio.
Syntax: set <auto-select> Enables or disables auto select mesh connections.
Example: admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz].mesh)> set auto-select enable admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz].mesh)> show config
Mesh Connection Auto Select : enable
CLI Reference 8-109
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz].mesh)> add
Description:
Adds a 802.11n (2.4 GHz) radio mesh connection.
Syntax: add <priority>
<mac>
Defines the connection priority (1-16).
Sets the access point MAC address.
Example: admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz].mesh)> add 2 AA21DCDD12DE
8-110 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz].mesh)> delete
Description:
Deletes a 802.11n (2.4 GHz) radio mesh connection by specified index or by removing all entries.
Syntax: delete <idx>
<all>
Deletes a mesh connection by specified index (1-16).
Removes all mesh connections.
Example: admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz].mesh)> delete 2
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[5.0 GHz])>
Description:
Displays a specific 802.11n (5.0 GHz) radio 2 submenu. The items available under this command include:
Syntax:
/
..
show set
Displays 802.11n (5.0 GHz) radio settings
Defines specific 802.11n (5.0 GHz) radio parameters.
advanced Displays the Advanced radio settings submenu.
mesh Goes to the Mesh Connections submenu.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
save quit
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
CLI Reference 8-111
8-112 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[5.0 GHz])> show
Description:
Displays specific 802.11n (5.0 GHz) radio settings.
Syntax: show radio rates aggr qos
Displays specific 802.11n (5.0 GHz) radio settings.
Displays specific 802.11n (5.0 GHz) radio rate settings.
Displays specific 802.11n (5.0 GHz) aggregation settings.
Displays specific 802.11n (5.0 GHz) radio WMM QoS settings.
Example: admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[5.0 GHz])> show radio
Radio Setting Information
Placement
MAC Address
Radio Type
HT Protection Mode
Channel Setting
Power Level
: indoor
: 00A0F8715920
: 802.11n (5.0 GHz)
: Pure HT
: uniform spreading
: 20 dbm (100 mW)
802.11 rate compatibility mode : A and N
Beacon Interval
DTIM Interval
RTS Threshold
: 100 K-usec
: 10 beacon intvls
: 2341 bytes
QBSS Channel Util Beacon Intervl : 10 beacon intvls
QBSS Load Element Mode
Single Antenna
: enable
: disable
CLI Reference 8-113 admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[5.0 GHz])> show rates
10
11
12
13
14
15
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
Basic Rates
Supported Rates
6 12 24
6 9 12 18 24 36 48 54
Short Guard Interval disable
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
0
1
MCS Index Basic/Supported 20 MHz Rate 40 MHz Rate
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Supported
Supported
6.5 Mbps
13.0 Mbps
13.5 Mbps
27.0 Mbps
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
19.5 Mbps
26.0 Mbps
39.0 Mbps
52.0 Mbps
58.5 Mbps
65.0 Mbps
13.0 Mbps
26.0 Mbps
40.5 Mbps
54.0 Mbps
81.0 Mbps
108.0 Mbps
121.5 Mbps
135.0 Mbps
27.0 Mbps
54.0 Mbps
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
39.0 Mbps
52.0 Mbps
78.0 Mbps
104.0 Mbps
117.0 Mbps
130.0 Mbps
81.0 Mbps
108.0 Mbps
162.0 Mbps
216.0 Mbps
243.0 Mbps
270.0 Mbps admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[5.0 GHz])> admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[5.0 GHz])> show aggr
Radio Aggregation Settings
Enable Transmit A-MSDU
Receive A-MSDU Buffer Limit
Enable Transmit A-MPDU
Transmit A-MPDU Size Limit
Receive A-MPDU Size Limit
Receive A-MPDU Minimum Spacing
:enable
:3839 bytes
:enable
:65536 bytes
:65536 bytes
:0 usec admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[5.0 GHz])>
8-114 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[5.0 GHz])> show qos
Radio QOS Parameter Set 11n-default
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Access Category CWMin CWMax AIFSN TXOPs (32 usec) TXOPs ms
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Background
Best Effort
Video
Voice
15
15
7
3
1023
63
15
7
7
3
1
1
0
31
94
47
0.000
0.992
3.008
1.504
For information on configuring the Radio 2 Configuration options available to the access point using the applet (GUI), see
WLAN Access Control List (ACL) on page 5-35 .
CLI Reference 8-115
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[5.0 GHz])> set
Description:
Defines specific 802.11n (5.0 GHz) radio parameters.
Syntax: set placement ch-mode channel power rf-mode rates beacon dtim aggr shortgi rts range
Defines the access point radio placement as indoors or outdoors.
Determines how the radio channel is selected.
Defines the actual channel used by the radio. Channel allowed depends on actual country of operation.
Defines the antenna power transmit level. Depends on radio type, channel and country.
Sets the default rates for the 802.11 mode selected (a-only, n-only, or a-and-n).
Sets the supported radio transmit rates.
Sets the beacon interval used by the radio.
Defines the DTIM interval (by index) used by the radio.
Sets the radio’s aggregation.
Enables/disables a short guard interval of 40MHz.
Defines the RTS Threshold value for the radio.
Sets the radio’s extended range (in miles 0-50).
qos Defines the param-set, cwmin, cwmax, aifsn and txops levels for the QoS policy used for the 5.0 GHz radio.
qbss-beacon Sets the QBSS Channel Util Beacon Interval in kilo-usec (10 - 200).
qbss-mode Enables/disables the QBSS load element.
single-antenna Enables/disables single antenna support. Enable (default setting) to decrease sensitivity and device retries.
Example: admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[5.0 GHz])> admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[5.0 GHz])> set placement indoor admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[5.0 GHz])> set ch-mode auto-40 admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[5.0 GHz])> set channel 11 admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[5.0 GHz])> set power 4 admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[5.0 GHz])> set rates 10 admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[5.0 GHz])> set beacon 100 admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[5.0 GHz])> set dtim 1 10 admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz])> set aggr ampdu enable admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz])> set shortgi disable admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[5.0 GHz])> set rts 2341 admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[5.0 GHz])> set range 40 admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[5.0 GHz])> set qbss-beacon 110 admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[5.0 GHz])> set qbss-mode enable admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[2.4 GHz])> set single-antenna disable
For information on configuring the Radio 2 Configuration options available to the access point using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n Radio on page 5-56 .
8-116 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[5.0 GHz].advanced)>
Description:
Displays the advanced submenu for the 802.11n (5.0 GHz) radio. The items available under this command include:
Syntax:
/
..
show set save quit
Displays advanced radio settings for the 802.11n (5.0 GHz) radio.
Defines advanced parameters for the 802.11n (5.0 GHz) radio.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
CLI Reference 8-117
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[5.0 GHz].advanced)> show
Description:
Displays the BSSID to WLAN mapping for the 802.11n (5.0 GHz) radio.
Syntax: show advanced wlan
Displays advanced settings for the 802.11n (5.0 GHz) radio.
Displays WLAN summary list for 802.11n (5.0 GHz) radio.
Example: admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[5.0 GHz].advanced)> show advanced
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
WLAN BSS ID BC/MC Cipher Status Message
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Lobby
HR
Office
1
2
3
Open
Open
Open good good good configuration is ok configuration is ok configuration is ok
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
BSSID Primary WLAN
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1
2
3
Lobby
HR
Office admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[5.0 GHz].advanced)> show wlan
Warning: This will display secure information,
Do you want to continue? (n/y?)y
WLAN 1:
WLAN name
ESS ID
Radio
VLAN
Security Policy
QoS Policy
Rate Limiting
: WLAN1
: 101
: 2.4 and 5.0 GHz
: <none>
: Default
: Default
: disable
For information on configuring the Radio 2 Configuration options available to the access point using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n Radio on page 5-56 .
8-118 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[5.0 GHz].advanced)> set
Description:
Defines advanced parameters for the target 802.11n (5.0 GHz) radio.
Syntax: set wlan bss
<wlan-name>
<bss-id>
<bssid> Defines advanced WLAN to BSSID mapping for the target 5.0 GHz radio.
<wlan name> Sets the BSSID to primary WLAN definition.
Example: admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[5.0 GHz].advanced)> set wlan demoroom 1 admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[5.0 GHz].advanced)> set bss 1 demoroom
802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n Radio on page 5-56 .
CLI Reference 8-119
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[5.0 GHz].mesh)>
Description:
Displays the mesh configuration submenu for the 802.11n (5.0 GHz) radio. The items available under this command include:
Syntax:
/
..
show set add delete save quit
Displays mesh settings and status for the 802.11n (5.0 GHz) radio.
Defines mesh parameters for the 802.11n (5.0 GHz) radio.
Adds a 802.11n (5.0 GHz) radio mesh connection.
Deletes a 802.11n (5.0 GHz) radio mesh connection.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
8-120 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[5.0 GHz].mesh)> show
Description:
Displays mesh settings and status for the 802.11n (5.0 GHz) radio.
Syntax: show config status
Displays the connection list configuration.
Shows the available mesh connection status.
Example: admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[5.0 GHz].mesh)> show config
Mesh Connection Auto Select : enable admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[5.0 GHz].mesh)> show status
----------------------------------------------------------------------------idx AP MAC Address Channel Signal (dBm)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[5.0 GHz].mesh)>
CLI Reference 8-121
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[5.0 GHz].mesh)> set
Description:
Defines mesh parameters for the 802.11n (5.0 GHz) radio.
Syntax: set <auto-select> Enables or disables auto select mesh connections.
Example: admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[5.0 GHz].mesh)> set auto-select enable admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[5.0 GHz].mesh)> show config
Mesh Connection Auto Select : enable
8-122 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[5.0 GHz].mesh)> add
Description:
Adds a 802.11n (5.0 GHz) radio mesh connection.
Syntax: add <priority>
<mac>
Defines the connection priority (1-16).
Sets the access point MAC address.
Example: admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[5.0 GHz].mesh)> add 2 AA21DCDD12DE
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[5.0 GHz].mesh)> delete
Description:
Deletes a 802.11n (5.0 GHz) radio mesh connection by specified index or by removing all entries.
Syntax: delete <idx>
<all>
Deletes a mesh connection by specified index (1-16).
Removes all mesh connections.
Example: admin(network.wireless.radio.802-11n[5.0 GHz].mesh)> delete 2
CLI Reference 8-123
8-124 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
8.3.3.5 Network Quality of Service (QoS) Commands
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.qos)>
Description:
Displays the access point Quality of Service (QoS) submenu. The items available under this command include: show create edit delete
/
..
save quit
Displays access point QoS policy information.
Defines the parameters of the QoS policy.
Edits the settings of an existing QoS policy.
Removes an existing QoS policy.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
CLI Reference 8-125
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.qos)> show
Description:
Displays the access point’s current QoS policy by summary or individual policy.
Syntax: show summary policy <index>
Displays all exisiting QoS policies that have been defined.
Displays the configuration for the requested QoS policy.
Example: admin(network.wireless.qos)> show summary
----------------------------------------------------------------------
QOS Policy Name Associated WLANs
----------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Default
2 IP Phones
3 Video
WLAN1, mudskipper
Audio Dept
Vidio Dept admin(network.wireless.qos)> show policy 1
Policy Name
Support Voice Prioritization
Multicast (Mask) Address 1
Multicast (Mask) Address 2
WMM QOS Mode
WMM QOS Parameter Set
Default disable
01005E000000
09000E000000 disable
11ag-default
.
8-126 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.qos.create)>
Description:
Defines an access point QoS policy.
Syntax: show set add-policy
..
qos-name vop mcast
<index>
<index>
<mac> wmm-qos <index> param-set <set-name> cwmin <access category> cwmax <access category> aifsn txops default
<access category>
<access category>
Displays QoS policy parameters.
Sets the QoS name for the specified index entry.
Enables or disables support (by index) for legacy VOIP devices.
<index> Defines primary and secondary Multicast MAC address. Defines multicast address index between 1-2.
Enables or disables the QoS policy index specified.
Defines the data type used with the qos policy and mesh network. When set to a value other then manual, editing the access category values is not necessary. Options include; 11g-default, 11b-default, 11g-wifi, 11bwifi, 11g-voice, 11b-voice or manual for advanced users).
<index> Defines Minimum Contention Window (CW-Min) for specified access categoiry and index.
<index> Defines Maximum Contention Window (CW-Max) for specified access categoiry and index.
<index> Sets Arbitrary Inter-Frame Space Number (AIFSN) for specified access categoiry and index.
<index> Configures Opportunity to Transmit Time (TXOPs Time) for specified access categoiry and index.
<index> Defines CWMIN, CWMAX, AIFSN and TXOPs default values.
Completes the policy edit and exits the session.
Cancels the changes and exits.
Example: admin(network.wireless.qos.create)>show
Policy Name :
Support Voice Prioritization : disable
Multicast (Mask) Address 1 : 000000000000
Multicast (Mask) Address 2 : 000000000000
WMM QOS Mode : disable admin(network.wireless.qos.create)> admin(network.wireless.qos.create)>set default
The WMM parameter is set to "manual".
admin(network.wireless.qos.create)>
.
CLI Reference 8-127
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.qos.edit)>
Descripton:
Edits the properties of an existing QoS policy.
Syntax: show set qos-name <index> vop <index> mcast <mac> wmm-qos <index> param-set <set-name> change
..
cwmin <access category> cwmax <access category> aifsn txops
<access category>
<access category> default
<index>
<index>
<index>
<index>
<index>
Displays QoS policy parameters.
Sets the QoS name for the specified index entry.
Enables or disables support (by index) for legacy VOIP devices.
Defines primary and secondary Multicast MAC address.
Enables or disables the QoS policy index specified.
Defines the data type used with the qos policy and mesh network. When set to a value other then manual, editing the access category values is not necessary. Options include; 11gdefault, 11b-default, 11g-wifi, 11b-wifi, 11g-voice, 11b-voice or manual for advanced users).
Defines the Minimum Contention Window (CW-Min) for specified access categoiry and index.
Defines the Maximum Contention Window (CW-Max) for specified access categoiry and index.
Sets the Arbitrary Inter-Frame Space Number (AIFSN) for specified access categoiry and index.
Configures Opportunity to Transmit Time (TXOPs Time) for specified access categoiry and index.
Defines CWMIN, CWMAX, AIFSN and TXOPs default values.
Completes the policy edit and exits the session.
Cancels the changes and exits.
Example: admin(network.wireless.qos.edit)>show
Policy Name : Default
Support Voice Prioritization : disable
Multicast (Mask) Address 1 : 01005E000000
Multicast (Mask) Address 2 : 09000E000000
WMM QOS Mode : enable
WMM QOS Parameter Set : 11n-default
Access Category CWMin CWMax AIFSN TXOPs (32usec) TXOPs ms
--------------------------------------------------------------
Background 15 1023 7 0 0.000
Best Effort 15 255 3 20 0.640
Video 7 15 2 94 3.008
Voice 3 7 2 47 1.504
admin(network.wireless.qos.edit)>
.
8-128 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.qos)> delete
Description:
Removes a QoS policy.
Syntax: delete <qos-name>
<all>
Deletes the specified QoS polciy index, or all of the policies (except default policy).
For information on configuring the WLAN QoS options available to the access point using the applet (GUI), see
Setting the WLAN Quality of Service (QoS) Policy on page 5-39
.
8.3.3.6 Network Rate Limiting Commands
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.rate-limiting)>
Description:
Displays the access point Rate Limiting submenu. The items available under this command include:
/ show set
..
save quit
Displays Rate Limiting information for how data is processed by the access point.
Defines Rate Limiting parameters for the access point.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
CLI Reference 8-129
8-130 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.rate-limiting)> show
Description:
Displays the access point’s current Rate Limiting configuration.
Syntax: show summary Displays the current Rate Limiting configuration for defined WLANs.
wlan
Example: admin(network.wireless.rate-limiting> show summary
Per MU Rate Limiting : disable admin(network.wireless.rate-limiting)> show wlan
Warning: This will display secure information,
Do you want to continue? (n/y?)y
WLAN 1
WLAN Name
ESSID
Radio Band(s)
VLAN
Security Policy
QoS Policy
Rate Limiting
WLAN1
101
2.4 and 5.0 GHz
<none>
Default
Default disable
For information on configuring the Rate Limiting options available to the access point using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring MU Rate Limiting on page 5-67
.
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.rate-limiting)> set
Description:
Defines the access point Rate Limiting configuration.
Syntax: set mode <mode> Enables or disables Rate Limiting.
Example: admin(network.wireless.rate-limiting)>set mode enable admin(network.wireless.rate-limiting)>
For information on configuring the Rate Limiting options available to the access point using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring MU Rate Limiting on page 5-67
.
CLI Reference 8-131
8-132 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
8.3.3.7 Network Rogue-AP Commands
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.rogue-ap)>
Description:
Displays the Rogue AP submenu. The items available under this command include: show set mu-scan
Displays the current access point Rogue AP detection configuration.
Defines the Rogue AP detection method.
Goes to the Rogue AP mu-uscan submenu.
allowed-list Goes to the Rogue AP Allowed List submenu.
/
..
active-list rogue-list save quit
Goes the Rogue AP Active List submenu.
Goes the Rogue AP List submenu.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
CLI Reference 8-133
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.rogue-ap)> show
Description:
Displays the current access point Rogue AP detection configuration.
Syntax: show Displays the current access point Rogue AP detection configuration.
Example: admin(network.wireless.rogue-ap)> show
MU Scan
MU Scan Interval
On-Channel
Detector Radio Scan
Auto Authorize Motorola APs
: disable
: 60 minutes
: disable
: enable
: disable
Approved APs age out
Rogue APs age out
: 0 minutes
: 0 minutes
For information on configuring the Rogue AP options available to the access point using the applet (GUI), see
.
8-134 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.rogue-ap)> set
Description:
Defines the access point ACL rogue AP method.
Syntax: set mu-scan interval
<mode>
<minutes> on-channel <mode> detector-scan <mode>
ABG-scan <mode> motorola-ap <mode> applst-ageout <minutes> roglst-ageout <minutes>
Enables or disables to permit MUs to scan for rogue APs.
Defines an interval for associated MUs to beacon in attempting to locate rogue
APs. Value not available unless mu-scan is enabled.
Enables or disables on-channel detection.
Enables or disables AP detector scan (dual-radio model only).
Enables or disables A/BG Detector Scan Mode.
Enables or disables the Authorize Any AP with a Motorola MAC address option.
Sets the approved AP age out time.
Sets the rogue AP age out time.
Example: admin(network.wireless.rogue-ap)> admin(network.wireless.rogue-ap)> set mu-scan enable admin(network.wireless.rogue-ap)> set interval 10 admin(network.wireless.rogue-ap)> set on-channel disable admin(network.wireless.rogue-ap)> set detector-scan disable admin(network.wireless.rogue-ap)> set ABG-scan disable admin(network.wireless.rogue-ap)> set motorola-ap enable admin(network.wireless.rogue-ap)> set applst-ageout 10 admin(network.wireless.rogue-ap)> set roglst-ageout 10 admin(network.wireless.rogue-ap)> show
MU Scan
MU Scan Interval
On Channel
Detector Radio Scan
Auto Authorize Motorola APs
: enable
: 10 minutes
: disable
: disable
: enable
Approved AP age out
Rogue AP age out
: 10 minutes
: 10 minutes
For information on configuring the Rogue AP options available to the access point using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring Rogue AP Detection on page 6-42 .
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.rogue-ap.mu-scan)>
Description:
Displays the Rogue-AP mu-scan submenu.
Syntax: add show start
..
/ save quit
Add all or just one scan result to Allowed AP list.
Displays all APs located by the MU scan.
Initiates scan immediately by the MU.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
CLI Reference 8-135
8-136 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.rogue-ap.mu-scan)> start
Description:
Initiates an MU scan from a user provided MAC address.
Syntax: start <mu-mac> Initiates MU scan from user provided MAC address.
Example: admin(network.wireless.rogue-ap.mu-scan)>start 00af8000001 admin(network.wireless.rogue-ap.mu-scan)>
For information on configuring the Rogue AP options available to the access point using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring Rogue AP Detection on page 6-42 .
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.rogue-ap.mu-scan)> show
Description:
Displays the results of an MU scan.
Syntax: show Displays all APs located by the MU scan.
Example: admin(network.wireless.rogue-ap.mu-scan)>show
Scan Result Not Available.
admin(network.wireless.rogue-ap.mu-scan)>
For information on configuring the Rogue AP options available to the access point using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring Rogue AP Detection on page 6-42 .
CLI Reference 8-137
8-138 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.rogue-ap.allowed-list)>
Description:
Displays the Rogue-AP allowed-list submenu.
show add delete
..
/ save quit
Displays the rogue AP allowed list
Adds an AP MAC address and ESSID to the allowed list.
Deletes an entry or all entries from the allowed list.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
CLI Reference 8-139
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.rogue-ap.allowed-list)> show
Description:
Displays the Rogue AP allowed List.
Syntax: show Displays the rogue-AP allowed list.
Example: admin(network.wireless.rogue-ap.allowed-list)> show
Allowed AP List
----------------------------------------------------------------------------index ap mac essid
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1
2
3
00:A0:F8:71:59:20
00:A0:F8:33:44:55
00:A0:F8:40:20:01
*
101
Marketing
For information on configuring the Rogue AP options available to the access point using the applet (GUI), see
.
8-140 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.rogue-ap.allowed-list)> add
Description:
Adds an AP MAC address and ESSID to existing allowed list.
Syntax: add <mac-addr>
<ess-id>
Adds an AP MAC address and ESSID to existing allowed list.
“fffffffffffffffff” means any MAC
Use a “*” for any ESSID.
Example: admin(network.wireless.rogue-ap.allowed-list)> add 00A0F83161BB 103 admin(network.wireless.rogue-ap.allowed-list)> show
----------------------------------------------------------------------------index ap essid
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
3
4
1
2
00:A0:F8:71:59:20
00:A0:F8:33:44:55
00:A0:F8:40:20:01
00:A0:F8:31:61:BB
* fffffffffff
Marketing
103
For information on configuring the Rogue AP options available to the access point using the applet (GUI), see
.
CLI Reference 8-141
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.rogue-ap.allowed-list)> delete
Description:
Deletes an AP MAC address and ESSID to existing allowed list.
Syntax: delete <idx> (1-50)
<all>
Deletes an AP MAC address and ESSID (or all addresses) from the allowed list.
Example: admin(network.wireless.rogue-ap.allowed-list)>delete 1 cfg read/write failed admin(network.wireless.rogue-ap.allowed-list)>
For information on configuring the Rogue AP options available to the access point using the applet (GUI), see
.
8-142 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
8.3.3.8 WIPS Commands
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.wips)>
Description:
Displays the WIPS submenu. The items available under this command include:
/ show set
..
save quit
Displays the current WLAN Intrusion Prevention configuration.
Sets WLAN Intrusion Prevention parameters.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.wips)> show
Description:
Shows the WLAN Intrusion Prevention configuration.
Syntax: show Displays the WLAN Intrusion Prevention configuration.
Example: admin(network.wireless.wips> show
Warning: This will display secure information,
Do you want to continue? (n/y?)y
WIPS Server #1
IP Address
WIPS Server #2
IP Address
: 192.168.0.21
: 10.1.1.1
admin(network.wireless.wips>
CLI Reference 8-143
8-144 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.wips)> set
Description:
Sets the WLAN Intrusion Prevention configuration.
Syntax: set <idx 1 and 2> <ip> Defines the WLAN Intrusion Prevention Server IP Address (for server IPs 1 and 2).
Example: admin(network.wireless.wips)> set server 1 192.168.0.21
admin(network.wireless.wips)>
8.3.3.9 Network MU Locationing Commands
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.mu-locationing)>
Description:
Displays the MU Locationing submenu. The items available under this command include:
/ show set
..
save quit
Displays the current MU Locationing configuration.
Defines MU Locationing parameters.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
CLI Reference 8-145
8-146 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.mu-locationing> show
Description:
Displays the MU probe table configuration
Syntax: show Displays the MU probe table configuration.
Example: admin(network.wireless.mu-locationing)> show
MU Probe Table Mode
MU Probe Table Size
: disable
: 200 admin(network.wireless.mu-locationing)>
AP7131N>admin(network.wireless.mu-locationing> set
Description:
Defines the MU probe table configuration used for locating MUs.
Syntax: set mode size
Defines the MU probe table configuration.
Enables/disables a mu probe scan.
Defines the number of MUs in the table (the maximum allowed is 200).
Example: admin(network.wireless.mu-locationing)> set admin(network.wireless.mu-locationing)> set mode enable admin(network.wireless.mu-locationing)> set size 200 admin(network.wireless.mu-locationing)>
CLI Reference 8-147
8-148 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
8.3.4 Network Firewall Commands
AP7131N>admin(network.firewall)>
Description:
Displays the access point firewall submenu. The items available under this command include: show set
Displays the access point’s current firewall configuration.
Defines the access point’s firewall parameters. access Enables/disables firewall permissions through the LAN and WAN ports.
advanced Displays interoperaility rules between the LAN and WAN ports.
..
/ save quit
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
CLI Reference 8-149
AP7131N>admin(network.firewall)> show
Description:
Displays the access point firewall parameters.
Syntax: show Shows all access point firewall settings.
Example: admin(network.firewall)> show
Firewall Status
NAT Timeout
Configurable Firewall Filters:
: enable
: 10 minutes ftp bounce attack filter syn flood attack filter unaligned ip timestamp filter source routing attack filter
: enable
: enable
: enable
: enable winnuke attack filter : enable seq num prediction attack filter : enable mime flood attack filter max mime header length max mime headers
: enable
: 8192 bytes
: 16 headers
8-150 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.firewall)> set
Description:
Defines the access point firewall parameters.
Syntax: set nat-timeout syn src win ftp ip seq mime len hdr
<interval>
<mode>
<mode>
<mode>
<mode>
<mode>
<mode> filter
<length>
<count>
Defines the NAT timeout value.
Enables or disables SYN flood attack check.
Enables or disables source routing check.
Enables or disables Winnuke attack check.
Enables or disables FTP bounce attack check.
Enables or disables IP unaligned timestamp check.
Enables or disables sequence number prediction check.
Enables or disables MIME flood attack check.
Sets the max header length in bytes as specified by <length>
(with value in range ( 256 - 34463 ).
Sets the max number of headers as specified in <count>
(with value in range( 12 - 34463 ).
Example: admin(network.firewall)> set ftp enable admin(network.firewall)> set ip enable admin(network.firewall)> set seq enable admin(network.firewall)> set src enable admin(network.firewall)> set syn enable admin(network.firewall)> set win enable admin(network.firewall)> show
Firewall Status : enable
NAT Timeout : 10 minutes
Configurable Firewall Filters ftp bounce attack filter syn flood attack filter unaligned ip timestamp filter
: enable
: enable
: enable source routing attack filter winnuke attack filter
: enable
: enable seq num prediction attack filter : enable mime flood attack filter : enable max mime header length : 8192 bytes
max mime headers : 16 headers
CLI Reference 8-151
AP7131N>admin(network.firewall)> access
Description:
Enables or disables firewall permissions through LAN to WAN ports.
Syntax: show set add delete list
..
/ save quit
Displays LAN to WAN access rules.
Sets LAN to WAN access rules.
Adds LAN to WAN exception rules.
Deletes LAN to WAN access exception rules.
Displays LAN to WAN access exception rules. for the specified LAN.
Goes to parent menu
Goes to root menu.
Saves configuration to system flash.
Quits and exits the CLI session.
Example: admin(network.firewall.lan-wan-access)> list lan1
----------------------------------------------------------------------------index from to name prot start port end port
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1
2
3
4
5 lan lan lan lan lan wan wan wan wan wan
HTTP abc
123456
654321 abc tcp udp ah tcp ah
80
0
1440
2048
100
80
0
2048
2048
1000
8-152 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.firewall)> advanced
Description:
Displays whether an access point firewall rule is intended for inbound traffic to an interface or outbound traffic from that interface.
Syntax: show set import inbound outbound
..
/ save quit
Shows advanced subnet access parameters.
Sets advanced subnet access parameters.
Imports rules from subnet access.
Goes to the Inbound Firewall Rules submenu.
Goes to the Outbound Firewall Rules submenu.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the configuration to flash memory.
Quits and exits the CLI session.
Example: admin(network.firewall.adv-lan-access.inb)> list
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Idx RuleId Src IP-Netmask Dst IP-Netmask Tp Src Ports Dst Ports NAT Action
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 1245 202.105.5.5- 202.105.5.10- all 1:65535 1:65535 none (null)
255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
admin(network.firewall.adv-lan-access.outb)> list
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Idx RuleId Src IP-Netmask Dst IP-Netmask Tp Src Ports Dst Ports NAT Action
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 10 111.110.0.15- 157.235.205.30- all 1:65535 1:65535 none (null)
255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
8.3.5 Network Router Commands
AP7131N>admin(network.router)>
Description:
Displays the router submenu. The items available under this command are: show set add delete list
/
..
save quit
Displays the existing access point router configuration.
Sets the RIP parameters.
Adds user-defined routes.
Deletes user-defined routes.
Lists user-defined routes.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
CLI Reference 8-153
8-154 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.router)> show
Description:
Shows the access point route table.
Syntax: show routes rips
Shows the access point route table.
Displays RIP parameters
Example:
3
4
1
2
5 admin(network.router)> show routes
---------------------------------------------------------------------------index destination netmask gateway interface metric
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
192.168.2.0
192.168.1.0
192.168.0.0
192.168.24.0
157.235.19.5
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
192.168.24.1
lan1
lan2
lan1
wan
wan
0
0
0
0
1
Default gateway Interface: wan admin(network.router)>show rip
Warning: This will display secure information.
Do you want to continue [n/y]?y
rip type : off rip direction : both rip authentication type : none rip simple auth password : ******** rip md5 id 1 : 1 rip md5 key 1 : ******** rip md5 id 2 : 2 rip md5 key 2 : ******** admin(network.router)>
For information on configuring the Router options available to the access point using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring Router Settings on page 5-68
.
CLI Reference 8-155
AP7131N>admin(network.router)> set
Description:
Shows the access point route table.
Syntax: set auth dir id key passwd type dgw-iface
Sets the RIP authentication type (none, simple or MD5).
Sets RIP direction (rx, tx or both)
Sets MD5 authetication ID (1-256) for specific index (1-2).
Sets MD5 authetication key (up to 16 characters) for specified inded (1-2).
Sets the password (up to 16 characters) for simple authentication.
Defines the RIP type (off, ripv1, ripv2, or ripv1v2).
Sets the default gateway interface (lan1, lan2, wan or none).
For information on configuring the Router options available to the access point using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring Router Settings on page 5-68
.
8-156 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.router)> add
Description:
Adds user-defined routes.
Syntax: add <dest> <netmask> <gw> <iface> <metric> Adds a route with destination IP address <dest>, IP netmask
<netmask>, destination gateway IP address <gw>, interface
LAN1, LAN2 or WAN <iface>, and metric set <metric> to
(1-65535).
Example: admin(network.router)> add 192.168.3.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.2.1 LAN1 1 admin(network.router)> list
---------------------------------------------------------------------------index destination netmask gateway interface metric
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 192.168.3.0
255.255.255.0
192.168.2.1
lan1 1
For information on configuring the Router options available to the access point using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring Router Settings on page 5-68
.
CLI Reference 8-157
AP7131N>admin(network.router)> delete
Description:
Deletes user-defined routes.
Syntax: delete <idx> all
Deletes the user-defined route <idx> ( 1 20 ) from list.
Deletes all user-defined routes.
Example:
1
2
3 admin(network.router)> list
---------------------------------------------------------------------------index destination netmask gateway interface metric
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
192.168.2.0
192.168.1.0
192.168.0.0
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
192.168.0.1
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
lan1
lan2
lan2
1
0
0 admin(network.router)> delete 2 admin(network.router)> list
-----------------------------------------------------------------index destination netmask gateway interface metric
------------------------------------------------------------------
1 192.168.2.0
255.255.255.0
0.0.0.0
lan1
2 192.168.0.0
255.255.255.0
0.0.0.0
lan1
0
0 admin(network.router)>
For information on configuring the Router options available to the access point using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring Router Settings on page 5-68
.
8-158 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(network.router)> list
Description:
Lists user-defined routes.
Syntax: list Displays a list of user-defined routes.
Example: admin(network.router)> list
2
3
---------------------------------------------------------------------------index destination netmask gateway interface metric
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 192.168.2.0
255.255.255.0
192.168.0.1
lan1 1
192.168.1.0
192.168.0.0
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
lan2
lan1
0
0
For information on configuring the Router options available to the access point using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring Router Settings on page 5-68
.
CLI Reference 8-159
8.4 System Commands
AP7131N>admin(system)>
Description:
Displays the System submenu. The items available under this command are shown below. restart show set arp power-setup aap-setup access cmgr snmp userdb radius ntp logs config fw-update fips-test
/
..
save quit
Restarts the access point.
Shows access point system parameter settings.
Defines access point system parameter settings.
Dispalys the access point’s arp table.
Goes to the Power Settings submenu.
Goes to the Adaptive AP Settings submenu.
Goes to the access point access submenu where access point access methods can be enabled.
Goes the Certificate Manager submenu.
Goes to the SNMP submenu.
Goes to the user database submenu.
Goes to the Radius submenu.
Goes to the Network Time Protocol submenu.
Displays the log file submenu.
Goes to the configuration file update submenu.
Goes to the firmware update submenu.
Goes to the FIPS test submenu.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
8-160 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system)>restart
Description:
Restarts the access point access point.
Syntax: restart Restarts the access point.
Example: admin(system)> restart
********************************WARNING***********************************
** Unsaved configuration changes will be lost when the access point is reset.
** Please be sure to save changes before resetting.
**************************************************************************
Are you sure you want to restart the AP-7131N?? (yes/no):
AP-7131N Boot Firmware Version 4.0.0.0-002GDN
Copyright(c) Motorola 2009. All rights reserved.
Press escape key to run boot firmware ........
Power On Self Test testing ram testing nor flash testing nand flash testing ethernet
: pass
: pass
: pass
: pass
For information on restarting the access point using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring System Settings on page 4-2 .
CLI Reference 8-161
AP7131N>admin(system)>show
Description:
Displays high-level system information helpful to differentiate this access point.
Syntax: show Displays access point system information.
Example: admin(system)> show system name system location admin email address system uptime
: AP-7131N
: Atlanta Field Office
: 0 days 4 hours 41 minutes
AP-7131N firmware version country code ap-mode
: 4.0.2.0-021GDN
: us
: independent serial number : 05224520500336 model : AP-7131N admin(system)>
8-162 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system)>set
Description:
Sets access point system parameters.
Syntax: set name loc email cc dns-relaymode
<name> Sets the access point system name to <name> (1 to 59 characters). The access point does not allow intermediate space characters between characters within
<loc> the system name. For example, “AP7131N sales” must be changed to
“AP7131Nsales” to be a valid system name.
Sets the access point system location to <loc> (0 to 59 characters).
<email> Sets the access point admin email address to <email> (0 to 59 characters).
<code> Sets the access point country code using two letters <code>.
<mode> Enables/disables dns-relay-mode. By default, dns-relay-mode is enabled.
admin(system)> set name phils admin(system)> set loc engineering admin(system)> set email [email protected]
admin(system)> set cc us admin(system)> set dns-relay-mode enable
NOTE This name will appear in the WIPS server when one of the radios is configured as a sensor and the WIPS functionality connects to the WIPS server. The WIPS module only accepts names with up to 20 characters, keep that if intending to use this AP as a sensor.
For information on configuring System Settings using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring System Settings on page 4-2
. Refer to Appendix A for information on the two-character country codes.
CLI Reference 8-163
AP7131N>admin(system)>arp
Description:
Dispalys the access point’s arp table.
Example: admin(system)> arp
IP Address HWtype HWaddress Flags Mask
157.235.92.210 ether 00:11:25:14:61:A8 C
157.235.92.179 ether 00:14:22:F3:D7:39 C
157.235.92.248 ether 00:11:25:B2:09:60 C
157.235.92.180 ether 00:0D:60:D0:06:90 C
157.235.92.3 ether 00:D0:2B:A0:D4:FC C
157.235.92.181 ether 00:15:C5:0C:19:27 C
157.235.92.80 ether 00:11:25:B2:0D:06 C
157.235.92.95 ether 00:14:22:F9:12:AD C
157.235.92.161 ether 00:06:5B:97:BD:6D C
157.235.92.126 ether 00:11:25:B2:29:64 C admin(system)>
Device
8-164 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
8.4.1 Power Setup Commands
AP7131N>admin(system)>power-setup
Description:
Displays the Power Setup submenu.
/
..
show set save quit
Displays the current power setting configuration.
Defines the access point’s power setting configuration.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the current configuration to the access point system flash.
Quits the CLI and exits the current session.
For information on configuring power settings using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring Power Settings on page 4-6
.
AP7131N>admin(system.power-setup)>show
Description:
Displays the access point’s current power configuration.
Syntax: show Displays the access point’s current power configuration.
Example: admin(system.power-setup)> show
Power Mode
Power Status
3af Power Option
3at Power Option
Default Radio
: 3af
: Mid Power
: option
: default
: Radio2 admin(system.power-setup)>
For information on configuring power settings using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring Power Settings on page 4-6
.
CLI Reference 8-165
8-166 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.power-setup)>set
Description:
Sets access point’s power consumption configuration.
Syntax: set mode Sets the power mode to either Auto or 3af. Changing the power mode restarts the AP, for the change to take effect.
power-option Defines the power option.
def-radio Defines the radio receiving access port resource priority (1-Radio1, 2-Radio2).
admin(system.power-setup)> set mode Auto admin(system.power-setup)> set power-option 3af option admin(system.power-setup)> set def-radio 1
For information on configuring power settings using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring Power Settings on page 4-6
..
8.4.2 Adaptive AP Setup Commands
AP7131N>admin(system)>aap-setup
Description:
Displays the Adaptive AP submenu.
show set delete
..
/ save quit
Displays Adaptive AP information.
Defines the Adaptive AP configuration.
Deletes static switch address assignments.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the current configuration to the access point system flash.
Quits the CLI and exits the current session.
.
For an overview of adaptive AP functionality and its implications, see
.
CLI Reference 8-167
8-168 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.aap-setup)>show
Description:
Displays the access point’s Adaptive AP configuration.
Syntax: show Displays the access point’s Adaptive AP configuration.
Example: admin(system.aap-setup)> show
Auto Discovery Mode
Switch Interface
Switch Name
Static IP Port
Static IP Address
IP Address 1
IP Address 2
IP Address 3
IP Address 4
IP Address 5
IP Address 6
IP Address 7
IP Address 8
IP Address 9
IP Address 10
IP Address 11
IP Address 12
: disable
: lan1
: greg
: 24576
:
: 0.0.0.0
: 0.0.0.0
: 0.0.0.0
: 0.0.0.0
: 0.0.0.0
: 0.0.0.0
: 0.0.0.0
: 0.0.0.0
: 0.0.0.0
: 0.0.0.0
: 0.0.0.0
: 0.0.0.0
Tunnel to Switch
AC Keepalive
Load Balancing
Current Switch
AP Adoption State
: disable
: 5
: enable
: 157.235.22.11
: AAP not adopted admin(system.aap-setup)>
.
For an overview of adaptive AP functionality and its implications, see
.
AP7131N>admin(system.aap-setup)>set
Description:
Sets access point’s Adaptive AP configuration.
Syntax: set auto-discovery Sets the switch auto-discovery mode (enable/disable).
ipadr Defines the switch IP address used.
name port
Defines the switch name for DNS lookups (up to 127 characters).
Sets the port.
passphrase Defines the pass phrase or key for switch connection.
tunnel-to-switch Enables/disables the tunnel between switch and access point.
ac-keepalive Defines the keepalive interval.
load-balancing Enables or disables AAP load balancing.
admin(system.aap-setup)> set auto-discovery enable admin(system.aap-setup)> set ipadr 192.235.111.10
admin(system.aap-setup)> set port 1812 admin(system.aap-setup)> set passphrase mudskipper admin(system.aap-setup)> set load-balancing enable
Example: admin(system.aap-setup)>set ipadr 1 ?
admin(system.aap-setup)>set name symbol admin(system.aap-setup)>
.
For an overview of adaptive AP functionality and its implications, see
.
CLI Reference 8-169
8-170 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.aap-setup)>delete
Description:
Deletes static switch address assignments.
Syntax: delete <idx>
<all>
Deletes static switch address assignments by selected index.
Deletes all assignments.
Example: admin(system.aap-setup)> delete 1 admin(system.aap-setup)>
For information on configuring Adaptive AP using the applet (GUI), see
Adaptive AP Setup on page 4-11 .
For an overview of adaptive AP functionality and its implications, see
.
8.4.3 System Access Commands
AP7131N>admin(system)>access
Description:
Displays the access point access submenu.
show set rmlock
..
/ save quit
Displays access point system access capabilities.
Goes to the access point system access submenu.
Removes AP login locks
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the current configuration to the access point system flash.
Quits the CLI and exits the current session.
CLI Reference 8-171
8-172 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.access)>set
Description:
Defines the permissions to access the access point applet, CLI, SNMP as well as defining their timeout values.
Syntax: set applet app-timeout ssh auth-timout inactive-timeout console-timeout rlogin snmp admin-auth server slan swan
Enables/disables applet HTTPS access parameters from LAN.
Enables/disables applet HTTPS access parameters from WAN.
<minutes> Sets the applet timeout. Default is 300 Mins.
Sets the CLI SSH access parameters.
<seconds> Disables the radio interface if no data activity is detected after the interval defined. Default is 120 seconds.
<minutes> Inactivity interval resulting in the AP terminating its connection.
Default is 120 minutes.
<seconds> Sets the maximum inactivity interval allowed for console session. Set the interval between 60-600 seconds.
Defines the number of times a remote login failure allowed for SSH/GUI.
Sets the threshold between 1-3.
Sets SNMP access parameters for the AP’s LAN and WAN ports.
<ip>
Designates a Radius server is used in the authentication verification.
Specifies the IP address the Remote Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) server.
secret mode msg
<pw>
<mode>
Defines the shared secret password for RADIUS server authentication
(upto 31 characters).
Enables/disables the access point message mode.
Defines the access point login message text (up to 1024 characters).
Example: admin(system.access)>set applet slan 1 enable
CliAuditLog - User:'admin' Command:'set applet slan 1 enable' Status:'success'
From:'Ssh-172.16.10.10' MU_Mac:'NULL' admin(system.access)> admin(system.access)>set rlogin 1
CliAuditLog - User:'admin' Command:'set rlogin 1' Status:'success' From:'Ssh-
172.16.10.10' MU_Mac:'NULL' admin(system.access)> admin(system.access)>set console-timeout 550
CliAuditLog - User:'admin' Command:'set console-timeout 550' Status:'success'
From:'Ssh-172.16.10.10' MU_Mac:'NULL' admin(system.access)>
For information on configuring access point access settings using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring Data Access on page 4-14 .
CLI Reference 8-173
AP7131N>admin(system.access)>show
Description:
Displays the current access point access permissions and timeout values.
Syntax: show Shows all of the current system access settings for the access point..
Example: admin(system.access)> show
Warning: This will display secure information,
Do you want to continue? (n/y?)y
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
From LAN1 From LAN2 From WAN
------------------------------------------------------------------------------applet https access enable enable enable cli ssh access enable enable enable snmp access enable enable enable https timeout (in mins) : 3 ssh server authentication timeout (in secs): 120 ssh server inactivity timeout (in secs): 500 remote login failure threshold (SSH/GUI): 1 console inactivity timeout (in secs): 550 admin authentication mode : local
Login Message : This is a User Configured Message
Related Commands: set Defines the access point system access capabilities and timeout values.
For information on configuring access point access settings using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring Data Access on page 4-14 .
8-174 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.access)>rmlock
Description:
Removes AP login locks. The lock can be removed through console management interface (local RS-232 port) only.
Syntax: rmlock Removes login locks of access point.
Example: admin(system.access)>rmlock ssh admin(system.access)>
8.4.4 System Certificate Management Commands
AP7131N>admin(system)>cmgr
Description:
Displays the Certificate Manager submenu. The items available under this command include: genreq delself loadself listself loadca delca listca showreq
/
..
delprivkey listprivkey expcert impcert save quit
Generates a Certificate Request.
Deletes a Self Certificate.
Loads a Self Certificate signed by CA.
Lists the self certificate loaded.
Loads trusted certificate from CA.
Deletes the trusted certificate.
Lists the trusted certificate loaded.
Displays a certificate request in PEM format.
Deletes the private key.
Lists names of private keys.
Exports the certificaqte file.
Imports the certificate file.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
CLI Reference 8-175
8-176 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.cmgr)> genreq
Description:
Generates a certificate request.
Syntax: genreq <IDname> <Subject>
. . . [-p <PostCode>]
[-ou <OrgUnit>]
[-cc <CCode>]
[-on <OrgName>]
[-e <Email>]
[-cn <City>]
[-d <Domain>]
Generates a self-certificate request for a Certification Authority (CA), where:
[-st <State>]
[-i <IP>]
<IDname>
<Subject>
-ou <Department>
-on <OrgName>
-cn <City>
-st <State>
-p <PostCode>
-cc <CCode>
-e <Email>
-d <Domain>
-i <IP>
-k <KSize>
Private key ID Name (1- 7 chars) Mandatory
Subject Name (1-49 chars) Mandatory
Organization Unit (1-49 chars) Optional
Organization Name (1-49 chars) Optional
City Name of Organization (1-49 chars) Optional
State Name (1-49 chars) Optional
Postal code (1-9 digits) Optional
Country code (2 chars) Optional
E-mail Address (1-49 chars) Optional
Domain Name (1-49 chars) Optional
IP Address (a.b.c.d) Optional
Key size in bits 2048 bits Optional
. . .
[-sa <SAlgo>]
Note: The parameters in [square brackets] are optional. Check with the CA to determine what fields are necessary. For example, most CAs require an email address and an IP address, but not the address of the organization.
Example: admin(system.cmgr)> genreq MyCert2 MySubject -ou MyDept -on MyCompany
Please wait. It may take some time...
Generating the certificate request
Retreiving the certificate request
The certificate request is
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE REQUEST-----
MIHzMIGeAgEAMDkxEjAQBgNVBAoTCU15Q29tcGFueTEPMA0GA1UECxMGTXlEZXB0
MRIwEAYDVQQDEwlNeVN1YmplY3QwXDANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQEFAANLADBIAkEAtKcX plKFCFAJymTFX71yuxY1fdS7UEhKjBsH7pdqnJnsASK6ZQGAqerjpKScWV1mzYn4
1q2+mgGnCvaZUlIo7wIDAQABoAAwDQYJKoZIhvcNAQEEBQADQQCClQ5LHdbG/C1f
Bj8AszttSo/bA4dcX3vHvhhJcmuuWO9LHS2imPA3xhX/d6+Q1SMbs+tG4RP0lRSr iWDyuvwx
-----END CERTIFICATE REQUEST-----
For information on configuring certificate management settings using the applet (GUI), see
Managing Certificate Authority (CA)
.
CLI Reference 8-177
AP7131N>admin(system.cmgr)> delself
Description: )
Deletes a self certificate.
Syntax: delself <IDname> Deletes the self certificate named <IDname>.
Example: admin(system.cmgr)> delself MyCert2
For information on configuring self certificate settings using the applet (GUI), see
Creating Self Certificates on page 4-20
.
8-178 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.cmgr)> loadself
Description:
Loads a self certificate signed by the Certificate Authority.
Syntax: loadself <IDname> Load the self certificate signed by the CA with name <IDname>.
Example: admin(system.cmgr)>loadself 1
Currently Only certificates in PEM format can be uploaded.
Enter 'Ctrl C' to abort. Paste the certificate:
For information on configuring self certificate settings using the applet (GUI), see
Creating Self Certificates on page 4-20
.
CLI Reference 8-179
AP7131N>admin(system.cmgr)> listself
Description:
Lists the loaded self certificates.
Syntax: listself Lists all self certificates that are loaded.
Example: admin(system.cmgr)>listself
Self Certificate List: admin(system.cmgr)>
For information on configuring self certificate settings using the applet (GUI), see
Creating Self Certificates on page 4-20
.
8-180 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.cmgr)> loadca
Description:
Loads a trusted certificate from the Certificate Authority.
Syntax: loadca Loads the trusted certificate (in PEM format only) that is pasted into the command line.
Example: admin(system.cmgr)>loadca
Currently Only certificates in PEM format can be uploaded.
Enter 'Ctrl C' to abort. Paste the certificate:
.
CLI Reference 8-181
AP7131N>admin(system.cmgr)> delca
Description:
Deletes a trusted certificate.
Syntax: delca <IDname> Deletes the trusted certificate.
.
8-182 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.cmgr)> listca
Description:
Lists the loaded trusted certificate.
Syntax: listca Lists the loaded trusted certificates.
.
CLI Reference 8-183
AP7131N>admin(system.cmgr)> showreq
Description:
Displays a certificate request in PEM format.
Syntax: showreq <IDname> Displays a certificate request named <IDname> generated from the genreq command.
.
8-184 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.cmgr)> delprivkey
Description:
Deletes a private key.
Syntax: delprivkey <IDname> Deletes private key named <IDname>.
CLI Reference 8-185
AP7131N>admin(system.cmgr)> listprivkey
Description:
Lists the names of private keys.
Syntax: listprivkey Lists all private keys and displays their certificate associations.
.
8-186 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.cmgr)> expcert
Description:
Exports the certificate file to a user defined location.
Syntax: expcert Exports the access point’s CA or Self certificate file.
To export certificate information from an AP-7131N model access point: admin(system.cmgr)> expcert ?
<type> <file name> <cr> : type: sftp
: file name: Certificate file name
: Server options for this file are the same
: as that for the configuration file admin(system.cmgr)> expcert sftp AP-71x1certs.txt
To configue certificate management settings while conducting a firmware update or restoring a factory default configuratrion: admin(system.cmgr)> ?
genreq delself loadself listself loadca delca listca showreq delprivkey listprivkey expcert impcert
(..)
/ save quit
: generate a certificate request
: deletes a signed certificate
: loads a signed certficiate signed by the CA
: lists the loaded signed self certificate
: loads the root CA certificate
: deletes the root CA certificate
: lists the loaded root CA certificate
: displays certificate request in PEM format
: deletes the private key
: lists the names of the private keys
: exports the target certficate file
: imports the target certficate file
: goes to the parent menu
: goes to the root menu
: saves the configuration to system flash
: quits the CLI session
.
CLI Reference 8-187
AP7131N>admin(system.cmgr)> impcert
Description:
Imports the target certificate file.
Syntax: impcert Imports the target certificate file.
To import certificate information from an AP-7131N model access point: admin(system.cmgr)> impcert ?
<type> <file name> <cr> : type: sftp
: file name: Certificate file name
: Server options for this file are the same
: as that for the configuration file admin(system.cmgr)> impcert sftp AP-7131Ncerts.txt
To configure certificate management settings while conducting a firmware update or restoring a factory default configuratrion: admin(system.cmgr)> ?
genreq delself loadself listself loadca delca listca showreq delprivkey listprivkey expcert impcert
(..)
/ save quit
: generate a certificate request
: deletes a signed certificate
: loads a signed certficiate signed by the CA
: lists the loaded signed self certificate
: loads the root CA certificate
: deletes the root CA certificate
: lists the loaded root CA certificate
: displays certificate request in PEM format
: deletes the private key
: lists the names of the private keys
: exports the target certficate file
: imports the target certficate file
: goes to the parent menu
: goes to the root menu
: saves the configuration to system flash
: quits the CLI session
.
8-188 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
8.4.5 System SNMP Commands
AP7131N>admin(system)> snmp
Description:
Displays the SNMP submenu. The items available under this command are shown below.
/
..
access traps save quit
Goes to the SNMP access submenu.
Goes to the SNMP traps submenu.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
8.4.5.1 System SNMP Access Commands
AP7131N>admin(system.snmp.access)
Description:
Displays the SNMP Access menu. The items available under this command are shown below. show add delete list
/
..
save quit
Shows SNMP v3 engine ID.
Adds SNMP access entries.
Deletes SNMP access entries.
Lists SNMP access entries.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
CLI Reference 8-189
8-190 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.snmp.access)> show
Description:
Shows the SNMP v3 engine ID.
Syntax: show eid Shows the SNMP v3 Engine ID.
Example: admin(system.snmp.access)> show eid
AP-7131N snmp v3 engine id : 000001846B8B4567F871AC68 admin(system.snmp.access)>
CLI Reference 8-191
AP7131N>admin(system.snmp.access)> add
Description:
Adds SNMP access entries for specific v1v2 and v3 user definitions.
Syntax: add acl v3
<ip1> <ip2> Adds an entry to the SNMP access control list with <ip1> as the starting IP address and <ip2> and as the ending IP address.
<user> <access> <oid> <sec>
<auth> <pass1> <priv> <pass2>
: user - username 1 to 31 characters
: access - read/write access - (ro,rw)
: oid - string 1 to 127 chars - E.g. 1.3.6.1
: sec - security - (,auth/priv)
: auth - algorithm - (,sha1)
: (required only if sec is - auth,auth/priv)
: pass1 - auth password - 8 to 31 chars
: (required only if sec is 'auth,auth/priv')
: priv - algorithm - ( aes)
: (required only if sec is 'auth/priv')
: pass2 - privacy password - 8 to 31 chars
: (required only if sec is 'auth/priv')
The following parameters must be specified if <sec> is not none :
Authentication type <auth> set to sha1
Authentication password <pass1> (8 to 31 chars)
The following parameters must be specified if <sec> is set to auth/priv :
Privacy algorithm set to aes
Privacy password <pass2> (8 to 31 chars)
8-192 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.snmp.access)> delete
Description:
Deletes SNMP access entries for v3 user definitions.
Syntax: delete acl v3
<idx> all
<idx> all
Deletes entry <idx> (1-10) from the access control list.
Deletes all entries from the access control list.
Deletes entry <idx> (1-10) from the v3 user definition list.
Deletes all entries from the v3 user definition list.
Example: admin(system.snmp.access)> list acl
----------------------------------------------------------------------------- index start ip end ip
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 209.236.24.1
209.236.24.46 admin(system.snmp.access)> delete acl all admin(system.snmp.access)> list acl
----------------------------------------------------------------------------- index start ip end ip
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
CLI Reference 8-193
AP7131N>admin(system.snmp.access)> list
Description:
Lists SNMP access entries.
Syntax: list acl v3 <idx> all
Lists SNMP access control list entries.
Lists SNMP v3 user definition by index <idx> (1-10).
Lists all SNMP v3 user definitions.
Example: admin(system.snmp.access)> list acl
---------------------------------------------------------------- index start ip end ip
----------------------------------------------------------------
1 209.236.24.1
209.236.24.46 admin(system.snmp.access)>list v3 1
Warning: This will display secure information.
Do you want to continue [n/y]?y
index : 1 username : user access permission : read/write object identifier : 1.3.6.1
security level : auth/priv auth algorithm : sha1 auth password : ******** privacy algorithm : aes privacy password : ******** admin(system.snmp.access)>
8-194 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
8.4.5.2 System SNMP Traps Commands
AP7131N>admin(system.snmp.traps)
Description:
Displays the SNMP traps submenu. The items available under this command are shown below. show set add delete list
..
/ save quit
Shows SNMP trap parameters.
Sets SNMP trap parameters.
Adds SNMP trap entries.
Deletes SNMP trap entries.
Lists SNMP trap entries.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
AP7131N>admin(system.snmp.traps)> show
Description:
Shows SNMP trap parameters.
Syntax: show trap rate-trap
Shows SNMP trap parameter settings.
Shows SNMP rate-trap parameter settings.
Example: admin(system.snmp.traps)> show trap
SNMP MU Traps mu associated mu unassociated mu denied association mu denied authentication
SNMP Traps snmp authentication failure snmp acl violation
: enable
: disable
: disable
: disable
: disable
: disable
SNMP Network Traps physical port status change : enable denial of service : enable denial of service trap rate limit : 10 seconds
SNMP System Traps system cold start system config changed rogue ap detection ap radar detection wpa counter measure mu hotspot status vlan lan monitor
DynDNS Update
: disable
: disable
: disable
: disable
: disable
: disable
: disable
: disable
: enable
For information on configuring SNMP traps using the applet (GUI), see
Enabling SNMP Traps on page 4-34
.
CLI Reference 8-195
8-196 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.snmp.traps)> set
Description:
Sets SNMP trap parameters.
Syntax: set mu-assoc mu-unassoc mu-deny-assoc mu-deny-auth snmp-auth snmp-acl dos-attack interval cold cfg rogue-ap ap-radar enable / disable enable / disable enable / disable enable / disable enable / disable enable / disable enable / disable
<rate> enable / disable enable / disable enable / disable enable / disable
Enables/disables the MU associated trap.
Enables/disables the MU unassociated trap.
Enables/disables the MU association denied trap.
Enables/disables the MU authentication denied trap.
Enables/disables the authentication failure trap.
Enables/disables the SNMP ACL violation trap.
Enables/disables the denial of service trap.
Sets denial of service trap interval.
Enables/disables the system cold start trap.
Enables/disables a configuration changes trap.
Enables/disables a trap when a rogue-ap is detected.
Enables/disables the AP Radar Detection trap.
wpa-counter hotspot-mu-status vlan lan-monitor rate min-pkt enable / disable enable / disable enable / disable enable / disable
<rate>
<pkt> dyndns-update enable / disable all enable / disable
Enables/disables the WPA counter measure trap.
Enables/disables the hotspot mu status trap.
Enables/disables VLAN traps.
Enables/disables LAN monitor traps.
<scope> <value> Sets the particular <rate> to monitor to <value> given the indicated <scope>. See table below for information on the possible values for <rate>, <scope>, and <value>.
Sets the minimum number of packets required for rate traps to fire ( 1 65535 ).
Enables/disables dynamic DNS update trap.
Enables/disables each trap.
For information on configuring SNMP traps using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring Specific SNMP Traps on page 4-36 .
CLI Reference 8-197
AP7131N>admin(system.snmp.traps)> add
Description:
Adds SNMP trap entries.
Syntax: add v3 <ip> <user> <sec> <auth> <pass1> <priv> <pass2>
Adds an entry to the SNMP v3 access list with the destination IP address set to <ip>, the destination UDP port is set to
<port>, the username set to <user> (1 to 31 characters), and the authentication type set to one of auth , or auth/priv .
The following parameters must be specified if <sec> is not none :
Authentication type <auth> set to sha1
Authentication password <pass1> (8 to 31 chars)
The following parameters must be specified if <sec> is set to auth/priv :
Privacy algorithm set to r aes
Privacy password <pass2> (8 to 31 chars)
Example: admin(system.snmp.traps)>add v3 192.168.1.70 snmpv3user1 auth/priv sha1 symbol123 aes symbol123 admin(system.snmp.traps)>list v3 all
Warning: This will display secure information.
Do you want to continue [n/y]?y
index : 1 destination ip : 192.168.1.70
destination port : 162 username : snmpv3user1 security level : auth/priv auth algorithm : sha1 auth password : ******** privacy algorithm : aes
privacy password : ********
For information on configuring SNMP traps using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring SNMP RF Trap Thresholds on page 4-39
.
8-198 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.snmp.traps)> delete
Description:
Deletes SNMP trap entries.
Syntax: delete v3 <idx> all
Deletes entry <idx> from the v3 access control list.
Deletes all entries from the v3 access control list.
Example: admin(system.snmp.traps)> delete v3 all
For information on configuring SNMP traps using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring SNMP Settings on page 4-27
.
CLI Reference 8-199
AP7131N>admin(system.snmp.traps)> list
Description:
Lists SNMP trap entries.
Syntax: ist v3 <idx> all
Lists SNMP v3 access entry <idx 1-10> .
Lists all SNMP v3 access entries.
Example: admin(system.snmp.traps)> add v3 201.232.24.33 555 BigBoss nonesha1 admin(system.snmp.traps)> list v3 all index destination ip destination port username security level auth algorithm auth password privacy algorithm privacy password
: 1
: 201.232.24.33
: 555
: BigBoss
: none
: sha1
: ********
: aes
: ********
For information on configuring SNMP traps using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring SNMP RF Trap Thresholds on page 4-39
.
8-200 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
8.4.6 System User Database Commands
AP7131N>admin(system)> userdb
Description:
Goes to the user database submenu.
Syntax: user group save
/
..
Goes to the user submenu.
Goes to the group submenu.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
For information on configuring User Database permissions using the applet (GUI), see
Defining User Access Permissions by Group on page
CLI Reference 8-201
8.4.5.1 Adding and Removing Users from the User Database
AP7131N>admin(system.userdb)> user
Description:
Adds and remvoves users from the user database and defines user passwords.
Syntax:
Wireless Users add delete clearall set show
..
/ save
Adds a new user.
Deletes a new user.
Removes all existing user IDs from the system.
Sets a password for a user.
Displays the current user database configuration.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Management
Users mgmt-user-add Adds a new management user mgmt-delete Deletes a management user Id mgmt-clearall Removes all management user Ids except admin user mgmt-set Sets the password for management user
For information on configuring User Database permissions using the applet (GUI), see
Defining User Access Permissions by Group on page
8-202 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.userdb.user)> add
Description:
Adds a new user to the user database.
Syntax: add Adds a new user ID <id> and password <pw> string (8-19 characters) to the user database.
Example: admin(system.userdb.user> add george password admin(system.userdb.user>
For information on configuring User Database permissions using the applet (GUI), see
Defining User Access Permissions by Group on page
CLI Reference 8-203
AP7131N>admin(system.userdb.user)> delete
Description:
Removes a new user to the user database.
Syntax: delete Removes a user ID <id> and password <pw> string from the user database.
Example: admin(system.userdb.user> delete george admin(system.userdb.user>
For information on configuring User Database permissions using the applet (GUI), see
Defining User Access Permissions by Group on page
8-204 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.userdb.user)>clearall
Description:
Removes all existing user IDs from the system.
Syntax: clearall Removes all existing user IDs from the system.
Example: admin(system.userdb.user> clearall admin(system.userdb.user>
For information on configuring User Database permissions using the applet (GUI), see
Defining User Access Permissions by Group on page
CLI Reference 8-205
AP7131N>admin(system.userdb.user)>set
Description:
Sets a password for a user.
Syntax: set <user> <pw> Sets user <id> and password <pw> string (8-19 characters) for a specific user.
Example: admin(system.userdb.user> set george password admin(system.userdb.user>
For information on configuring User Database permissions using the applet (GUI), see
Defining User Access Permissions by Group on page
8-206 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.userdb.user)>mgmt-add
Description:
Adds a new management user.
Syntax: mgmt-add <user> <pw> Creates a user <id> and password <pw> string (8-19 characters) for a new management user.
Example: admin(system.userdb.user> mgmt-add John Motorola123 admin(system.userdb.user>
AP7131N>admin(system.userdb.user)>mgmt-delete
Description:
Deletes a management user identity.
Syntax: mgmt-delete <user> Deletes a management user.
Example: admin(system.userdb.user> mgmt-delete george admin(system.userdb.user>
CLI Reference 8-207
8-208 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.userdb.user)>mgmt-clearall
Description:
Removes all the management user accounts except admin account.
Syntax: mgmt-clearall Removes all the management user accounts except admin account
Example: admin(system.userdb.user> mgmt-clearall admin(system.userdb.user>
CLI Reference 8-209
AP7131N>admin(system.userdb.user)>mgmt-set
Description:
Sets the password for management user.
Syntax: mgmt-set <user> <pw> Sets a user <id> and password <pw> string (8-19 characters) for a specific management user.
Example: admin(system.userdb.user> mgmt-set john motorola123 admin(system.userdb.user>
8-210 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.userdb.user)>show
Description:
Displays existing user details.
Syntax: show mgmt-users users groups
Displays existing management users.
Displays configured user IDs for a group.
Displays configured groups.
Example: admin(system.userdb.user> show mgmt-users
Warning: This will display secure information.
Do you want to continue [n/y]?y
List of User Ids : John admin(system.userdb.user>
CLI Reference 8-211
8.4.5.2 Adding and Removing Groups from the User Database
AP7131N>admin(system.userdb)> group
Description:
Adds and remvoves groups from the user database.
Syntax: create delete clearall add remove show
/ save
..
Creates a group name.
Deletes a group name.
Removes all existing group names from the system.
Adds a user to an existing group.
Removes a user from an existing group.
Displays existing groups.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Goes to the parent menu.
Moves back to root menu.
For information on configuring User Database permissions using the applet (GUI), see
Defining User Access Permissions by Group on page
8-212 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.userdb.group> create
Description:
Creates a group name. Once defined, users can be added to the group.
Syntax: create Creates a group name string. Once defined, users can be added to the group.
Example: admin(system.userdb.group> create 2 admin(system.userdb.group>
For information on configuring User Database permissions using the applet (GUI), see
Defining User Access Permissions by Group on page
CLI Reference 8-213
AP7131N>admin(system.userdb.group> delete
Description:
Deletes an existing group.
Syntax: delete Deletes an existing group name string.
Example: admin(system.userdb.group> delete 2 admin(system.userdb.group>
For information on configuring User Database permissions using the applet (GUI), see
Defining User Access Permissions by Group on page
8-214 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.userdb.group> clearall
Description:
Removes all existing group names from the system.
Syntax: clearall Removes all existing group names from the system.
Example: admin(system.userdb.group> clearall admin(system.userdb.group>
For information on configuring User Database permissions using the applet (GUI), see
Defining User Access Permissions by Group on page
CLI Reference 8-215
AP7131N>admin(system.userdb.group> add
Description:
Adds a user to an existing group.
Syntax: add <userid> <group> Adds a user <userid> to an existing group <group>.
Example: admin(system.userdb.group> add lucy group x admin(system.userdb.group>
For information on configuring User Database permissions using the applet (GUI), see
Defining User Access Permissions by Group on page
8-216 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.userdb.group> remove
Description:
Removes a user from an existing group.
Syntax: remove <userid> <group> Removes a user <userid> from an existing group<group> .
Example: admin(system.userdb.group> remove lucy group x admin(system.userdb.group>
For information on configuring User Database permissions using the applet (GUI), see
Defining User Access Permissions by Group on page
CLI Reference 8-217
AP7131N>admin(system.userdb.group> show
Description:
Displays existing groups.
Syntax: show users groups
Displays existing groups and users,
Displays configured user IDs for a group.
Displays configured groups.
Example: admin(system.userdb.group> show groups
Warning: This will display secure information,
Do you want to continue? (n/y?)y
List of Group Names
: engineering
: marketing
: demo room admin(system.userdb.group>
For information on configuring User Database permissions using the applet (GUI), see
Defining User Access Permissions by Group on page
8-218 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
8.4.7 System Radius Commands
AP7131N>admin(system)> radius
Description:
Goes to the Radius system submenu.
Syntax: eap policy ldap proxy client set
/ show save quit
..
Goes to the EAP submenu.
Goes to the access policy submenu.
Goes to the LDAP submenu.
Goes to the proxy submenu.
Goes to the client submenu.
Sets Radius parameters.
Displays Radius parameters.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
For information on configuring Radius using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring User Authentication on page 6-52 .
AP7131N>admin(system.radius)> set/show
Description:
Sets or displays the Radius user database.
Syntax: set show all
Sets the Radius user database.
Displays the Radius user database.
Example: admin(system.radius)> set database local admin(system.radius)> show all
Database : local admin(system.radius)>
For information on configuring Radius using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring User Authentication on page 6-52 .
CLI Reference 8-219
8-220 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
8.4.6.1 AP7131N>admin(system.radius)> eap
Description:
Goes to the EAP submenu.
Syntax: peap ttls import set show save
/ quit
..
Goes to the Peap submenu.
Goes to the TTLS submenu.
Imports the requested EAP certificates.
Defines EAP parameters.
Displays the EAP configuration.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
.
CLI Reference 8-221
AP7131N>admin(system.radius.eap)> peap
Description:
Goes to the Peap submenu.
Syntax:
/
..
set show save quit
Defines Peap parameters.
Displays the Peap configuration.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
For information on configuring PEAP Radius using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring User Authentication on page 6-52
.
8-222 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.radius.eap.peap> set/show
Description:
Defines and displays Peap parameters
Syntax: set show
Sets the Peap authentication <type>.
Displays the Peap authentication type.
Example: admin(system.radius.eap.peap)> set auth gtc admin(system.radius.eap.peap)> show
PEAP Auth Type : gtc
CLI Reference 8-223
AP7131N>admin(system.radius.eap)> ttls
Description:
Goes to the TTLS submenu.
Syntax:
/
..
set show save quit
Defines TTLS parameters.
Displays the TTLS configuration.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
.
8-224 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.radius.eap.ttls> set/show
Description:
Defines and displays TTLS parameters
Syntax: set show
Sets the default TTLS authentication <type>.
Displays the TTLS authentication <type>.
Example: admin(system.radius.eap.ttls)> set auth pap admin(system.radius.eap.ttls)> show
TTLS Auth Type : pap
.
CLI Reference 8-225
8.4.6.2 AP7131N>admin(system.radius)> policy
Description:
Goes to the access policy submenu.
Syntax: set Sets a group’s WLAN access policy.
access-time Goes to the time based login submenu.
show save
Displays the group’s access policy.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
/ quit
..
Quits the CLI.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
.
8-226 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.radius.policy> set
Description:
Defines the group’s WLAN access policy.
Syntax: set <group name>
<wlan name>
Defines the group’s <group name> WLAN access policy (defined as a string) delimited by a space.
Example: admin(system.radius.policy)> set engineering 16 admin(system.radius.policy)>
.
CLI Reference 8-227
AP7131N>admin(system.radius.policy> access-time
Description: set
Goes to the time-based login submenu.
Syntax: set
/
..
show save quit
<group>
<access-time>
Defines a target group’s access time permissions. Access time is in Day DDDD-DDDD format.
Displays the group’s access time rule.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Example: admin(system.radius.policy.access-time)> show
Warning: This will display secure information,
Do you want to continue? (n/y?)y
List of Access Policies
1
2
10
12
: Tue0830-2200, We2000-2300, Th1100-1930
: Any0000-2359
: Any0000-2359
: Any0000-2359
Context Command Description system>radius>policy>access-time set start-time <group> <value> group = Valid group name..
value = 4 digit value representing HHMM
(0000-2359 allowed).
system>radius>policy>access-time set end-time <group> <value> group = Valid group name..
value = 4 digit value representing HHMM
(0000-2359 allowed).
The end time should be greater than the start time.
system>radius>policy>access-time set access-days <group>
<day-selector-keyword> group = Valid group name.
day-selector-keyword = The allowed values are:
Mo, Tu, We, Th, Fr, Sa, Su,
Weekdays, Weekends, all.
.
8-228 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.radius.policy> show
Description:
Displays a group’s access policy.
Syntax: show Displays a group’s access policy.
Example: admin(system.radius.policy)> show
Warning: This will display secure information,
Do you want to continue? (n/y?)y
List of Access Policies engineering marketing demo room test demo admin(system.radius.policy)>
: 16
: 10
: 3
: No Wlans
CLI Reference 8-229
8.4.6.3 AP7131N>admin(system.radius)> ldap
Description:
Goes to the LDAP submenu.
Syntax:
/
..
set Defines the LDAP parameters.
show all Displays existing LDAP parameters.
save quit
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
For information on configuring a Radius LDAP server using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring LDAP Authentication on page 6-57
.
8-230 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.radius.ldap)> set
Description:
Defines the LDAP parameters.
Syntax: set ipadr binddn basedn passwd login
Defines the LDAP parameters.
Sets LDAP IP address.
Sets LDAP bind distinguished name.
Sets LDAP base distinguished name.
Sets LDAP server password. The password length must be 8-16 characters.
Sets LDAP login attribute.
pass_attr Sets LDAP password attribute.
groupname Sets LDAP group name attribute.
filter Sets LDAP group membership filter. membership Sets LDAP group membership attribute.
Example: admin(system.radius.ldap)> set ipadr 157.235.121.12
admin(system.radius.ldap)> set binddn 123 admin(system.radius.ldap)> set basedn 123 admin(system.radius.ldap)> set passwd mudskipper admin(system.radius.ldap)> set login muddy admin(system.radius.ldap)> set pass_attr 123 admin(system.radius.ldap)> set groupname WLANgroup admin(system.radius.ldap)> set filter 123 admin(system.radius.ldap)> set membership radiusGroupName admin(system.radius.ldap)>
For information on configuring a Radius LDAP server using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring LDAP Authentication on page 6-57
.
CLI Reference 8-231
AP7131N>admin(system.radius.ldap)> show all
Description:
Displays existing LDAP parameters.
Syntax: show all Displays existing LDAP parameters.
Example: admin(system.radius.ldap)> show all
Warning: This will display secure information,
Do you want to continue? (n/y?)y
LDAP Server IP
LDAP Server Port
LDAP Bind DN
LDAP Base DN
LDAP Login Attribute
LDAP Password attribute
LDAP Group Name Attribue
:
: 389
: cn=manager, o=radius
:
:
:
:
0.0.0.0
o=radius
(uid=%{Stripped-User-Name:-%{User-Name}}) userPassword
Wlangroup
LDAP Group Membership Filter : (|(&(objectClass=GroupOfNames)(member=%{LdapobjectClass=GroupOfUniqueNames)(uniquemember=%{Ldap-UserDn})))
LDAP Group Membership Attribute : radiusGroupName admin(system.radius.ldap)>
For information on configuring a Radius LDAP server using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring LDAP Authentication on page 6-57
.
8-232 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
8.4.6.4 AP7131N>admin(system.radius)> proxy
Description:
Goes to the Radius proxy server submenu.
Syntax: add delete clearall set show save
/ quit
..
Adds a proxy realm.
Deletes a proxy realm.
Removes all proxy server records.
Sets proxy server parameters.
Displays current Radius proxy server parameters.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
CLI Reference 8-233
AP7131N>admin(system.radius.proxy)> add
Description:
Adds a proxy.
Syntax: add name ip1 sec
Adds a proxy realm.
<name> Realm name.
<ip1>
<sec>
Authentication server IP address. The default port is set to 1812.
Shared secret password.
Example: admin(system.radius.proxy)> add lancelot 157.235.241.22 1812 muddy admin(system.radius.proxy)>
8-234 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.radius.proxy)> delete
Description:
Adds a proxy.
Syntax: delete <name> Deletes a realm name.
Example: admin(system.radius.proxy)> delete lancelot admin(system.radius.proxy)>
CLI Reference 8-235
AP7131N>admin(system.radius.proxy)> clearall
Description:
Removes all proxy server records from the system.
Syntax: clearall Removes all proxy server records from the system.
Example: admin(system.radius.proxy)> clearall admin(system.radius.proxy)>
8-236 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.radius.proxy)> set
Description:
Sets Radius proxy server parameters.
Syntax: set delay count
Sets Radius proxy server parameters.
Defines retry delay time (in seconds) for the proxy server. The minimum value is 5 and maximum value is 10.
Defines retry count value for the proxy server. The minimum value is 3 and maximum value is 6.
Example: admin(system.radius.proxy)> set delay 10 admin(system.radius.proxy)> set count 5 admin(system.radius.proxy)>
CLI Reference 8-237
8.4.6.5 AP7131N>admin(system.radius)> client
Description:
Goes to the Radius client submenu.
Syntax: add delete show save
/ quit
..
Adds a Radius client to list of available clients.
Deletes a Radius client from list of available clients.
Displays a list of configured clients.
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
For information on configuring Radius client values using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring the Radius Server on page 6-52 .
8-238 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.radius.client> add
Description:
Adds a Radius client to those available to the Radius server.
Syntax: add ip mask secret
<ip>
<ip1>
<sec>
Adds a proxy.
Client’s IP address.
Network mask address of the client.
Shared secret password. The password length must be 8-16 characters.
Example: admin(system.radius.client)> add 157.235.132.11 255.255.255.225 muddy admin(system.radius.client)>
For information on configuring Radius client values using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring the Radius Server on page 6-52 .
CLI Reference 8-239
AP7131N>admin(system.radius.client> delete
Description:
Removes a specified Radius client from those available to the Radius server.
Syntax: delete ipadr Removes a specified Radius client <ipadr> from those available to the Radius server
Example: admin(system.radius.client)> delete 157.235.132.11
admin(system.radius.client)>
For information on configuring Radius client values using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring the Radius Server on page 6-52 .
8-240 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.radius.client> show
Description:
Displays a list of configured Radius clients.
Syntax: show Removes a specified Radius client from those available to the Radius server.
Example: admin(system.radius.client)> show
Warning: This will display secure information,
Do you want to continue? (n/y?)y
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Idx Subnet/Host Netmask SharedSecret
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 157.235.132.11
255.255.255.225
***** admin(system.radius.client)>
For information on configuring Radius client values using the applet (GUI), see
Configuring the Radius Server on page 6-52 .
CLI Reference 8-241
8.4.8 System Network Time Protocol (NTP) Commands
AP7131N>admin(system)> ntp
Description:
Displays the NTP menu. The correct network time is required for numerous functions to be configured accurately on the access point.
Syntax: show Shows NTP parameters settings. date-zone Show date, time and time zone.
/ zone-list Displays list of time zones.
set
..
Sets NTP parameters.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
save quit
Saves the configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
.
8-242 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.ntp)> show
Description:
Displays the NTP server configuration.
Syntax: show Shows all NTP server settings.
Example: admin(system.ntp)> show current time : Tue 2011-Dec-13 16:58:59 +0530 IST time zone : Asia/Calcutta ntp mode : disable admin(system.ntp)>
.
CLI Reference 8-243
AP7131N>admin(system.ntp)> date-zone
Description:
Show date, time and time zone.
Syntax: date-zone Show date, time and time zone.
Example: admin(system.ntp)>date-zone
Date/Time : Tue 2011-Jan-02 18:35:37 +0000 UTC
Time Zone : UTC
CliAuditLog - User:'admin' Command:'date-zone ' Status:'success' From:'Ssh-
172.16.10.10' MU_Mac:'NULL' admin(system.ntp)>
.
8-244 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.ntp)> zone-list
Description:
Displays an extensive list of time zones for countries around the world.
Syntax: zone-list Displays list of time zone indexes for every known zone.
Example: admin(system.ntp)> zone-list
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Index | TimeZone
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 | Africa/Abidjan
2 | Africa/Accra
3 | Africa/Addis_Ababa
4 | Africa/Algiers
5 | Africa/Asmera
6 | Africa/Bamako
7 | Africa/Bangui
8 | Africa/Banjul
9 | Africa/Bissau
10 | Africa/Blantyre
<Hit any key to continue> admin(system.ntp)>
.
CLI Reference 8-245
AP7131N>admin(system.ntp)> set
Description:
Sets NTP parameters for access point clock synchronization.
Syntax: set mode <ntp-mode> server <idx> <ip> intrvl <period> time zone
<time>
<zone>
Enables or disables NTP.
Sets the NTP sever IP address.
Defines the clock synchronization interval used between the access point and the NTP server in minutes (15 - 65535).
Sets the current system time. [yyyy] - year, [mm] - month, [dd] - day of the month, [hh] - hour of the day, [mm] - minute, [ss] second, [zone -idx] Index of the zone.
Defines the time zone (by index) for the target country.
Example: admin(system.ntp)> set mode enable admin(system.ntp)> set server 1 203.21.37.18
admin(system.ntp)> set port 1 123 admin(system.ntp)> set intrvl 15 admin(system.ntp)> set zone 1
.
8-246 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
8.4.9 System Log Commands
AP7131N>admin(system)> logs
Description:
Displays the access point log submenu. Logging options include:
Syntax: show filter-show set unset-filter view delete
..
/ save quit
Shows logging options.
Shows all filters.
Sets log options and parameters.
Unsets filters.
Views system log.
Deletes the system log.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Saves configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
AP7131N>admin(system.logs)> show
Description:
Displays the current access point logging settings.
Syntax: show Displays the current access point logging configuration.
Example: admin(system.logs)> show log level syslog server logging syslog server ip address
: L6 Info
: enable
: 192.168.0.102
For information on configuring logging settings using the applet (GUI), see
Logging Configuration on page 4-45
.
CLI Reference 8-247
8-248 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.logs)>filter-show
Description:
Displays filters.based on the specified rule
Syntax: filter-show idx all
Displays the filters based on the specified rule
Displays all filters
Example admin(system.logs)>filter-show all
Filter Precedence 1 :
Permission - log user - any
Login Source - console
MU MAC - any
IP address - any
Filter Precedence 2 :
Permission - log user - symbol
Login Source - console
MU MAC - any
IP address - any
Filter Precedence 3 is not yet set
Filter Precedence 4 is not yet set
Filter Precedence 5 is not yet set
Filter Precedence 6 is not yet set
Filter Precedence 7 is not yet set
Filter Precedence 8 is not yet set
Filter Precedence 9 is not yet set
Filter Precedence 10 is not yet set admin(system.logs)> admin(system.logs)>filter-show 2
Filter Precedence 2 :
Permission - log user - symbol
Login Source - console
MU MAC - any
IP address - any admin(system.logs)>
AP7131N>admin(system.logs)>unset-filter
Description:
Unsets filters.based on the specified rule
Syntax: unset-filter idx Unsets filters based on the specified rule precedence number all Unsets all filters
Example admin(system.logs)>unset-filter all
Filter precedence 1 Unset
Filter precedence 2 Unset
Filter precedence 3 is not yet set
Filter precedence 4 is not yet set
Filter precedence 5 is not yet set
Filter precedence 6 is not yet set
Filter precedence 7 is not yet set
Filter precedence 8 is not yet set
Filter precedence 9 is not yet set
Filter precedence 10 is not yet set admin(system.logs)>
CLI Reference 8-249
8-250 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.logs)> set
Description:
Sets log options and parameters.
Syntax: set level <level> mode ipadr auditfilter
<mode>
<ip>
<rule>
<log|no-log>
Sets the level of the events that will be logged. All events with a level at or above <level>
(L0-L7) will be saved to the system log.
L0:Emergency
L1:Alert
L2:Critical
L3:Errors
L4:Warning
L5:Notice
L6:Info (default setting)
L7:Debug
Enables or disables syslog server logging.
Sets the external syslog server IP address to <ip> (a.b.c.d).
Sets audit filter for filtering the logs
Sets the rule precedence value from 1-10 for filtering the logs
Allows or Disallows system logging
<username | 'any >
<network |console' |
'any>
<mac address of mu |
Sets the user name
Sets the logging source. Specifies the method used by the user to login to the system.The source may be through network or console or any other method
Sets the MAC address of a logged device or any other address
'any >
<IP address of mu | any > Sets the IP address of a logged device or any other address
Example admin(system.logs)> set mode enable admin(system.logs)> set level L4 admin(system.logs)> set ipadr 157.235.112.11
admin(system.logs)>set audit-filter 1 log any any any any
For information on configuring logging settings using the applet (GUI), see
Logging Configuration on page 4-45
.
CLI Reference 8-251
AP7131N>admin(system.logs)> view
Description:
Displays the access point system log file.
Syntax: view Displays the entire access point system log file.
Example: admin(system.logs)> view
Warning: This will display secure information,
Do you want to continue? (n/y?)y
Jan 7 16:14:00 (none) syslogd 1.4.1: restart (remote reception).
Jan 7 16:14:10 (none) klogd: :ps log:fc: queue maintenance
Jan 7 16:14:41 (none) klogd: :ps log:fc: queue maintenance
Jan 7 16:15:43 (none) last message repeated 2 times
Jan 7 16:16:01 (none) CC: 4:16pm up 6 days, 16:16, load average: 0.00, 0.01,
0.00
Jan 7 16:16:01 (none) CC:
0 0
Mem: 62384 32520 29864
Jan 7 16:16:01 (none) CC: 0000077e 0012e95b 0000d843 00000000 00000003 0000121 e 00000000 00000000 0037ebf7 000034dc 00000000 00000000 00000000
Jan 7 16:16:13 (none) klogd: :ps log:fc: queue maintenance
Jan 7 16:16:44 (none) klogd: :ps log:fc: queue maintenance
Jan 7 16:17:15 (none) klogd: :ps log:fc: queue maintenance
Jan 7 16:17:15 (none) klogd: :ps log:fc: queue maintenance
For information on configuring logging settings using the applet (GUI), see
Logging Configuration on page 4-45
.
8-252 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.logs)> delete
Description:
Deletes the log files.
Syntax: delete Deletes the access point system log file.
Example: admin(system.logs)> delete
For information on configuring logging settings using the applet (GUI), see
Logging Configuration on page 4-45
.
8.4.10 System Configuration-Update Commands
AP7131N>admin(system.config)>
Description:
Displays the access point configuration update submenu.
Syntax: default partial show set export import transfer_keys_cfg
..
/ save quit
Restores the default access point configuration.
Restores a partial default access point configuration.
Shows import/export parameters.
Sets import/export access point configuration parameters.
Exports access point configuration to a designated system.
Imports configuration to the access point.
Exports SSH keys to turn off interactive mode.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the configuration to access point system flash.
Quits the CLI.
CLI Reference 8-253
8-254 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.config)> default
Description:
Restores the full access point factory default configuration.
Syntax: default Restores the access point to the original (factory) configuration.
Example: admin(system.config)> default
Are you sure you want to default the configuration? <yes/no>:
CLI Reference 8-255
AP7131N>admin(system.config)> partial
Description:
Restores a partial factory default configuration. The access point’s LAN, WAN and SNMP settings are uneffected by the partial restore.
Syntax: default Restores a partial access point configuration.
Example: admin(system.config)> partial
Are you sure you want to partially default AP-7131N? <yes/no>:
8-256 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.config)> show
Description:
Displays import/export parameters for the access point configuration file.
Syntax: show Shows all import/export parameters.
Example: admin(system.config)> show
Warning: This will display secure information,
Do you want to continue? (n/y?)y cfg filename cfg filepath sftp server ip address sftp user name
: cfg.txt
:
: 192.268.0.10
:
CLI Reference 8-257
AP7131N>admin(system.config)> set
Description:
Sets the import/export parameters.
Syntax: set file path server user
<filename>
<path>
<ipaddress>
<username>
Sets the configuration file name (1 to 39 characters in length).
Defines the path used for the configuration file upload.
Sets the SFTP server IP address.
Sets the SFTP user name (1 to 39 characters in length).
Example: admin(system.config)> set server 192.168.22.12
admin(system.config)> set user myadmin admin(system.config> set passwd georges admin(system.config)> show
Warning: This will display secure information,
Do you want to continue? (n/y?)y cfg filename cfg filepath sftp server ip address sftp user name
: cfg.txt
:
: 192.268.0.10
: admin(system.config)>
For configuration file creation and export, only the set radio-config is supported. Therefore, when configuration files for export are created, a line such as set rf-function X wips / wlan (where X is 1 or 2) is never generated.
For configuration file import, the legacy command set rf-function X wips / wlan is processed.
There is no CLI menu allowing the user to enter set rf-function X wips/wlan (where X is 1 or 2).
Instead, the command set radio-configX (where X is 1,2,3,4,5,6,7, or 8) is created in the configuration files for export.
8-258 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.config)> export
Description:
Exports the configuration from the system.
Syntax: export sftp Exports the access point configuration to the SFTP server. Use the set command to set the server, user, password, and file name before using this command.
Example: admin(system.config)> set server 192.168.22.12 admin(system.config)> set user myadmin admin(system.config)> set file config.txt
admin(system.config)> export sftp
Export operation
Building configuration file
File transfer
File transfer
Export Operation
: [ Started ]
: [ Done ]
: [ In progress ]
: [ Done ]
: [ Done ]
CAUTION Make sure a copy of the access point’s current configuration is exported (to a secure location) before exporting the access point’s configuration, as you will want a valid version available in case errors are encountered with the configuration export.
CLI Reference 8-259
I
AP7131N>admin(system.config)> import
Description:
Imports the access point configuration to the access point. Errors could display as a result of invaid configuration parameters. Correct the sepcified lines and import the file again until the import operation is error free.
Syntax: import sftp Imports the access point configuration file from the SFTP server. Use the set command to set the server, user, password, and file.
Example: admin(system.config> set server 192.168.22.12
admin(system.config> set user myadmin admin(system.config)> set file config.txt
admin(system.config)> import sftp
Import operation : [ Started ]
File transfer : [ In progress ]
File transfer : [ Done ]
Import operation : [ Done ]
CAUTION A single-radio model access point cannot import/export its configuration to a dual-radio model access point. In turn, a dual-radio model access point cannot import/export its configuration to a single-radio access point.
CAUTION Motorola Solutions discourages importing a 1.0 baseline configuration file to a 1.1 (or later) version access point. Similarly, a 2.0 baseline configuration file should not be imported to a 1.0 version access point. Importing configurations between different version access point’s results in broken configurations, since new features added to the 2.0 version access point cannot be supported in a leagcy version access point.
8-260 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.config)>transfer_keys_cfg
Description:
Exports SSH keys in order to turn off interactive mode.
Syntax: transfer_keys Exports SSH keys in order to turn off interactive mode.xx
Example: admin(system.config> transfer_keys_cfg
Transfer of ssh public key in progress
Done.
admin(system.config)>
CLI Reference 8-261
8.4.11 Firmware Update Commands
AP7131N>admin(system)>fw-update
Description:
Displays the firmware update submenu. The items available under this command are shown below.
NOTE The access point must complete the reboot process to successfully update the device firmware, regardless of whether the reboot is conducted uing the GUI or CLI interfaces.
/
..
show set
Displays the current access point firmware update settings.
Defines the access point firmware update parameters.
transfer_keys_fw Exports ssh keys to turn off interactive mode for firmware update Executes the firmware update.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
save quit
Saves the current configuration to the access point system flash.
Quits the CLI and exits the current session.
8-262 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.fw-update)>show
Description:
Displays the current access point firmware update settings.
Syntax: show Shows the current system firmware update settings for the access point.
Example: admin(system.fw-update)> show
Warning: This will display secure information,
Do you want to continue? (n/y?)y firmware filename firmware path sftp server ip address sftp user name
: apn.bin
: /sftpboot/
: 168.197.2.2
: jsmith
For information on updating access point device firmware using the applet (GUI), see
Updating Device Firmware on page 4-51 .
CLI Reference 8-263
AP7131N>admin(system.fw-update)>set
Description:
Defines access point firmware update settings and user permissions.
Syntax: set file path server user
<name>
<path>
<ip>
<name>
Defines the firmware file name (1 to 39 characters).
Specifies a path for the file (1 to 39 characters)..
The IP address for the SFTP server used for the firmware and/or config file update.
Specifies a username for SFTP server login (1 to 39 characters).
admin(system.fw-update)> set file 3.0.0.0-29D admin(system.fw-update)> set path c:/fw admin(system.fw-update)> set server 157.235.111.22
admin(system.fw-update)> set user mudskipper
For information on updating access point device firmware using the applet (GUI), see
Updating Device Firmware on page 4-51 .
8-264 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.fw-update)>transfer_keys_fw
Description:
Execute this command to export ssh keys to turn off interactive mode on firmware
Syntax transfer_keys_fw Exports ssh keys to turn off interactive mode on firmware
Example: admin(system.fw-update)>transfer_keys_fw ssh keygen for cli in progress
Transfer of ssh public key in progress: for CLI ssh keygen for applet in progress
Transfer of ssh public key in progress: for Applet
Checking For Image Verification Keys Required for Firmware Upgrade: for Applet
Done.
admin(system.fw-update)>
CLI Reference 8-265
AP7131N>admin(system.fw-update)>update
Description:
Executes the access point firmware update over the WAN or LAN port using SFTP.
Syntax: update <mode> Defines the sftp mode used to conduct the firmware update. Specifies whether the update is executed over the access point’s WAN, LAN1 or LAN2 interface .
NOTE The access point must complete the reboot process to successfully update the device firmware, regardless of whether the reboot is conducted uing the GUI or CLI interfaces.
admin(system.fw-update)> update sftp
For information on updating access point device firmware using the applet (GUI), see
Updating Device Firmware on page 4-51 .
8-266 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
8.4.12 FIPS Test Commands
AP7131N>admin(system)>fips-test
Description:
Displays the fips-test submenu. The items available under this command are shown below. run-self-test zeroisekeys showlog
..
/ save quit
Performs self test.
Zeroization of critical security parameters.
Displays the PoST Log File success or error status.
Goes to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the current configuration to the access point system flash.
Quits the CLI and exits the current session.
CLI Reference 8-267
AP7131N>admin(system.fips-test)>run-self-test
Description:
Execute this command to perform a self test.
Syntax: run-self-test Conducts a self test.
Example: admin(system.fips-test)>run-self-test
Fri Aug 31 18:47:44 2012 FIPS self test started this can take some time
Fri Aug 31 18:47:46 2012 FIPS integrity check of the WIOS image successful
Fri Aug 31 18:47:46 2012 FIPS data integrity check is successful
Fri Aug 31 18:47:46 2012 FIPS power-up tests for openSSL library
Fri Aug 31 18:47:50 2012 1. Automatic power-up self test includes RNG, HMAC, AES,
3DES, RSA, DSA selftests...Successful
Fri Aug 31 18:47:50 2012 2. AES encryption/decryption...Successful
Fri Aug 31 18:47:51 2012 3. RSA key generation and encryption/ decryption...successful
Fri Aug 31 18:47:51 2012 4. 3DES-ECB encryption/decryption...successful
Fri Aug 31 18:47:52 2012 5. DSA key generation and signature validation...successful
Fri Aug 31 18:47:52 2012 6a. SHA-1 hash...successful
Fri Aug 31 18:47:52 2012 6b. SHA-256 hash...successful
Fri Aug 31 18:47:52 2012 6c. SHA-512 hash...successful
Fri Aug 31 18:47:52 2012 6d. HMAC-SHA-1 hash...successful
Fri Aug 31 18:47:52 2012 6e. HMAC-SHA-224 hash...successful
Fri Aug 31 18:47:52 2012 6f. HMAC-SHA-256 hash...successful
Fri Aug 31 18:47:52 2012 6g. HMAC-SHA-384 hash...successful
Fri Aug 31 18:47:52 2012 6h. HMAC-SHA-512 hash...successful
Fri Aug 31 18:47:52 2012 The tests completed without errors
Fri Aug 31 18:47:52 2012 openSSL power-up self test successful
Fri Aug 31 18:47:52 2012 FIPS power-up tests for wireless crypto user space library
Fri Aug 31 18:47:52 2012 1. AES encryption/decryption...successful
Fri Aug 31 18:47:52 2012 2. CCM encryption/decryption...successful
Fri Aug 31 18:47:52 2012 The tests completed without errors
Fri Aug 31 18:47:52 2012 wireless crypto user space power-up self test successful
Fri Aug 31 18:47:52 2012 Common Criteria - Integrity Check on Persistent Keys
Successful
Fri Aug 31 18:47:52 2012 Key Integrity check PASS
Fri Aug 31 18:47:52 2012 FIPS power-up tests for wireless crypto kernel space library
Fri Aug 31 18:47:52 2012 1. AES encryption/decryption...Successful
Fri Aug 31 18:47:52 2012 2. CCMP encryption/decryption...Successful
Fri Aug 31 18:47:52 2012 The tests completed without errors
Fri Aug 31 18:47:52 2012 wireless crypto kernel space power-up self test successful
Fri Aug 31 18:47:52 2012 FIPS power-up tests for iGateway
8-268 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Fri Aug 31 18:47:52 2012 1. RNG Test...Successful
Fri Aug 31 18:47:52 2012 2. AES encryption/decryption...Successful
Fri Aug 31 18:47:52 2012 3. 3DES-ECB encryption/decryption...Successful
Fri Aug 31 18:47:52 2012 4. SHA-1 hash...Successful
Fri Aug 31 18:47:52 2012 5. HMAC-SHA-1 hash...Successful
Fri Aug 31 18:47:52 2012 The tests completed without errors
Fri Aug 31 18:47:52 2012 iGateway power-up self test successful admin(system.fips-test)>
As a part of self-test, the Integrity check on persistent keys is performed as given below:
NOTE On initial startup the default persistent keys are concatenated into a combined key and the SHA-256 hash of this combined key is calculated.
This hash value is stored in a file. As authorized users create custom keys to use instead of the defaults, this process is repeated to generate a new hash over the modified keyset. During startup, the combined SHA-256
Hash of the persistent keys are calculated and compared against the stored hash value. This integrity check is also performed as part of the
run-self-test run-time self-test.
NOTE The AP7131also implements a set of hardware self tests that are executed by the bootloader when the device boots up that verify the correct operation of the underlying hardware. The test covers the following:
1.RAM
2.NOR Flash
3.NAND Flash
4.Ethernet
5.PCI
When the self-tests fail, an error message is logged, displaying on the console. The
AP7131 is rebooted immediately.
CLI Reference 8-269
AP7131N>admin(system.fips-test)>zeroisekeys
Description:
Conducts a zeroization of critical security parameters by restrating the access point and restoring its default configuration. A new, more secure, password will then be required.
Syntax: zeroisekeys Conducts a zeroization of critical security parameters. The country code must be supplied to continue with the CLI session.
admin(sy stem.fips
-test)> zeroisekeys
WARNING: Zeroizing.....
Do you want to continue [n/y]?
WARNING: Zeroizing.....
Do you want to continue [n/y]?y
******************************************************************************
System will now reset for restoring default configuration. After the system restarts, you will need to set the country code for correctc operation.
****************************************************************************** admin(system.fips-test)>
8-270 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(system.fips-test)>showlog
Description:
Displays the PoST Logs File <file> success or error state.
Syntax: showlog <file> Displays the PoST Logs File <file> success or error state.
admin(sy stem.fips
-test)> showlog admin(system.fips-test)>
8.5 Statistics Commands
AP7131N>admin(stats)
Description:
Displays the access point statistics submenu. The items available under this command are: show Displays access point WLAN, MU, LAN and WAN statistics.
clear Clears all statistic counters to zero.
flash-all-leds Starts and stops the flashing of all access point LEDs.
echo Defines the parameters for pinging a designated station.
ping
..
/ save quit
Iniates a ping test.
Moves to the parent menu.
Goes to the root menu.
Saves the current configuration to system flash.
Quits the CLI.
CLI Reference 8-271
8-272 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(stats)> show
Description:
Displays access point system information.
Syntax: show wan lan stp wlan s-wlan radio
Displays stats for the access point WAN port.
Displays stats for the access point LAN port
Displays LAN Spanning Tree Status
Displays WLAN status and statistics summary.
Displays status and statistics for an individual WLAN
Displays a radio statistics transmit and receive summary.
s-radio Displays radio statistics for a single radio retry-hgram Displays a radio’s retry histogram statistics.
mu s-mu auth-mu mesh s-mesh known-ap
Displays all mobile unit (MU) status.
Displays status and statistics for an individual MU.
Displays single MU Authentication statistics.
Displays Wireless Bridge Statistics statistics summary.
Displays single Wirless Bridge statistics.
Displays a Known AP summary.
For information on displaying WAN port statistics using the applet (GUI), see
Viewing WAN Statistics on page 7-2 .
.
For information on displaying Wireless statistics using the applet (GUI), see
Viewing Wireless Statistics on page 7-12 .
For information on displaying individual WLAN statistics using the applet (GUI), see
Viewing WLAN Statistics on page 7-15 .
For information on displaying Radio statistics using the applet (GUI), see
Viewing Radio Statistics Summary on page 7-18 .
.
For information on displaying Mesh statistics using the applet (GUI), see
Viewing the Mesh Statistics Summary on page 7-32 .
CLI Reference 8-273
AP7131N>admin(stats)> clear
Description:
Clears the specified statistics counters to zero to begin new data calculations.
Syntax: clear wan lan all-rf all-wlan wlan all-radio radio1 radio2 all-mu mu known-ap
Clears WAN statistics counters.
Clears LAN statistics counters for specified LAN index (either clear lan 1 or clear lan 2).
Clears all RF data.
Clears all WLAN summary information.
Clears individual WLAN statistic counters.
Clears access point radio summary information.
Clears statistics counters specific to radio1.
Clears statistics counters specific to radio2.
Clears all MU statistic counters.
Clears MU statistics counters.
Clears Known AP statistic counters.
8-274 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(stats)> flash-all-leds
Description:
Starts and stops the illumination of a specified access point’s LEDs.
Syntax: flash-all-leds <index>
<stop/start>
Example: admin(stats)>
Defines the Known AP index number of the target AP to flash.
Begins or terminates the flash activity.
admin(stats)> flash-all-leds 1 start
Password ******** admin(stats)> flash-all-leds 1 stop admin(stats)>
For information on flashing access point LEDs using the applet (GUI), see
Viewing Known Access Point Statistics on page 7-34
.
AP7131N>admin(stats)> echo
Description:
Defines the echo test values used to conduct a ping test to an associated MU.
Syntax: show list set start
/
..
quit
Shows the Mobile Unit Statistics Summary.
Defines echo test parameters and result.
Determines echo test packet data.
Begins echoing the defined station.
Goes to parent menu.
Goes to root menu.
Quits CLI session.
For information on MU Echo and Ping tests using the applet (GUI), see
Pinging Individual MUs on page 7-30 .
CLI Reference 8-275
8-276 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin.stats.echo)> show
Description:
Shows Mobile Unit Statistics Summary.
Syntax: show Shows Mobile Unit Statistics Summary.
Example: admin(stats.echo)> show
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Idx IP Address MAC Address WLAN Radio T-put ABS Retries
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 192.168.2.0
00:A0F8:72:57:83 demo 11a
For information on MU Echo and Ping tests using the applet (GUI), see
Pinging Individual MUs on page 7-30 .
AP7131N>admin.stats.echo)> list
Description:
Lists echo test parameters and results.
Syntax: list Lists echo test parameters and results.
Example: admin(stats.echo)> list
Station Address
Number of Pings
Packet Length
Packet Data (in HEX)
: 00A0F8213434
: 10
: 10
: 55 admin(stats.echo)>
For information on MU Echo and Ping tests using the applet (GUI), see
Pinging Individual MUs on page 7-30 .
CLI Reference 8-277
8-278 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin.stats.echo)>set
Description:
Defines the parameters of the echo test.
Syntax: set station request length data
<mac>
<num>
<num>
<hex>
Defines MU target MAC address.
Sets number of echo packets to transmit (1-539).
Determines echo packet length in bytes (1-539).
Defines the particular packet data.
For information on MU Echo and Ping tests using the applet (GUI), see
Pinging Individual MUs on page 7-30 .
AP7131N>admin.stats.echo)> start
Description:
Initiates the echo test.
Syntax: start Initiates the echo test.
Example: admin(stats.echo)> start admin(stats.echo)> list
Station Address
Number of Pings
Packet Length
Packet Data (in HEX)
: 00A0F843AABB
: 10
: 100
: 1
Number of MU Responses : 2
For information on MU Echo and Ping tests using the applet (GUI), see
Pinging Individual MUs on page 7-30 .
CLI Reference 8-279
8-280 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin(stats)> ping
Description:
Defines the ping test values used to conduct a ping test to an AP with the same ESSID.
Syntax: ping show list set start
/
..
quit
Shows Known AP Summary details.
Defines ping test packet length.
Determines ping test packet data.
Begins pinging the defined station.
Goes to parent menu.
Goes to root menu.
Quits CLI session.
For information on Known AP tests using the applet (GUI), see
Pinging Individual MUs on page 7-30
.
CLI Reference 8-281
AP7131N>admin.stats.ping)> show
Description:
Shows Known AP Summary Details.
Syntax: show Shows Known AP Summary Details.
Example: admin(stats.ping)> show
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Idx IP Address MAC Address MUs KBIOS Unit Name
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 192.168.2.0
00:A0F8:72:57:83 3 0 access point
8-282 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin.stats.ping)> list
Description:
Lists ping test parameters and results.
Syntax: list Lists ping test parameters and results.
Example: admin(stats.ping)> list
Station Address
Number of Pings
Packet Length
Packet Data (in HEX)
: 00A0F8213434
: 10
: 10
: 55 admin(stats.ping)>
For information on Known AP tests using the applet (GUI), see
Pinging Individual MUs on page 7-30
.
AP7131N>admin.stats.ping)> set
Description:
Defines the parameters of the ping test.
Syntax: set station request length data
Defines the AP target MAC address.
Sets number of ping packets to transmit (1-539).
Determines ping packet length in bytes (1-539).
Defines the particular packet data.
Example: admin(stats.ping)> set station 00A0F843AABB admin(stats.ping)> set request 10 admin(stats.ping)> set length 100 admin(stats.ping)> set data 1 admin(stats.ping)>
For information on Known AP tests using the applet (GUI), see
Pinging Individual MUs on page 7-30
.
CLI Reference 8-283
8-284 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
AP7131N>admin.stats.echo)> start
Description:
Initiates the ping test.
Syntax: start Initiates the ping test.
Example: admin(stats.ping)> start admin(stats.ping)> list
Station Address
Number of Pings
Packet Length
Packet Data (in HEX)
: 00A0F843AABB
: 10
: 100
: 1
Number of AP Responses : 2
For information on Known AP tests using the applet (GUI), see
Pinging Individual MUs on page 7-30
.
Configuring Mesh Networking
9.1 Mesh Networking Overview
The access point can be configured in two modes to support the new mesh networking functionality.
The access point can be set to a client bridge mode and/or a base bridge mode (which accepts connections from client bridges). Base bridge and client bridge mode can be used at the same time by an individual access point to optimally bridge traffic to other members of the mesh network and service associated MUs.
An access point in client bridge mode scans to locate other access points using the WLAP client's
ESSID. Then it is required to go through the association and authentication process to establish wireless connections with the located devices. This association process is identical to the access point’s current MU association process. Once the association and authentication process is complete, the wireless client adds the connection as a port on its bridge module. This causes the client bridge to begin forwarding packets to the base bridge node. The base bridge realizes it is talking to a wireless client bridge. It then adds that connection as a port on its own bridge module. The two bridges at that point are communicating using the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP).
9-2 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide access points configured as both a base and a client bridge function as repeaters to transmit data with associated MUs in their coverage area (client bridge mode) as well as forward traffic to other access points in the mesh network (base bridge mode). The number of access points and their intended function within the mesh network dictate whether they should be configured as base bridges, client bridges or both (repeaters).
The spanning tree determines the path to the root and detects if the current connection is part of a network loop with another connection in the system. Each bridge can be configurable so the administrator can control the spanning tree to define the root bridge and what the forwarding paths are. Once the spanning tree converges, both access points begin learning which destinations reside on which side of the network. This allows them to forward traffic intelligently.
After the client bridge establishes at least one wireless connection (if configured to support mobile users), it begins beaconing and accepting wireless connections. If configured as both a client bridge and a base bridge, it begin accepting client bridge connections. Therefore, the mesh network could connect simultaneously to different networks in a manner whereby a network loop is not created and then the connection is not blocked. Once the client bridge establishes at least one wireless connection, it begins establishing other wireless connections as it finds them available. Thus, the client bridge is able to establish simultaneous redundant links.
A mesh network must use one of the two access point LANs. If intending to use the access point for mesh networking support, Motorola recommends configuring at least one WLAN (of the 16 WLANs available) specifically for mesh networking support.
The client bridge creates up to three connections if it can find base bridges for connection. If the connections are redundant (on the same network), then one connection will be forwarding and the others blocked. However, if each of the connections links to a different wired network, then none are redundant and all are forwarding. Thus, the bridge automatically detects and disables redundant connections, but leaves non-redundant connections forwarding. This gives the user the freedom to configure their topology in a variety of ways without limitations. This is important when configuring multiple access points for base bridge support in areas like a shipping yard where a large radio coverage area is required. For more information on configuring the access point in respect to specific usage scenarios, see
Mesh Network Deployment - Quick Setup on page 9-20
.
NOTE Since each access point can establish up to 3 simultaneous wireless connections, some of these connections could be redundant. If this is the case, the STP algorithm defines which links are the redundant links and disables those links from forwarding.
Configuring Mesh Networking 9-3
If an access point is configured as a base bridge (but not as a client bridge) it operates normally at boot time. The base bridge supports connections made by other client bridges.
The dual-radio model access point affords users better optimization of the mesh networking feature by enabling the access point to transmit to other mesh network members using one independent radio and transmit with associated MUs using the second independent radio. A single-radio access point has its channel utilization and throughput degraded in a mesh network, as the AP’s single radio must process both mesh network traffic with other access points and MU traffic with its associated devices.
CAUTION Only Motorola model access points can be used as base bridges, client bridges or repeaters within an access point supported mesh network. If utilizing a mesh network, Motorola recommends considering a dual-radio model to optimize channel utilization and throughput.
9.1.1 The Client Bridge Association Process
An access point in client bridge mode performs an active scan to quickly create a table of the access points nearby. The table contains the access points matching the ESS of the client bridge AP’s WLAN.
The table is used to determine the best access point to connect to (based on signal strength, load and the user's configured preferred connection list).
The association and authentication process is identical to the MU association process. The client access point sends 802.11 authentication and association frames to the base access point. The base access point responds as if the client is an actual mobile unit. Depending on the security policy, the two access point’s engage in the normal handshake mechanism to establish keys.
After device association, the two access points are connected and the system can establish the bridge and run the spanning tree algorithm. In the meantime, the access point in client bridge mode continues to scan in the background attempts to establish an association with other access points using the same ESS on the same channel.
CAUTION An access point is Base Bridge mode logs out whenever a Client
Bridge associates to the Base Bridge over the LAN connection. This problem is not experienced over the access point’s WAN connection. If this situation is experienced, log-in to the access point again.
9-4 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
The access point in client bridge mode attempts to establish up to 3 simultaneous wireless connections. The second and third connections are established in the background while the system is running. The first connection needs to be established before the system starts bridging traffic.
The dual-radio model access point affords users better optimization of the mesh networking feature by allowing the access point to transmit to other access points (in base or client bridge mode) using one independent radio and transmit with its associated MUs using the second independent radio. A single-radio access point has its channel utilization and throughput degraded in a mesh network, as the access point’s single radio must process both mesh network traffic with other access points and
MU traffic with its associated devices.
9.1.1.1 Client Bridge Configuration Process Example
In this example, two access points are described with the following configurations:
• AP #1 base bridge
• AP #2 repeater (both a base and client bridge)
In the case of a mesh enabled radio, the client bridge configuration always takes precedence over the base bridge configuration. Therefore, when a radio is configured as a repeater (AP #2), the base bridge configuration takes effect only after the client bridge connection to AP #1 is established. Thus,
AP #2 keeps scanning to find the base bridge, form the uplink and start beaconing as a base bridge for downstream client bridge connection. This is by design, as there is no reason to use a partially broken connection with no uplink to a base bridge.
9.1.2 Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)
The access point performs mesh networking using STP as defined in the 802.1d standard.
Once device association is complete, the client and base bridge exchange Configuration Bridge
Protocol Data Units (BPDUs) to determine the path to the root. STP also determines whether a given port is a redundant connection or not.
9.1.3 Defining the Mesh Topology
When a user wants to control how the spanning tree determines client bridge connections, they need to control the mesh configuration. The user must be able to define one node as the root. Assigning a base bridge the lowest bridge priority defines it as the root.
Configuring Mesh Networking 9-5
NOTE Motorola recommends using the Mesh STP Configuration screen to define a base bridge as a root. Only advanced users should use the
Advanced Client Bridge Settings screen’s Preferred List to define the mesh topology, as omitting a bridge from the preferred list could break connections within the mesh network.
The access point can manipulate the path cost assigned to a bridge connection based on that connection’s RSSI. This results in the spanning tree selecting the optimal path for forwarding data when redundant paths exist. However, this can be overridden using the preferred list. When using the preferred list, the user enters a priority for each bridge, resulting in the selection of the forwarding link.
Limit the wireless client’s connections to reduce the number of hops required to get to the wired network. Use each radio’s preferred base bridge list to define which access points the client bridge connects to. For more information, see
Configuring Mesh Networking Support on page 9-7 .
9.1.4 Mesh Networking and the Access Point’s Two Subnets
The access point now has a second subnet on the LAN side of the system. This means wireless clients communicating through the same radio can reside on different subnets. The addition of this feature adds another layer of complexity to the access point’s mesh networking functionality.
With a second LAN introduced, the LAN’s Ethernet port (and any of the 16 WLANs) could be assigned to one of two different subnets. From a layer 2 perspective, the system has two different bridge functionalities, each with its own STP. The WLAN assignment controls the subnet (LAN1 or 2) upon which a given connection resides. If WLAN2 is assigned to LAN1, and WLAN2 is used to establish a client bridge connection, then the mesh network connection resides on LAN1.
Therefore, (depending upon the WLAN-to-LAN mapping), the access point could have multiple mesh connections on either LAN1 or LAN2.
9.1.5 Normal Operation
Once the mesh network is defined, all normal access point operations are still allowed. MUs are still allowed to associate with the access point as usual. The user can create WLANs, security polices and
VLANs as with any other access point. DHCP services function normally and all layer 3 communications are allowed.
WNMP is used to send information about each mesh network so information can be displayed to the user from any access point on the system. WNMP messages are AP-AP info messages used to send system status.
9-6 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
9.1.6 Impact of Importing/Exporting Configurations to a Mesh Network
When using the access point’s Configuration Import/Export screen to migrate an access point’s configuration to other access points, mesh network configuration parameters will get sent or saved to other access points. However, if using the Known AP Statistics screen’s Send Cfg to APs functionality, “auto-select” and preferred list” settings do not get imported.
CAUTION When using the Import/Export screen to import a mesh supported configuration, do not import a base bridge configuration into an existing client bridge, as this could cause the mesh configuration to break.
Configuring Mesh Networking 9-7
9.2 Configuring Mesh Networking Support
Configuring the access point for Mesh Bridging support entails:
•
Setting the LAN Configuration for Mesh Networking Support
•
Configuring a WLAN for Mesh Networking Support
•
Configuring the Access Point Radio for Mesh Support .
9.2.1 Setting the LAN Configuration for Mesh Networking Support
At least one of the two access point LANs needs to be enabled and have a mesh configuration defined to correctly function as a base or client bridge within a mesh network. This section describes the configuration activities required to define a mesh network’s LAN configuration.
As the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) mentions, each mesh network maintains hello, forward delay and max age timers. The base bridge defined as the root imposes these settings within the mesh network.
The user does not necessarily have to change these settings, as the default settings will work.
However, Motorola encourages the user to define an access point as a base bridge and root (using the base bridge priority settings within the Bridge STP Configuration screen). Members of the mesh network can be configured as client bridges or additional base bridges with a higher priority value.
NOTE For an overview on mesh networking and some of the implications on using the feature with the access point, see
.
To define a LAN’s Mesh STP Configuration:
1.
Select Network Configuration -> LAN from the AP-7131 menu tree.
2.
Enable the LAN used to support the mesh network.
Verify the enabled LAN is named appropriately in respect to its intended function in supporting the mesh network.
3.
Select Network Configuration -> LAN -> LAN1 or LAN2 from the AP-7131 menu tree.
4.
Click the Mesh STP Configuration button on the bottom off the screen.
5.
Define the properties for the following parameters within the mesh network:
9-8 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Priority
Maximum Message age
Hello Time
Set the Priority as low as possible for a to force other devices within the mesh network to defer to this client bridge as the bridge defining the mesh configuration (commonly referred to as the root).
Motorola recommends assigning a Base Bridge AP with the lowest bridge priority so it becomes the root in the STP. If a root already exists, set the Bridge Priorities of new APs accordingly so the root of the STP doesn't get altered. Each access point starts with a default bridge priority of 63335.
The Maximum Message age timer is used with the Message
Age timer. The Message Age timer is used to measure the age of the received protocol information recorded for a port, and to ensure the information is discarded when it exceeds the value set for the
Maximum Message age timer.
The Hello Time is the time between each bridge protocol data unit sent. This time is equal to 2 seconds (sec) by default, but you can tune the time to be between 1 and 10 sec. If you drop the hello time from 2 sec to 1 sec, you double the number of bridge protocol data units sent/received by each bridge. The 802.1d specification recommends the Hello Time be set to a value less than half of the
Max Message age value.
Configuring Mesh Networking 9-9
Forward Delay
Forwarding Table
Ageout
The Forward Delay is the time spent in the listening and learning state. This time is equal to 15 sec by default, but you can tune the time to be between 4 and 30 sec. The 802.1d specification recommends the Forward Delay be set to a value greater than half the Max Message age timeout value.
The Forwarding Table Parameter value defines the length of time an entry will remain in the a bridge’s forwarding table before being deleted due to lack of activity. If the entry replenishments a destination generating continuous traffic, this timeout value will never be invoked. However, if the destination becomes idle, the timeout value represents the length of time that must be exceeded before an entry is deleted from the forwarding table.
6.
Click OK to return to either the LAN1 or LAN2 screen where updates to the Mesh STP
Configuration can be saved by clicking the Apply button.
7.
Click Cancel to discard the changes made to the Mesh STP Configuration and return to the
LAN1 or LAN2 screen. Once the Mesh STP Configuration is defined, the access point’s radio can be configured for base and/or client bridge support.
9.2.2 Configuring a WLAN for Mesh Networking Support
Each access point comprising a particular mesh network is required to be a member of the same
WLAN. Therefore, each base bridge, client bridge or repeater within the mesh network must use the same WLAN in order to share the same ESSID, radio designation, security policy, MU ACL and Quality of Service policy. If intending to use the access point for mesh networking support, Motorola recommends configuring at least one WLAN (of the 16 WLANs available) specifically for mesh networking support.
To define the attributes of the WLAN shared by the members of the mesh network:
1.
Select Network Configuration -> Wireless from the AP-7131 menu tree.
The Wireless Configuration screen displays with those existing WLANs displayed within the table.
2.
Select the Create button to configure a new WLAN specifically to support mesh networking.
An existing WLAN can be modified (or used as is) for mesh networking support by selecting it from the list of available WLANs and clicking the Edit button.
9-10 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
3.
Assign an ESSID and Name to the WLAN that each access point will share when using this
WLAN within their mesh network.
Motorola recommends assigning a unique name to a WLAN supporting a mesh network to differentiate it from WLANs defined for non mesh support. The name assigned to the WLAN is what is selected from the Radio Configuration screen for use within the mesh network.
NOTE It is possible to have different ESSID and WLAN assignments within a single mesh network (one set between the Base Bridge and repeater and another between the repeater and Client Bridge). However, for ease of management and to not waste network bandwidth, Motorola recommends using the same ESSID across the entire mesh network.
Configuring Mesh Networking 9-11
4.
Use the Available On checkboxes to specify the access point radio(s) used with the target
WLAN within the mesh network.
The Available On checkboxes are for making this WLAN available for base bridges or repeaters to connect to. The Available On checkbox should only be selected for a mesh
WLAN if this target access point is to be configured as a base bridge or repeater on the radio. If the WLAN is to be defined for client bridge support only, the Available On checkbox should not be selected. Instead, it only needs to have the Enable Client Bridge Backhaul option selected.
5.
Use the Maximum MUs field to define the number of MUs allowed to associate with this
WLAN. This number should be defined based on the number of client bridge and repeaters within this mesh network. This value can be increased as the mesh network grows and devices are added.
Only advanced users should define the number of devices allowed to associate with the
WLAN, as setting the value too low could restrict devices from joining an expanding mesh network, and setting it too high could prohibit other WLANs from granting access to the all the devices needed.
6.
Select the Enable Client Bridge Backhaul checkbox to make this WLAN available in the
Mesh Network Name drop-down menu within the Radio Configuration screen. Only
WLANs defined for mesh networking support should have this checkbox selected, in order to keep the list of WLANs available (within the Radio Configuration screen) restricted to just
WLANs configured specifically with mesh attributes.
7.
Refer to the Security Policy drop-down menu to select the security policy used within this
WLAN and mesh network.
A security policy for a mesh network should be configured carefully since the data protection requirements within a mesh network differ somewhat compared to a typical wireless LAN.
Motorola discourages user-based authentication schemes such as 802.1x EAP, as this authentication scheme is not supported within a mesh network.
If none of the existing policies are suitable, select the Create button to the right of the
Security Policy drop-down menu and configure a policy suitable for the mesh network. For information on configuring a security using the authentication and encryption techniques available to the access point, see
Enabling Authentication and Encryption Schemes on page
8.
ACL policies should be configured to allow or deny a range of MAC addresses from interoperating with the WLAN used with the mesh network. ACLs should be defined based
9-12 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide on the client bridge and repeater (an access point defined as both a base and client bridge) association requirements within the mesh network.
For information on defining an ACL for use with the WLAN assigned to the mesh network,
see Configuring a WLAN Access Control List (ACL) on page 5-35
.
9.
Select the Disallow MU to MU Communication checkbox to restrict MUs from interacting with each other both within this WLAN, as well as other WLANs.
Selecting this option could be a good idea, if restricting device “chatter” improves mesh network performance. If base bridges and client bridges are added at any given time to extent the coverage are of a mesh network, the data going back and forth amongst just those radios could be compromised by network interference. Adding mesh device traffic could jeopardize network throughput. If however, MU to MU communication is central to the organization (for example, scanners sharing data entry information) then this checkbox should remain unselected.
10. Select the Use Secure Beacon checkbox to not transmit the ESSID amongst the access points and devices within the mesh network. If a hacker tries to find an ESSID via an MU, the access point’s ESSID does not display since the ESSID is not in the beacon. Motorola recommends keeping the option enabled to reduce the likelihood of hacking into the WLAN.
11. Select the Accept Broadcast ESSID checkbox to associate an MU that has a blank ESSID
(regardless of which ESSID the access point is currently using). Traffic within a mesh network probably consists of known devices, so you may want to leave the checkbox unselected and configure each MU with an ESSID. The default is selected. However, for
WLANs used within a mesh network, Motorola recommends unselecting this option as it would prevent the AP from answering to blank ESSID probes from other mobile units.
12. If there are certain requirements for the types of data proliferating the mesh network, select an existing policy or configure a new QoS policy best suiting the requirements of the mesh network. To define a new QoS policy, select the Create button to the right of the Quality Of
Service Policy drop-down menu.
For detailed information on configuring a QoS policy, see
Setting the WLAN Quality of Service (QoS) Policy on page 5-39 .
13. Click Apply to save the changes made to the mesh network configured WLAN.
An access point radio is now ready to be configured for use with this newly created mesh
WLAN.
Configuring Mesh Networking 9-13
9.2.3 Configuring the Access Point Radio for Mesh Support
An access point radio intended for use within a mesh network requires configuration attributes unique from a radio intended for non-mesh support.This section describes how to configure an access point radio for mesh network support.
To configure the access point radio for mesh networking support:
NOTE The dual-radio model AP-7131N-FGR affords users better optimization of the mesh network feature by allowing the access point to transmit to other access points (in base or client bridge mode) using one independent radio and transmit with its associated devices using the second independent radio. A single-radio access point has its channel utilization and throughput degraded in a mesh network, as the AP’s single radio must process both mesh network traffic with other access points and MU traffic with its associated devices.
1.
Select Network Configuration -> Wireless -> Radio Configuration from the access point menu tree.
9-14 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
2.
Refer to the Radio Function parameter to ensure the radio has been designated for WLAN
Radio support.
NOTE With this 4.0 release of the access point firmware, a new scheme for radio configuration and WIPS server management has been implemented within the Quick Setup GUI applet. Up to eight radio buttons are now available (depending on the number radios supported by the SKU). These radio buttons define how WLAN and WIPS are supported amongst the radios available to the access point. The options available depend strictly on the SKU supported. For information on configuring a radio for WLAN and WIPS support see
Basic Configuration on page 3-4
.
Refer to RF Band of Operation parameter to ensure you are enabling the correct
802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n radio. After the settings are applied within this Radio
Configuration screen, the Radio Status and MUs connected values update. If this is an existing radio within a mesh network, these values update in real-time.
Configuring Mesh Networking 9-15
3.
Select the Base Bridge checkbox to allow the access point radio to accept client bridge connections from other access points in client bridge mode. The base bridge is the acceptor of mesh network data from those client bridges within the mesh network and never the initiator.
CAUTION A problem could arise if a Base Bridge’s Indoor channel is not available on an Outdoor Client Bridge's list of available channels. As long as an Outdoor Client Bridge has the Indoor Base Bridge channel in its available list of channels, it can associate to the Base Bridge.
4.
If the Base Bridge checkbox has been selected, use the Maximum no. Client Bridges parameter to define the client bridge load on a particular base bridge.
The maximum number of client bridge connections per access point radio is 12, with 24 representing the maximum for dual-radio models.
CAUTION An access point in Base Bridge mode logs out whenever a Client
Bridge associates to the Base Bridge over the LAN connection. This problem is not experienced over the access point’s WAN connection. If this situation is experienced, log-in to the access point again.
Once the settings within the Radio Configuration screen are applied (for an initial deployment), the current number of client bridge connections for this specific radio displays within the CBs Connected field. If this is an existing radio within a mesh network, this value updates in real-time.
5.
Select the Client Bridge checkbox to enable the access point radio to initiate client bridge connections with other mesh network supported access points radios on the same WLAN.
If the Client Bridge checkbox has been selected, use the Mesh Network Name drop-down menu to select the WLAN (ESS) the client bridge uses to establish a wireless link. The default setting, is (WLAN1). Motorola recommends creating (and naming) a WLAN specifically for mesh networking support to differentiate the Mesh supported WLAN from
non-Mesh supported WLANs. For more information, see Configuring a WLAN for Mesh
Networking Support on page 9-9
Once the settings within the Radio Configuration screen are applied (for an initial deployment), the current number of base bridges visible to the radio displays within the BBs
Visible field, and the number of base bridges currently connected to the radio displays within the BBs Connected field. If this is an existing radio within a mesh network, these values update in real-time.
9-16 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
NOTE Ensure you have verified the radio configuration for both Radio 1 and
Radio 2 before saving the existing settings and exiting the Radio
Configuration screen.
6.
Click the Advanced button to define a prioritized list of access points to define mesh connection links.
7.
Select the Automatic Link Selection checkbox to allow the access point to select the links used by the client bridge to populate the mesh network. Selecting this checkbox prohibits the user from selecting the order base bridges are added to the mesh network when one of the three associated base bridges becomes unavailable.
NOTE Auto link selection is based on the RSSI and load. The client bridge will select the best available link when the Automatic Link Selection checkbox is selected. Motorola recommends you do not disable this option, as (when enabled) the access point will select the best base bridge for connection.
8.
Refer to the Available Base Bridge List to view devices located by the access point using the WLAN selected from the Radio Configuration screen. Refer the following for information on located base bridges:
Configuring Mesh Networking 9-17
MAC Address
RSSI
Channel
The MAC Address field displays the factory set hard-coded MAC address that serves as a device identifier.
The Relative Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) displays the located device’s signal strength with the associated access point in client bridge mode. Use this information as criteria on whether to move a particular device from the available list to the preferred list.
The Channel displays the name of the channel that both the access point and base bridge use. A client bridge can only connect to access points (Base Bridges) on the same channel. If the user selects multiple base bridges on different channels, the access point will only be able to connect to those bridges on the same channel and the others will not be able to join this particular mesh network.
9.
Click Refresh at any time to update the list of available Base Bridge devices available to the access point.
10. Use the >> button to move a selected base bridge MAC address from Available Base Bridge
List.
11. Refer to the Preferred Base Bridge List for a prioritized list of base bridges the mesh network’s client bridge uses to extend the mesh network’s coverage area and potentially provide redundant links. If a device does not appear on the Available Base Bridge List, there is no way it can be moved to Preferred Base Bridge List as the device has not yet been seen.
However, if you know the MAC Address corresponding to that Base Bridge, you can add that to the Preferred List using the add button.
12. Highlight a MAC address from the Preferred Base Bridge List and click the Up button to assign that device’s MAC address a higher priority and a greater likelihood of joining the mesh network if an association with another device is lost.
If a MAC address is not desirable as others but still worthy of being on the preferred list, select it, and click the Down button to decrease its likelihood of being selected as a member of the mesh network.
13. If a device MAC address is on the Preferred Base Bridge List and constitutes a threat as a potential member of the mesh network (poor RSSI etc.), select it and click the Remove button to exclude it from the preferred list.
If all of the members of the Preferred Base Bridge List constitute a risk as a member of the mesh network, click the Remove All button. This is not recommended unless the preferred
9-18 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide list can be re-populated with more desirable device MAC addresses from the Available Base
Bridge List.
14. Click Ok to return to the Radio Configuration screen. Within the Radio Configuration screen, click Apply to save any changes made within the Advanced Client Bridge Settings screen.
15. Click Cancel to undo any changes made within the Advanced Client Bridge Settings screen.
This reverts all settings for the screen to the last saved configuration.
16. If using a dual-radio model access point, refer to the Mesh Timeout drop-down menu (from within the Radio Configuration screen) to define whether one of the access point’s radio’s beacons on an existing WLAN or if a client bridge radio uses an uplink connection. The Mesh
Timeout value is not available on a single-radio access point, since the radio would have to stop beaconing and go into scan mode to determine if a base bridge uplink is lost. The following drop-down menu options are available:
Disabled
Uplink Detect
Enabled
When disabled, both radios are up at boot time and beaconing. If one radio (radio 1) does not have a mesh connection, the other radio (radio 2) is not affected. Radio 2 continues to beacon and associate MUs, but MU's can only communicate amongst themselves using the access point. Disabled is the default value.
When Uplink Detect is selected, the access point only boots up the radio configured as a client bridge. The access point boots up the second radio as soon as the first mesh connection is established.
However, if the client bridge radio loses its uplink connection, the second radio shuts down immediately.
If the mesh connection is down on one radio (radio 1), the other radio (radio 2) is brought down and stops beaconing after the timeout period (45 seconds). This allows the client bridge (radio 1) to roam without dropping the MU's associated to radio 2. The disadvantage is that radio 2 may beacon for the 45 second timeout period and have to drop associated MU's because radio 1 could not establish its uplink.
NOTE The Mesh Time Out variable overrides the Ethernet Port Time Out (EPTO) setting on the LAN page when the access point is in bridge mode. As long as the mesh is down, the access point acts in accordance to the Mesh
Time Out setting regardless of the state of the Ethernet. However, if the
Ethernet goes down and the mesh link is still up, the EPTO takes effect.
Configuring Mesh Networking 9-19
17. Click Apply to save any changes to the Radio Configuration screen. Navigating away from the screen without clicking Apply results in all changes to the screens being lost.
CAUTION When defining a Mesh configuration and changes are saved, the mesh network temporarily goes down. The mesh network is unavailable because the access point radio goes down when applying the changes. This can be problematic for users making changes within a deployed mesh network. If updating the mesh network using a LAN connection, the access point applet loses connection and the connection must be re-instated. If updating the mesh network using a
WAN connection, the applet does not lose connection, but the mesh network is unavailable until the changes have been applied.
18. Click Undo Changes (if necessary) to undo any changes made. Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the Radio Configuration screen to the last saved configuration.
19. Click Logout to securely exit the access point applet. A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed.
Once the target radio has been enabled from the Radio Configuration screen, configure the radio’s properties by selecting it from the AP-7131 menu tree.
For additional information on configuring the access point’s radio, see
802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n Radio on page 5-56
. For two fictional deployment scenarios, see
Mesh Network Deployment - Quick Setup on page 9-20
.
9-20 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
9.3 Mesh Network Deployment - Quick Setup
This section provides instructions on how to quickly setup and demonstrate mesh functionality using three access points. Two following two deployment scenarios will be addressed:
• Scenario 1 - Two base bridges (redundant) and one client bridge
• Scenario 2 - A two hop mesh network with a base bridge, repeater (combined base bridge and client bridge mode) and a client bridge.
9.3.1 Scenario 1 - Two Base Bridges and One Client Bridge
In scenario 1, the following three access point configurations will be deployed within the mesh network:
• AP#1 - An active base bridge
• AP#2 - A redundant base bridge
• AP#3 - A client bridge connecting to both AP#1 and AP#2 simultaneously.
AP#1 and AP#2 will be configured somewhat the same. However there are some important (yet subtle) differences. Therefore, the configuration of each access point will be described separately.
9.3.1.1 Configuring AP#1:
1.
Provide a known IP address for the LAN1 interface.
Configuring Mesh Networking 9-21
NOTE Enable the LAN1 Interface of AP#1 as a DHCP Server if you intend to associate MUs and require them to obtain an IP address via DHCP.
9-22 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
2.
Assign a Mesh STP Priority of 40000 to LAN1 Interface.
3.
Define a mesh supported WLAN.
4.
Enable base bridge functionality on the 802.11a/n radio (Radio 2).
Configuring Mesh Networking 9-23
9-24 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
5.
Define a channel of operation for the 802.11a/n radio.
6.
If needed, create another WLAN mapped to the 802.11b/g/n radio if 802.11b/g/n support is required for MUs on that 802.11 band.
9.3.1.2 Configuring AP#2
AP#2 can be configured the same as AP#1 with the following exceptions:
• Assign an IP Address to the LAN1 Interface different than that of AP#1
• Assign a higher Mesh STP Priority 50000 to the AP#2 LAN1 Interface.
NOTE In a typical deployment, each base bridge can be configured for a Mesh
STP Priority of 50000. In this example, different values are used to force
AP#1 to be the forwarding link since it's a small mesh network (of only three APs) with AP within close proximity of one another.
Configuring Mesh Networking 9-25
NOTE Ensure AP#1 and AP#2 use the same channel for each 802.11a/n radio, or the APs will not be able to “hear” each other over different channels.
9.3.1.3 Configuring AP#3
To define the configuration for AP#3 (a client bridge connecting to both AP#1 and AP#2 simultaneously):
1.
Provide a known IP address for the LAN1 interface.
9-26 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
2.
Assign the maximum value (65535) for the Mesh STP Priority.
3.
Create a mesh supported WLAN with the Enable Client Bridge Backhaul option selected.
NOTE This WLAN should not be mapped to any radio. Therefore, leave both of the “Available On” radio options unselected.
4.
Select the Client Bridge checkbox to enable client bridge functionality on the 802.11a/n radio. Use the Mesh Network Name drop-down menu to select the name of the WLAN created in step 3.
NOTE You don't need to configure channel settings on the client bridge (AP#3). It automatically finds the base bridges (AP#1 and AP#2) and uses the channel assigned to them.
Configuring Mesh Networking 9-27
5.
If needed, create another WLAN mapped to the 802.11b/g/n radio if 802.11b/g/n support is required for MUs on that 802.11 band.
9.3.1.4 Verifying Mesh Network Functionality for Scenario #1
You now have a three AP mesh network ready to demonstrate. Associate a single MU on each AP
WLAN configured for 802.11b/g/n radio support. Once completed, pass traffic among the three APs comprising the mesh network.
9.3.2 Scenario 2 - Two Hop Mesh Network with a Base Bridge
Repeater and a Client Bridge
By default, the mesh algorithm runs an automatic link selection algorithm to determine the best possible active and redundant links. If member APs are not far apart (in physical distance), the algorithm intelligently chooses a single hop link to forward data. To force APs to use multiple hops for demonstrations, use manual links.
In scenario 2, the following three AP configurations comprise the mesh network:
9-28 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
• AP#1 is a base bridge
• AP#2 is a repeater (client bridge/base bridge combination)
• AP#3 is a client b ridge
9.3.2.1 Configuring AP#1
The setup of AP#1 within this usage scenario is exactly the same as the AP#1 configuration within
Scenario 1 - Two Base Bridges and One Client Bridge for step by step instructions for configuring
AP#1, see
Configuring AP#1: on page 9-21
. Once completed, return to
within this section.
Configuring Mesh Networking 9-29
9.3.2.2 Configuring AP#2
AP#2 requires the following modifications from AP#2 in the previous scenario to function in base bridge/client bridge repeater mode.
1.
Enable client bridge backhaul on the mesh supported WLAN.
9-30 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
2.
Enable client and base bridge functionality on the 802.11a/n radio
9.3.2.3 Configuring AP#3
To define AP #3’s configuration:
1.
The only change needed on AP#3 (with respect to the configuration used in scenario #1), is to disable the Auto Link Selection option.
Click the Advanced button within the Mesh Client Bridge Settings field.
Configuring Mesh Networking 9-31
2.
Add the 802.11a/n Radio MAC Address.
In scenario #2, the mesh WLAN is mapped to BSS1 on the 802.11a/n radio if each AP. The
Radio MAC Address (the BSSID#1 MAC Address) is used for the AP#2 Preferred Base Bridge
List. Ensure both the AP#1 and AP#2 Radio MAC Addresses are in the Available Base Bridge
List. Add the AP#2 MAC Address into the Preferred Base Bridge List.
3.
Determine the Radio MAC Address and BSSID MAC Addresses.
9-32 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
9.3.2.4 Verifying Mesh Network Functionality for Scenario #2
You now have a three AP demo multi-hop mesh network ready to demonstrate. Associate an
MU on the WLANs configured on the 802.11b/g/n radio for each AP and pass traffic among the members of the mesh network.
Configuring Mesh Networking 9-33
9.4 Mesh Networking Frequently Asked Questions
The following scenarios represent issues that could be encountered and resolved when defining an access point supported mesh configuration:
Mesh Deployment Issue 1 - Client Bridge can only connect to one of two Base
Bridges
You have two access points configured as base bridges (AP1, AP2) and one access point defined as a as a client bridge (AP3). However, the client bridge is able to connect to only one of the base bridges.
Resolution
Check the mesh backhaul radio channel configuration on both base bridges (AP1, AP2). They need to use the same channel so the client bridge can connect to both simultaneously.
Mesh Deployment Issue 2 - Faulty Client Bridge Connectivity
You have configured three access points in mesh mode; one base bridge (AP1), one client bridge/base bridge (AP2) and one client bridge (AP3). However, the client bridge (AP3) is connecting to both AP1 and AP2 and using its link to base bridge (AP1) to forward traffic.
Resolution
This is valid behavior, you see this when your mesh APs are close enough (in proximity) so the client bridge can see both the base bridges (AP1, AP2), in which case it forms two links, one each to AP1 and AP2. Since the link to AP1 is the shortest path in terms of number of hops, AP3 uses that link to forward traffic.
Mesh Deployment Issue 3 - Cannot select a WLAN name for a Client Bridge
You created a WLAN for mesh backhaul on an AP needed as a client bridge, but you don't get to select the WLAN name in the Mesh Network Name drop down menu. Why?
Resolution
Check the WLAN configuration to ensure you have enabled the Enable Client Bridge Backhaul option.
9-34 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Mesh Deployment Issue 4 - Do I need to map a WLAN to a radio when configuring mesh backhaul on a Client Bridge?
When creating a mesh backhaul WLAN on a client bridge only AP, do you need to map the WLAN on a radio?
Resolution
No, a client bridge only AP behaves just like an MU! It scans for base bridges and forms connections to them. It doesn't need to beacon on that WLAN. Therefore, while creating a mesh backhaul WLAN on a client bridge only AP, just enable the Enable Client Bridge Backhaul option.
Mesh Deployment Issue 5 - Do I need to use secure beacons on a mesh backhaul supported WLAN?
Can I use secure beacons on the mesh backhaul supported WLAN?
Resolution
Yes, you can enable a secure beacon on a mesh backhaul supported WLAN. In fact, it is a Motorola recommended practice.
Mesh Deployment Issue 6 - Is my mesh topology complete?
How can I determine if all my mesh APs are connected and the mesh topology is complete?
Resolution
Each mesh AP has a Known AP Table (available in the applet, CLI and SNMP). All APs (whether they are supporting mesh or not) periodically exchange ID messages notifying their presence to one another. Review the Known AP Table on any mesh supported AP to determine if you have all required
APs connected to the mesh topology.
Mesh Deployment Issue 7 - Can MUs roam within a mesh topology?
Can MUs connected to a mesh AP roam seemlessly among other MUs and wired access points?
Resolution
Yes, MUs on a mesh APs can roam seemlessly throughout the mesh network as well as with non-mesh access points on the wired network.
Mesh Deployment Issue 8 - Can I mesh between Motorola Access Point Models?
Can I mesh between models?
Configuring Mesh Networking 9-35
Resolution
Yes, the access points are fairly close from a software deployment standpoint. So it is a supported configuration for three models to exist in a single topology.
Mesh Deployment Issue 9 - Can I mesh between and an access point and an AP300?
Can I mesh between an AP-7131N-FGR and a AP300 model access port?
Resolution
No, an AP300 does not support mesh networking.
Mesh Deployment Issue 10 - Can I update firmware/configuration files across a mesh backhaul?
Can I update device firmware over the mesh backhaul on a client bridge or repeater AP with no wired connectivity?
Resolution
Yes, an AP-7131N-FGR support wireless firmware updates.
Mesh Deployment Issue 12 - Can I perform firmware/configuration file updates with DHCP options?
Can I use the AP’s Automatic Firmware/Configuration update functionalities with DHCP Options on the AP for mesh nodes as well?
Resolution
Yes, mesh nodes also support Automatic Firmware/Configuration updates using DHCP Options. Make sure you create DHCP reservations for each mesh node and add an appropriate configuration file to each one of them. If you don’t, the base bridge configuration file could get applied on a client bridge or repeater and you will loose connectivity to that AP.
Mesh Deployment Issue 13 - Why do I lose connectivity when updating configurations?
When I make a configuration change and apply the changes on a client bridge or repeater, I momentarily loose connectivity to that AP, why?
9-36 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Resolution
That is expected behavior, when you make a configuration change on a mesh supported AP, it brings the radio driver down and then back up again. Consequently, the AP needs to re-establish its mesh connection after saving the configuration.
Mesh Deployment Issue 14 - Will an existing client bridge see a new base bridge or repeater?
If I add a new base bridge or repeater to an existing mesh topology, will my current client bridges see it and connect to it?
Resolution
Yes, all client bridges perform periodic background scanning - both passively (by sniffing the air for beacons) and actively (by sending Probe Requests). Therefore, a client bridge automatically detects the presence of a new base bridge or repeater added to the mesh network topology and forms a seam less connection without affecting current operation.
Mesh Deployment Issue 15 - Can a mesh supported AP react to changing RF conditions?
If RF conditions change, will a mesh supported AP automatically detect and re-route traffic on its backup link or look for new links if all current links are exhausted?
Resolution
Yes, all mesh nodes have built in dynamic link switching and auto-recovery mechanisms that ensure they adapt to changing RF conditions.
Adaptive AP
10.1 Adaptive AP Overview
An adaptive AP (AAP) is an access point that can adopt like an AP300 (L3) access port. The management of an AAP is conducted by the switch, once the access point connects to a Motorola
RFS7000 model switch and receives its AAP configuration.
An AAP provides:
• local 802.11 traffic termination
• local encryption/decryption
• local traffic bridging
• the tunneling of centralized traffic to the wireless switch
The switch can be discovered using one of the following mechanisms:
• Switch fully qualified domain name (FQDN)
• Static IP addresses
10-2 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
The benefits of an AAP deployment include:
• Centralized Configuration Management & Compliance - Wireless configurations across distributed sites can be centrally managed by the wireless switch or cluster.
• WAN Survivability - Local WLAN services at a remote sites are unaffected in the case of a
WAN outage.
• Securely extend corporate WLAN's to stores for corporate visitors - Small home or office deployments can utilize the feature set of a corporate WLAN from their remote location.
• Maintain local WLAN's for in store applications - WLANs created and supported locally can be concurrently supported with your existing infrastructure.
10.1.1 Where to Go From Here
Refer to the following for a further understanding of AAP operation:
•
•
•
•
Securing a Configuration Channel Between Switch and AP
•
•
•
Securing Data Tunnels between the Switch and AAP
•
•
Remote Site Survivability (RSS)
•
For an understanding of how AAP support should be configured for the access point and its connected switch, see
How the AP Receives its Adaptive Configuration on page 10-9 .
For an overview of how to configure both the access point and switch for basic AAP connectivity and
operation, see Establishing Basic Adaptive AP Connectivity on page 10-11 .
To configure the access point’s switch discovery method and connection medium, see
Adaptive AP Setup on page 4-11 .
Adaptive AP 10-3
10.1.2 Adaptive AP Management
An AAP can be adopted, configured and managed like a thin access port from the wireless switch.
NOTE To support AAP functionality, a RFS7000 model switch must be running firmware version 4.0 or higher. The access point must running firmware version 4.0 or higher to be converted into an AAP.
NOTE An AAP cannot support a firmware download from the wireless switch.
Once an access point connects to a switch and receives its AAP configuration, its WLAN and radio configuration is similar to a thin access port. An AAP's radio mesh configuration can also be configured from the switch. However, non-wireless features (DHCP, NAT, Firewall etc.) cannot be configured from the switch and must be defined using the access point's resident interfaces before its conversion to an AAP.
10.1.3 Licensing
An AAP uses the same licensing scheme as a thin access port. This implies an existing license purchased with a switch can be used for an AAP deployment. Regardless of how many AP300 and/or AAPs are deployed, you must ensure the license used by the switch supports the number of radio ports (both AP300s and AAPs) you intend to adopt.
10.1.4 Switch Discovery
For an access point to function as an AAP (regardless of mode), it needs to connect to a switch to receive its configuration.
•
10.1.4.1 Manual Adoption Configuration
A manual switch adoption of an AAP can be conducted using:
• Static FQDN - A switch fully qualified domain name can be specified to perform a DNS lookup and switch discovery.
10-4 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
• Static IP addresses - Up to 12 switch IP addresses can be manually specified in an ordered list the AP can choose from. When providing a list, the AAP tries to adopt based on the order in which they are listed (from 1-12)
.
NOTE An AAP can use it's LAN or WAN Ethernet interface to adopt. The LAN is
PoE and has a default static IP address of 192.168.0.1/24.
The WAN has no PoE support and has a default static IP address of 10.1.1.1/8.
10.1.5 Securing a Configuration Channel Between Switch and AP
Once an access point obtains a list of available switches, it begins connecting to each. The switch can be either on the LAN or WAN side of the access point to provide flexibility in the deployment of the network. If the switch is on the access point’s LAN, ensure the LAN subnet is on a secure channel.
The AP will connect to the switch and request a configuration.
10.1.6 Adaptive AP WLAN Topology
An AAP can be deployed in the following WLAN topologies:
• Extended WLANs - Extended WLANs are the centralized WLANs created on the switch
• Independent WLANs - Independent WLANs are local to an AAP and can be configured from the switch. You must specify a WLAN as independent to stop traffic from being forwarded to the switch. Independent WLANs behave like WLANs on a standalone access point.
• Both - Extended and independent WLANs are configured from the switch and operate simultaneously.
NOTE For a review of some important considerations impacting the use of extended and independent WLANs within an AAP deployment, see
Adaptive AP Deployment Considerations on page 10-15 .
10.1.7 Configuration Updates
An AAP receives its configuration from the switch initially as part of its adoption sequence.
Subsequent configuration changes on the switch are reflected on an AAP when applicable.
An AAP applies the configuration changes it receives from the switch after 30 seconds from the last received switch configuration message. When the configuration is applied on the AAP, the radios shutdown and re-initialize (this process takes less than 2 seconds) forcing associated MUs to be deauthenticated. MUs are quickly able to associate.
Adaptive AP 10-5
10.1.8 Securing Data Tunnels between the Switch and AAP
If a secure link (site-to-site VPN) from a remote site to the central location already exists, the AAP does not require IPSec be configured for adoption.
For sites with no secure link to the central location, an AAP can be configured to use an IPSec tunnel
(with AES 256 encryption) for adoption. The tunnel configuration is automatic on the AAP side and requires no manual VPN policy be configured. On the switch side, configuration updates are required to adopt the AAP using an IPSec tunnel.
To review a sample AAP configuration, see Sample Switch Configuration File for IPSec and
Independent WLAN on page 10-16
.
10.1.9 Adaptive AP Switch Failure
In the event of a switch failure, an AAP's independent WLAN continues to operate without disruption.
The AAP attempts to connect to another switch (if available) in background. Extended WLANs are disabled once switch adoption is lost. When a new switch is discovered and a connection is secured, an extended WLAN can be enabled.
If a new switch is located, the AAP synchronizes its configuration with the located switch once adopted. If Remote Site Survivability (RSS) is disabled, the independent WLAN is also disabled in the event of a switch failure.
10-6 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
10.1.10 Remote Site Survivability (RSS)
RSS can be used to turn off RF activity on an AAP if it loses adoption (connection) to the switch.
RSS State
RSS Enabled
RSS Disabled
Independent WLANs
WLAN continues beaconing
WLAN stops beaconing
Extended WLANs
WLAN continues beaconing but AP does not allow clients to associate on that WLAN
WLAN stops beaconing
NOTE For a dependant AAP, independent WLANs continue to beacon for three days in the absence of a switch.
10.1.11 Adaptive Mesh Support
An AAP can extend existing mesh functionality to a switch managed network. All mesh APs are configured and managed through the wireless switch. APs without a wired connection form a mesh backhaul to a repeater or a wired mesh node and then get adopted to the switch. Mesh nodes with existing wired access get adopted to the switch like a wired AAP.
Mesh AAPs apply configuration changes 300 seconds after the last received switch configuration message. When the configuration is applied on the Mesh AAP, the radios shutdown and re-initialize
(this process takes less than 2 seconds), forcing associated MUs to be deauthenticated and the Mesh link will go down. MUs are able to quickly associate, but the Mesh link will need to be re-established before MUs can pass traffic. This typically takes about 90 to 180 seconds depending on the size of the mesh topology.
NOTE When mesh is used with AAPs, the "ap-timeout" value needs to be set to a higher value (for example, 180 seconds) so Mesh AAPs remain adopted to the switch during the period when the configuration is applied and mesh links are re-established.
For an overview of mesh networking and how to configure an access point to support mesh, see
Configuring Mesh Networking on page 9-1 .
Adaptive AP 10-7
10.2 Supported Adaptive AP Topologies
For this version of the access point firmware, the following AAP topologies are supported:
•
•
•
Extended WLANs with Independent WLANs
•
Extended WLAN with Mesh Networking
10.2.1 Topology Deployment Considerations
When reviewing the AAP topologies describes in the section, be cognizant of the following considerations to optimize the effectiveness of the deployment:
• An AAP firmware upgrade will not be performed at the time of adoption from the wireless switch. Instead, the firmware is upgraded using the firmware update procedure (manually).
• An AAP can use its LAN1 interface or WAN interface for adoption. The default gateway interface is set to LAN1. If the WAN Interface is used, explicitly configure WAN as the default gateway interface.
• Motorola recommends using the LAN1 interface for adoption in multi-cell deployments.
• If you have multiple independent WLANs mapped to different VLANs, the AAP's LAN1 interface requires trunking be enabled with the correct management and native VLAN IDs configured. Additionally, the AAP needs to be connected to a 802.1q trunk port on the wired switch.
• Be aware IPSec Mode supports NAT Traversal (NAT-T).
10-8 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
10.2.2 Extended WLANs Only
An extended WLAN configuration forces all MU traffic through the switch. No wireless traffic is locally bridged by the AAP.
Each extended WLAN is mapped to the access point's virtual LAN2 subnet. By default, the access point's LAN2 is not enabled and the default configuration is set to static with IP addresses defined as all zeros. If the extended WLAN option is configured on the switch, the following configuration updates are made automatically:
• The AAP’s LAN2 subnet becomes enabled
• All extended WLANs are mapped to LAN2.
NOTE MUs on the same WLAN associated to the AAP can communicate locally at the AP Level without going through the switch. If this scenario is undesirable, the access point's MU-to-MU disallow option should be enabled. To enable the access point’s MU-to-MU disallow option, see
Creating/Editing Individual WLANs on page 5-29 .
10.2.3 Independent WLANs Only
An independent WLAN configuration forces all MU traffic be bridged locally by the AAP. No wireless traffic is tunneled back to the switch. Each independent WLAN is mapped to the access point's LAN1 interface. The only traffic between the switch and the AAP are control messages (for example, heartbeats, statistics and configuration updates).
10.2.4 Extended WLANs with Independent WLANs
An AAP can have both extended WLANs and independent WLANs operating in conjunction. When used together, MU traffic from extended WLANs go back to the switch and traffic from independent
WLANs is bridged locally by the AP.
All local WLANs are mapped to LAN1, and all extended WLANs are mapped to LAN2.
Adaptive AP 10-9
10.2.5 Extended WLAN with Mesh Networking
Mesh networking is an extension of the existing wired network. There is no special configuration required, with the exceptions of setting the mesh and using it within one of the two extended VLAN configurations and defining an access point radio as a preferred base bridge.
NOTE The mesh backhaul WLAN must be an independent WLAN mapped to
LAN1. The switch enforces the WLAN be defined as an independent
WLAN by automatically setting the WLAN to independent when backhaul is selected. The AP ensures the backhaul WLAN be put on LAN1.
10.3 How the AP Receives its Adaptive Configuration
An AAP does not require a separate "local" or "running" configuration. Once enabled as an AAP, the
AP obtains its configuration from the switch. If the AP’s WAN link fails, it continues to operate using the last valid configuration until its link is re-established and a new configuration is pushed down from the switch. There is no separate file-based configuration stored on the switch.
Only WLAN, VLAN extension and radio configuration items are defined for the AAP by its connected switch. None of the other access point configuration items (RADIUS, DHCP, NAT, Firewall etc.) are configurable from the connected switch.
After the AP downloads a configuration file from the switch, it obtains the version number of the image it should be running. The switch does not have the capacity to hold the access point’s firmware image and configuration. The access point image must be downloaded using a means outside the switch. If there is still an image version mismatch between what the switch expects and what the
AAP is running, the switch will deny adoption.
Adaptive AP Pre-requisites
Converting an access point into an AAP requires:
• A version 4.0 or higher firmware running on the access point.
• A Motorola RFS7000 (running firmware version 4.0 or later) model switch.
• The appropriate switch licenses providing AAP functionality on the switch.
• The correct password to authenticate and connect the adaptive to the switch.
Configuring the Adaptive AP for Adoption by the Switch
1.
An AAP needs to find and connect to the switch. To ensure this connection:
• Configure the switch’s IP address on the AAP
10-10 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
• Configure the switch’s FQDN on the AAP. The AAP can use this to resolve the IP address of the switch.
2.
Use the switch’s secret password on the AAP for the switch to authenticate it.
For additional information on defining the connection medium used by the access point t to
receive an AAP configuration, see Adaptive AP Setup on page 4-11 .
To avoid a lengthy broken connection with the switch, Motorola recommends generating an
SNMP trap when the AAP loses adoption with the switch.
NOTE For additional information (in greater detail) on the AP configuration
activities described above, see Adaptive AP Configuration on page 10-11
.
Configuring the Switch for Adaptive AP Adoption
The tasks described below are configured on a Motorola RFS7000 model switch. To adopt an AAP on a switch:
1.
Ensure enough licenses are available on the switch to adopt the required number of AAPs.
2.
As soon as the AAP displays in the adopted list:
Adjust each AAP’s radio configuration as required. This includes WLAN-radio mappings and radio parameters. WLAN-VLAN mappings and WLAN parameters are global and cannot be defined on a per radio basis. WLANs can be assigned to a radio as done today for an AP300 model access port. Optionally, configure WLANs as independent and assign to AAPs as needed.
3.
Configure each VPN tunnel with the VLANs to be extended to it.
If you do not attach the target VLAN, no data will be forwarded to the AAP, only control traffic required to adopt and configure the AP.
NOTE For additional information (in greater detail) on the switch configuration
activities described above, see Switch Configuration on page 10-13
.
Adaptive AP 10-11
10.4 Establishing Basic Adaptive AP Connectivity
This section defines the activities required to configure basic AAP connectivity RFS7000 model switch. In establishing a basic AAP connection, both the access point and switch require modifications to their respective default configurations. For more information, see:
•
•
NOTE
Refer to Adaptive AP Deployment Considerations on page 10-15
for usage and deployment caveats that should be considered before defining the
AAP configuration. Refer to
configuration using IPSec VPN and an extended WLAN.
10.4.1 Adaptive AP Configuration
An AAP can be manually adopted by the switch, adopted using a configuration file (consisting of the adaptive parameters) pushed to the access point. Each of these adoption techniques is described in the sections that follow.
10.4.1.1 Adopting an Adaptive AP Manually
To manually enable the access point’s switch discovery method and connection medium required for adoption:
1.
Select System Configuration -> Adaptive AP Setup from the access point’s menu tree.
10-12 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
2.
Select the Auto Discovery Enable checkbox.
Enabling auto discovery will allow the AAP to be detected by a switch once its connectivity medium has been configured (by completing steps 3-6)
3.
Enter up to 12 Switch IP Addresses constituting the target switches available for AAP connection.
The AAP will begin establishing a connection with the first addresses in the list. If unsuccessful, the AP will continue down the list (in order) until a connection is established.
4.
If a numerical IP address is unknown, but you know a switch’s fully qualified domain name
(FQDN), enter the name as the Switch FQDN value.
5.
Select the Enable AP-Switch Tunnel option to allow AAP configuration data to reach a switch using a secure VPN tunnel.
6.
If using IPSec as the tunnel resource, enter the IPSec Passkey to ensure IPSec connectivity.
Adaptive AP 10-13
7.
Click Apply to save the changes to the AAP setup.
NOTE The manual AAP adoption described above can also be conducted using the access point’s CLI interface using the admin(system.aapsetup)> command.
10.4.1.2 Adopting an Adaptive AP Using a Configuration File
To adopt an AAP using a configuration file:
1.
Refer to
Adopting an Adaptive AP Manually
and define the AAP switch connection parameters.
2.
Export the AAP’s configuration to a secure location.
Either import the configuration manually to other APs or the same AP later (if you elect to default its configuration).
For instruction on how to use the access point’s configuration import/export functionality,
see Importing/Exporting Configurations on page 4-47
.
For information on updating the access point’s firmware, see
Updating Device Firmware on page 4-51
.
10.4.2 Switch Configuration
RFS7000 (running firmware version 4.0 or later) require an explicit adaptive configuration to adopt an access point (if IPSec is not being used for adoption). The same licenses currently used for AP300 adoption can be used for an AAP.
Disable the switch’s Adopt unconfigured radios automatically option and manually add AAPs requiring adoption, or leave as default. In default mode, any AAP adoption request is honored until the current switch license limit is reached.
To disable automatic adoption on the switch:
1.
Select Network > Access Port Radios from the switch main menu tree.
2.
Select the Configuration tab (should be displayed be default) and click the Global
Settings button.
10-14 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
3.
Ensure the Adopt unconfigured radios automatically option is NOT selected.
When disabled, there is no automatic adoption of non-configured radios on the network.
Additionally, default radio settings will NOT be applied to access ports when automatically adopted.
NOTE For IPSec deployments, refer to
Sample Switch Configuration File for
IPSec and Independent WLAN on page 10-16 and take note of the CLI
commands in red and associated comments in green.
Any WLAN configured on the switch becomes an extended WLAN by default for an AAP.
4.
Select Network > Wireless LANs from the switch main menu tree.
5.
Select the target WLAN you would like to use for AAP support from those displayed and click the Edit button.
6.
Select the Independent Mode (AAP Only) checkbox.
Selecting the checkbox designates the WLAN as independent and prevents traffic from being forwarded to the switch. Independent WLANs behave like WLANs as used on a a standalone access point. Leave this option unselected (as is by default) to keep this WLAN an extended WLAN (a typical centralized WLAN created on the switch).
NOTE Additionally, a WLAN can be defined as independent using the
"wlan <index> independent" command from the config-wireless context.
Once an AAP is adopted by the switch, it displays within the switch Access Port Radios screen (under the Network parent menu item) as an access point within the AP Type column.
Adaptive AP 10-15
10.4.3 Adaptive AP Deployment Considerations
Before deploying your switch/AAP configuration, refer to the following usage caveats to optimize its effectiveness:
• Extended WLANs are mapped to the AP’s LAN2 interface and all independent WLANs are mapped to the AP’s LAN1 Interface.
• If deploying multiple independent WLANs mapped to different VLANs, ensure the AP’s LAN1 interface is connected to a trunk port on the L2/L3 switch and appropriate management and native VLANs are configured.
• The WLAN used for mesh backhaul must always be an independent WLAN.
• The switch configures an AAP. If manually changing wireless settings on the AP, they are not updated on the switch. It's a one way configuration, from the switch to the AP.
• An AAP always requires a router between the AP and the switch.
• An AAP can be used behind a NAT.
• An AAP uses UDP port 24576 for control frames and UDP port 24577 for data frames.
• Multiple VLANs per WLAN, L3 mobility, dynamic VLAN assignment, NAC, self healing, rogue AP, MU locationing, hotspot on extended WLAN are some of the important wireless features not supported in an AAP supported deployment.
10-16 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
10.4.4 Sample Switch Configuration File for IPSec and Independent
WLAN
The following constitutes a sample RFS7000 switch configuration file supporting an AAP IPSec with
Independent WLAN configuration.
The sample output is as follows:
### show running-config
!
! configuration of RFS7000 version 4.1.4.0-014GR
!
version 1.4
!
!
aaa authentication login default local remote-login max-allowed-failure 3 network-element-id RFS7000
!
username "admin" password 1 8e67bb26b358e2ed20fe552ed6fb832f397a507d
!
!
username "admin" privilege superuser username "operator" password 1 40fc8eaf6500a3e4ba113b2be120af8f93b6ae00 ip access-list extended My-ACL
deny ip host 172.16.10.160 any log rule-precedence 10
permit ip 172.16.10.160/29 host 172.19.97.167 log rule-precedence 20
permit ip host 172.16.10.168 host 172.19.97.167 log rule-precedence 30
permit ip host 172.16.10.169 host 172.19.97.167 log rule-precedence 40
permit ip host 172.16.10.170 host 172.19.97.167 log rule-precedence 50 ip access-list extended AAP-ACL
permit ip host 192.168.0.4 any log rule-precedence 10
Adaptive AP 10-17 ip access-list extended RADIUS-ACL
permit ip host 192.168.0.4 host 192.168.0.10 log rule-precedence 10 ruledescription "Primary RADIUS ACL"
permit ip host 192.168.0.4 host 172.20.0.1 log rule-precedence 20 ruledescription "Secondary RADIUS Server" ip access-list extended REMOTE-VPN ip access-list extended Cluster-ACL ip access-list extended Cluster-Mob-ACL
permit ip host 192.168.5.61 host 192.168.5.89 log rule-precedence 10
!
spanning-tree mst cisco-interoperability enable spanning-tree mst configuration
name My Name
!
crypto pki trustpoint MS-CA
subject-name "RFS7000-CC" IN "KAR" "BANGALORE" "MOTOROLA" "EWLAN" crypto pki trustpoint WIN2008-CA
subject-name "RFS7000-CC" IN "KAR" "BLR" "MOTO" "EWLAN" crypto pki trustpoint Win2008-CA
subject-name "CC-RFS-TLS" IN "KAR" "BANG" "MOTO" "EWLAN"
!
country-code fr redundancy group-id 13 redundancy interface-ip 192.168.5.61
redundancy member-ip 192.168.5.89
redundancy enable logging buffered 4 logging console 7 snmp-server engineid netsnmp 6b8b45674f193c26 snmp-server sysname RFS7000 snmp-server manager v3
10-18 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide snmp-server user snmptrap v3 encrypted auth sha
0xa38c581812b8fb074602362f65299741547564d7 snmp-server user snmpmanager v3 encrypted auth sha
0xef925e804cf8f7eb49258c5ce6b262a942c9f6c6 snmp-server user snmpoperator v3 encrypted auth sha
0xa3d5669f507d3777488d19d8c29286f0b0f21aac snmp-server enable traps snmp-server enable traps wireless ap-detection unauthorizedAPDetected snmp-server enable traps wireless ap-detection unauthorizedAPRemoved ip http-https inactivity-timeout 1440 firewall dhcp-snoop-conflict-detection disable firewall dhcp-snoop-conflict-logging disable crypto isakmp key 2 FBZx1Kdh3F1jRcala5eptQWPgXER9/pBp/92wgv6T3IA address
255.255.255.255
crypto isakmp key 2 X11qUCSaU3ANqPhD6ZANQKYeiH9Ey0DcQ3v5MAsA+cGA address 0.0.0.0
crypto isakmp key 2 eLiatzafD9AY7Mxh0iI0WwiUle1jA+t4u87VBeU62pNA address
192.168.5.89
crypto isakmp key 2 gfagIEbg7lGebx2pRlFpBgx6Q9hlV5OTlqsVqRo0UUAA address
192.168.0.10
crypto isakmp key 2 YZPZWUHNyPz9ZD2v1XrTXwFM8gI/Ai/uqWFrILXZAoNA address
172.20.0.1
ip local pool default low-ip-address 4.4.4.4 high-ip-address 4.4.4.10
local username remote-rashmi password 2 kIWt2kwGaTI+QTezVOTAJq+ca3M4pGIo+22308QsvwHA vpn authentication-method radius ip http secure-trustpoint default-trustpoint ip http secure-server ip ssh no service pm sys-restart timezone America/New_York service radius license AAP
48a2c0e176f652c3ba0c2fd8ec66218aac002f0092a4e06c4e2add62e549fc289a644cbd42b37512
Adaptive AP 10-19 license AP
48a2c0e176f652c3b14fc96c0e6e57e6ac002f0092a4e06cd3822e53f1b9e4879a644cbd42b37512
!
wireless
mobility local-address 192.168.5.61
mobility enable
mobility peer 192.168.5.89
manual-wlan-mapping enable
wlan 1 enable
wlan 1 ssid @@P-Pr0x!
wlan 1 vlan 222
wlan 1 encryption-type ccmp
wlan 1 authentication-type eap
wlan 1 radius server primary 192.168.0.10
wlan 1 radius server primary radius-key 2
FpIbb6rdLjRpRPpzcP+ePR6wJ56t8l3pi7STrYFpbTLA
wlan 1 aap-proxy-radius enable
no wlan 1 dot11i pmk-caching
no wlan 1 dot11i opp-pmk-caching
wlan 2 ssid R@D!U$
wlan 2 vlan 40
wlan 2 encryption-type ccmp
wlan 2 authentication-type eap
wlan 2 inactivity-timeout 60
wlan 2 radius server primary 192.168.0.4
wlan 4 enable
wlan 4 ssid Pr0x!
wlan 4 vlan 40
wlan 4 encryption-type ccmp
wlan 4 authentication-type eap
wlan 4 radius server primary 192.168.0.4
wlan 10 enable
10-20 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
wlan 10 ssid CC
wlan 10 vlan 222
wlan 10 encryption-type ccmp
wlan 10 inactivity-timeout 300
wlan 10 dot11i key 2 qnwGA69t848iAzBUjSJdPjIeQb7WWlEWgsyzUH4zwS/
4gvtZauQ2rvSAgeFucZbJVv+vMNBvlA/JbvEjrAqNQ8ON9d+4Ht6iFTgf2/SAQ/
2sIXfUfD8xOlEBoZUMP/Ky
aap fwupdate filename apn_040004000026GRN.bin
aap fwupdate ipaddress 192.168.0.1
aap fwupdate mode sftp
aap include-config syslog
radio add 1 00-23-AE-0E-85-D6 11bgn aap7131
radio 1 description RADIO16
radio 1 radio-number 1
radio add 2 00-23-AE-0E-85-D6 11an aap7131
radio 2 description RADIO18
radio 2 radio-number 2
radio add 3 00-23-AE-0D-85-D8 11bgn aap7131
radio 3 radio-number 1
radio add 4 00-23-AE-0D-85-D8 11an aap7131
radio 4 radio-number 2
radio 4 bss 1 1
radio add 5 00-23-AE-0D-85-D8 11bgn aap7131
radio 5 radio-number 3
no ap-ip default-ap switch-ip
ap 00-23-AE-0E-85-D6 radio-config 2-4-wlan-5-0-wlan
ap 00-23-AE-0D-85-D8 radio-config 2-4-wlan-5-0-wlan-sensor
ap-detection timeout unauthorized 60
ap-detection timeout authorized 60
ap-detection timeout ignored 60
ap-detection add 1 authorized any Alpha-Corp
ap-detection add 2 authorized any Alpha-Plus
Adaptive AP 10-21
ap-detection add 3 authorized any Alpha-Net
ap-detection add 4 authorized any Alpha-Voice
wips detect-window 10
no wips event ap-default-configuration enable
wips event suspicious-ap-high-rssi filter-ageout 60
wips event suspicious-ap-high-rssi signal-strength-threshold -100
wips event fake-ap-flood threshold 60
wips event unauthorized-ap-using-authorized-ssid filter-ageout 60
smart-rf
radio 1 radio-mac 00-23-68-97-D4-10
radio 2 radio-mac 00-23-68-97-D2-60
radio 3 radio-mac 00-23-68-0F-46-10
radio 4 radio-mac 00-23-68-0F-45-F0
radio 5 radio-mac 00-23-68-0F-48-60
!
wireless
!
!
radius-server local
authentication eap-auth-type all
ca trust-point Win2008-CA
server trust-point Win2008-CA
rad-user "user1" password 2 SBJs6EgygxWZVx2hTUqKjrhgONN6iZjUapvWXiMvCUPA
group "Wireless-Users"
rad-user "user1"
policy wlan 2
!
!
crypto isakmp policy 9999
encryption aes-256
hash sha
10-22 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
authentication pre-share
group 14
lifetime 86400 crypto isakmp policy 10000
encryption 3des
hash sha
authentication pre-share
group 14
lifetime 86400
!
crypto ipsec transform-set AAP-TFSET esp-aes-256 esp-sha-hmac
mode tunnel crypto ipsec transform-set REMOTE-TFSET esp-3des esp-sha-hmac
mode transport crypto ipsec transform-set RADIUS-TFS esp-3des esp-sha-hmac
mode tunnel
!
crypto map AAP-SYSLOG-MAP 13 ipsec-isakmp
set peer 255.255.255.255
set mode main
match address AAP-ACL
set transform-set AAP-TFSET crypto map AAP-SYSLOG-MAP 11 ipsec-isakmp
set peer 192.168.0.10
match address RADIUS-ACL
set transform-set RADIUS-TFS crypto map CLUSTER-MOB-MAP 10 ipsec-isakmp
set peer 192.168.5.89
match address Cluster-Mob-ACL
set transform-set AAP-TFSET
!
interface ge1
switchport access vlan 13
ip dhcp trust
!
interface ge2
switchport access vlan 1
ip dhcp trust
!
interface ge3
switchport access vlan 192
ip dhcp trust
!
interface ge4
switchport access vlan 10
ip dhcp trust
!
interface me1
ip address 10.1.1.100/24
!
interface vlan1
ip address dhcp
crypto map CLUSTER-MOB-MAP
!
interface vlan192
ip address dhcp
crypto map AAP-SYSLOG-MAP
!
interface vlan222
ip address 222.222.222.222/24
!
ip dhcp pool Vlan222
Adaptive AP 10-23
10-24 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
default-router 222.222.222.222
network 222.222.222.0/24
address range 222.222.222.2 222.222.222.200
!
service dhcp
!
rtls
rfid
espi
sole
!
ip route 172.20.0.0/16 192.168.0.13
!
line con 0
exec-timeout 35791 0 line vty 0
exec-timeout 2 0 line vty 1
exec-timeout 1 0 line vty 2 24
!
auth-time 1 end
Technical Specifications
This appendix provides technical specifications for the following:
•
•
•
•
A-2 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
A.1 Physical Characteristics
An AP-7131N-FGR model access point has the following physical characteristics:
Dimensions
Housing
Weight
Operating
Temperature
5.50 in. Depth x 7.88 in. Width x 1.38 in. Height
14 cm Depth x 20.32 cm Width x 3.5 cm Height
Metal, plenum-rated housing (UL2043)
2.7 lbs
-4°F to 122°F/-20°C to 50°C
Storage Temperature -40°F to 158°F/-40°C to 70°C
Altitude 8000 ft./2438 m @ 82°F/28°C (Operating)
15000 ft./4572 m @ 53°F/12°C (Storage)
Humidity
Electrostatic
Discharge
5 to 95% RH non-condensing
15kV air, 8kV contact
A.2 Electrical Characteristics
The AP-7131N-FGR model access points have the following electrical characteristics:
Operating Voltage
Operating Current
38-54V DC
Not to exceed 600mA @ 48VDC
Technical Specifications A-3
A.3 Radio Characteristics
An AP-7131N-FGR has the following radio characteristics:
Operating Channels All channels from 4920 MHz to 5825 MHz except channel
52 -64
Channels 1-13 (EU), Channels 1-11 (US/Canada)
Channel 14 (2484 MHz) Japan only
Actual operating frequencies depend on regulatory
Data Rates Supported 802.11g: 1,2,5.5,11,6,9,12,18,24,36,48, and 54Mbps
802.11a: 6,9,12,18,24,36,48, and 54Mbps
802.11n: MCS 0-15 up to 300Mbps
Wireless Medium Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS),
Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM)
Spatial multiplexing (MIMO)
Network Standards 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.3, 802.11n (Draft 2.0)
Maximum Available
Transmit Power
Maximum available conducted transmit power per chain: 2.4Ghz: + 23dBm
Maximum available conducted transmit power all chains: 2.4GHz: + 27.7dBm
Maximum available conducted transmit power per chain: 5.2Ghz: + 20 dBm
Maximum available conducted transmit power all chains: 5.2GHz: + 24.7dBm
1dB increments Transmit Power
Adjustment
Antenna
Configuration
2x3 or 3x3
A-4 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
A.4 Country Codes
The following list of countries and their country codes is useful when using the AP-7131N-FGR configuration file, CLI or the MIB to configure the access point:
Country
Argentina
Australia
Austria
Bahamas
Bahrain
Barbados
Belarus
Belgium
Bermuda
Bolivia
Botswana
Botznia-Herzegovina
Brazil
Bulgaria
Canada
Cayman Islands
Chile
China
Christmas Islands
Colombia
Costa Rica
Croatia
CO
CR
HR
KY
CL
CN
CX
BA
BR
BG
CA
BE
BM
BO
BW
BS
BH
BB
BY
Code Country
AR Mexico
AU
AT
Moldova
Morocco
Nambia
Netherlands
Netherlands Antilles
New Zealand
Nicaragua
Norfolk Island
Northern Mariana Islands
Norway
Oman
Pakistan
Panama
Paraguay
Peru
Philippines
Poland
Portugal
Puerto Rico
Qatar
Romania
OM
PK
PA
PY
NI
NF
MP
NO
NA
NL
AN
NZ
Code
MX
MD
MA
PR
QA
RO
PE
PH
PL
PT
Guadeloupe
Guam
Guyana
Haiti
Honduras
Hong Kong
Hungary
Iceland
India
Indonesia
Ireland
Israel
Country
Cypress
Czech Rep.
Denmark
Dominican Republic
Ecuador
Egypt
El Salvador
Estonia
Falkland Islands
Finland
France
French Guiana
Germany
Greece
Technical Specifications A-5
HN
HK
HU
IS
GP
GU
GY
HT
IE
IL
IN
ID
FR
GF
DE
GR
SV
EE
FK
FI
DK
DO
EC
EG
Code Country
CY
CZ
Code
Russia RU
Saudi Arabia SA
Serbia
Singapore
Slovak Republic
Slovenia
RS
SG
SK
SI
South Africa
South Korea
Spain
Sri Lanka
Sweden
Switzerland
Taiwan
Thailand
SE
CH
TW
TH
ZA
KR
ES
LK
Trinidad and Tobago
Tunisia
Turkey
Ukraine
UAE
United Kingdom
USA
Uruguay
Venezuela
Vietnam
Virgin Islands (British)
Virgin Islands (US)
AE
GB
US
UY
TT
TN
TR
UA
VE
VN
VG
VI
A-6 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Country
Italy
Jamaica
Japan
Jordan
Kazakhstan
Kuwait
Latvia
Lebanon
Liechtenstein
Lithuania
Luxembourg
Macedonia
Malaysia
Malta
Martinique
LU
MK
MY
MT
MQ
LI
LT
LV
LB
JP
JO
KZ
KW
Code Country
IT
JM
Code
Usage Scenarios
This appendix provides practical usage scenarios for many of the access point’s key features. This information should be referenced as a supplement to the information contained within this Product
Reference Guide.
The following scenario is described:
•
Configuring an IPSEC Tunnel and VPN FAQs
B-2 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
B.1 Configuring an IPSEC Tunnel and VPN FAQs
The access point has the capability to create a tunnel between an access point and a VPN endpoint.
The access point can also create a tunnel from one access point to another access point.
The following instruction assumes the reader is familiar with basic IPSEC and VPN terminology and technology.
•
Configuring a VPN Tunnel Between Two Access Points
•
Configuring a Cisco VPN Device
•
Frequently Asked VPN Questions
B.1.1 Configuring a VPN Tunnel Between Two Access Points
The access point can connect to a non-AP device supporting IPSec, such as a Cisco VPN device - labeled as "Device #2".
For this usage scenario, the following components are required:
• 2 access points
• 1 PC on each side of the access point’s LAN.
To configure a VPN tunnel between two access points:
1.
Ensure the WAN ports are connected via the internet.
2.
On access point #1, select WAN -> VPN from the main menu tree.
3.
Click Add to add the tunnel to the list.
4.
Enter a tunnel name (tunnel names do not need to match).
Usage Scenarios B-3
5.
Enter the WAN port IP address of AP #1 for the Local WAN IP .
6.
Within the Remote Subnet and Remote Subnet Mask fields, enter the LAN IP subnet and mask of AP #2 /Device #2.
7.
Enter the WAN port IP address of AP #2/ Device #2 for a Remote Gateway .
8.
Click Apply to save the changes.
NOTE For this example, Auto IKE Key Exchange is used. Any key exchange can be used, depending on the security needed, as long as both devices on each end of the tunnel are configured exactly the same.
9.
Select the Auto (IKE) Key Exchange radio button.
10. Select the Auto Key Settings button.
B-4 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
11. For the ESP Type, select ESP with Authentication and use AES 128-bit as the ESP encryption algorithm and SHA1 as the ESP authentication algorithm. Click OK .
12. Select the IKE Settings button.
13. Select Pre Shared Key (PSK) from the IKE Authentication Mode drop-down menu.
14. Enter a Passphrase . Passphrases must match on both VPN devices.
NOTE Ensure the IKE authentication Passphrase is the same as the Pre-shared key on the Cisco PIX device.
15. Select AES 128-bit as the IKE Encryption Algorithm.
16. Select Group14 as the Diffie -Hellman Group. Click OK . This will take you back to the VPN screen.
17. Click Apply to make the changes
18. Check the VPN Status screen. Notice the status displays "NOT_ACTIVE". This screen automatically refreshes to get the current status of the VPN tunnel. Once the tunnel is active, the IKE_STATE changes from NOT_CONNECTED to SA_MATURE.
19. On access point #2/ Device #2, repeat the same procedure. However, replace access point
#2 information with access point #1 information.
20. Once both tunnels are established, ping each side of the tunnel to ensure connectivity.
Usage Scenarios B-5
B.1.2 Configuring a Cisco VPN Device
This section includes general instructions for configuring a Cisco PIX Firewall 506 series device.
For the usage scenario described in this section, you will require the following:
• 1 Cisco VPN device
• 1 PC connected to the LAN side of the access point and the Cisco PIX.
NOTE The Cisco PIX device configuration should match the access point VPN configuration in terms of Local WAN IP (PIX WAN), Remote WAN
Gateway (access point WAN IP), Remote Subnet (access point LAN
Subnet), and the Remote Subnet Mask. The Auto Key Settings and the IKE
Settings on the Cisco PIX should match the access point Key and
IKE settings.
Below is how the access point VPN Status screen should look if the entire configuration is setup correctly once the VPN tunnel is active. The status field should display "ACTIVE".
B-6 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
B.1.3 Frequently Asked VPN Questions
The following are common questions that arise when configuring a VPN tunnel.
• Question 1: Does the access point IPSec tunnel support multiple subnets on the other end of a VPN concentrator?
Yes. The access point can access multiple subnets on the other end of the VPN Concentrator from the access point's Local LAN Subnet by:
• Creating multiple VPN Tunnels. The AP supports a maximum of 25 tunnels.
• When using the Remote Subnet IP Address with an appropriate subnet mask, the AP can access multiple subnets on the remote end.
For example: If creating a tunnel using 192.168.0.0/16 for the Remote Subnet IP address, the following subnets could be accessed:
192.168.1.x
192.168.2.x
192.168.3.x, etc
• Question 2: Even if a wildcard entry of "0.0.0.0" is entered in the Remote Subnet field in the VPN configuration page, can the AP access multiple subnets on the other end of a VPN concentrator for the APs LAN/WAN side?
No. Using a "0.0.0.0" wildcard is an unsupported configuration. In order to access multiple subnets, the steps in Question #1 must be followed.
• Question 3: Can the AP be accessed via its LAN interface of AP#1 from the local subnet of AP#2 and vice versa?
Yes.
• Question 4: Will the default "Manual Key Exchange" settings work without making any changes?
No. Changes need to be made. Enter Inbound and Outbound ESP Encryption keys on both
APs. Each one should be of 16 Hex characters (depending on the encryption or authentication scheme used). The VPN tunnel can be established only when these corresponding keys match. Ensure the Inbound/Outbound SPI and ESP Authentication Keys have been properly specified.
• Question 5: Can a tunnel between an AP-7131N-FGR and WS2000 be established?
Yes.
Usage Scenarios B-7
• Question 6: Can an IPSec tunnel over a PPPoE connection be established - such as a PPPoE enabled DSL link?
Yes. The access point supports tunneling when using a PPPoE username and password.
• Question 7: Can I setup an access point so clients can access both the WAN normally and only use the VPN when talking to specific networks?
Yes. Only packets that match the VPN Tunnel Settings will be sent through the VPN tunnel.
All other packets will be handled by whatever firewall rules are set.
• Question 8: I am using a direct cable connection between my two VPN gateways for testing and cannot get a tunnel established, yet it works when I set them up across another network or router. Why?
The packet processing architecture of the access point VPN solution requires the WAN default gateway to work properly. When connecting two gateways directly, you don't need a default gateway when the two addresses are on the same subnet. As a workaround, point the access point's WAN default gateway to be the other VPN gateway and vice-versa.
• Question 9: I have setup my tunnel and the status still says 'Not Connected'. What should I do now?
VPN tunnels are negotiated on an "as-needed" basis. If you have not sent any traffic between the two subnets, the tunnel will not get established. Once a packet is sent between the two subnets, the VPN tunnel setup occurs.
• Question 10: I still can't get my tunnel to work after attempting to initiate traffic between the two subnets. What now?
Try the following troubleshooting tips:
• Verify you can ping each of the remote Gateway IP addresses from clients on either side.
Failed pings can indicate general network connection problems.
• Pinging the internal gateway address of the remote subnet should run the ping through the tunnel as well. Allowing you to test, even if there are no clients on the remote end.
• Try re-setting the shared secret password on the access point.
• Question 11: My tunnel works fine when I use the LAN-WAN Access page to configure my firewall. Now that I use Advanced LAN Access, my VPN stops working. What am I doing wrong?
VPN requires certain packets to be passed through the firewall. Subnet Access automatically inserts these rules for you when you do VPN. Advanced Subnet Access requires these rules to be in effect for each tunnel.
B-8 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
• An 'allow' inbound rule.
Scr
Dst
Transport
Scr port
Dst port
Rev NAT
• An 'allow' outbound rule.
<Remote Subnet IP range>
<Local Subnet IP range>
ANY
1:65535
1:65535
None
Scr
Dst
Transport
Scr port
Dst port
NAT
<Local Subnet IP range>
<Remote Subnet IP range>
ANY
1:65535
1:65535
None
• For IKE, an 'allow' inbound rule.
Scr
Dst
Transport
Scr port
Dst port
Rev NAT
<Remote Subnet IP range>
<WAN IP address>
UDP
1:65535
500
None
These three rules should be configured above all other rules (default or user defined). When
Advanced LAN Access is used, certain inbound/outbound rules need to be configured to control incoming/outgoing packet flow for IPSec to work properly (with Advanced LAN
Access). These rules should be configured first before other rules are configured.
• Question 12: Do I need to add any special routes on the access point to get my VPN tunnel to work?
Usage Scenarios B-9
No. However, clients could need extra routing information. Clients on the local LAN side should either use the access point as their gateway or have a route entry tell them to use the access point as the gateway to reach the remote subnet.
B-10 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
Customer Support
Comprehensive on-line support is available at the Support Central site at https://portal.motorolasolutions.com/Support/US-EN
Support Central provides our customers with a wealth of information and online assistance including developer tools, software downloads, product manuals and online repair requests.
When contacting the Motorola Solutions Support Center, please provide the following information:
• serial number of unit
• model number or product name
• software type and version number.
C-2 Motorola Solutions AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
North American Contacts
Support (for warranty and service information): telephone: 1-800-653-5350 fax: (631) 738-5410
Email: https://portal.motorolasolutions.com/Support/US-EN
International Contacts
Outside North America:
Motorola Solutions, inc.
Symbol Place
Winnersh Triangle, Berkshire, RG41 5TP
United Kingdom
0800-328-2424 (Inside UK)
+44 118 945 7529 (Outside UK)
Web Support Sites
Product Downloads and Manuals https://portal.motorolasolutions.com/Support/US-EN
Additional Information
Obtain additional information by contacting Motorola Solutions at:
1-800-722-6234, inside North America
+1-516-738-5200, in/outside North America https://portal.motorolasolutions.com/Support/US-EN
Index
Numerics
32735
Heading 2
1.1.11 Symbol NetVision Phone/Spectralink
Voice Prioritization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
A
access options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Access Point
CAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
PSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
RSSI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Adaptive AP Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
administrator access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
antenna support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
AP-5131 access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
AP-5131 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
AP-5131 Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
AP-5131 management options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
AP-5131 operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
AP-5131 placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
AP-5131 statistical displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
association process
beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
RSSI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
available protocols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
B
Bandwidth Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
basic device configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
CAM stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
PSP stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
BSSID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
C
CA certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
CAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
CLI, ACL commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-88
CLI, common commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
CLI, connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
IN-2 AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
CLI, firewall commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-148
CLI, firmware update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-261
CLI, log commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-246
CLI, network commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
CLI, network LAN commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
CLI, network LAN, DHCP commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
CLI, network wireless commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-66
CLI, NTP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-241
CLI, QoS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-124
CLI, radio configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-93
CLI, router commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-153
CLI, security commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-80
CLI, serial port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
CLI, SNMP access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-189
CLI, SNMP commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-188
CLI, SNMP traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-194
CLI, statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-271
CLI, system access commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-171
CLI, system commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-159
CLI, telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
CLI, type filter commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
CLI, WAN commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
CLI, WAN NAT commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
CLI, WAN VLAN Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49, 8-62
config import/export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
configuration file import/export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
configuration options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
configuration restoration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Content Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
content filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
country codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4, A-4
customer support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1
D
data access, configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
device firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
device settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
DHCP support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
DHCP, advanced settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
direct-sequence spread spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Document Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-vii
E
EAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
EAP authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
electrical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
event logging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
F
firewall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Firewall Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
firewall, configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13
firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
H
hardware installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1
I
importing certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18
importing/exporting configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47
initial connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
installation, ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
installation, ceiling T-Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
installation, wall mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
J
Java-Based WEB UI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
K
Kerberos
authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
L
LAN port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9
LAN to WAN access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-16
LAN, configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1
LAN, statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6
LAN, timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
logging configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-45
login screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6, 4-1
M
MAC layer bridging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
management options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-28, 1-29
SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
media types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
mesh networking
dual-radio AP-5131 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
mesh overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
MIB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
ML-2499-11PNA2-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
ML-2499-BYGA2-01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
ML-2499-HPA3-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
ML-5299-WBPBX1-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
ML-5299-WPNA1-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
monitoring statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1, 9-1, 10-1
mounting options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Mounting the AP-5131. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
MU
CAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
data encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
MU association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
MU association process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
MU-MU transmission disallow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
N
NAT, configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Network Time Protocol (NTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Notational Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-viii
NTP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
NTP, configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
O
operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
P
physical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
power injector, cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
PPP over Ethernet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
programmable SNMP trap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
PSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
MU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Q
QoS support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Quality of Service (QoS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
R
radio options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
radio, retry histogram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
radio, statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
restore default configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
roaming across routers
TIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
rogue AP detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
rogue AP detection, allowed APs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
rogue AP, details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Routing Information Protocol (RIP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
S
security, content filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
security, firewall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
security, rogue AP detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
security, VPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
security, WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
security, WPA2-CCMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
self certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
site surveys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
SNMP Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
SNMP access control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
SNMP settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
SNMP v1/v2/v3 trap support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
SNMP v3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
SNMP, access control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
SNMP, RF trap thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
SNMP, specific traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
SNMP, traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
SNMP, v3 user definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
statistics, AP-5131 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
statistics, LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
statistics, mu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
IN-3
IN-4 AP-7131N-FGR Access Point Product Reference Guide
statistics, radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
statistics, WAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
statistics, WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
suspended T-Bar installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
system information
general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
system uptime. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
T
theory of operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
transmit power control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
type filter, configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
V
VLAN support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
VLAN, configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
VLAN, management tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
VLAN, name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
VLAN, native tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
Voice prioritization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
VPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
VPN Tunnels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
VPN, auto key settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-32
VPN, configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-22
VPN, IKE key settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-34
VPN, manual key settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-28
VPN, status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-36
W
wall mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
WAN port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9
WAN, configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
WAN, port forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
WAN, statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
WLAN, ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
WLAN, creating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
WLAN, editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
WLAN, enabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
WLAN, security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
WLAN, statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
WPA2-CCMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12, 6-11
WPA2-CCMP (802.11i) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
WPA-CCMP (802.11i) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
MOTOROLA Solutions INC.
1301 E. ALGONQUIN ROAD
SCHAUMBURG, IL 60196-1078, U.S.A.
http://www.motorolasolutions.com
72E-161311-01 Revision B
March 2014
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement